Home

User Manual High Performance AC Drive

1. Frame 4 Frame 5 75 HP 480V 55 kW 400V Normal Duty Drive 47 0 1 85 Dia 169 0 6 65 4 34 9 1 37 Dia 28 7 1 13 Dia 5 Places 2Places 22 2 0 87 Dia 760 299 158 2 6 23 4 alles 54 1 2 13 Dia brc euet 2 Places 2 Places 6 Ol day f gu ma AX 627247 Dis x 2 Places 45 189 7 747 2419 Vd 9 52 229 5 a le 1779 9 04 2200 7 00 866 157 9 184 0 gt E 621 724 5S oo SS 555 5 141 9 159 5 gt SS 3 SS SS FO OOS 5 59 6 28 E E 96 0 1 5 8 p vy v Jif 3ti 65 0 2 56 26 8 1 06 65 0 2 56 36 8 1 45 93 0 2 66 51 5 2 03 lt gt 110 0 4 33
2. E R LI Lr CIT 2 4 DRIVE Start Up Applying Power to the Drive 6 Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive Examine the Power PWR LED Table C Drive Status Indicator Descriptions Color State Description PWR Green Steady llluminates when power is applied to the drive Power 575 Green Flashing _ ready but not running amp faults are present S Status Steady _ Drive running no faults are present 8 Yellow Flashing When running a type 2 non configurable alarm condition exists drive continues to run When stopped a start inhibit exists and the drive cannot be started 5 Steady A type 1 user configurable alarm condition exists but drive continues to run m Red Flashing A fault has occurred Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Red Flashing drive is in flash recovery mode The only operation permitted is flash upgrade Yellow Alternately F PORT Status of DPI port internal communications if present 5 MOD Refer to the Status of communications module when installed Communication Status of network if connected g Adapter
3. Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter MulDiv 1 Mul 1054 PLL LPFilter BW 730 PositReg Integ 770 MulDiv 1 Result 1056 PLL FiltPositOut 733 PositReg P Gain 768 MulDiv 2 Div 1059 PLL Posit Out 731 PositTP DataDInt 738 MulDiv 2 Input 1057 PLL Posit OutAdv 732 PositTP DataReal 739 MulDiv 2 Mul 1058 PLL Position Ref 721 Power EE TP Data 413 MulDiv 2 Result 1060 PLL Rev Input 723 Power EE TP Sel 412 NetLoss DPI Cnfg 392 PLL Rev Output 724 Power Loss Level 408 Normal Stop Mode 168 PLL Speed Out 734 Power Loss Mode 406 Notch Filt Freq 118 PLL SpeedOut Adv 735 Power Loss Time 407 NotchAttenuation 117 PLL TP DataDInt 718 PPMP Accel Time 1139 OL ClsLp CurrLim 344 PLL TP DataReal 719 PPMP Control 1134 OL OpnLp CurrLim 343 PLL TP Select 717 PPMP Decel Time 1140 Opt 0 Regis Ltch 257 PLL VirtEncdrRPM 727 PPMP Fwd Spd Lim 1137 Opt 1 Regis Ltch 258 PM AbsEncd Offst 504 PPMP Over Ride 1138 Opt0 1 RegisCnfg 254 PM D Inductance 521 PPMP Pos Command 1130 Opt0 1 RegisCtrl 255 PM Mtr CEMF Coef 523 PPMP Pos Div 1132 Opt0 1 RegisStat 256 PM Mtr CEMF Comp 427 PPMP Pos Mul 1131 Output Curr Disp 297 PM Q Inductance 520 PPMP Pos Output 1143 Output Current 308 PM Stator Resist 522 PPMP Pos To Go 1144 Output Freq 310 PM Test Freq Ref 508 PPMP Rev Spd Lim 1136 Output Power 311 PM Test FreqRamp 507 PPMP
4. DPI Data Links 621 FromDriveLogix19 927 51 Mult State 985 SLBuf Data Tx15 650 DPI In DataType 622 FromDriveLogix20 986 SL Buf Data Tx16 651 DPI Data In 1 625 To DL DataType 987 SLBuf Data Tx17 652 DPI Data In A2 626 To DriveLogix00 653 DPI Data In B1 627 DriveLogix01 654 DPI Data In B2 E E SynchLink Input 655 DPI Data In C1 DriveLogix i 656 DPI Data In C2 630 To DriveLogix04 928 Rx Dir Data Type ETT 657 DPI Data In D1 631 DriveLogix05 929 SL Dir Data Rx00 ecurity 658 DPI Data In 02 632 To DriveLogix06 E Dir Pata 714 Port Mask Act 659 DPI Out DataType 633 DriveLogix07 MAE 669 Write Mask 660 DPI Data Out 1 634 To DriveLogix08 932 L Dir Data Rx03 712 Write Mask Act 661 DPI Data Out A2 635 To DriveLogixo9 333 Bx Bul Data Type 670 Logic Mask 662 DPI Data Out B1 636 DriveLogix10 934 51 Buf Data Rx00 713 Logic Mask Act 663 DPI Data Out B2 637 ToDriveLogixit MB Bul Data het 664 DPI Data Out C1 638 ToDrwelogxi2 56 Gt Buf Data Rx02 605 DPI Data Out C2 639 ToDrvelogxi3 927 GL Buf Data 03 666 DPI Data Out D1 640 ToDrivelogixi4 5958 SL Buf Data Rx04 667 Data Out D2 641 ToDrivelogxis 599 SI Buf Data RO 642 To DriveLogix16 940 SL Buf Data Rx06 643 To DriveLogixt7 941 SE Buf Data Rx07 644 To DriveLogix18 942 5 Buf Data Rx08 645 To DriveLogixto 949 SL Buf Data
5. Wiring Installation Wiring 1 21 Important points to remember about I O wiring Always use copper wire Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0 3 meters 1 foot 4100CCF3 Flex I O cable for use with DriveLogix is 3 ft maximum length Important I O terminals labeled or not referenced to earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise exists when using bipolar input sources Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and direction Use speed command parameters to help reduce input source sensitivity ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage Table 1 G Recommended Control Wire Insulation Type Wire Type s Description Rating Digital I O Un shielded Per US NEC or applicable national local Mes mne A C Shielded Multi conductor shielded cable 0 750 mm 18AWG 3 ren such as Belden 8770 equiv conductor shielded Standard Belden 8760 9460 or equiv 0 750 mm 18AWG Analog I O twisted pair 100 shield with drain Remote Pot Belden 8770 or equiv 0 750 mm 18AWG 3 cond sh
6. MDI Feedback Option Board ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 4j BU A POWER Rotary Encoder POWER 16 DIE RD B X BU 5 B POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 DIR BN c REFSIN Rotary Encoder SIN 14 li REFCOS Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 i BK GY E DATA RS485 Rotary Encoder 4COS 12 08 GN F DATA RS 485 Rotary Encoder DATA 9485 11 DIE WH Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 10 PKI 4cos Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 o gt NC Linear Sensor CLOCK 8 gt J SHIELD Linear Sensor DATA 7 Linear Sensor DATA 6 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 4 Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONe 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 CHASSISGND 1 0 Figure 6 Rotary Encoder Connections with Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable and 8 pin Berg style connector MDI Feedback Option Board ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 DIE N N 1 POWER Rotary Encoder POWER 16 Ae XX H X BU 5 POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 02 BN tt Li REFSIN Rotary Encoder SIN 14 WH XX H 4 REFCOS Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 BK H GYI
7. Motor NP System Cont Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA A Frequency Motor NP RPM Motor NP Motor Current peak Stall Torque Motor Max Model Number line to line V rms rms Hz oper rpm Power KW Poles Arms N m RPM rpm MPG A004 031 230 1 8 222 7 3340 0 21 8 4 0 0 60 6000 MPG A010 031 230 21 189 3 2840 0 36 8 6 0 1 21 4875 MPG A010 091 230 0 9 295 3 4430 0 19 8 2 3 0 41 5900 MPG A025 031 230 9 9 181 0 1810 0 88 12 19 8 4 65 5200 MPG A025 091 230 3 0 168 0 1680 0 52 12 8 5 2 95 5625 MPG A050 031 230 24 7 120 0 1200 1 50 12 53 0 11 90 2510 MPG A050 091 230 5 0 275 0 2750 0 75 12 15 6 2 60 3775 MPG A110 031 230 20 2 122 0 1220 2 20 12 53 0 17 20 2875 MPG A110 091 230 17 0 184 0 1840 1 60 12 33 2 8 30 3500 MPG B010 031 460 1 6 162 7 2440 0 34 8 4 4 1 33 6450 MPG B010 091 460 0 7 357 3 5360 0 23 8 1 5 0 41 6450 025 031 460 40 219 0 2190 0 92 12 11 3 4 02 4838 025 091 460 1 9 175 0 1750 0 54 12 5 2 2 95 5900 050 031 460 16 3 92 0 920 1 20 12 32 5 12 40 2510 MPG B050 091 460 3 4 290 0 2900 0 79 12 9 9 2 60 4560 MPG B110 031 460 12 9 112 0 1120 2 00 12 31 1 17 00 2420 MPG B110 091 460 10 6 184 0 1840 1 60 12 20 5 8 30 3500 1326AB B410G 460 2 5 118 0 3540 1 00 4 74 2 70 5000 1326AB B410J 460 3 5 165 0 4950 1 40 4 10 4 2 70 7250 1326AB B420E 460 2 8 70 0 2100 1 10 4 8 5 5 00 3000 1326AB B420H 460 55 137 3 4120 2 20 4 15 6 5 10
8. T CC cO Default o 0 0 0 O O JO JO JO 0 O 0 JO JO JO O 0 JO 0 JO JO 0 lO JO 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 825 826 827 828 829 830 Description Dig In1 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 1 Note For all Stop Function Low Stop High Ok to Run In Norm Stop CF Low Normal Stop and Clear Fault Notes Option 38 ExtFault Inv was added for firmware version 2 04 Option 39 Home Switch was added for firmware version 3 01 Dig In2 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 2 Note For all Stop Function Low Stop High Ok to Run In Norm Stop CF Low Normal Stop and Clear Fault Notes Option 38 ExtFault Inv was added for firmware version 2 04 Option 39 Home Switch was added for firmware version 3 01 Dig In3 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 3 Dig In4 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 4 Dig In5 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 5 Dig In6 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 6 Note For all S
9. peueseu 2 gt 5 5 3 2 8 2 peueseu s S a o a peuesed o E SPUFIUQUWOD 5 as paniaseyy o eo 5 S N 5 2 5 peueseu 5 E jesyoou3 8 8 5 z peAJeseH 8 2 195 viserpul o 2 a 8 o 1 5 o o 5 8 o Q 2 E e R 2 E E 2 E 2 5 EE B peueseu o IN 2 Z E peueseg zi 6 t d Z E 2 2 9 gt 5 gt lt g5 gt 5 2 gt 2 g5 gt E 2 E peueseg gt m So S So SE 85 peuesed 5 9 2t 9 9 5 gt 58 25 8 ea 5 8 5 5 lBal es 8 Bm 0 20 50 2 No 3 72 Programming and Parameter
10. uonenuenvuoioN usw TS Je enbio Jay ls Eer you bios 15 91601 1913 383 peo1 1depy 100 Ker es wey uondepy epou eau 8101 00 ap4 pds L SEL vemu enbJo o4juo2 enbJo Haz yousng lt gt eigeu3 eye1g sng oo sng exeJg sng exeug qe 90 09 lt gt sng Cozi 116 D juodieg 1043 1165 X MES K Joy exeig Bessng 10u43 peeds D nbio L in zjeu onbio z Joy anbos Bas Jey enbio L rov duio52u4 lt gt Ces gt sHv zo ppy bij eneu pHs 1O Id Bay pds pds 02 eres 21601 j pds Bed di 01 195 d L Jes Sjulogise 9 Control Block Diagrams d Jes unt 8Sed 195 dL Jes UND 7Sed 5 eq xn noy 5 eunjojny Aq 5 x 2 gt noy enbuo eyes 2 Aela suondo
11. Source 1 4 Unbalanced 1 4 Ungrounded 1 4 AC Supply Source Consideration 1 4 Access Tap 1 11 Access Panel 1 10 Alarms 4 1 Ambient Temperature 1 3 Application Notes C 1 Armored Cable 1 8 Assisted Start Up 2 5 Autotune Results 3 4 Auxiliary Power Supply 1 23 A 18 Before Applying Power 2 1 Bipolar Inputs 1 21 Bottom Plate Removal 1 9 Brake Resistor 1 16 C Cable 1 9 Cable Entry Plate Removal 1 9 SHLD Terminal 1 6 Cable Length Motor 1 9 Cable Trays 1 9 Cables Power Armored 1 8 Insulation 1 7 Separation 1 7 Shielded 1 7 1 8 Type 1 7 Unshielded 1 7 Capacitors 1 18 CE Conformity 1 29 Checklist Start Up 2 1 Circuit Breaker Ratings A 6 Circuitry 1 23 Class 1 LED Product P 4 Index Clear Faults Manually 4 4 Clearances Mounting 1 3 Clearing Faults 4 4 Command Word Logic A 5 Common Bus 1 10 Common Mode Capacitors 1 18 Common Mode Interference 1 21 Common Start Up Faults 2 5 Communication Masks amp Owners 3 12 Communications Programmable Controller Configurations 4 Compatible Motors Thermistor A 17 Conduit 1 9 Conformity CE 1 29 Contactors Input Output 1 17 Control Block Diagrams B 1 Control Wire 1 21 Controller DriveLogix P 2 Conventions P 3 Cooling Fan Voltage 1 10 Copycat D 4 Cover Opening 1 2 Covers Removing 1 2 D Data Saving D 4 Defaults Resetting to D 4 Diagnostic Data Viewing D 4 Dimensions A 19 Distribution Systems 1 1
12. 2 288 is e 10 ul 8 149 o 2 8 25 5 gt 10 AUIS 2 MO ONT o 2 10 Aul 2 58071 9 5 5 NS IMLO yS 30 u 5507 Idd gt gt gt N uned Kajo 5501 o 9 Dag IMLO 15 3 uj 13 3 5501 190 o 9 S354 e e 2 5807 Iddo 2 59528882 5 3uewdsdl 9 gt Es is BS 0 5501140 103 dSQ o 7 2 501 2 s 5 5999zZ IMLO PJH o 9 S 1043 450 5 td 55071 2 5 p 8 S e Sdssolldd o S 5 5 852 T siwodo m 5 emulo amp 5 _ 8901190 Q D oaaao Pa 5 5 bei419 0 x 5801 5 t 85 E bej4 5 9 5507 14016 xi 9 s _USsSIWWOD N SSON o N ps 5525956 5 N N SsOTION ti 5 WOeag gQ zida ssomeN o Q E 5a TESE 2 o 159 __ 18 _ 53 55 jeseq 509 5 5 ssoTieN o S S 1 8 gog peuesed a 5 jne4 o 57 5 Eldd SSONEN S So 5 S 29585555 ot jne4 o 9 vida ssomeN o WE 255 55 9 jne4
13. SSE lev peo1 sy p 101014 UM S um 5 ux 10113 peeds Jey peeds NO Id Bey pds Bey pds 80 Ki 9je1S 21601 U S Jy Y puooog sueipes se eneu D uleg Cz D 283 a Buiduieg Bay pds Cis gt Ajjenuew 0 06 Weed jas Bou pds 06 J Lxse XX7 aema 20 J o4ju02 p ds praese C re dmioanuy Gourds yu 7 ma D pds 8 pdsin4 151 6 9jelS 21601 passaidxa pue pee1 J0 u02 i C91 D poeds jeu pds sunny 8 rnm UM S R D 2 peeds ndino pds ssed g SH t peeds zssed g joy pds 151 21601 dois 84S 2601 Aak 4S4 7 Control Block Diagrams Bed dl Id 6213 195 dl Id 8213 sxe ueguir
14. lo a g 2 5 9 9 9 lt 3 peueseu S 2 xxu 8 N E N 8 Z 9 5 Q paniasey Q lt 8 lt g lt o9 Q 58 Q Z 8 22 9 2 lt gt an 5 Q aS 5 2 5 2 8 lt 8 Gs lt gt D o z 5 p amp peweseu 5 08 5 1 9 9 EE 9 9 XO es S as a 8 8 oo o ms o 8 o 5 gt 5 3 5 3 5 3 gt 5 3 c2 5 3 c2 5 3 E2 5 45 S Ed s 5 x Q e gt em zo Oo gt 5 5 o 3 80 Programming and
15. Default Options Units Default Min Max P U 0 0100 0 0000 0 5000 Zero Zero Reserved LPF Output P Gain Term Reg Output On Intg Lim On Out Limit O uou n 0 0000 48 0000 pu P U 0 0000 48 0000 pu P U 0 0000 48 0000 pu P U 0 0000 48 0000 pu P U 0 0000 48 0000 pu R S 0 0000 0 0000 500 0000 P U 0 0000 48 0000 pu 8 0000 10 0000 200 0000 Sec 8 0000 0 0000 4000 0000 P U 0 1000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 0 1000 8 0000 0 0000 P U 0 0000 8 0000 pu P U 0 1000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 0 1000 8 0000 0 0000 0 Basic 0 Basic 1 Advanced Sec 1 0000 0 0100 20 0000 Linkable 20 7 Status Hold 8 Reserved 9 Reset Status Read Write Data Type 10 Time Axis 11 Enbl Status 12 Out Max Lim 13 Out Min Lim RO RO RW RW RO RW RW RW RW RW RW RO RW RW RW RW Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 16 bit Integer Real Programming and Parameters 3 31 2 2 5755 No Description Values 5725 203 Time Axis Output Defaul
16. Rs D 2 ALT Functions See ien D 2 Meni Structure et bec e ps D 3 Viewing and Editing D 5 nib oe D 5 D 5 Establishing Link oon NOE ER RU D 6 Removing Installing the D 6 Chapter Objectives vetet T entente dart aud pean e ORIS est Ae E 1 Specifications ENTE 1 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card Specifications 1 Wiring and Configuring the Second Encoder Option E 2 Dip Switch Settings uei e oe Ghee poe ies bie eke hee n E 3 Chapter Objectives x ues vom eve eee aioe eve kav E 1 Specifications iore a Or xdi p a eet ea IE uis F 1 Stegmann Hi Resolution Feedback Option Card F 1 Supported Encodets LE RAMUS Que EU ate A F 1 Wiring the Stegmann Hi Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder F 2 Recommended Cables lan eet tre s ete bra PA rca F 3 Chapter Obje
17. Bit 0 Local Ovflow indicates a math overflow due to local multiply Bit 1 Rx Ovflow indicates a math overflow in received data Bit 3 Ftol Ovflow indicates a math overflow in the real to integer conversion function Options x 8 gt S IO 55 55555 515 25152 8 8 x o CC E ie jo joe jo Default 0 jo jo 0 jo 0 0 jo jo 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 JO 0 0 0 JO JO 0 0 0 Q_Falge Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 928 RxDir Data Type Sets the data type for the SynchLink received direct words If the word s bit is set the data type is floating point real If the bit is not set the data type is integer Options Reserved Reserved 2 Reserved e Reserved N Reserved P Reserved C Reserved Reserved C ISLDir03 Real SLDir02 Real SLDir01 Real SLDir0O Real o 7 Reserved Reserved lReserved gt N Reserved Reserved lReserved lReserved lReserved lReserved Reserved lReserved Reserved l
18. ZMO puai lesy puel puas Jo1ju02 191 reed gd 191 reed Yead puel 0 cul puell o pese m 1 snes puai snes pua L ysel MeN puai L puas kA puj puss 1 126102 1409 pue Buy puel puai y gu wq gu pussy y YOu wig 9964 0 0 Woy jejurod ui s eyep 1504 0 6964 s quod p L 0 9959 s c 9958 juiod Jo BuiuuiBeq ejep y paced enjeA 1 ay seuiuuejep y ed ejep uo 8959 Jo 958 Z ed y Joud 21015 0 51104 jo jequinu ay sj2ejes 9964 Ceos Jeay Jaye yy puoi 1987
19. enis anda n puoj uas JeyueujeJou 5 jeoed 1899Y ddd Gen o einjsqv sod NE indino pds 09 01 sod 103302 1 la la GeuuejqunowW Md Qn ueo sod lean INN sod of nc CD Sueos Ge ddd i PWD 5 1940 ddd a esneg 1940 10u09 10u00 pds di dd ddd z 4561 UONOW JUIOd O JO1JUOD Control Block Diagrams B 18 11 6 11 PIS dL 11 2 159 nding uaa mia indino Tid 962 Tid dwog enieu 11 Jd duio9 Tid gt 191114 Td 47 sod apy 1nopeeds ino peeds Td 1217 vonisod Td p L L L 1 4 EED M4 uipiwpueg iX pds va Tid
20. 2 e 1 A A Lele 4548 85 033 1 Lifting Holes 497 4 Places 13 5 0 53 12 7 0 50 Dia Y Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Expanded C Max Approx Weight kg Ibs AA Drive 403 9 15 90 435 8 17 16 850 0 33 46 275 5 10 85 300 0 11 81 825 0 32 48 71 44 157 5 Refer to the Table A A table for frame information Weights include HIM and Standard I O 9 Add an additional 3 6 kg 8 00 Ibs for 200 HP drives Drive amp Packaging 91 85 202 5 24 Supplemental Information Figure 6 PowerFlex 700S Frame 9 Dimensions 4800 18 90 gt gt 5 0 0 20 400 0 15 75 gt 369 3 1432 14 0 0 55 lt 240 0 9 45 gt 9 0 0 35 339 5 13 37 Y An 1465 450 177 Wire Way 1150 0 45 28 1120 0 44 09 Nameplate Y gt 9 0 0 35 Lifting Hole 21 0 0 83 372 5 14 67 gt 245 53 lt 292 5 11 52 gt 9 67 142 5 59 0 2 32 191 64 7 54 100 12 M 285 0 11 22 Lm Weight Ibs Drive Drive amp Packaging Dimensions
21. Options 2 lo 8 9 5 55 55 38838 338 33838 CC Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 JO 0 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Default Default Min Max Units Default Units Default Min Max Programming and Parameters 3 105 rg 5 2 s t 0 RW 16 bit 4432 Integer Sec V RW 16 bit 0 Integer 0 600 00 Sec RO 16 bit 0 Integer 0 600 00 0 V IRW 32 bit 32 bits of data Boolean 0 RW 16 bit 4432 Integer Sec V RW 16 bit 0 Integer 0 60000 Sec RO 16 bit 0 Integer 0 60000 3 106 Programming and Parameters No 1120 1121 1122 1123 1125 1126 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 Name Description Home Accel Time Acceleration rate when homing Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Home Decel Time Deceleration rate when homing Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Home Speed Speed reference used when homing Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Home Position Home to go position Note This parameter was added
22. 51 SIDE VIEW FRONT TOP VIEW 1 UP OPEN OFF DOWN CLOSED ON Selection Supply Channel Channel Z Channel 5V DC Closed Closed Closed Closed 12 4 PowerFlex 7005 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card Notes Chapter Objectives Specifications Appendix F PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option For Information on See Page Specifications 1 Wiring the Stegmann Hi Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder 2 Stegmann Hi Resolution Feedback Option Card Specifications Consideration Description Encoder Voltage Supply 11 5V dc 130 mA Hi Resolution Feedback Sine Cosine 1V P P Offset 2 5 Maximum Cable Length 182 m 600 ft Maximum Frequency 12 5 us cycle Encoder Speed 4687 5 RPM for encoders with 1024 sine cycles per revolution 9375 RPM for encoders with 512 sine cycles per revolution RS 485 Interface The Hi Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS 485 interface shortly after power up e Address Command Number e Mode e Number of turns e Number of Sine Cos cycles e Checksum Customer I O plug P1 Allen Bradley PN 594262912 Weidmuller PN BL3 50 90 12BK Supported Encoders Table E A specifies which encoders are supported by the 7005 Hi Resolution Stegmann Encoder Feedback Option module
23. o gt lt x 02 c x d n x a cc jui ui ju Default 0 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 JO 0 0 O JO JO 0000 0 0 O j0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 True SL System Time Units RO 32 bit Displays the SynchLink system time counter Default 0 Integer Min Max 0 1048575 Posit Spd Output Units RO Real Final output of the position regulator Default 0 0000 Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu Selected Trq Ref Units PU RO Real Displays the actual selected torque reference value after Par 110 Speed TorqueMode Default 0 0 Min Max 8 0 pu Programming and Parameters 3 46 5 weal 8 E 3 E BE we E we ur on on E a d d a ex gt Ki eu e S sav 3 MIL Holo 3 Sjeseudu m m lo o o puewwo jeoeq g o Aquogsng Hho eoeq YPAS pP 99N o gt 5507 Us ss0100pou3 S us 33 80 5 SPUSA HH o e d 10093 o fa es a o
24. 6 8 9 s 2 e gt 3 0 0 Fal Defaut fo fo fo o lo fo fo fo fo fo jo fo fo fo fo fo fo fo fo fo fo fo 9 se Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1002 UserData Dint 01 Default 0 V RW 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer to 1011 UserData Dint 10 These are general purpose parameters available for storage of 32 bit enumerated data or Dint data by the user These parameters will be retained through power cycles 1012 User Data Real 01 Default 10 0000 V RW Real to Min Max 2200000000 0000 1021 UserData Real 10 These are general purpose parameters available for storage of Real data by the user These parameters will be retained through power cycles 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl This is the control parameter for the switches and selector switch user functions 16 Input Selector Switches use bits 0 4 Bit 0 SSW DataPass Updates the output If bit 0 is low the output is NOT updated with the selected input Bit 1 Sel Swtch 00 4 Sel Swtch 04 BCD selection of the 16 inputs to the switch Bit 1 is the Least Significant Bit Refer to Pars 1029 1046 Bit 5 Sw Real 1 On activat
25. and Parameters Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter SL Mult Out 926 Spd Reg TP Data 109 Stop Dwell Time 154 SL Mult State 927 Spd Reg TP Sel 108 Stop Oper TP Sel 163 SL MultErr Cnfg 390 SpdFdbkSmoothing 220 Stop Owner 677 SL Node Cnfg 904 SpdRef SpdTrm1 47 StopOper TP Data 164 SL Rev Events 915 SpdRef Filt BW 36 STrim2 Filt Gain 25 SL Real2Dint In 921 SpdRef Filt Gain 35 Swtch Dint 1 NC 1026 SL Real2DInt Out 922 SpdReg AntiBckup 84 Swtch Dint 1 NO 1027 SL Rx CommFormat 905 SpdReg FilterSel 88 Swtch Dint 1 Out 1028 SL Rx DirectSelo 906 SpdReg Integ Out 101 Swtch Real 1 NC 1023 SL Rx DirectSel1 907 SpdReg P Gain Mx 92 Swtch Real 1 NO 1024 SL Rx DirectSel2 908 SpdTrim 3 Scale 24 Swtch Real 1 Out 1025 SL Rx DirectSel3 909 SpdTrim2 Filt BW 26 SynchLink Rev 900 SL Rx Regis 917 Speed Comp 55 SynchLink Status 316 SL Rx P1 Regis 918 Speed Error 100 TachSwitch Level 224 SL System Rev 901 Speed Ref 1 10 Test Curre
26. 22 23 35 55 55 32 24 Using Encoder 0 as speed feedback e Par 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri 0 Encoder 0 default Par 232 Encoder 0 PPR Pulses Rev for installed encoder 14 15 16 Primary Encoder External Supply Encoder A gt P 2 2 Plo Power V V Shield 1 26 Installation Wiring Input Output Digital Inputs used for enable and precharge control Note 24V DC Supply supports only on board digital inputs Do not use for circuits outside the drive Note The factory default for all Digital Inputs is 24V To use 115V on Digital Inputs 4 6 see Table 1 J Note Digital Inputs 1 3 are always 24V DC Table 1 M TB2 Digital Wiring Examples Connection Example Sourcing Digital Inputs Internal Power Supply Com 24V dc aN
27. 50 uj dwog eau s0 dois 18200 1x3 dois 15205 1 dos wrung dos wrung wwo9 da L z z 224 159 Bays 904 SISUMQ SySE A 0 lca les su Bid asionay Bess soa 919803 024 dweypds 09 SL ejqeu3 12919 6 4 sixy eui 12910 coq 9JeMyJoS 0 9 vui eia ISH SsoTYoR yes S pds yes 109 m L dois jeuuoN 450 dweypds dois 009 0 uo smeig Le les pu 9Iqeua SL 0 2 G SL d 91607 2914 0 95 dL 21601 L9Ld 21607 8594 L Cs eui BI SL 49 qeu3 EA eusa 5 0 5 WIH Le aki pasen L uBiH sy 91607 e uq 159 Id SLO via gt zul S ug Id zia dwog yous o duo eeu ora 0 1 9 604 L uBiH eoa Woy 204 Cs ies ysysju Bess 904 ejqeu j 9 qeua Bess
28. 5 8 5 88 555 32 2 le 5 6 2 S lt 015 lt lt Default 0 0 jo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lo 0 0 0 0 0 JO jo 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 O False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 131 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name Current Function Bit Current Function 0 Active Drive is controlling motor 15 Enable On 1 Running Run command received amp controlling motor 16 AtSetpt 1 Par 172 value is within limits defined by Par 173 and Par 174 2 Command Dir Commanded direction is forward 17 AboveSetpt2 Par 175 value is within limits defined by Par 176 and Par 177 3 Actual Dir Actual motor direction is forward 18 MC Active Drive is controlling motor same as enabled 4 Accelerating Motor is increasing speed 19 Commis Motor control commissioning in progress 5 Decelerating Motor is decreasing speed 20 5 Speed control commissioning in progress 6 Jogging Jog command received amp controlling motor 21 Hw Enable On 7 Faulted Exception event that causes a fault has occurred 22 Torque Mode Par 110 value is 2 3 4 5 or 6 8 Alarm Exception event that causes an alarm has occurred 23 SpeedMode Par 110 value is 1 amp position control is not enabled 9 FlashMode Flash upgrade in progress 24 Position Mode Position control active amp Par 110 value is not 2 3 4 5 or6 10 Ready Enable input is high amp drive is fault free 25 Start Active
29. action Word Meaning Can Possible able to do something Cannot Not possible not able to do something May Permitted allowed Must Unavoidable you must do this Shall Required and necessary Should Recommended Should Not Not recommended Similar PowerFlex 700S drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify spare parts ordering dimensioning etc A cross reference of drive catalog numbers and their respective frame size is provided in Appendix A 4 Overview General Precautions Class 1 LED Product gt gt gt D ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber optic cable connectors ATTENTION This drive contains ESD Electrostatic Discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A B publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive am
30. 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True Programming and Parameters 3 75 Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 557 Trend Status Bits indicate the status of the Data Trend function Bit 1 Triggered indicates a Trend Trigger event has been detected This bit will clear in response to the rise of Par 556 Trend Control bit 0 Enbl Collect Bit2 Complete indicates all the post trigger data samples have been gathered and the trend buffers are full It will also be set if the Par 556 Trend Control bit 0 Enbl Collect is cleared before the trigger occurs The trend data outputs will be updated from the contents of the trend buffer data when this bit is set Par 556 Trend Control bit 0 Enbl Collect can be cleared after this bit is set without affecting the trend data buffer contents This bit will clear in response to the rise of Par 556 Trend Control bit 0 Enbl Collect The trend outputs will be forced to zero while this bit is clear Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved lt 9 Reserved Reserved N 9 Reserved 9 Reserved 9 Reserved 9 Reserved O Reserved Complete Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved IReserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved j Default Bit 31 1 558 Trend S
31. 34 ldsintegral 35 Iqsintegral 36 DcBus 37 AGnd 38 Wr2 39 FluxRatio1 40 VbusFdbk 41 FluxRatio2 42 FluxRatio3 2 Value Displays the data selected by Par 473 MC TP2 Select This display should only be used Min Max 43 FluxRatio4 44 MuFIxRtioRef 45 RepFixRatio1 46 MulfluxRef 47 MultestRef 48 MotVntc 49 BaseSlip 50 VbusFdbk2 51 VdsFdbk2 52 VqsFdbk2 53 VdsSpaVItFlt 54 WrEsti 55 MulestFrqRef 56 TestFrqRef 57 FluxFltrN_1 58 PrchgDlayCtr 59 PrchTimOutCr 60 PrchPilotCtr 61 TrqEnableCtr 62 MuTscan1 63 ErStatFromCp 64 FlxCurRteOut 65 ThetaE 66 SinThetaE1 67 SinThetaE2 68 SinThetaE3 69 SinThetaE4 70 SinThetaE5 71 SinThetaE6 72 ThetaEcor 73 SinThtaEcor1 74 SinThtaEcor2 75 SinThtaEcor3 76 SinThtaEcor4 77 MulRef2B 78 SpdFdbk 79 Spdintegral 80 SpdPrportnal 81 SpdPI 82 SpdRef 83 SlipGainEst 84 SlipGainFf 85 Ws2 for firmware version 2 03 86 SlipGain 87 SlipGainFltr 88 SlipVdsCmd 89 SlpVdsCmdFit 90 VdsLastError 91 VdsPrportnal 92 VdslntMnitor 93 MotorVits 94 BusUtil 95 FieldlnitTm 96 IqsLimit 97 VqsCmdMotor 98 We2FieldWeak 99 VqsFieldWkBase 100 VqsldsCmd 101 VqsMaxMotor 102 VqsMaxVbus 103 CalcPUMtrFlx 104 FidWkinitTim 105 FluxldsFfFit 106 FixVqsCmdFit 107 VqsError 108 VqsFluxPl 109 Vqsintegral 110 Vqs
32. E 12 690 Volt Tap 600 Volt Tap A Frame 5 amp 6 utilize a transformer to match the input line voltage to the internal fan voltage If you line voltage is different then the voltage class specified on the drive nameplate it may be necessary to change the transformer taps The taps are shown in the inserts of frames 5 amp 6 Common Bus drives require user supplied 120V or 240V to power the cooling fans Power source is connected between and the terminal corresponding to your source voltage BRT Des po Fan VA Rating Common Bus Only Frame Fan Voltage 120V or 240V 5 100 VA 6 138 VA Installation Wiring Figure 1 4 Power Terminal Block 2 Q Q gt C C w 5 b y Frame 2 9 J S 7 Frame 1 BRi BR2 DC DC PE U V W R S T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3
33. PPR 242 FromDriveLogix08 610 nterp Speed 751 Est Theta Delay 477 FromDriveLogix09 611 nterp Synclnput 693 Estimated Torque 471 FromDriveLogix10 612 nv OL Pend Cnfg 376 Exception Eventl 320 FromDriveLogix1 1 613 nv OL Trip Cnfg 377 Exception Event2 321 FromDriveLogix12 614 nv OT 375 Programming and Parameters 323 111 Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter q Actual Lim 353 Logic 2A Data 1067 Motn EventStatus 691 q Actual Ref 350 Logic 2B Bit 1070 Motn Mx Neg 695 q Rate Limit 354 Logic 2B Data 1069 Motn Mx Pos 694 q Ref Limited 355 Logic Command 151 Motn Posit Cmmd 698 q Ref Trim 351 Logic Config 1061 Motn Posit Sync 700 qs Command 495 Logic Ctrl State 157 Motn PositErrTol 696 qs Integ Freq 421 Logic Mask 670 Motn RotaryCmmd 705 qs Rate Limit 423 Logic Mask Act 713 Motn Speed 699 qs Reg P Gain 422 Logic State Mach 150 Motn TP Select 703 reg IGain Fctr 428
34. 5 81 lt suonoeuuo Be 7 1 4 5 1 Be 1 20 6 1 pueuuuo 221801 1 4 J0u3uonisog 1 OL 1 OL AqpAuonisog 1 OL Ceo Snyejsuonisod Be xi601 yoxiboeAug OL
35. 5 5 713 13 13 se 709 5 0160 51 222929 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 5 2 5 5 5 6 5 6 6 5 5 6 65 2 lt 5 lt 2 58 85888 888 5888 88555 e 2 cC CC S A jo x lt x x lt Default 0 o 0 o p jo jo jo jo jo jo JO 0 1 0 jo JO jo JO j JO ji JO JO 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 Title 742 Position Ref Sel Default 1 AuxPosit Ref Enter a value to select the position mode and corresponding reference ons 25 Note This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Options 12 743 Posit Ref Default 0 V RW 32 bit Supplies position reference to the position regulator when selected by Par 742 Posit Ref Sel Min Max 2147483648 Integer 1 This input is designed to be linked to a position count accumulator such as a virtual encoder or hardware accumulator 744 PositRef EGR Out Default 0 RO 32 bit Accumulated output of the position reference Electronic Gear Ratio EGR When the position Min Max 2147483648 Integer regulator is not enabled this parameter is initialized to Par 762 Position Fdbk or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 740 Position Control bit
36. BY 104 BY JOS 7S 016 pue xy 1S 506 ed j 00 pos swous Ajuo 511 5 8 pue SPIO 91 SDJOM JAIA t 9 9293J 4211A p JO 10 S9joN uires 15 0 00 PJOM XL 15 0001815 ejeg yng XL pereyng Omura als oo Kee cones ed eieg yng xy Xx xuruouAS BJeq eAie2es Sempre ag Ui PNW IS 0 00 IS usod Lido 84 10 gt sed oido gt uonisod Q1pou3 0380 QJpou3 lt 00x eieq 15 00XL eea 15 Sjue 3 12 15 enen 5 woy 2 Acres 0 woy aseg x Keze gt mn 15 ejewpieH 15 01 00 XL 75 0040119 yaey ed XL Cue 15 15 01884911Q XL IS jag sloy Ld 15 5 4
37. Title Publication Available PowerFlex Reference Manual Phase Control PFLEX RM003 con PowerFlex 7005 and 700H Adjustable PFLEX INO06 literature Frequency Drives for Frames 9 11 The following publications provide information Title Installation Instructions Stegmann Feedback Option for PowerFlex 7005 Drive specific PowerFlex 7005 drive features Installation Instructions Resolver Feedback Option for PowerFlex 7005 Drives Installation Instructions Multi Device Interface for PowerFlex 7005 Drive Installation Instructions Second Encoder Option for PowerFlex 7005 Drives with Phase II Control Firmware Release Notes PowerFlex 7005 Drive amp DriveLogix Publication Available 20D IN001 20D IN002 20D IN004 www rockwellautomation com literature 20D IN009 20D RN007 For Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Title Online at Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support www rockwellautomation com literature or call M F 7 00a m to 7 00p m Central STD time 1 262 512 8176 For Automation and Control Technical Support Title Online at Rockwell Automation Technical Support http support rockwellautomation com knowledgebase The following publications provide necessary information when applying the DriveLogix Controller Title DriveLogix5730 Controller User Manual Publication Available 20D UM003 PowerFlex 700S Driv
38. 394 VoltFdbkLossCnfg 77 Ref TP Sel 216 PkDtct2 In Dint 326 Alarm Status 1 376 Inv OL Pend Cnfg 78 Spd Ref TP RPM 217 PkDtct2 In Real 327 Alarm Status 2 377 Inv OL Trip Cnfg 79 Spd Ref TP Data 218 PeakDtct2 Preset 328 Alarm Status 3 372 Mtr OL Pend Cnfg 108 Spd Reg TP Sel 219 PeakDetect2 Out 323 Fault Status 1 371 Mtr OL Trip Cnfg 109 Spd Reg Data 324 Fault Status 2 375 Inv OT Pend Cnfg 347 Drive OL TP Sel 325 Fault Status 3 369 Brake OL Cnfg 348 Drive OL TP Data 331 LstFaultStopMode 365 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri 130 Ref TP Sel 313 Heatsink Temp 366 Fdbk LsCnfg Alt 131 Ref TP Data 345 Drive OL JnctTmp 367 Fdbk LsCnfgPosit 357 Ref TP Sel 346 Drive OL Status 391 DPI CommLoss Cfg 358 Curr Ref TP Data Trending 316 SynchLink Status 392 55 DPI 418 Brake TP Sel Trend Control 902 SL Error Status 383 SL CommLoss Data 419 Brake TP Data 956 Tend UE 903 SL Error History 384 SL CommLoss Cnfg 178 PITP Sel 557 Trend Status 518 MC Diag Status 390 SL MultErr Cnfg 179 PITP Data 958 Trond Stato 519 MC Diag Done 385 Lgx CommLossData 737 Posit TP Select 559 2d Di 463 MC Diag Error 1 386 OutOfRunCnfg 738 PositTP DataDInt 560 Trend TrigA Dint 464 MC Diag Error 2 387 Lgx Timeout Cnfg 739 PositTP DataReal 561 Tong Tig meal 465 MC Diag Error 3 388 10 Closed Cnfg 892 51 Comm TP Sel 562 Teng TOB R T 894 SLCRCErrAccum 389 Lgx LinkChngCnfg 893 SL Comm TP Data 563 Trend TrigB Rea 895 SLCRC Error 370 HiHp InPhsLs Cfg 245 Spd Fdbk T
39. o XEN XEN 2 XEN y UIN g XEN WIN 295 1000 sdwy anj u 3 5510 g Huey juaung ejqejsn py 10429 016 Jexeelg Buneu gt JOJOW WOVE 309412 4010 1 219 esnj ejeg ejog eui uawa jeng jndjno eAug 40J 2177 9520 6 seure14 2v HOA 007 Supplemental Information A 12 VN 052 0091 009 9001 00h Sec 092 0 2 081 691 OSL VN 007 002 00 002 099 0021 0 6 5 0 Bre v6l Eez 002 9 820002 VN i 052 097 009 0001 OSE 004 212 vec 99 271 Sel VN 052 0091 009 9001 00 980 0 2 986 08 691 09 9 0810002 VN 052 9 61 009 g l 05 1 OSc 9881 90 601 LELI OOH VN 052 097 009 0041 OSE 000 0 221 98 eck 711 921 9 9510002 VN 60 096 056 9211 008 921 89L trl 96 674 106 SZ VN x 091 9 61 005 0911 098 091 29 82 Scl 926 OOL 5 5210002 VN 0006 NINO INOY 00 006 006 001 OO 79 908 109 EL 09 VN Sel 092 0 921 00 5011 901 96 106 9 9 9600002 VN 0006 NINO INOY z 001 092 0 08 981 08 06 86 99 967 966 05
40. 9 y Signal 10 11 12 OShield Common Analog Output 10V DC Used to drive analog meters displaying speed and current 11 0 10V Analog Output A 1 j 12 lt Using Analog Out 1 10V to 10V to meter Motor RPM and direction Send the data to the Analog Output Par 833 Anlg Out1 Real the destination linked to Par 71 Filtered SpdFdbk the source Scale the Output to the source parameter Par 835 Anlg Out1 Scale 175 1750 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 10V Using Analog Out 2 10V to 10V to meter Motor Current Send the data to the Analog Output Par 840 Anlg Out2 Real the destination linked to Par 308 Output Current the source Scale the Output to the source parameter Par 822 Anlg Out2 Scale xx Par 2 Motor NP FLA 10 V Output Primary Encoder Interface Supports 5V DC 12V DC differential encoders with internal power supply 18 14 15 16 Primary Encoder Internal Supply Encoder 17 18 19 20 21
41. Crse 159 100 gt QS Xni4 9189 snes JOJO 96 01300 2 10 0 Jew uno AW je bI 153 enbuo ug 21607 ug bi suondo enbio ove gt snes 10 enia ug suondo duie xuisjgeH duie 1ouf 10 05441612 10 doopesor 11 e1 Kest suondo urn 01812 10 d Sune oes 84 Cz V14 dN JO OW IW jueun 2 AW ur eny by doojuedo 2 2010 si 1ueun 20325 nd wrung dudo L 581 xxe emua JUALIND 5 1 Control Block Diagrams B 10 892 1eyeurejeg 0 uueuifeis 662 1ejeurejeg 0 292 1ejeurejed 1 0 1pou3 eez eu suonduosep eeg peeds ay jo Buu yy ay seonpai 5 jo Jaquinu ay Bulonpay yoeqpaay paads y jo ay seseeoui sdej jo jequinu y Buiseeiou g 5 4 uoee 10 inejeq eigeisn pe sde jo jequinu ay uy ue seu yeg sod Lido 84 Duisseoo1gd x
42. 5 16 msec Note Values 5 16 msec and 6 32 msec were added for firmware version 2 04 2 2 msec 6 32 msec 3 4 msec 788 1 Default 0 RW 32 bit 32 bit integer input of the Sync Generator Latched to Par 789 Xsync Out 1 Link any 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer integer parameter to this input parameter 789 Out 1 Default 0 RO 32 bit Sync Generator 32 bit output register Latched to Par 788 Xsync In 1 every time bit 0 Sync Min Max 2147483648 Integer Pulse of Par 786 Xsync Status is set 790 XsyncIn2 Units V RW 32 bit 32 bit integer input of the Sync Generator Latched to Par 791 Xsync Out 2 Link any 32 bit Default 0 Integer integer parameter to this input parameter Min Max 2147483648 791 Out 2 Default 0 RO 32 bit Sync Generator 32 bit output register Latched to Par 790 Xsync In 2 every time bit 0 Sync Min Max 2147483648 Integer Pulse of Par 786 Xsync Status is set 792 Out 2 Dly Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays data of Par 791 Xsync Out 2 from the last sync period Min Max 2147483648 Integer 793 XsyncIn 3 Unit V RW 32 bit 32 bit integer input of the Sync Generator Latched to Par 794 Xsync Out 3 Link any 32 bit Default 0 0000 Integer integer parameter to this input parameter Min Max 214748 3594 794 Out 3 Unit P U RO Real Sync Generator 32 bit output reg
43. dorus 4 1 Drive 4 1 LED Indications 4424 esu ede eed pee ete exe 4 2 Precharge Board LED 4 3 HIM Indications uber RIP 4 4 Manually Clearing 6 4 4 Fault Descriptions kets Cede ege Estee e Rea pes me ae a 4 4 Chapter Objectives isa ser ce Bak Sata dad whee bale RERO ds A 1 Specifications Dm A 1 DPI Communication A 4 Typical Programmable Controller Configurations A 4 Logic Command Word A 5 Logic Status Word ise Rene ER RUE hee nex e ea A 6 Output Devices irem be eee p ELIdG nnb e ate A 6 Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker A 6 Buse Size 2 heb ee P Lue ates es PRU E M rats A 6 Type a e EN east done 7 m 15 List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor A 17 Spare Connectors pe err s eme Waele e E pe RU Sn A 18 Main Control Board
44. x lt Default 0 0 0 000 00 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 JO JO 0 O 0 0 JO 0 JO jO 0 JO JO 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 True 823 Digln Debounce Sets the amount of de bounce filtering for each digital input This is used to remove unwanted on off cycling chatter on the digital inputs caused by relay bounce Each digital input de bounce is configured separately from 0 5ms to 8 0ms The bit selections are cumulative for each digital input 1 6 Example bit 4 amp 2 amp 1 on 5 5ms of de bounce for digital input 1 Options g BIB BIBIBSIBIBSSIBIBIBIBSSSBIBSIBIBS FSIS ISIS IS IS FBS FSIS JS IS 49 1S ISIS S18 ISIS 5 le lt IN lt lt IN PS IN FO lt lt IT IN Ie xx 2 e e e lt 9 sa sa Default 0 0 0 0 0 O O JO JO 0 JO 10H JO JO JO JO O JO JO 0 JO JO JO JO JO JO Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 210 0 False 1 True 824 Locall O Status Displays the status of the local I O Options amp 222 2 272922 229299c7IzxS92222929 5
45. 0 0 dweypds voq ug sixy coa Se XX aemula 154 sso1uoe 204 b 1 S pde Loa D 21607 00 quuo14 450 dweypds 004 91607 04 u02 Control Block Diagrams B 14 ereuipiooo uonoung e2ueJ9jeJ Joud BY pepeo 2729 pue yy d 9 4 uay S S 8 Op d JI Z 10929 esyo SAY 2929 uonisog 196 2724 pue ip d 9 4 9 Jes si 8 4q 09 4 L Qu dooig 20 sjueuiuBisse eui GHG1 2 04 Lp4d Bursu ey uo jeseld oJozx QD eso 1 uonlSOd y ejep pue 1 si doo uonisod ueuM sijurod 5141 1 sod 1no ayu UION X pds uooN X pds Beux 225 1289 peedg JW 5015 5 peeds dy Joug indino pds novjeuio x so E 5 uonisogd Kor ses purses ejes 91607 Jew D 9 NN
46. 2 S004 pds deis enbio Colt epojenbio peeds Cit 1 jeu Cor re smes 12907 sss smes OW 1ndino Jes 12 gt pasayi snes 21501 peeds 9 4 uuo x61 009 OL J04ju02 eAug Control Block Diagrams B 26 OL xi o31eAug OL OL OL 2 OL OL OL s e egieesipeugegues xiBo1eAug OL OL cle egieesipeugequesm OL xiBo1eAug OL xiBo1eAug OL OL 95 5
47. 4931s 1010 NOP L 2 osnJ ejog 1 eng sdwy yndjno yndu dH eAug SeioN 10 21 7 9520 205 6 seure14 1nduj Dy 087 Supplemental Information A 14 VN 092 GLE 9 6 061 9 0 091 5 Scl 1 01 VN 2 092 007 007 g l 00 92 zi vi 951 Z 091 9 7713000 VN 091 9 61 9 6 Scl 002 Sek 66 996 606 05 21001 052 9 61 9 6 09 052 051 Geb 211 05 e 42 9 5213000 VN 0006 NINO IN x 001 00 006 00 9 1 001 861 Ob Z4 194 EZZ S VN x 091 GLE Seb 002 901 601 66 996 626 Z 00L S 660 002 VN 00 9 NINO IN E 001 052 0 06 Sel 06 921 76 59 909 289 05 09 VN 0006 NINO IN 001 00 00 06 051 06 9 Sg 7 VSL 604 09 c 94 S 2204002 00 9 NINO IN 5 001 600 See 08 Scl 08 01 84 29 909 289 08 Z 09 09 290 002 VN 00 9 NINO IN B 001 0021 002 09 OLL 09 8 SI9 cS 96v 227 09 t 0 09 2204002 VN 0007 99 384 001 0911 00 05 06 05 9 8 ly 166 9 6 05 Y 06 0 04000 VN 0007 062 38 05 Sel 62 0 79 90 ce 906 09 Y Sc 0 6 2804002 VN 00ScNWO ScO 3843 N 09 00L 00 Ge 09 Ge 661 Le 2 872 08 Y 0 52 c 720 002 VN 00ScNWO
48. 5 uonisogd 9je1S 2 21601 sH S1 pds 092 X awi jenjoy uonisog D 104 15009 queo pds yndyno sees 10113 X uonisog 19530 x so ov ro Kore x 5015 uonisog so K gt TISHO ey 19550 5 15480 X PYY Idd jov jesnidid snjeijs uonisog 893 MNW 393 ES 2209 uonisod SQ 1 1 pejejodieju ees CN N 5 r2 ies jou 049Z xoeqpeej pue uonisod pejqeue 1520 51 doo uonisod ayy e sijulod 5141 jsog peeds uonisod Control Block Diagrams B 16 91215 WD 91607 tgv port 9 leoer uonisog uoniso eyeis 21601 suonounj 95 Joy 10 sniejs uonisog 0114 18S Jou epoyeinjosqv 0je n8e1 uonisod
49. Offset Spd 756 X Offst SpdFilt 747 Position Cmmd 757 Abs Posit Offset 762 Position Fdbk 763 Position Actual 769 Position Error 796 Gear Ratio 768 PositReg P Gain 761 PtPtFilt BW 759 X Pt Pt Accel Time 760 Decel Time 775 XRegSpd LoLim 776 XReg Spd HiLim 778 X Notch Attenu 779 X Notch FiltFreq 318 Spd Output 797 Basiclndx Step 798 Basiclndx Preset 799 Basiclndx Output 1130 Pos Command 1131 Pos 1132 PPMP Pos Div 1133 Scaled 1134 PPMP Control 1135 PPMP Status 1136 PPMP Rev Spd Lim 1137 PPMP Fwd Spd Lim 1138 PPMP Over Ride 1139 PPMP Accel Time 1140 PPMP Decel Time 1141 PPMP SCurve Time 1142 PPMP Spd Output 1143 PPMP Pos Output 1144 PPMP Pos Go Sync Generator Phase Lock Loop 786 Status 720 Control 787 Xsync Gen Period 721 PLL Position Ref 317 SL System Time 722 PLL BandWidth 788 XsyncIn 1 723 Rev Input 789 Xsync Out 1 724 PLL Rev Output 790 XsyncIn2 725 PLLEPR Input 791 Xsync Out 2 726 EPR Output 792 Xsync Out 2 Dly 727 PLL VirtEncdrRPM 793 XsyncIn3 728 Ext Spd Ref 794 Xsync Out 3 729 PLL Ext SpdScale 795 Xsync Out 3 Dly 730 PLLLPFilter BW 731 PLL Posit Out 732 PLL Posit OutAdv 733 PLLFiltPositOut 734 PLL Speed Out Motion 735 SpeedOut Adv 684 MotnUpdatePeriod 685 Motn CoarseMulti
50. Status of secondary network if connected Troubleshooting 4 3 Precharge Board LED Indications Precharge Board LED indicators are found on Frame 5 amp 6 drives The LEDs are located above the Line Type jumper shown in Figure 1 2 Name Color State Description Power Green Steady Indicates when precharge board power supply is operational Alarm Yellow Flashing Number in indicates flashes and associated alarm 1 Low line voltage lt 90 2 Very low line voltage lt 50 3 Low phase one phase lt 80 of line voltage 4 Frequency of range or asymmetry line sync failed 5 Low DC bus voltage triggers ride through operation 6 Input frequency momentarily out of range 40 65 Hz 7 DC bus short circuit detection active Fault Flashing Number in indicates flashes and associated fault 2 DC bus short Udc lt 2 after 20 ms 4 Line sync failed or low line Uac 5096 Unom 0 alarm condition automatically resets when the condition no longer exists 9 A fault indicates a malfunction that must be corrected and can only be reset after cycling power Table 4 C Common Causes of a Run Inhibit Examine Parameter 156 Run Inhibit Status Bit Description Action 1 No power is present at the Enable Terminal TB2 16 Apply the enable 2 3 4 stop command is being issued Close all stop inputs 5 Power loss event is in progress
51. A 18 High Resolution Encoder Interface Board A 18 Resolver Interface A 18 Auxiliary Power Supply A 18 Dimensions oup DUC IRR A ERA UE IUE A 19 List of Control Block Diagrams B 1 Diagram Conventions and Definitions B 2 Input Voltage C 1 Motor Control nne ooo nA SEE ISI C 2 Field Oriented Control 1 2 C 2 Permanent Magnet 1 C 3 Volts Hertz Control v2 003 and later C 3 Motor Overload lel ee ee TELLURE EP VERO TI det C 5 Mtr PT Spd Mim oe Ee eut ER LEES C 5 Stop Dwell Time REIR RENI RE A ee ee E ER eS C 5 6 Setpt 2 Medes A 6 iv Table of Contents Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H Appendix I Index External and Internal D 1 LED Display Elements
52. RS 485 Rotary Encoder COS 12 ns PK 1 H GN 6 RS 485 Rotary Encoder RS485 11 WH 7 ag Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 10 E PKI gt 8 005 Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 Linear Sensor CLOCK 8 DL 3 ay Linear Sensor DATA 7 H H Linear Sensor DATA 6 GN H H Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 4 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 CHASSISGND 1 L Figure 7 Rotary Encoder Connections with Stegmann pre attached shielded twisted pair cable GY GN Linear Sensor DATA MDI Feedback Option Board ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 pn I BU POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER 16 ee 4 80 Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 m H H REFSIN Rotary Encoder SIN 14 T K SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 14 1 REFCOS Rotary Encoder 005 12 d H PK Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 11 E E GY __ RS 485 Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 10 _ DATA RS 485 Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 Linear Sensor CLOCK i i 8 7 Linear Sensor DATA 6 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 4 3 2 1 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION Linear Senso
53. values for options 1 amp 8 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 PI TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 178 PI TP Sel Output The final output of the Process Control regulator A value of 1 can represent either base motor speed motor rated torque or 10096 for some external function Reference The reference input for the process control regulator A value of 1 can represent either base motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function Feedback The feedback input for the process control regulator A value of 1 can represent either base motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function Error Displays the error of the process trim reference minus the process trim feedback Lpass Filt BW Sets the bandwidth of a single pole filter applied to the error input of the Process Control regulator The input to the filter is the difference between Par 181 PI Reference and Par 182 Feedback The output of this filter is used as the input to the process control regulator PI Preload Presets the integrator of the Process Control regulator PI Prop Gain Controls the proportional gain of the Process Control regulator If the proportional gain is 1 0 the regulator output equals 1 pu for 1 pu error PI Integ Time Controls the integral gain of the Process Control regulator If the integrator time is 1 0 the regulator output equal
54. 170M6610 phs 20DJ730 1 600 836 520 730 803 1095 700 2 170M6611 phs 500 744 463 650 975 1170 700 2per 170M6611 phs 0 Also applies to voltage class Fuses must be applied in the leg and leg of the DC Common Bus The power source to Common Bus inverters must be derived from AC voltages 600V or less as defined in NFPA70 Art 430 18 NEC Battery supplies or MG sets are not included The following devices were validated to break current of the derived power DC Bus Disconnects Allen Bradley Bulletin No 1494 30 to 400 A Bulletin No 194 30 to 400 A or ABB OESA 600 amp 800 A OESL all sizes Fuses Bussmann Type JKS all sizes Type 170M Case Sizes 1 2 and 3 or Ferraz Shawmut Type HSJ all sizes For any other devices please contact the factory 650 Volt DC Input Protection Devices HP Rating DC Input Ratings Output Amps Drive Catalog Number Frame ND HD Amps kW Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Fuse Non Time Delay Fuse 20DD014 1 10 7 5 147 95 14 16 5 22 30 HSJ30 20DD022 1 15 10 23 3 15 1 22 24 2 33 45 HSJ40 20DD027 2 20 15 28 9 18 8 27 33 44 60 HSJ50 2000034 2 25 20 36 4 236 34 405 54 70 HSJ60 20DD040 3 30 25 42 9 27 8 40 51 68 80 HSJ80 2000052 3 40 30 55 7 36 1 52 60 80 100 HSJ90 2000065 3 50 40 69 7 45 4 65 78 104 150 HSJ100 20DD077 4 60 84 5
55. 2 5 81818 8 818181818118 81818 B alo tC EITE o Default 0 jO 0 JO lO 0 JO 0 0 False 15 14 13 1211109 8 7 6 5 4 3210 1 3 79 Programming and Parameters eq E E SE Ww Wo oc o o ejqexur1 gt gt 09 uwopinug 09 uwopinug UMOpInUSSXV o la 4007 1504 o 00 euoH UAW o 00 WOW o 00 o 09 WAZ UGY o Panasey gt gt IMLIAO YSH IMLO 99 DJH panasey DJH S S 8 5 431pdn 1S2 5 o Z S e X SN 5 lt gt E lt gt 8 v 2 g 8 v 2 SE SE x
56. 25522 gio gt lt a a a a 2 5 5 o Defaut 0 0 0100 0 0 jO O 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 02000 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 87 65 4 3 2 1 O0 MC Diag Error 3 Displays the third diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control MC Errors appear in this parameter in the order in which they occurred Bit 9 CurrSensor U indicates a current sensing fault in the U phase power structure of a frame 12 drive Bits 1 7 10 12 and 18 were changed to Reserved bits 9 11 13 and 17 were changed for firmware version 3 01 Options 3 z 2 8 8 22 22 22 9 222 22222 5 6 5 5 5 6 6 5 5 5 9 6 6 5 5 5 81812 818 28288 8898 8 2 22 2 8 28 59 51 98 5 8218 8 2 0 a x Defaut 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 jO 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 020000 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 87 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 False 1 True 0 False 1 True 3 64 Programming and Parameters No 466 467 Name Description
57. 55 2 5 5 25 8 5 5555 S 8 5 5 52 2 lt 5 8 lt 88558 5 2 8 8 8 55 515 5 5 5 2 2 55 g I x A lt lt Default 0 0 lo o jo jo jo o o 0 Y fo jp o j jo jo jo Jo JO Jo jo 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4321 0 741 Position Status Indicates status of position control algorithms e Bit 0 X IGain LLim indicates the position integrator is at the low limit e Bit 1 X IGain indicates the position integrator is at the high limit Bit 2 X Spd indicates the position regulator output at the low limit e Bit 3 X Spd HLim indicates the position regulator output is at the high limit e Bit 4 PtPtRRef Act TBD e Bit 5 XOffRRef Act TBD e Bit 7 Regulator On indicates position regulator is active Bit 8 Posit Watch1 indicates Position Watch 1 has detected motor position equal to its setpoint from the proper direction Bit 9 Posit Watch2 indicates Position Watch 2 has detected motor position equal to its setpoint from the proper direction Bit 10 In Position indicates Par 769 Position Error is within the position deadband specified by Par 782 In Posit BW Note Bits 13 15 were added for future use not active for use with firmware version 3 01 Options 8 le
58. Default o 0 o jo o o o o jo o o po o p o jo jo jo p jo jo jo jo oj jo jo jo jo 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 917 SL Rx Regis Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays received port 0 registration data if direct received data is configured to be 2147483648 Integer registration data by the Rx Direct Data Selector Parameters 905 909 Configure this selection by using the Peer Communication window 918 Rx P1 Regis Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays received port 1 registration data if direct received data is configured to be port 1 Min Max 2147483648 Integer registration data by the Rx Direct Data Selector Parameters 905 909 Configure this selection by using the Peer Communication window 921 ISL Real2Dint In Default 0 0000 IRW Real Provides the floating point real input to the real to integer conversion function Min Max 16 0000 922 Real2Dint Out Default 0 RO 16 bit Displays the integer output of the real to integer conversion function The value is the result of Min Max 0 65535 Integer the formula Par 921 SL Real2DInt In x Par 923 SL Mult Base 923 ISL Mult Base Default 10000 0000 RW Real Specifies the base for SynchLink real to integer and integer to real conversion functions Min Max 0 2000 50000 0000 Determines the resolution of the conversion results You must use the same val
59. Voltage 120V or 240V 5 100 VA 6 138 VA Selecting Verifying Fan Voltage Frames 5 amp 6 Only power to the drive has been removed before performing ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard ensure that all the following Frames 5 amp 6 utilize a transformer to match the input line voltage to the internal fan voltage If your line voltage is different than the voltage class specified on the drive nameplate it may be necessary to change the transformer taps The taps are shown in the insert of frame 5 below Figure 1 2 Frames 5 amp 6 Jumper and Transformer Locations Frame 5 shown Phase Selection Jumper 3 PH 1 PH LINE TYPE SPARE 1 SPARE 2 Fan Voltage OUTPUT 7 690 Volt 600 Volt 480 400 Volt Frame 6 Transformer Tap Access The transformer is located behind the Power Terminal Block in the area shown in Figure 1 2 Gain access by releasing the terminal block from the rail To release terminal block and change tap 1 12 Installation Wiring 1 Locate the small metal tab at the bottom of the end block 2 Press the tab in and pull the top of the block out Repeat for next block if desired 3 Select appropriate transformer tap 4 Replace bloc
60. y uo QD esso sod sq eo Kore jesaig 01 ZX 5 uo wm pds x Control Block Diagrams C61 bola x X zv s 10 u09 peeds pds sod 1 doigdur nad 01ju0 5 uonisog 5 00 lt sousdsysod 6 9 sod se Sjuno2 esn Ajuo uonisod oj ay ejnjosqe pessed q eie yy S 904 ueuM 7 904 Opzd pue uni jou 5 y pesn eq 5141 oJez 34 195 0 pesn eq 609 29 1090197395 eui s 904 0 4 Z sod 0 e 9 ut y uey S 8928 enje eui j 204 024 uonisod ay 904 07 4 JO pesn s uinj inui Jas eq 904 ED uonisod 19000197395 KED oos uonsog LKD Z 521 xxe semus JOJUOD UONISOd pds 0 Sneg
61. 092 sud sed 0061 9 092 0811 588 069 807 069 96 syd 198 2 098 540 190 097 50 2 099 sud 190 2 09 VN 002 0091 sud 0021 Sud 006 syd ooe sud 190 006 0811 SIZ 059 osr 099 992 0590002 sud 2 09 540 198 2 922 sud ed 2 os sud sed 2 see VN 008 002 sud ed 0091 sud sad 099 sud jed 0011 549 089 082 029 096 029 osz sud 198 2 098 sud ied 2 922 sud 2 009 sud 198 2 5 6 VN 0021 0091 sud ed 0021 092 40 90 0061 840 082 679 066 80h oes SIE 0690002 VN 008 0021 0001 628 0001 azg 078 069 027 982 ooz VN 008 0021 007 529 0011 929 092 099 005 622 060 052 01 0050002 VN 008 008 0001 005 008 oos 0 8 6 982 192 222 ooz VN 008 0021 0021 9 9 006 9 9 0 909 09 212 sv 092 01 0970002 VN 009 008 008 9 9 aze 009 0 002 poz vez 09 VN 008 008 000 005 008 009 009 982 198 002 01 5820002 YN 007 00 059 926 006 Sze 06 892 972 991 Ore cel YN 007 008 008 9 9 9 6 09 062 002 poz v6c 091 6 0070002 VN 007 009 098 052 007 osz 017 9802 502 Gel 102 OL VN 007 00 00 606 009 SZE OLlv 282 192 952 2841 6 1920002 jjSJequinN
62. 5 1 dOW 21 2 uonoun J epiaig Ajdnini LL uoroun j OL Leq 6 0 JUIG 2 UOISIBAUOD 8 Jeay 0 ujq z 9 21601 t 2 yoyms 10j2ejes 1 045 WIA Z uoi 2 5 1085 eeu 2 91 4 YMS 10129JeS 4 lt z 20 Kzeoi gt z 90 Kzeor 15 5 2 607 8 lt 1 so Kzeor a gt v Kzeor 5 2 607 mH E jnses qnsppv Es om z qnsppv 581 xxe semwa 1997 gz aedwog yz g aedwog y jongns qnsppv ppv ansppy qnsppv 2 qnsppv PPV 2 2 jonqns qnsppv ppv qnsppv qnsppv 21601 ejes dw 9 31607 jnses eros 141001694 ul juldzieey 19 0 eros zieeuaiua ul 801 ILeeNZIUIG Buipunos 1 5 95 MOLY 5 in
63. 6 4 PowerFlex 7005 Resolver Feedback Option Card Notes PowerFlex 7005 Multi Device Interface Option Card For information about See page Specifications H 1 Wiring the MDI Option Card H 3 Specifications MDI Option Card Specifications Consideration Description Rotary Encoder Voltage Supply 11 5 DC 130 mA Rotary Encoder Hi Resolution _ Sine Cosine 1V P P Offset 2 5 Feedback Rotary Encoder Maximum Cable 90m 295 ft Length Rotary Encoder RS 485 Interface The MDI Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS 485 interface shortly after power up e Address e Command Number e Mode e Number of turns e Number of Sine Cos cycles e Checksum Registration Inputs high speed 12 24V DC sinking digital inputs Customer I O plug P1 Allen Bradley PN 594274917 Weidmuller PN 67601782 Supported Linear Sensors Temposonics III Linear sensors with MTS part numbers ending in 15261102 work with the MDI Option Part Number Character Characteristic 1 Input Voltage 24Vdc S SSI output 2 Data Length 24 Bits G Output Format Gray Code 1 Resolution 0 005 mm 1 Performance Standard 02 Scale Orientation Forward acting Synchronized Temposonics is a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation 2 PowerFlex 7005 Multi Device Interface MDI Option Card If you are using this motor and feedback dev
64. 85 Error 88 Stahl Optics 94 Analog In 1 Loss 129 Faults Cleared Indicate HIM and place in fault queue after the faults have been cleared 130 Fault Q Cleared Place in fault queue after the fault queue have been cleared 131 Alarm Cleared Place alarm queue after the alarm has been cleared S 132 Alarm Cleared Place in alarm queue after the alarm queue has been cleared OY Refer to Table on page 4 1 for Fault Type Descriptions Table 4 E Fault Description Cross Reference Fault No Fault No 15volt Power 82 Inst Overcurrent 27 Hard Over Trvl 83 Interp Out Synch 46 Hard Over Trvl 84 Inv OLoad Pend 16 Soft Over 81 Inv OLoad Trip 17 Soft Over 82 Inv OTemp Pend 14 Abs Ovespd Det i Inv OTemp Trip 45 Alarm Cleared 131 Inv Trans 20 Alarm Q Cleared 132 Logix Closed 63 Analog In 1 Loss 94 Logix Link Chng 64 Analog In 2 Loss 95 Logix Out of Run 61 Analog In 3 Loss 96 Logix Timeout 62 Brake OL Trip 38 MC CML Task Fail 47 DC Bus Overvolt 24 MC Commissn Fail 29 DC Bus Undervolt 42 MC Firmware 30 DPI Loss Port 1 49 Motor OLoad Pend 12 DPI Loss Port 2 50 Motor OLoad Trip 11 DPI Loss Port 3 51 Motor Stalled 13 DPI Loss Port 4 52 Net Loss DPI P1 55 DPI Loss Port 5 59 Net Loss DPI P2 56 DPI Loss Port 6 54 Net Loss DPI P3 57 Drive Power Loss 10 Net Loss DPI P4
65. Default Programming and Parameters EPR 1048576 1 67108864 RPM 1750 0 1 0 30000 0 P U 0 0 2200000000 0 1 0 2200000000 0 RIS 50 00 0 00 8000 00 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 P U 0 0 2200000000 0 P U 0 0 2200000000 0 P U 0 0 2200000000 0 Zero Zero del Xos Vout del del Act Load del Act Mtr Integ Error Out Fdbk Sel Alt PreLim Xvout uu n Hu m n 2147483648 0 0 8 0 pu 3 83 Linkable Read Write ta Type W 32 bit V RW Rea V RW Rea V RW Rea RO 32 bit Integer RO 32 bit Integer V RW Real V RW Real V RW Real 9 Limiter Out 10 Ref EGR In 11 OffsetSpdLim 12 Pt Pt SpdLim 13 Sec per Edge 14 Edge per Sec 15 Ratio Guess 16 Sync Count RO 32 bit Integer RO Real 3 84 Programming and Parameters 8 2 2 2 5 5 No Description Values 52 5 740 Position Control Set bits to enable various position control functions e Setting bit 1 Speed Out En enables position regulator output at Par 318 Posit Spd Output e Setting bit 2 Integ En enables integrator operation Resetting it resets the integrator e Setting bit 3 Integ Hold holds integrator in present state e Setting
66. lt ye areas zino Cire Jesuo zno oes Cate ies H Qu uno zov spun Sojeuy anea nno Buy oiez ino Suy Qu uno Loy spun Bojeuy ne ey Lino Buy Lino uy 80 181 jew Jojo IOON GL MANO 40814 yndino Id L Sd leew z puas 2 JOJ3 19814 LL 9 64 2 92 42844 id OL LINO puo Gd puas 92 191811 Id 6 Lino pueJ1 2 64 1 puas yz sng 289064 sna oa 8 1894 06019 18497 dOW ez abeJoAMdNO 40 d syoA ndino JnO Id Bey pds no Bey pds zz Jewogindino LLEd Jamo NANO 9 Jeu pds 12 XNA JOON 608 100W 6 pds 5 2 04 ps 02 b11 6 p anbJo Zbd 153 61 yuan indino goed dyro e 20d peads 8 pds Pds 195 6 Jeu peeds JOJON Jeu peeds 2 oled dyno 1 Jes bil NN 6064 jewunoba aw 91 peugeq1est peles jesn 0 1ndino 8ojeuy L 38
67. 11 Control Block Diagrams L 581 sjndjno 9 sjnduJ Case ies eno Ara p Cis ug Cess mo popas eui uo Corse I uo zino W u I eui ropes Care ies 2 uo 0 281 1 Cave X SnjelS snjels 0 1 2207 IVE BE ges ze 2495 uaquesn 96 Mes ae Mes jeu pds dois i 0196 1 alas jeu pds 2195 jeu pds 8L 3yurmueuno pL peeds paedsojez 2 zades enoqy Li Ladies OL vC paedsiv 6 INLO PIH dois jeuuoN WLO ZE z Bor LE pensesoy 0 pansasay pue11 62 Bor 0 WL Id 82 6 Id 22 8 ug Id 92 ung 4 jeseu dOW sz 9 oeg don vz uus 5 dOW z 30 4015 WON p udisxpujosg zz ynes xa deis 12 Syne 1e9 8 z dur 82 8 v Zsdwo 2 S v 92 S v sz ZUM 1504 LUM 1504 uonisog ZL 9L SL vL L eL eiqeua penjesey 9 penjesey G 6L peeu
68. 2 I Z LX SOS 2 WOH A OD OD SG Ly Y Input Output 0 10V Analog Input Table 1 K TB2 Terminals 5 Factory 55 Terminal Signal Default Description c 1 24V DC Common NA Drive supplied 24V DC logic input power 2 24V DC Source NA Rating 300 mA maximum load 3 Digital Output 1 24V DC Open Collector sinking logic 816 Rating Internal Source 150 mA max 847 External Source 750 mA 4 Digital Output 1 2 Com NA Common for Digital Output 1 amp 2 5 Digital Output 2 24V DC Open Collector sinking logic 851 Rating Internal Source 150 mA max 852 External Source 750 mA 6 Relay Output 3 NC Relay contact output 856 7 Relay Output 3 Com NA Rating 115V AC or 24V DC 2 A max 857 8 Relay Output 3 Inductive Resistive 9 Digital Input 1 3 Com NA Common for Digital Inputs 1 3 10 Digital Input 1 High speed 12 24V DC sourcing Digital Input 825 11 Digital Input 2 Load 15 mA at 24V DC 826 12 Digital Input 3 Load 15 mA at 24V DC sourcing 827 13 Digital Input 4 6 Com NA Common for Digital Inputs 4 6 14 Digital Input 4 Load 10 mA at 24V DC sinking sourcing 828 15 Digital Input 5 Load 7 5 mA at 115V AC 829 16 Digital Input 6 HW Enable 830 Table 1 L TB1 Terminals Analog Wiring Examples Connection Example 0 10V Analog Input Internal Sourc
69. 2275 0 89 57 This dimension is the depth for drives with the optional door mounted HIM installed Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Supplemental Information A 27 Figure 8 PowerFlex 7005 Bottom View Dimensions Frame 1 Frame 2 I 108 5 4 27 1675 6 59 75 344 lt 67 5 2 66 gt 1999 PE 287 1 13 Dia 22 471 5 1 87 22 2 0 87 Dia 22 4 0 88 Dia rT place 28 6 1 13 Da 3 Places 2 Places Ww i Oe PSH te 25 5 1 00 d BII 184 8 T T T 7 28 639 E er 1 9 187 6 z 185 1 62 e ST 7 39
70. 3 Fit RampStop 4 FitCurLimStp Amps RO Real 22 0000 0 1000 2500 0000 Volt RO 16 bit 480 Integer 75 750 kHz RW Real 2 0000 Fr 5 6 9 4 0000 1 4 1 0000 15 0000 10 0000 Fr 5 6 9 3 High Voltage 2 Low Voltage 3 High Voltage uSec RO Real 5 0000 2 0000 100 0000 RW 16 bit 0 Integer 0 200 0 Coast 0 Coast 3 Reserved 1 Reserved 4 Reserved 2 Continue 5 Flux Only Sec RW Real 2 0000 0 0000 60 0000 Programming and Parameters 3 59 No 408 409 410 411 412 413 Name Description Power Loss Level Sets the bus voltage level at which ride through begins and modulation ends When bus voltage falls below this level the drive prepares for an automatic restart Enter a percentage of the bus voltage derived from the high voltage setting for the voltage class For example on a 400 480V drive 0 221 x 480Vac x J2 150Vdc Line Undervolts Controls the level of bus voltage that is needed to complete precharge and sets the level for undervoltage alarm fault detection Enter a percentage of the bus voltage derived from the value in Par 401 Rated Volts For example on a 480V drive 0 615 x 480Vac x J2 418Vdc PreChrg TimeOut Sets the time duration of precharge If bus voltage does not stabilize within this amount of time a Precharge Error exception event occurs PreChr
71. 638 251 gt 150 0 5 91 m 112 8 4 44 gt ape S oda 02 E 180 8 7 12 Frame 5 100 480V 55 kW 400V Normal Duty Drive 34 9 1 37 Dia I 107 6 4 24 62 7 2 47 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia 2 Places 96 9 3 81 _ a 2 Places Removable Junction Box or na Za v 2 a 5 U EN m o e d a s FH t 4 24 D f T o 223 5 8 80 e 42 1843 E 7 26 153 5 zc 6 04 96 0 878 Uc 65 0 2 56 93 0 3 66 109 0 4 29 193 0 7 60 297 3 11 70 Frame 6 34 9 1 37 Dia i 1285 nee 62 7 2 47 Dia ipo a i 112 9 4 44 3 Places Removable Junction Box E OY PTS IN A5 275 5 A ai 0 2 eS 219 0 2420 522 654 2 o e 1854 879 1485 REO RE 585 Loc 6666 5 98 1166 Q O O O10 O O 59 OOP SP 1 dE EE OO 0000 Lt T 67 3 2 65 4 1144 45 1194 4 7 1364 8 37 1974 777 gt 297 4 11 7 uds a 1 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Control Block Diagrams List of Control Block Flow diagrams on the following pages illustrate the drives control Diagrams algorithms For Information on See Page Overview B 3 S
72. Pos Lpf Out 0 2147483648 0 0 2200000000 0000 Bit 0 Vel FdFwd En when set enables velocity feed forward path When cleared the feed forward path is disabled Bit 1 Ext Vel In When set enables external velocity feed forward through Par 728 PLL Ext Spd Ref When cleared velocity feed forward is derived from the input device position s 8 85 E 8 3 15 Vel Lpf In 16 Vel Lpf Out 17 k1 18 19 k3 20 pi 21 Ve Enable 22 Ve In 23 Ve Out 24 Ve AnaPlsScl 25 Whi Accum 26 Ve Frc AccmF 27 Fre Accml 28 Ve Dt RO 32 bit Integer RO Real Bit 2 Trckng AComp when set provides an element of acceleration compensation to the feed forward branch This is not recommended for use with external inputs because of increased noise Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options 2 Reserved Reserved 62 IReserved lReserved 9 lReserved 9 9 Reserved Reserved 9 Reserved Default Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 PLL Position Ref Physical encoder position input This parameter is normally linked directly to the encoder position of the device chosen for input to PLL Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL BandWidth Sets the internal bandwidth response of the PLL function in rad sec The setting for very nois
73. Revision No High 250 Opt0 Posit Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the position feedback accumulator from the feedback option card port 0 Min Max 2147483648 Integer Programming and Parameters 3 37 5075 No Description Values 225 251 0 Spd Fdbk Unit RO Real Displays the speed feedback from the feedback option card port 0 Default 0 0000 Min Max 14000 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 252 Posit Default 0 RO 32 0 Displays position feedback accumulator from port 1 of the feedback option card Min Max 0 2147483648 Integer 253 Opti Spd Fdbk Units RPM RO Real Displays speed feedback from port 1 of the feedback option card Default 0 0 Min Max 8 0 pu 254 0 1 RegisCnig Configures the registration latch for port 0 of the feedback option card Bits 3 00 RLTrgEdg0 4 00 RLTrgEdg1 19 O1 RLTrgEdg0 and 20 O1 RLTrgEdg1 select which trigger edges signal the position see Par Table 254A Edge Selection Settings Bits 5 00 RL DirRev 6 OO RL DirFwd 21 O1 RL DirRev and 22 O1 RL DirFwd set the direction of position capture see Par Table 254B Direction Settings Bits 8 11 configure a digital filter for the registration trigger signal This filter can be used to reject spurious noise The filter works by waiting a programmed time before deciding that t
74. Sourcing and Sinking Definitions B c Sinking Digital Inputs Internal Power Supply Com 24V dc aN A CO Sinking Digital Output Internal Power Supply 1 24V dc C N on AB no The digital inputs and digital outputs of the PowerFlex 7008 AC drive support Sourcing or Sinking configuration Typically digital inputs are sourcing devices and digital outputs are sinking devices The following definitions apply throughout this section Sourcing a Digital Input The digital input common return is connected to the power supply common Applying a positive voltage to the digital input will cause it to activate pull up Sinking a Digital Input The digital input common return is connected to the power supply positive voltage Applying OV or common to the digital input will cause it to activate pull down Sinking a Digital
75. X 9 x 5 N is x S 2 9 N uy 9 Terminal Signal Description 17 Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Power supply for Rotary Encoder interface 16 Rotary Encoder POWER 15 Rotary Encoder REFSIN Positive Sine signal for Rotary Encoder interface 14 Rotary Encoder SIN Negative Sine signal for Rotary Encoder interface 13 Rotary Encoder REFCOS Negative Cosine signal for Rotary Encoder interface 12 Rotary Encoder COS Positive Cosine signal for Rotary Encoder interface 11 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 Positive DH485 terminal for Rotary Encoder interface 10 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 Negative DH485 terminal for Rotary Encoder interface 9 Linear Sensor CLOCK Positive Clock terminal for Linear Sensor interface 8 Linear Sensor CLOCK Negative Clock terminal for Linear Sensor interface 7 Linear Sensor DATA Positive SSI terminal for Linear Sensor interface 6 Linear Sensor DATA Negative SSI terminal for Linear Sensor interface 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Positive terminal for Rotary Encoder registration strobe 4 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Negative terminal for Rotary Encoder registration strobe 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION Positive terminal for Linear Sensor registration strobe 2 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION Negative terminal for Linear Sensor registration strobe 1 CHASSIS GND Connection point for cable shields Connection Examples Figure
76. nd 101816 d1udo 10 ees Kouenbai4 L4 1340 sng He 910 0 Ana uedo 1 5 OLN 9 lt lt ese gt pawn Jey by 5 10 e ug eje IM jour 10 e ug pue 33 It OLN sonsuejoeeuo lt 11 25 Control Block Diagrams cg e eqieBeu peugeques OL 95 OL OL 2 95 OL OL OL 81 OL OL OL s OL OL c OL 2 OL i ejeareespeuyequesm OL loleieaireespeuyequesm OL eieque
77. x x 5 mum um EE or or 5 o 2 0ojeux buoj o E c 9 5 9 2 5 809 o Jo X YIEMI X UEM o Jo 7 3 umopynys r 12 umopynys 7 1504 o o 9 Bs o 9 S x IsiBed o a 2 o D 3 9 5 19 _ 9 pug 1504 0 gt 5 S 5 g S g nm yoursy X 2 ed o 2 o x B fpeeuewQ s 1504 25 6 IPUD oS e 5 51 N 3 9 8 OS lo B Uy o 2 SIXY o E 8 8 2 5 8 Q 5 Q E Q 9 8 B X S x o a 8 o 5 o gt E 9 5 9 5 S
78. y p auog 15 0 00 oo Ks 001015 ed ejeg Xy eseg JINN 15 75 ul Y UMW 75 oles Pad 1S 2418994 JOAIIG Control Block Diagrams B 22 PON ZH A Urq1ueunj o Kor uo SnmelS ZH A loquo ZH A jou dino Id 2821 Joguo2 N e gt 1 pdg esalg 500 18009 ZH A pueg peeds dns gt 9 pds jeseid s seo peedg diis gt S pds s d 2 peeds 05 gt Y pds peeds dis uonosjes Buisseoold quaung ZH A ds Jou pds pejeos y pds pedwey 95 v Jeu peeds Z H S A x Eee 2 ysel 5 peeds Z S004 X9 349 0gd 23 Control Block Diagrams Ls gt pno puan E eey no puau pino puan pul puaa pul PUBL o lt gt ul puas z snes 1G eed AIR INO eed EKD 2 Lou d 110xeed xeeg snes 1 eed yoojaq s d joi greed ar EN EKD De Peed eed
79. 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 1514 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 1 16 SL Buf Data Rx00 Default 0 RO 32 bit to Min Max 32 bits of data Integer 951 SL Buf Data Rx17 This is the SynchLink buffered data received See Par 933 Rx Buf Data Type for data type configuration 964 Tx Dir Data Type Indicates the data type of each Direct Transmit word If the word s bit is set the data type is floating point real If the bit is not set the data type is integer Use the Peer Communication window to configure this selection slalala lt lt lt lt 22 22 288 8 828 8 8 8 8 Options 9 g ooo ojoj gjej ajajaja CC EE 02 902 02 Default 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O JO 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12111 109 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 1 965 SL Dir Data Tx00 Default 0 RW 32 bit to Min Max 32 bits of data Integer 968 SL Dir Data Tx03 This is the SynchLink direct data transmitted See Par 964 Tx Dir Data Type
80. 0 egisod jes eq oj speeu p d uo Bes sod Paq uonisod ul uonisoq ul 874845 uonisod Z uoieM X 7 U9jeM uoniisod z 5 uOnisod enjoy uonisod ZUNEM 5 uonisod 1a X 5 5 uonisog enjoy uonisod LUIM 811816 uonisog Z 4se xxe vemu OMUOD O4 UO 5 D jeseugxepu oiseg Ci s 027 5 H to a we mm dn v1 Kore 1 uonisod qua xpurosg 9 uonisod 1 D poueg uec ou sx JojeJeuec 20 5 uz 5 0 esing 24 6 snjeis ou sx oo awl 16 5 ou sx ou sx ZnO ou sx ouAsx z no ou sx 2 6 uj 5 Joje1euec ou g 17 e E puo n 5 5 110 84 1 5 NO WIG Bujuuny ejqeu3 Buieos n 99 98 PIlBS dl awd 02159 peedg ojez ues z 9 n jeyueuieuou e 8 esea s o ovis oy 4
81. 22 Supplemental Information Figure 4 PowerFlex 7005 Frame 5 Dimensions 65 0 26 lt gt 259 1 10 20 gt gt gt 15 0 0 59 i gt Detail C Ay of p Co 0000000000000000001000000000 r 4 000000000000000000000000000000 LO 111111111 BEL f mE ms 649 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches C Max kg Ibs Drive amp Packaging 308 0 12 16 339 9 13 38 644 5 25 37 275 4 10 84 225 0 8 86 1625 0 24 61 37 19 82 0 42 18 93 0 Refer to the Table A A table for frame information 0 When using the supplied junction box 100 HP drives Only add an additional 45 1 mm 1 78 in to this dimension 8 Weights include HIM DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard Hi Resolution Encoder Option and 20 COMM C ControlNet adapter Supplemental Information A 23 Figure 5 PowerFlex 7005 Frame 6 Dimensions gt 8 5 0 33 vi A 18 0 0 71 gt e hee 360 6 14 20 rly etal de A lt x i 5 312 12 28
82. 799 9 x 10 IS 5 0 0 0 1000 0 x 10 0 8192 0 0 0 8192 7971 0 32767 Linkable Read Write WwW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RO RO RW 3 61 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi t t Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer t t t t t t t t t t t 16 bi t Integer 3 62 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 453 454 456 457 463 Programming and Parameters 8 gis Description Values Zle id Vds Max Default 5793 RW 16 Displays the maximum flux producing d axis voltage allowed on the motor Adaptation is Min Max 0 32767 Integer disabled below this voltage This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Used only in FOC modes Vqs Min Default 246 RW 16 bit Displays the minimum torque producing q axis voltage required for motor control Min Max 32767 Integer adaptation This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Used only in FOC modes Vds Min Default 246 RW 16 bit Displays the minimum flux producing d a
83. Allen Bradley ili S Power High Performance AC Drive Phase Control Firmware Versions 1 xx 3 01 User Manual Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of infor
84. Available functions are lt B A gt Programming and Parameters 3 103 8 5 2 S gs No Description Values 52 1073 Compare 2A Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Sets input A for the Compare 2 The compare functions allow the user to compare two values Min Max 2200000000 0000 The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 Logic Cmpr State Available functions are lt B A gt 1074 Compare 2B Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Sets input B for the Compare 2 The compare functions allow the user to compare two values Min Max 2200000000 0000 The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 Logic Cmpr State Available functions lt B A gt 1086 Control Motor Operated Potentiometer MOP control and configuration Bit 0 Increase if set increments the level output from Par 1087 MOP Rate to Par 1088 MOP High Limit e Bit 1 Decrease if set decrements the MOP level output from Par 1087 MOP Rate to Par 1089 MOP Low Limit e Bit2 Reset if set resets the MOP level output to zero and Bit 0 Increment and Bit 1 Decrement are inhibited Bit 3 Reset Stop if set resets the MOP level output to zero when stop is set Bit 4 Reset PwrLs if set resets the MOP level output to zero when power is lost Note If either Bit 3 or Bit 4 is not set the MOP level outpu
85. I 1 I n Td 2 xse 1 1x3 ajeogpds 1x3 Td 1 207 Tid 19 Control Block Diagrams Aejag eq 5 4 ajeog x co 9901 dois Ieesnula aad peo 980 X ES 18497 GOW ey 9j amp H dOW YSE 1955 wa ao demsua 799 aodemsua C Coen ug demsug era vo demsug 9 demsyg insew desig vs demgiig demsug c demsyig ynsey z desig vr desig vr desig demsyg ynsey JO Ig peddews peoejde4 SI V 9941 z 1l j passed 61 ejeq v pJoM L v HAZE aC ug demguig Czz9 D eiea ge Cus ve demsug Kove ve demsug ox D iia densis D era 81 D iia vi densis ox sea v dems jig Control Block Diagrams B 20 z 1 9 6 1 5 9 2 1 5 1 1
86. Important Please note that encoders must be ordered as Single Ended This will ensure that the RS 485 channel has the proper termination network installed at the factory 2 PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Wiring the Stegmann Hi Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder Table F A Supported Stegmann Encoders Model SINCOS SCS 60 SCS 70 SCM 60 and SCM 70 Resolution 512 sine cycles per revolution Comment SCM 60 and SCM 70 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SCS KIT 101 and SCM KIT 101 1024 sine cycles per revolution SCM 60 and SCM 70 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SRS 50 SRS 60 SRM 50 and SRM 60 1024 sine cycles per revolution SRM 50 and SRM 60 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SRS M 25 1024 sine cycles per revolution SRS25 and SRM25 have built in mechanical turns counter IP65 Protection Class Size 25 square flange mounting SINCOS SRS660 1024 sine cycles per revolution Hollow shaft up to 14 mm diameter SINCOS SHS 170 512 sine cycles per revolution While the software supports this encoder the SHS 170 draws excessive current and should only be used with an external power supply SINCOS SINCODER and LINCODER are registered trademarks of Stegmann Inc Terminal block contains connection points for a Stegmann Hiperface encoder This terminal block resides on the
87. jue Coos puas esc d peejue ye oye puer sesneo 9999 jo fumes y pua ony st puas LAS 10 s ji 35774 01 yes osje si aBueyD 251 195 s ay seBueuo joajap xeed ay j 301 PS s Z 0 x x xeeg yq eBueuo 241 XX 4 ION 5 00 Control Block Diagrams B 24 oe yead jo Jeu exeig Bexisng Cav spem exyeig ves 9 spem esind spewesind exeig aeq di 10 195 dL 5 exeig exeig Cece 121 aw I 1 nd OL i eE uno 1081891 aq oce 4 N S T I l d gz l jueuno nd duro 91 pued 10 ul Core di 12 odujdujo e Huang uondeox3 oes 09 pued AW 10 uondeox3 anno jo sore d OZ 121 AW jueuno yndjno dius eno wrung 41810 10 11 1 SH SH
88. 2 jutoq 0 julod ees e29 D les sod 493 x uonisod lt gt LX Z SCL vemu uonisog uonisod o 9121S 2607 sus 1041007 uonisogd Jonuo2 uonisogd 83 C991 84 eoo de 0927 usod C cH6 1150 4 peeds uonisogd 92 gt SHO x uonisog X 5 pds 19510 ZIOSHO 11804 Jedoud 10 2699 oi eq 0024 10 98 4 ou S UJON esing 20 5 gt snjeys ou sx dieyu xnv 15 y 196 pue ppzd 99 4 29 8 uay S 8 0729 Z 25 0 SHO sqv 2929 196 pue 2 59 4 egzd uay Jes S 8 0729 1 sjuawubisse 8 9 2 19 Lpd jo eBpe
89. 31 32 Integer Note To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative Use 32 to invert bit 0 Logic 2A Data Default 0 RW 32 bit Selects the data word for the first input to Logic Block 2 See Par 1061 Logic Config Min Max 32 bits of data Boolean Logic 2A Bit Default 0 RW 16 bit Selects the bit of Par 1067 Logic 2A Data for the first input to Logic Block 2 31 32 Integer Note To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative Use 32 to invert bit 0 Logic 2B Data Default 0 RW 32 it Selects the data word for the second input to Logic Block 2 See Par 1061 Logic Config 32 bits of data Boolean Logic 2B Bit Default 0 RW 16 bit Selects the bit of Par 1069 Logic 2B Data for the second input to Logic Block 2 31 32 Integer Note To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative Use 32 to invert bit 0 Compare 1A Default 10 0000 RW Real Sets input A for the Compare 1 function The compare function allows the user to compare 2200000000 0000 two values The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 Logic Cmpr State Available functions are lt B A gt Compare 1B Default 10 0000 RW Real Sets input B for the Compare 1 The compare functions allow the user to compare two values Min Max 2200000000 0000 The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 Logic Cmpr State
90. 5 x 2285 i 218 5 a o zc 5 522185 7 e eo ce 2 zx 23 Ey SES 595 ERES zc Units Defau t Un De Default Units efault Default Units Default For example enter 1024 to match encoder with 1024 EPR Min Max 14112 0000 14112 0000 48 0000 8 0000 Min Max Min Max in Max in Max Programming and Parameters RPM 0 0000 8 0000 pu Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 900 2 30000 RPM 0 0000 48 0000 pu Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 0 0000 1 0 pu Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 0 0000 1 0 pu Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 0 0000 1 0 pu pu Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 0 0000 1 0 pu pu Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 0 0000 1 0 pu 8 0000 RPM 0 0000 8 0000 0 262144 5 35 0000 0 0000 2000 0000 Sec 0 0000 2200000000 0000 RPM 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 1 0000 1 0000 2 0000 1 0000 1 0000 2 0000 P U 1 0000 48 0000 pu 1 0000 1000 0000 EPR 4096 10 67108864 Linkable Read Write F Data Type RW RO RO RO RO RW RO RO RO RW RO RW RW RW RO RW RW 3 17 16 bit Integer Real Real Real Real
91. Linkable 20 Read Write Ww RO RW RO RW RO RO RW RW RW RO RW RW RW RW RW RO 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Real Real Real 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Real Real 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Real Real Real 32 bit Integer 3 86 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 Programming and Parameters Name Description Position Actual Displays the accumulated motor position as a 32 bit integer It tracks Par 762 Position Fdbk When the position regulator is not enabled this parameter is initialized to Par 762 Position Fdbk or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 740 Position Control bit 6 AbsPositCtrl Posit Load Fdbk Tracks the load position as a 32 bit integer When a gear box connects the load to the motor Par 766 Posit FB EGR Mul and Par 767 Posit FB EGR Div must be set to account for the gear ratio Set Par 766 Posit FB EGR Mul equal to Par 767 Posit FB EGR Div if the load is directly connected to the motor Posit Actl Load Holds the accumulated output of the Load Gear Ratio as a 32 bit integer and forms the primary feedback for the position regulator integral channel It is very important that the load gear ratio be precisely set such that the delta pulse count of one motor revolution equals the delta pulse count of this parameter Wh
92. Option Description HIM Copycat Save data to a HIM set load data from a HIM set to active drive memory or delete Device gt HIM a HIM set Device HIM EEPROM Save data to EEPROM load data from EEPROM to active drive memory or name a User set Reset To Defaults Start Up Menu See Chapter 2 Restore the drive to its factory default settings Preferences Menu The HIM and drive have features that you can customize Option Description Drive Identity Add text to identify the drive Change Enable disable or modify the password Password User Dspy Lines Selectthe display parameter scale and text for the User Display The User Display is two lines of user defined data that appears when the HIM is not being used for programming User Dspy Time Set the wait time for the User Display or enable disable it User Dspy Video Select Reverse or Normal video for the Frequency and User Display lines Reset User Dspy Return all the options for the User Display to factory default values The PowerFlex 7008 drive is initially set to Basic Parameter View To view all parameters set parameter 196 ParamAccessL vl to option 1 Advanced Parameter 196 is not affected by the Reset to Defaults function Viewing and Editing Parameters Linking Parameters HIM Overview D 5 LCD HIM Step Key s Example Displays 1 In the Main Menu press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Parameter o
93. Reserved 9 Reserved 9 Reserved 9 Reserved Peak2SelHigh a 9 Peak 2 Hold 9 Peak 2 Set 9 Reserved n PeaktSelHigh 7 9 Peak 1 Hold Default 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 True 211 PeakbDtct Status Status of peak level detectors A peak detector sets its Change bit for one scan when it detects a peak The Change bit is off when set or when the Hold bit is a 0 0 on Options omo 5 15 5 2 fe x 8 21818 CC ja Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 Q False 15 14 13 12 11109 87 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 212 PkDtcti In Dint Default 0 V RW 32 bit Integer input to the first peak level detector Min Max 2147483648 Integer 213 PkDtct In Real Default 0 0000 RW Real Floating point input to the first peak level detector Min Max 2200000000 0000 214 PeakDtct1 Preset Default 0 0000 RW Real The first detector set or hold modes compares this value to its input for level detection Min Max 2200000000 0000 When the detector trips in set mode it transfers the value of this parameter to its output 215 PeakDetect1 Out Default 10 0000 RO Real Output from the first pe
94. See Page Input Voltage Range Tolerance C1 Motor Control Mode C2 Motor Overload C 5 Stop Dwell Time C 5 Setpt 1 Data C 6 Setpt 2 Data C 6 Input Voltage Range Tolerance Drive Rating Nominal Line Nominal Motor Drive Full Power Drive Operating oleranc Voltage Voltage Range Range 200 240 200 2001 200 264 180 264 208 208 208 264 240 230 230 264 380 400 380 3801 380 528 342 528 400 400 400 528 480 460 460 528 500 600 600 5751 575 660 432 660 Frames 1 4 Only 500 690 600 5751 575 660 475 759 Frames 5 8 6 Only 690 690 690 759 475 759 Drive Full Power Range Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Rated current is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range Drive Operating Range Lowestt Nominal Motor Voltage 10 to Drive Rated Voltage 1096 Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal Motor Voltage E E o Derated Power Range T jon lt Full Power Range Drive Operating Range Nominal Motor Voltage 10 Drive Rated Voltage gt i Nominal Motor Voltage Drive Rated Voltage 10 Actual Line Voltage Drive Input 2 Application Notes Motor Control Mode Example Calculate the maximum power of a 5 HP 460V motor connected to a 480V rated drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input e Actual Line Voltage Nominal Motor Voltage 74 3 e 74 3 x 5 HP 3 7 HP e 74 3 x
95. Sjulogise cas sixy Ce uy Sixe ueguir gt 21607 40j amp 18u8c PW JOje1euec oun eur HO sixy owl k 4 ve suondo 5 07 9 C 902 sxe x gt y SIXV jndino sixy k INO Coat wm Id D Id peoiatd id Casi 1d SL Id Id KISI puewwog 21601 mun Id 061 Czer Id Id Carma SSed7 Id Cher 1 D 01 MNIT SU jeoidA on n X oy indino Id 0 L 10 Id uy Ez suondo gt e gt 21607 gt snes 21601 wu 5 Z ASBL XXE semus 91607 5 5592014 Control Block Diagrams B 8 ywn enbuo poy jenjoy 6 HoA sng poy enbio 9J 2 wed S gt jur sog lt ur Buy PAS 1030W pds peouo4 1 156 601 pds av dejs enbuo snes
96. terminal block and or the X9 and X15 This fault only applies to DC input drives connectors on the ASIC Board 74 PwrEE Error High Horse Power Only Power EEPROM Error the rating Replace output power module or program a the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board new power board do not match 75 PwrBd Otemp High Horse Power Only Power Board Over Temperature Check the main cooling fan and fan power temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85 C supply replace if necessary 76 HardwareVer High Horse Power Star coupler Frame 12 Only The left and Check the version of each inverter left and right side inverter units have different current ratings or the right units then replace the unit ASIC board on the power board is not functioning 77 CurrUnblnce High Horse Power Star coupler Frame 12 Only The output Check motor wiring for each unit current between the left and right side inverter units are unbalanced 20 of current feedback rating e g 184A 920A 0 2 4 10 Troubleshooting No Name Type Description Action 78 VoltUnblnce High Horse Power Star coupler Frame 12 Only The bus Check input power and wiring for each unit voltage for the left and right side inverter units is unbalanced 6 of normal bus voltage e g 41Vdc 675Vdc 0 06 Motion Only Position feedback exceeds the maximum positive tr
97. 2 17 VbusMemory 32 VdsCmd2 46 RecoverVolts 60 Vbushising 74 4 VdsCmd 18 33 VelFdbkOptt 47 TestDtoA0 61 PreChrgDone 75 HH HW Incomp 5 VqsCmd 19 ThetaE 34 Reserved 48 TestDtoA1 62 FieldWeak 76 GateShort 6 VdsFdbk 20 FldWeakActiv 35 Reserved 49 TestDtoA2 63 Reserved 7 21 36 Reserved 50 TestDtoA3 64 DynamBrakeOn 8 luFdbk 23 SlipGainFltr 37 Reserved 51 RideThruActv 65 Reserved 9 IwFdbk 24 SlipVdsCmd 38 TorqueEst 52 PreChrgReqVp 66 MCStatusMon 10 IdsFdbk 25 MotorVolts 39 TorqueEstFIt 53 Reserved 67 MCStatust 11 lgsFdbk 26 BusUtil 40 Reserved 54 Reserved 68 OverCurr 12 IdsCmd 27 IqsLimit 41 PowerCalc 55 Reserved 69 BusOvrvit 13 IqsCmd 28 VqsldsCmd 42 TorqueCmd 56 TorqTrimActv 70 HH Tr Desat 476 FaultTP Value Default 0 0 RO 32 bit Displays the data selected by Par 475 MC FaultTPSelect This parameter should not be Min Max 2147483648 Integer changed by the user Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 477 _ Est Theta Delay Units RW 16 bit Active only in Permanent Magnet motor mode when Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode equals 2 Default 10 Integer PMag Motor Provides a delay for the function that compares the estimated rotor Min Max 2 1024 position and the data from the position sensor
98. 404 405 406 407 Name Description OvrTrviCnfg Value 0 Ignore the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Hrd OvrTrviCnfg Value 0 Ignore Tori the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Position ErrCnfg Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue runn
99. 478 Mem Password Default 0 RW 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 479 VPL Mem Address Default 0 RW 32 bit Min Max 0 4294967295 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 480 Mem Data Int Default 32 RW 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 481 Mem Data Fit Default 1 25 RW Real Min Max Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 482 VPL Mem Data Bit Default 1 25 RW 32 bit Min Max Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 483 VPL Mem Link Int Default RO 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 484 Mem Link Fit RO Real Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 485 Motor om Mode m Default 0 FOC nter a value to select the operating mode for the Motor Control ions 0 EOC 2 yH e Value 0 Field Oriented Control FOC is induction motor control with voltage Options i 2 1 2 adaptation 2 PMag Motor e Value 1 Field Oriented Control 2 FOC 2 is induction motor control with temperature adaptation e Value 2 Permanent Magnet Motor Control Pmag Motor is permanent magnet motor operation Value 3 V HZ is volts per hertz motor control e Value 4 Test is the test mode
100. 62 pui291601 paddy Jeu peads T eS v peeds 2 Xse XX EMU 9S 92U8J8J8M JOJ UO2 gt v paps poeds Control Block Diagrams I lt 5 Control Block Diagrams zys 5 zssed g jay pds peeds 9jeos Jay Jeu pds pee1 114 9 5 114 jeus suondo 282 enbio enieu HA ueos suondo enbio dwogou4 19 D diis dwogou4 99 7 ys 9 dnjes dwogou4 21601 011 dwogou4 RC aug uA Jeu pds peKejeq peseg ysy due eAug dwog uonou4 Jepooug Jepoou3 enylA S jeoeq jeu pds MDs jeus 91607 20 5 pds 21607 Lio fos dweypds 21601 Kist gt dwey jays
101. 9 At Speed 24 Posit Watch2 10 At Setpt 1 25 Cmpr 1 A lt B 11 Above Setpt2 26 Cmpr 1 A gt B 12 AtZeroSpeed 27 Cmpr 2 A lt B 13 Speed Limit 28 Cmpr 2 A B CurrentLimit 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 11111111111111111111111111111111 0 IRW 32 31 RW 0 00 0 00 600 00 Sec RW 0 00 0 00 600 00 8 Active 0 User Select 15 Torque Limit 1 2 Not Fault 16 Power Limit 2 Not Alarm 17 Fault 3 Ready 18 Alarm 4 Running 19 Command Dir 5 Reserved 20 Actual Dir 6 Reserved 21 Jogging 7 Enable On 22 In Position 8 23 Watch 9 AtSpeed 24 Watch2 10 At Setpt 1 25 Cmpr 1 lt 11 Above Setpt2 26 Cmpr 1 A gt B 12 AtZeroSpeed 27 Cmpr 2 lt 13 Speed Limit 28 Cmpr 2 A B CurrentLimit 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 11111111111111111111111111111111 0 32 31 RW 0 00 0 00 600 00 Data Type 32 bit Boolean 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 32 bit Boolean 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 3 94 Programming and Parameters No 854 855 856 857 858 859 Name Description Values
102. Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control X Reserved xX Jog 2 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 2 1 Jog using Jog Speed 2 X Current 0 Not Current Limit Stop Limit Stop 1 Current Limit Stop X Coast Stop 0 Not Coast to Stop 1 Coast to Stop X Reserved X Reserved X Spd Ref Sel0 Bits X SpdRef 121110 Sel 0 0 0 Spd Ref A X SpdRef o 0 1 SpdRefB 5 2 0 1 0 Preset 2 0 1 1 Ref 3 Preset 3 1 0 0 4 Preset 4 1 0 1 Ref 5 Preset 5 111 0 j Ref 6 Preset 6 1 1 1 Ref 7 Preset 7 X Reserved 0 A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 logic bit 8 0 and logic bit 9 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive 2 To perform this command the value must switch from 0 to 1 6 Supplemental Information Output Devices Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status Description X Active 0 Not Active 1 Active X Running 0 Not Running 1 Running xX Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward Actual 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward X Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating X Jogging 0 Not Jogging 1 Jogging X Faulted 0 No F
103. G SIN SHELD 5 DE COS NC 4 NC NC 3 c gt J SHIELD RS 485 2 e DATA RS 485 1 Figure 6 Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 8 Berg style connector Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 BU A x 1 POWER POWER 11 Mmm ED XX gt 2 POWER COMMON REFSIN 10 OLA gt 8 REFSIN 4SIN 9 CRM 4 REFCOS REFCOS 8 5 DATA RS 465 GN 4COS 7 DIES wi 6 DATA RS 485 SHIELD 6 DI 7 91 SHELD 5 DIE cos NC 4 NC DATA 85 485 2 GN DATA RS485 1 DIE 0 6 PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Connection Examples Figure 7 Pre attached Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 RD 4 POWER 11 gt 2 POWER COMMON REFSIN 10 I E gt 8 REFSIN 48IN 9 BK 4 REFCOS REFCOS 8 GY 5 DATA RS 485 005 7 1 GNI 6 DATA RS 485 SHIELD 6 L DLO WH 7 SHIELD 5 PK 8 4008 NC 4 1 NC LJ DATA RS 485 2 ULE at DATA RS 485 1 Appendix G PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option Card Chapter Objectives For Infor
104. Idd wwo9 da ISL Idd WIH Z Idd WIH r3 S Idd wwo9 Idd EL JUNON M 5 Peiunow m p a m 2 Sad eif 2 Idd WIH m Cs 9pesdgjeseig 1 ZUOd Id 5 Cu Spesdgjeseig 1 Idd 2 WIH Peiunow paads 2 paads paeds 6L 9 paads 0 9996 2 peeds 2 G QD 5 Cu v paedg QD GD Cn un 9 peeds jeseJd vL peeds peeds jasald dOW peeds jeselg v ZH 4 peeds jesald T 2 paads MNN pds 9 peeds jesald vL peeds jesald dOW eds T 2 9 les 8 Jou paeds lt gt apaes joy pods 2 peeds 2 X Cz 7 jeu peeds l PAS 2 QD B HNN zjes pds X peeds evt 0 or i E I Jeu pds 1 ez cm En pds oe
105. Important If using a HIM the following functions are not available e Alt Man e Alt Lang Alt SMART Figure 2 1 Start Up Menu Down 1 level or Select Back 1 level or 1 selection PowerFlex 7005 Start Up 0962 Scroll all choices Motor Cnfg Motor Cnfg Motor Cnfg Motor Cnfg Application Cnfg Motor Control amp Motor Data Motor Tests Speed Limits Motor Control mode Feedback Cnfg Max Speed Limits Motor NP Data Direction Test Abs Overspeed Limit Select DB Resistor Auto Tune Inertia Test Application Cnfg Application Cnfg Start Stop Selections App Select About Parameters Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters Chapter 3 provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex 700S parameters The parameters can be programmed viewed edited using a HIM Human Interface Module Refer to HIM Overview on page D 1 for information on using the HIM to view and edit parameters As an alternative programming can also be performed using DriveTools software and a personal computer For information on See page About Parameters 3 1 How Parameters are Organized 3 3 Parameter Data in Linear List Format 3 15 Parameter Cross Reference Name 3 109 To configure a Drive module to operate in a specific way drive parameters may have to be set Three types of parameters exist e ENUM Parameters These parameters a
106. MC TP1 Select Linkable Read Write Data Type Enter a value to select Motor Control MC data displayed in Par 467 MC TP1 Value and Par 468 MC 1 Bit Par 467 MC TP1 Value and Par 468 MC TP1 Bit are diagnostic tools you can use to view internal drive parameters The default value is option 0 MulqsRef2 Note Options 209 212 were added for firmware version 2 04 Options 213 254 were added for firmware version 3 01 Options 0 MulqsRef2 1 SlipRatio 2 Ws 3 WrEst2 4 We 5 VdsCmd 6 VqsCmd 7 1 8 WOmdt 9 1 10 luFdbk 11 IwFdbk 12 IdsFdbk 13 IgsFdbk 14 VdsFdbk 15 VuvFdbk 16 VvwFdbk 17 VqsFdbk 18 IdsCmd 19 IqsRatio 20 MulqsRef 21 IqsCmd 22 We2 23 VuTd 24 25 26 27 28 VwCmd2 29 30 Vds cemf 31 Vqs cemf 32 VdsCmd2 33 VqsCmd2 34 Idslntegral 35 Iqsintegral 36 DcBus 37 AGnd 38 Wr2 39 FluxRatio1 40 VbusFdbk 41 FluxRatio2 42 FluxRatio3 MC TP1 Value 43 FluxRatio4 44 MuFIxRtioRef 45 RcpFlxRatio1 46 MulfluxRef 47 MultestRef 48 MotVntc 49 BaseSlip 50 VbusFdbk2 51 VdsFdbk2 52 VqsFdbk2 53 VdsSpd VIF It 54 WrEst 55 MuTestFrqRef 56 TestFrqRef 57 FluxFltrN_1 58 PrchgDlayCtr 59 PrchTimOutCr 60 PrchPilotCtr 61 TrqEnableCtr 62 MuTscan1 63 ErStatFromCp 64 FixCurRteOut 65 ThetaE 66 SinThetaE1 6
107. N 55 Z5 E Z Q 5 L 8 Z Q 9 5 8 a E 9 De ERIS zo ES pewesed R Pes Fs S 255 E 2 g e D 5 885 lt ze g 65 lt a 8 peuesoy g 52 B 55 OITS OoS lt Leg Jsuguur gt 8 2295 5 5 845 oo BaF e Wim E o ogc o 5 5 meg 5 E icum 5 5 Eo lt 5 las TEL oco 5 200 ooo als za 202 o ajal Soz o aimi Foz 5 5 io io 3 71 Programming and Parameters adi eeg TE qeyu suegsnqA o UOdML UOdML UONMUL UONML 11 co o o uoNA dnit amp ag a 9 s 3 E 2 E 3 2 E uoNA dMiubadlo sean SY te peueseu peueseu _ peuesed sea ur E E E
108. Reserved 28 E1 Edge Time 8 Reserved 29 E1 dEdge 9 Reserved 30 1 dTime 10 Reserved 31 E1 11 Reserved 32 E1 Edge Mode 12 Reserved 33 E1 nMax 13 Reserved 34 E1 Error 14 Reserved 35 E1 Qloss pk 15 Reserved 36 E1 Ploss 16 MCP PPR 37 E1 PleviHist 17 2 n 38 EO Delta2Err 18 E0 Edge Time 39 1 Delta2Er 19 E0 dEdge 40 Present 20 EO dTime 41 First Diff 246 Spd Fdbk TP RPM Units RPM RO Real Displays the value selected in Par 245 Spd Fdbk TP Sel RPM This display should only be Default 0 0 used if the selected value is floating point data Min Max 8 0 pu Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 247 Fdbk TP Data Default 0 RO 16 bit Displays the value selected in Par 245 Spd Fdbk TP Sel This display should only be used if Min Max 32768 Integer the selected value is integer data 249 Fdbk Option ID Options Displays information about the Feedback Option Bits 15 11 indicate Module ID Number NNNNN NNNNN N NNN N NNN Bits 10 6 indicate Version Number Bits 5 3 indicate Revision Number High e Bits 2 0 indicate Revision Number Low Revision No Low Hexadecimal 1000 indicates resolver hexadecimal 2000 indicates old high resolution board Module ID No and hexadecimal 2040 indicates new high resolution board Version
109. ScO 383 WN 500 438 20 3z0 W 0 08 08 0 09 0 ve 990 cc Ole 002 09 Y St 0 z 2203002 VN 919 3843 N 910 38 WN 912 300 0c 08 09 0c 041 990 2811 211 09 91 09 Ob Sk 21040060 VN 019 38 019 38Q WN 0LO 3cO N SI Sh Sh 8 FEL 20 66 05 7 92 Ob I 04002 VN 0LO 3843 N 0L0 38Q N 010 420 W 9 02 96 0L 0c 0 921 66 6 18 87 08 Y 9192 L 0464002 VN 99 380 N 98 3cO N Sk 02 02 6 6 26 79 19 99 629 09 Y S 1494002 VN Ord 38C N Org 3co N L 91 SI 9 6 91 69 GE 12 OF 09 Y 643002 Sc8 3cO N 6 91 Ol 9 8v 96 Ic N 05 Y z 2423002 VN 9Ig83cO N 6 SL 9 2 9c e TL Vi L 064 Y 90 L t 7415002 SHEM XN N 7995 2 UN 1009 WAX sdwy 9e 291 GN F p 101991014 3 5510 n9119 osnJ ejog ejog Buey yuan ajqeysnipy 101011 WOY L 101011 _ 3 ndul seioN 10 21 7 9620 9 seureJ4 Indu JY HOA 009 Supplemental Infor
110. Units Default Units Default Default Units Default Default Displays the scaled final value for Analog Input 3 Programming and Parameters V mA 0V 4 mA 1 20 0000 hv 0 0000 2200000000 0000 Volt 0 0000 20 0000 1 0000 5 0000 R S 0 0000 0 0000 3760 00001 0 0000 2200000000 0000 VimA 0V 4 mA 20 0000 hv 0 0000 2200000000 0000 Volt 0 0000 20 0000 1 0000 5 0000 RIS 0 0000 0 0000 3760 0000 0 0000 Min Max 2200000000 0000 Linkable Read Write F Data Type 3 89 RW RW RW RW RO RO RW RW RW RW RO Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 3 90 Programming and Parameters zz a Name s No Description Values 2025 813 0 In3 Value Units Volts RO Real Displays the actual input value at Analog Input Analog Input 3 is a uni polar voltage input Default 0 0 only and cannot be configured for current Min Max 0 0 10 0 Type of Input Voltage Polarity Uni Polar Resolution 10 bit 0 to 1023 814 Anlgin3 Scale Units 1 RW Real Scales the raw analog input data plus the input offset to the desired data range The scaled Default 0 0000 data for Analog Input 3 is displayed in Par 812 Anlg In3 Data and is available for usage in the Min Max 2200000000 0000
111. o ta _ SSRN o i 5 S 55 o S 5 528 28 2 lt eoe os 8 o 8 T T gt ES onde N N 559222828 8 amp amp 9405901 5 oS o 2 58 VOUS WMdlo amp 52 nyono Q 2 2 o B 2 WOUS g xO 1 292 8 88 B e 85 xlo B 2 8 5588444 sso 5 nls B 5 oou x61 R 5 28 g S 8 pasoig 1 S 58 853 2r agg 8 8 eme Slaw 8 peso 61 55 mae OUO Ux 29 18 ur1 x6 5 WMd o 5 525 Puyu x61 5 55 5 5 5801 gul luy o WMdlo 5 uygun XBT 5 2 5 Qu gt gw 8 85 B 588 5 3 g 85 5 25255 S 5 g SS OS SSeS SB 45 59 5 59 S E 955 085 5 5 25 8 25 5 8 5 Mos o aim wes o aim wo 28 8 Programming and Parameters 3 47 8 2195 e Description Values 51818 325 Fault Status 3 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions These events ar
112. qj WN 99S e UN L 39090 WAX 3 6 2101991014 asn4 3 Jequinn uonedissig 43119 ejog ejag J9MOd abuey 1uaun ejqessn py 19 12 S WOY L 1010 1ndingo 10 21 7 2620 eec 9 4 Indu HOA 087 13 Supplemental Information sud sed 2 058 sud sed 2 ogy sud Jed 2 069 sud 190 2 osy VN 0021 009 sud 1ed 0021 sud 006 sud Jed oog 540 o06 07111 9 6 099 ops 099 005 sud sad 2 009 syd sad 2 0001 sud 009 sud Jed 2 092 un sy VN z 0002 0002 sud 1ed 0002 sud 198 0001 sud Jed 006 198 0001 960 208 022 209 oez 009 0670002 sud 2 058 sud jed 2 972 sud oso sud 1ed 2 SZE VN 0021 0091 848 198 0024 sud 198 082 sud sed OOEL 549 092 2901 588 069 067 06 005 syd 2 098 sud jed 2 097 sud jed 089 sud 198 2 00 VN B 0021 0091 sud1ed 0024 sud 006 sud 190 002 640190 006 2901 Szi 059 ops 059 006 0590002 sud sed 2 09 5401
113. sS 1062Y 06 Cmpr 2 lt e gt 1062X 07 2 gt Options REN PRG dlo lolll l l l l l l l l lo lo 94222 222 22 diaaa 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 4 8 CC CC O O ae Default 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Tue Logic 1A Data Default 0 RW 32 bit Selects the data word for the first input to Logic Block 1 See Par 1061 Logic Config Min Max 32 bits of data Boolean Logic 1A Bit Default 0 RW 16 bit Selects the bit of Par 1063 Logic 1A Data for the first input to Logic Block 1 31 32 Integer Note To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative Use 32 to invert bit 0 Logic 1B Data Default 0 32 hit Selects the data word for the second input to Logic Block 1 See Par 1061 Logic Config 32 bits of data Boolean Logic 1B Bit Default 0 RW 16 bit Selects the bit of Par 1065 Logic 1B Data for the second input to Logic Block 1
114. when Par 769 Position Error is within this bandwidth for a sufficient time specified by Par 783 In Posit Dwell A modest hysteresis count is added to the position bandwidth after the position error is within specified limits 783 n Posit Dwell Units Sec 4 RW Real Position error must be within the value specified by Par 782 In BW for this amount of Default 0 0040 time before the In Position detector sets bit 10 In Position of Par 741 Position Status Min Max 0 0000 10 0000 momentary out of position indication will reset the internal timer and clear the In Position status bit 784 Dect1 In Default 0 V RW 32 bit Provides the input variable for Position Watch 1 Position Watch 1 is enabled and configured Min Max 2147483648 Integer with Par 740 Position Control bits 16 4 17 Position Watch 1 compares this value with 780 PositDetct1 Stpt and sets bit 8 Watch1 of Par 741 Position Status when the appropriate condition is satisfied A default link connects this parameter to Par 763 Position Actual 785 Dect2 In Default 0 V RW 32 bit Provides the input variable for Position Watch 2 Position Watch 2 is enabled and configured Min Max 2147483648 Integer with Par 740 Position Control bits 18 amp 19 Position Watch 2 compares this value with 781 PositDetct2 Stpt and sets bit 9 Posit Watch2 of Par 741 Position Status when the appropriate condi
115. 1 7 Motor Cable Lengths ct si dee e daw abe eR 1 9 Power Terminal 4 1 9 Cable Entry Plate 1 1 9 Power Wiring Access Panel 1 1 10 Access Panel Removals 22224 Reale Rese pid 1 10 Replace the cover when wiring is complete AC Input Phase Selection Frames 5 amp 6 1 10 Precharge Common Bus High Power Only 1 10 Cooling Fan Voltage 2 1 10 Selecting Verifying Fan Voltage Frames 5 amp 6 1 11 Important Common Bus DC Input Application 1 12 Dynamic Brake Resistor 10 1 16 Using Input Output Contactors 1 17 Using PowerFlex 7005 Drives with Regenerative Power Units 1 17 Regenerative Unit to Drive 1 18 Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode 1 18 Witillg m Xd e Tex Deed 1 21 Wiring the Main Control Board I O 1 22 Auxiliary Power S
116. 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1 TrigData ITmr1 Trig Bit ayTimer1PrSet ayTimer1 Accu ay Timer1Stats Tmr2 TrigData ITmr2 Trig Bit ayTimer2PrSet ay Timer2Accu ay Timer2Stats Parameter Data in Linear List Format Programming and Parameters 3 15 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 The Name Description Motor NP Volts Set to the motor nameplate rated volts Motor NP FLA Set to the motor nameplate rated full load amps Range limited by three second inverter rating Motor NP Hertz Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency Motor NP RPM Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM Motor NP Power Set to the motor nameplate rated power Note The unit of measure for this parameter was change from kW to Hp for firmware version 2 03 Mtr NP Pwr Units The power units shown on the motor nameplate Motor Poles Set the number of motor poles indicated on the motor nameplate or manufacture s motor data sheet Only even numbers of poles are allowed Calculation 120 NP Hz NP Rpm Poles round down Total Inertia Time in seconds for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed at rated motor torque Calculated during auto tune Speed Ref 1 Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when selected by Par 27 Speed Ref A Sel or Par 28 Speed Ref B Sel A value of 1 0 re
117. 1761 CBLPAOO to 1761 NET AIC 1756 CP3 directly to controller 1747 CP3 directly to controller category 3 2 category 3 2 Compact I O Connection Up to 16 modules Up to 16 modules Cable 20D DL2 CL3 20D DL2 CL3 20D DL2 CR3 20D DL2 CR3 Communication Configurations Typical Programmable Controller Configurations Important If programs are written that continuously write information to the drive care must be taken to properly format the block transfer If attribute 10 is selected for the block transfer values will be written only to RAM and will not be saved by the drive This is the preferred attribute for continuous transfers If attribute 9 is selected each program scan will complete a write to the drives non volatile memory EEprom Since the EEprom has a fixed number of allowed writes continuous block transfers will quickly damage the EEprom Do Not assign attribute 9 to continuous block transfers Refer to the individual communications adapter User Manual for additional details Logic Command Word Supplemental Information 5 Logic Bits 15 14 1312 11 10 9 8 7 6 Command Description Normal 0 Not Normal Stop Stop 1 Normal Stop Sta 0 Start 1 Start Jog 1 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 1 1 Jog using Jog Speed 1 Clear 0 Not Clear Fault Faut 1 Clear Fault Unipolar 00 No Command Direction 01
118. 37 o 9 75 125 100 5 100 10 90 o 75 25 100 55 45 75 60 110 90 150 125 1150 125 132 110 90 75 125 100 66 55 100 5 132 1110 200 150 110 90 150 125 E a 110 90 150 125 3 2 132 110 200 150 132 110 200 150 9 132 110 200 150 1150 150 160 132 z 160 1130 250 200 200 150 200 160 10 200 160 300 250 250 200 250 1200 250 200 1350 300 350 250 315 1250 250 250 450 350 400 350 355 1315 A Tt 400 355 600 500 1600 500 560 00 j 1 315 250 500 450 450 400 450 355 355 1315 500 500 500 450 500 450 5 20 Supplemental Information Figure 2 PowerFlex 700S Frame 1 3 Frame 1 Shown 15 0 58 0 59 C 0 23 dia n Es 2 eu 2000000 0000000 lt B 312 12 28 ori be E ey Y Y LZ Jj oai Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Frame Slim Expanded B Weight g kg Ibs A AA Drive Drive amp Packaging 1 135
119. 486 Rated Slip Freq Units _ Hz RW 16 bit Displays the control slip frequency determined from Par 3 Motor NP Hertz and Par4 Default 0 470 Integer Motor NP RPM Measured and updated by the autotune procedure Do not change this 0 000 32 000 value Scale 1000 Note Changed the attributes to allow changing this parameter while the drive is running for firmware version 3 01 3 68 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 500 502 503 504 Programming and Parameters Name Description Motor NTC Coef Defines a coefficient used to calculate the rotor temperature from the measured stator temperature Used only in Field Oriented Control 2 FOC2 mode See Par Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode Flux Current Specifies the magnetizing current that produces rated flux in the motor in a per unit percent representation Measured by the auto tune procedure Do not change this value CurFdbk Id Displays flux producing d axis current feedback Statorinductance Displays the sum of the stator and cable inductances of the motor in per unit percent representation as determined by the auto tune procedure Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance Do not change this value Note the default value was changed from 8192 to 4096 for firmware version 3 01 StatorResistance Displays the sum of the stator and cable resistances of
120. 5 of this value Min Max 8 0000 pu Limit Status Displays the limit status of conditions that may be limiting the current reference or torque reference Bit 0 MCS Iq Lim indicates that torque producing current is at its positive limit Bit 1 MCS Ws Lim indicates that flux producing torque is at its positive limit 0 la from indicates that torque producing current is limited to zero from the positive direction refer to Par 353 Iq Actual Lim lq Calc indicates the calculation for torque producing current has reached its positive limit Current Lim indicates that the current reference has reached the positive Motor Current Limit set by Par 356 Mtr Current Lim DriveProtOL indicates that the current reference has reached the positive current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload shown in Par 343 OL OpnLp CurrLim DriveProtCL indicates that the current reference has reached the positive current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload shown in Par 344 OL CurrLim Torq Limit indicates that the torque reference has reached the Positive Torque Limit set by Par 125 Torque Pos Limit Mtrng PwrLim indicates that the torque reference is being limited by the Motoring Power Limit set by Par 127 Mtring Power Lim Torq CurLim indicates that current reference has reached the Actual Torque Producing Current Limit set by Par 353 Iq Actual Lim Atune Tq Lim indicates that the torque reference is
121. 6 0000 0 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 8 0000 0 0000 200 0000 lt Linkable 20 Read Write Data Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RO RW RW RO RO RW RW RW Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Real Real Real Real Real Programming and Parameters 3 21 No 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 Name Description SrLss Spd Reg Ki Sets the integral gain of the Speed Regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth set in Par 106 Srlss Spd Reg BW Integral gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 106 to zero Units are Sec per unit torque sec per unit speed error SrLss Spd Reg BW Sets the bandwidth of the Speed Regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used Bandwidth is also referred to as the crossover frequency Small integral time response is approximately 1 BW and is the time to reach 6396 of set point A change to this parameter will cause an automatic update of Par 104 Srlss Spd Reg Kp and Par 105 Srlss Spd Reg Ki To disable the automatic gain calculation set this parameter to zero Slip RPM Meter Displays the present amount of adjustment being applied as slip compensation Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Spd
122. 9 Reserved 9 Reserved Reserved 9 Reserved Done Timer Timing 9 9 Timer Enable DelayTimer2Stats Enabled DelayTimer2PrSet DelayTimer2 Data 1113 Delay Timer 2 DelayTimer2 Bit DelTmr2 Trig Bit 5 DelayTimer 2Accum Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Selects the bit from the word linked to Par 1113 DelTmr2 TrigData that will change the status of the user defined delay timer to on or off When Par 1114 DelTmre Trig Bit is a positive number the delay timer is an on timer When Par 1114 is a negative number the delay timer is an off timer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimer2PrSet The time that the value in Par 1116 DelayTimer2Accum must reach before bit 2 Timer Done in Par 1117 DelayTimer2Stats is set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimer2Accum The amount of time that has elapsed since the timer was enabled Par 1117 DelayTimer2Stats bit 1 set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimer2Stats The status of the user defined on or off delay timer Bit 0 Timer Enable when this bit is set the timer is enabled Bit 1 Timer Timing when this bit is set the timer is running Bit 2 Timer Done when this bit is set the timer is done Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01
123. E 4a 02 ZL ywn 91 qur suonoejes indino Jne41oN 3oejes eIeoeqie ov 0 dois 15209 61 JON suonoejes 2 L L 0 0 vz zo zan o toza uouiuo vc sdg H ensis o eor uo eigeu3 H 574815 21607 ORE les 6iq oo K les 6iq EC 928 les pul iq ssed g e qejreAe jou si 084 Jedunr ejqeu3 104 38S SI 9 1 UuSUM eigeu3 MH lt lt t 62 gz ui amp ia W M lo snieis 1907 sz sz gz M oz eqeu3 eouncgeg Io 9 281 12 9 size M vr za EE n uera 9 10 514815 2907 10 uedo YS 2v SLL 24 2 5 vi fer ulfBiq s o lt gt eounogeq r M e ui amp ia 5814815 201 6 LI z ui amp ia 87486 O I 12907 eounogeq r M 814815 2907 10 syndu 2 Control Block Diagrams B 12 0 97 ZINO luy zino
124. Frames 1 6 690V Drive frames 5 amp 6 only Frames 9 amp up Protection 200 208V 240V 380 400V 480V 600V 690V 380 400V 480V 500V Drive 600V 690V Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive AC Input Overvoltage Trip 247 285VAC 475 570VAC 690VAC 863VAC 475 570V AC 611VAC 690VAC 863VAC Bus Overvoltage Trip 350VDC 405VDC 675VDC 810VDC 1013VDC 1164VDC 675VDC 810VDC 810VDC 1013 0 1164VDC Bus Undervoltage Trip Adjustable Adjustable Nominal Bus Voltage 281VDC 324VDC 540VDC 648VDC 810VDC 931VDC 540VDC 648VDC 645VDC 810VDC 931VDC Heat Sink Thermistor Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Drive Overcurrent Trip Software Current Limit Hardware Current Limit Instantaneous Current Limit Calculated value 10596 of motor rated to 200 of drive rated 105 of 3 sec rating 15826 21096 143 of 3 sec rating 21576 28796 Calculated value 10596 of motor rated to 200 of drive rated 360 of rated Heavy Duty current typical Line Transients Up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62 41 1991 up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62 41 1991 Control Logic Noise Immunity Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak Power Ride Thru 15 milliseconds at full load 15 milliseconds at full load Logic Control Ride Thru 0 25 sec drive not running 0 25 seconds drive no
125. MDI Feedback Option Board OR ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 gt SIN Rotary Encoder POWER 16 waor OX BKWH B RErgN Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 BKWH RD C 4005 Rotary Encoder SIN 14 BK xX WHIRD D REFCOS Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 DER WERD GN E DATA 85 485 Rotary Encoder COS 12 RD E RS 485 Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 11 GN OR N POWER Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 10 waron WHIOR COMMON Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 BU BU R TS Linear Sensor CLOCK 8 WH BU WH BU 5 8 Linear Sensor DATA 7 Linear Sensor DATA 6 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 4 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 CHASSISGND 1 Figure 3 Rotary Encoder Connections for 230V MP Series Motor with 2090 UXNFDMP SXX 2090 XXNFMP SXX cable MDI Feedback Option Board ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 WHIGY A 4SN Rotary Encoder POWER 16 GY Hd REFSIN Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 BKAWH BE xx FI 8D 0
126. Par 155 Logic Status bit 13 At Zero Spd is set Reduce mechanical load 4 6 Troubleshooting No Name Type Description Action 14 OTemp Pend Par 313 Heatsink Temp is within 10x C of maximum Reduce the mechanical load Lowerthe ambience temperature View the maximum heat sink temperature in Par 348 Drive OL TP Data when Par 347 Drive OL TP Sel is set to 30 fMaxHsDegc 15 Inv OTemp Trip Par 313 Heatsink Temp is above the maximum limit or Reduce the mechanical load temperature sensor has failed shorted or open Lowerthe ambience temperature See Par 346 Drive OL Status bit 0 NTC Shorted and bit 1 NTC Open 16 Inv OLoad D The drive s operating point is approaching the intermittent Reduce the load on the drive current rating limitation If output current remains at or above present levels an Inverter Overload condition will occur 17 OLoad The drive s operating point has exceeded the intermittent Reduce the mechanical load current rating and a foldback to the continuous rating in Par 400 Rated Amps has occurred 18 Ext Fault Input Q A digital input has detected an external fault Enter a value of 3 Ext Fault or 38 ExtFault Inv in one of the following parameters to configure an input to detect an external fault 825 Digin 1 Sel 826 Digin 2 Sel 827 Digin 3 Sel 828 Dig In4 Sel 829 Dig In5 Sel 830 Dig In6
127. Parameter Name Connected DPI Devices Him CopyCat Device gt HIM Reset To Defaults Device HIM Save EEPROM Delete HIM Set Recall EEPROM H gt Introduction gt Motor Control Slam Over Motor Data Feedback Config Pwr Circuit Diag Direction Test Drive Identity Motor Tese Change Password Inertia Measure User Dspy Lines Speed Limits Speed Control User Dspy Time RS User Dspy Video D m Reset User Dspy One xd Contrast Press GP to move between menu items Press to select a menu item Press to move 1 level back in the menu structure Press to select how to view parameters D 4 HIM Overview Diagnostics Menu When a fault trips the drive use this menu to access detailed data about the drive Option Description Faults View fault queue or fault information clear faults or reset drive Status Info View parameters that display status information about the drive Device Version View the firmware version and hardware series of components HIM Version View the firmware version and hardware series of the HIM Parameter Menu Refer to Viewing and Editing Parameters on page D 5 Device Select Menu Use this menu to access parameters in connected peripheral devices Memory Storage Menu Drive data can be saved to or recalled from the HIM or EEPROM EEPROM is permanent non volatile drive memory HIM sets are files stored in permanent non volatile HIM memory
128. Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat Installation Wiring 1 17 Using Input Output Contactors disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor If an input device is used occasionally an auxiliary contact on that device should also be wired to a digital input programmed as a Enable function The input device must not exceed one operation per minute or drive damage will occur ATTENTION contactor or other device that routinely solidstate components If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive When the AC line is removed there will be a loss of any inherent regenerative braking effect that might be present the motor will coast to a stop An auxiliary braking method may be required ATTENTION The drive start stop control circuitry includes output contactors the following information must be read and understood One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor s for the purpose of disconnecting or isolating certain motors loads If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating power will be removed from the respective motor but the drive will continue to produce voltage at
129. Preload 206 LimGen X axis In ise if Qan 207 Limit Gen Hi Out is PI integ HLim 208 Limit Gen Lo Out 189 PI Integ LLim 190 PI Integ Output 191 High Limit 192 PI Lower Limit 180 Output Position Config 740 Position Control 741 Position Status 742 Posit Ref Sel 777 PositionFdbk Sel 784 Posit Detct1 In 780 PositDetctt 785 Posit Detct2 In 781 PositDetct2 Stpt 782 n Posit BW 783 Posit Dwell Interp Direct 748 CoarsePosit Trgt 750 Coarse Spd Trot 749 Interp Position 751 Interp Speed 752 Interp AccelRate 693 Interp Syncinput 743 Aux Posit Ref 745 PositRef EGR Mul 746 PositRef EGR Div 744 PositRef EGR Out 757 Abs Posit Offset 753 Offset 1 754 Offset 2 755 Posit Offset Spd 756 XOffst SpdFilt 747 Position Cmmd 762 Position Fdbk 764 Load Fdbk 766 Posit FB EGR Mul 767 FB EGR Div 763 Position Actual 765 Load 769 Position Error 796 Gear Ratio 768 PositReg P Gain 770 Integ 772 XReglnteg LoLim 773 XReg Integ HiLim 774 XReg Integ Out 771 PositReg Droop 775 XReg Spd LoLim 776 XReg Spd HiLim 778 X Notch 779 FiltFreq 318 Posit Spd Output Point to Point Programming and Parameters 758 Pt Pt Posit Ref 745 PositRef EGR Mul 746 PositRef EGR Div 744 PositRef EGR Out 753 Posit Offset 1 754 Posit Offset 2 755
130. When the Config bit of Motn Cnet Status is set then this parameter contains the parameter number of an incorrectly configured parameter If more than one parameter is incorrectly configured they are displayed after others are fixed If there are not configuration problems relating to Motion then this parameter contains the value of zero and the Config OK bit is cleared 712 Write Mask Act Status of write access for DPI ports When bit 15 Security is set network security is controlling the write mask instead of Par 669 Write Mask Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options Reserved 62 gt Reserved Reserved gt DriveLogix gt 9 Reserved 9 Int DPI Comm Reserved 9 Aux DPI Conn IEx DPI Conn 9 HIM Terminal Default O 0 0 0 False 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 713 Logic Mask Act Indicates status of the logic mask for DPI ports When bit 15 Security is set network security is controlling the logic mask instead of Par 670 Logic Mask Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options Reserved Reserved 2 lReserved lReserved N 9 Reserved gt Reserved a e DPI Port 5 Reserved e DPI Port 3 DPI Port 2 9 DPI Port 1 Reserved Default O 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 True 714 Port Mask Act Bits 0 5 indicate statu
131. _ URL for Rockwell Automation Technical Support added Preface 2 Catalog Number Explanation updated Preface 5 DIP Switch Settings table updated 1 28 The following new parameters were added for firmware versions 2 03 and 2 04 3 1 3 108 e 42 Jerk 332 7001 EventStatus 483 VPL Mem Link Int e 98 Slip RPM FLA 333 7001 FaultStatus 484 VPL Mem Link Fit e 99 Slip Comp Gain 334 700L AlarmStatus 513 V Hz Mode Config 107 Slip RPM Meter 362 Current Limit Gain 527 Start Acc Boost 136 Skip Speed 1 363 Ki Current Limit 528 Run Boost 137 Skip Speed 2 364 Kd Current Limit 529 Break Voltage e 138 Skip Speed 3 471 Estimated Torque 530 Break Frequency e 139 Skip Speed Band 473 MC TP2 Select 531 Maximum Voltage 170 Flying StartGain 474 MC 2 Value 532 Maximum Freq e 263 Cnfg 475 MC FaultTPSelect 541 SrLss Angl Comp e 264 Heidenhain0 Stat 476 MC FaultTP Value 542 SrLss Volt Comp e 265 Heidn Mkr Offset 478 VPL Mem Password 545 Reg Ki 266 Heidn Encdr Type 479 VPL Mem Address 546 Bus Reg Kp e 267 Heidn PPR 480 VPL Mem Data Int 547 Bus Reg Kd 285 Lineari Config 481 VPL Mem Data 548 Bus Reg ACR Kp e 296 Motor Freq Ref 482 VVPL Mem Data Bit The following parameters were updated for firmware versions 2 03 and 2 04 e 153 Control Options 347 Drive OL TP Sel 830 Dig In6 Sel e 245 Spd Fdbk TP Sel 466
132. dll EM 7 29 1509 e 133 3 a f 5 25 3 bn UA 59162515 520592620 10 0 V Q QHO QLQL H v y 43 0 1 69 aa oe 1 55 lt lt 75 9 2 99 gt 57 2 2 25 lt ____ 96 0 3 78 gt lt 72 7 2 86 gt I 106 0 4 17 139 4 5 49 177 4 6 98 gt Frame 3 All Drives except 50 HP 480 V 37 kW 400V Frame 3 50 HP 480V 37 kW 400V Normal Duty Drive lt 105 3 4 15 34 9 1 37 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia 94 7 3 73 94 7 3 73 gt 2 Places 1 1 ia 28 7 1 13 Dia ain 27019 Dia 2 Places 2 Places aces PS EX I mg 509 EROL Th o t LR SZ 7 7 7 5 1845 45 1845 Pn B J 14 7 26 726 E F T 160 1 he E c J C m 160 1 e 6 30 6 20 1277 a Id T aa 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 gt i KO OO 4D Y vv 2 1 IO Vent Plate Y X A 1 Y Y 227 0 89 lt 29 0 1 14 lt gt 22 7 0 89 66 0 2 60 gt 29 0 1 14 97 0 3 82 gt lt 66 0 2 60 gt m 1872 640 130 0 5 12 lt 187 0 7 36 186 0 7 32 gt Dimensions are in millimeters and inches 28 Supplemental Information Figure PowerFlex 7005 Bottom View Dimensions
133. from by Par 1098 and loaded into Par 1099 See Par 1096 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1098 AddSub 1 Subtrct Default 1 0000 RW Real This value is subtracted from the result of Par 1096 Par 1097 The result will be loaded into Min Max 2200000000 0000 Par 1099 See Par 1096 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 3 104 Programming and Parameters No 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 Name Description AddSub 1 Result This is the result output from the Add and Subtract function See Par 1096 Equation Par 1099 Par 1096 Par 1097 Par 1098 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 2 Input Input value to be added to and or subtracted from as need with the Add and Subtract function This input will be added with Par 1101 AddSub 2 Add The result will be subtracted from by the value in Par 1102 AddSub 2 Subtrct The result of the operation is loaded to Par 1103 AddSub 2 Result Equation Par 1100 Par 1101 Par 1102 Par 1103 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 2 Add This value is added to the value of Par 1100 AddSub 2 Input The result will be subtracted from by Par 1102 and loaded into Par 1103 See Par 1100 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 2 Subirct This value is subt
134. in response this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 389 Lgx LinkChngCnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 390 SL MultErr Cnfg Default 2 FitCoastStop Enter a value to configure the Drive Module s response to SynchLink Multiplier error Refer to Options 0 Ignore Par 927 SL Mult State for possible causes for multiplier errors Hz Alarm Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event 2 FliCoastStop occurs 3 Fit RampStop e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and the appropriate alarm bit 4 FltCurLimStp when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 390 SL MultErr Cnfg lets you determine the ac
135. indicating a loss of the AC input voltage Restore AC power 6 Data supplied by the power structure EEprom is invalid or corrupt Cycle the power If problem persists replace the power structure 7 Flash Update in Progress Complete Flash Procedures 8 Drive is expecting a Start Edge and is receiving a continuous Open all start buttons and remove all start commands signal 9 Drive is expecting a Jog Edge and is receiving a continuous Open all jog buttons and remove all jog commands signal 10 A conflict exists between the Encoder PPR programming Par Verify encoder data and reprogram 232 or 242 and the encoder configuration for edge counts Par 233 bits 4 amp 5 11 The drive cannot precharge because a precharge input is Reprogram the input or close the precharge control contact programmed and no signal is present Start input configured but stop not configured Program Par 825 830 to include a stop button rewire the drive Run input configured but control options do not match Program Par 153 Bit 8 to O 2 wire control B Start input configured but control options do not match Program Par 153 Bit 8 to 1 3 wire control 12 Multiple inputs configured as Start or Run Reprogram Par 825 830 so multiple starts multiple runs or any 8 combination do not exist 45 Multiple inputs configured as Jog1 Reprogram Par 825 830s0 only 1 is set to Jog1 amp Multiple in
136. jo l lt 5 15 2 5 5 e 515155 5 5 2 lZ l l l l l 92255 2 2 2 5 2 55568 515 lS lt 2 l la 55 55155555 0 Sle Ele e 5 5 5 S S 8 E 2 E 1215862122212 1 Tue Default 0 0 0 O 0 jO 0 JO 0 0 JO 0 O JO JO 0 0 O 00 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 65 4 3 2 1 0 Heidn Mkr Offset Default 0 0000 4 RW 32 bit Configures marker offset values for the Heidenhain Encoder Feedback Option The marker 0 0000 4294967295 Integer offset is specified within one revolution Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Heidn Encdr Type V RW 16 bit Configures the encoder type manually if the Endat type is not used Integer Bit 1 Not EnDat when this bit is set it indicates that an Endat type encoder is not used Bit 2 Multi Turn when this bit is set it indicates that a multi turn type encoder is used Bit 5 Endat24bitSI when this bit is on the Heidenhain encoder works as Endat Single turn 24 bits When this bit is off the Heidenhain encoder works as Endat Single turn 20 bits Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Bit 1 Not Endat was changed to 0 false and bit 2 Multi Turn was changed to 1 true for firmware version 2 04 Bit 1 Not Endat was changed to 1 true bit 2 Multi Turn was changed to 0 Fal
137. synchronous speed nameplate speed The value can be manually set Flying StartGain Default 4000 This parameter is currently not used Min Max 0 32767 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Set Speed Lim Units _ Vv Creates a tolerance hysteresis band around the value in Par 41 Limited Spd Ref for Default 17 6400 comparison to average speed feedback The comparison controls bit 14 At Setpt Spd of Par 0 0000 882 0000 155 Logic Status In general bit 14 At Setpt Spd turns on when the feedback is within the Scale 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu tolerance of the reference level for rising feedback Limited Spd Ref Limit Turn off level for rising feedback Limited Spd Ref 2 Limit Turn on level for falling feedback Limited Spd Ref Limit Turn off level for falling feedback Limited Spd Ref 2 Limit Setpt 1 Data Units Provides data for comparison to Par 173 Setpt1 TripPoint driving bit 16 At Setpt 1 of Default 0 0000 155 Logic Status For more information please see Setpt 1 Data on page C 6 Min Max 8 0000 pu 1 TripPoint Units Provides the midpoint for operation of bit 16 At Setpt 1 of Par 155 Logic Status Default 0 1000 Min Max 8 0000 pu Setpt 1 Limit Unit Creates a tolerance hysteresis band around the value in Par 173 Setpt1 TripPoint Default 0 0100 T
138. 0 5 31 166 9 6 57 336 0 13 23 200 0 7 87 105 0 4 13 1320 0 12 60 17 03 15 5 9 98 22 2 222 0 8 74 253 9 9 99 342 5 13 48 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 320 0 12 60 12 52 27 6 15 20 33 5 3 222 0 8 74 253 9 9 99 517 5 20 37 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 500 0 19 69 18 55 40 9 22 68 50 7 Refer to Table A A for frame information 2 Weights include HIM DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard Hi Resolution Encoder Option 20 COMM C ControlNet adapter Supplemental Information A 21 Figure 3 PowerFlex 7005 Frame 4 Dimensions lt AA IQ A __ lt lt D gt 13 0 0 55 15 1 0 59 7 0 0 27 2 Places gt e Y 059 o gt A zr n CJ 312 12 28 Q Oo d 4 8 0 0 31 lt 4 Lifting Holes 3 Places 0 31 4 Places Dimensions are in millimeters and inches kg Ibs Drive Drive amp Packaging 738 2 29 06 24 49 54 0 29 03 64 0 Expanded A Max AA 220 0 8 66 251 9 9 92 758 8 29 87 7 Refer to the Table A A table for frame information 2 Weights include DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard Hi Resolution Encoder Option and 20 COMM C ControlNet adapter 2017 7 94 1920 7 56
139. 01 99 99 Integer software Scale 00 Notes The default value was changed from 1 11 to 2 03 for firmware version 2 03 The default value was changed from 2 03 to 3 01 for firmware version 3 01 VPL Build Number Default 1 RO 16 bit Displays the build number of the drive s Velocity Position Loop VPL software 1 10000 Integer Note The default value was changed from 8001 to 1 for firmware version 2 03 SynchLink Status indicates status of SynchLink functions e Bit 0 FB Opt Prsnt indicates the presence of an optional feedback daughter card e Bit 1 Prsnt indicates the presence of encoder 0 Bit2 Encdr1 Prsnt indicates the presence of encoder 1 Bit 3 In Sync indicates SynchLink communications is synchronized e Bit 4 Tx Active indicates TX frames are being transmitted downstream from this node e Bit 5 Rx Active indicates RX frames are being received from nodes upstream Bit 15 Rx Data Enbl indicates received data is being updated Note Bit 8 Open Wire was changed to Reserved and bit 12 SOB Present and bit 14 Reset Req d were added for firmware 2 04 Options 8 5 5 5 5 lole le 5 lo 2 9 22222 5 lt 2 2 9 5
140. 1 4 and 9 13 verify the precharge resistor is present With power off there should be a resistance between DC and BR In frames 5 amp 6 check the precharge board for errors See the precharge board LED for fault sequence 4 8 Troubleshooting No Name Type Description Action 43 VoltageFdbk Loss Loss of Motor or DC Bus Voltage Feedback has occurred Check the communication line between because of a communication failure between Motor Control and Motor Control MC and Voltage Feedback Voltage Feedback board board Replace the Voltage Feedback board 44 Runtime Data Rt 6 Runtime data hours energy has been reset to zero due to a checksum error 45 Enable Health Safety circuit is active Check input signal to the Safety circuit 46 Interp Out Synch D Interpolator for position feedback lost synchronization with Velocity Position Loop VPL 47 MCONMLTaskFail Current Minor Loop CML task has been delayed or run with j Cycle power incorrect interval 48 Device The controlling device HIM or controller has been disconnected while the drive was running 49 DPI Loss Port 1 D The device at DPI port 1 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional drive at port 1 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud 50 DPI Loss Port 2 D The device at
141. 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 Sel Switch Ctrl Swtch Real 1 NC Swtch Real 1 NO Swtch Real 1 Out Swtch Dint 1 NC Swtch Dint 1 NO Swtch Dint 1 Out Sel Swtch In00 Sel Swtch In01 Sel Swtch In02 Sel Swtch In03 Sel Swtch In04 Sel Swtch In05 Sel Swtch In06 Sel Swtch In07 Sel Swtch In08 Sel Swtch In09 Sel Swtch In10 Sel Swtch In11 Sel Swtch In12 Sel Swtch In13 Sel Swtch In14 Sel Swtch In15 SelSwtch RealOut SelSwtch DIntOut 1047 1048 1049 1150 1151 1152 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 DInt2Real1 In DInt2Real1 Scale Dint2Real1 Result Dint2Real2 In DInt2Real2 Scale Dint2Real2Result Real2DiInt In Real2DInt Scale Real2DInt Result MulDiv 1 Input MulDiv 1 Mul MulDiv 1 Div MulDiv 1 Result MulDiv 2 Input MulDiv 2 Mul MulDiv 2 Div MulDiv 2 Result Logic Config Logic Cmpr State Logic 1A Data Logic 1A Bit Logic 1B Data Logic 1B Bit Logic 2A Data Logic 2A Bit Logic 2B Data Logic 2B Bit Compare 1A Compare 1B Compare 2A Compare 2B AddSub 1 Input AddSub 1 Add AddSub 1 Subtrct AddSub 1 Result AddSub 2 Input AddSub 2 Add AddSub 2 Subtrct AddSub 2 Result AddSub 3 Input AddSub 3 Add AddSub 3 Subtrct AddSub 3 Result 1108
142. 155 183 11 45 51052 4 1500 155 220 14 55 51053 4 1500 155 265 2 75 51054 4 1500 155 346 27 200 SVO Motor 0 75 M 51043 4 1500 140 5 8 0 0075 15 51015 4 1500 140 114 0 0100 2 2 51016 4 1500 140 15 0 0120 37 51017 4 1500 140 24 5 0 0180 5 5 51018 4 1500 140 34 8 0 0390 7 5 M 51019 4 1500 140 44 0 0470 11 M 51020 4 1500 140 67 1 0 0810 15 M 51021 4 1500 140 80 7 0 1370 22 M 51022 4 1500 140 120 0 2000 30 M 51023 6 1000 155 176 0 5800 37 M 51024 6 1000 155 210 0 7000 55 M 51026 6 1000 135 334 1 1000 55 M 51027 6 500 155 315 5 4 0000 400 STD Motor 15 2051 4 1500 320 47 2 045 22 2052 4 1500 320 6 3 3 24 37 2053 4 1500 320 10 5 25 5 5 2054 4 1500 320 15 5 8 8 7 5 2055 4 1500 320 20 5 11 25 11 2056 4 1500 320 29 14 3 15 2057 4 1500 320 37 16 4 18 5 2058 4 1500 320 45 19 65 22 2059 4 1500 320 53 23 30 2060 4 1500 320 71 28 15 37 2061 4 1500 320 85 29 7 45 2062 4 1500 320 97 30 55 55 2063 4 1500 320 121 75 2064 4 1500 320 163 90 2065 4 1500 320 188 110 2066 4 1500 320 227 132 2067 4 1500 320 280 160 2068 4 1500 320 335 200 2069 4 1500 320 375 18 Supplemental Information Motor Type Motor Type Poles Base Speed RPM Voltage Rate Current Current 002 Kg m kW Catalog Vrms Arms Arms 400 SVO Motor 1 5 MC M2
143. 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Real 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Programming and Parameters 3 69 eo EE Name Description Values 5 els 505 TestWait Time Units 5 RW 16 bit Defines the time interval used for the automated measurement of Par 504 PM AbsEncd Default 2000 Integer Offst for a Permanent Magnet PM motor Min Max 500 5000 506 Test Idc Ramp Units 9o mS RW 16 bit Defines the ramp rate of the Flux Producing d axis current reference that is used for the Default 0 1 Integer automated measurement of Par 504 PM AbsEncd Offst for a Permanent Magnet PM 0 0 195 3 motor Scale 10 507 Test FreqRamp Units 9o mS RW 16 bit Defines the ramp rate of the frequency reference that is used for the automated Default 01 Integer measurement of Par 504 PM AbsEncd Offst for Permanent Magnet PM motor Min Max 0 0 195 3 Scale x 10 508 Test Freq Ref Units 96 RW 16 bit Defines the frequency reference that is used for the automated measurement of Par 504 Default 10 0 Integer PM AbsEncd Offst for a Permanent Magnet PM motor Min Max 799 9 Scale x 10 509 Test Ref
144. 179 Torque Int 180 IqsCmd2 181 Torque 182 Torque 183 RotorFluxEst 184 VL mtVqsRef 185 VRefVqsRefNm 186 VRefRslqsNm 187 VRefVqsSpdVN 188 EconoVoltGn 189 F Output Fre 190 TrqCreflgsCm 191 Wr 192 SrLssWrAve 193 CurFbklqsFbk 194 ACRIgsErr 195 CrefwgldsCmd 196 CurFbkldsFbk 197 7008 198 VdsCmc700B 199 VqsRefNom 200 VgsRslgsNom 201 VgsSpdVitNom 202 VitLmtVqsRef 203 IdsFbkDeriv 204 VdsRefNom 205 VdsRsldsNom 206 VdsSpdVitNom 207 VitLmtVdsRef 208 IdsFbkDeriv 209 VuvFbkOffset 210 VwwFbkOffset 211 luFdbkOffest 212 IwFdbkOffset 213 255 Reserved 0 0 2147483648 RO 32 bit Integer Programming and Parameters 3 67 Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 475 MC FaultTPSelect Enter or write a value to select the Motor Control MC Fault Data displayed in Par 476 MC FaultTP Value This parameter should not be changed by the user Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 The value for option 67 was changed from HH GateShort to MCStatus1 for firmware version 2 04 Values 68 6 were added for firmware version 3 01 Options 0 IqsRef2 14 DcBus 29 DbDuty 43 RotorFluxEst 57 VbusDrop 71 OverLoad 1 Ws 15 VbusFdbk 30 VelFdbkEncO 44 Ws2 58 VdsMax 72 HH Precharge 2 We 16 VbusFdbkFitr 31 VelFdbkEnct 45 BusDropVolts 59 VbusLow 73 Fan Alarm 3
145. 2 2 2 9 2 5 5 5 15 15 5 5 515 1515 5 5 1515 1515 5 9 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 29 5 5 8 18 98 181818 818 8 o0 02 ju Jac Default 0 0 l0 l0 l0 lo 1 0 0 Jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo j1 jo jo Jo J0 J0 0 1 0 0 0 O False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 t trug Table 268A Resolution Settings Table 268D FIR Filter Settings Bit 3 2 Resolution Bit 12 11 10 Taps 0 0 10 bit resolution 0 0 0 1 O 1 12 bit resolution default setting 0012 1 0 14bitresolution 0 10 4 1 1 16 bit resolution 0 1 1 8 Table 268B Resolution and Least Significant Bits Used 1 0 0 16 Resolution LSB Not Used Parameter 250 Increments by 101 9 16 bit All bits used 1 1 1 0 64 14 bit 2 LSB used 4 1 1 1 127 12 bit 4 LSB used 8 10 bit 6 LSB not used 64 Table 268C Resolution and Resolver Tracking Speed Resolution Maximum Tracking Speed Tracking Speed Tracking Speed Carrier Freq for X1 Resolver for X2 Resolver for X5 Resolver 10 bit 34 kHz 55 K rpm 27 5 K rpm 11 K rpm 12 bit 24kHz 13 8 K rpm 6 9 K rpm 2 76 K rpm 14 bit 14kHz 3480 rpm 1740 rpm 696 rpm 16 bit 10 kHz 900 rpm 450 rpm 180 rpm Resolver0 Status Indicates status of the resolver option card port 0 Bit 0 Cable Tune Bit 1 Tune Result indicates th
146. 27 is set to 0 False by default for firmware version 1 11 and is set to 1 True by default for firmware version 2 03 Options ajale amp 5 olv v l lv lv ixl S239 lt x lz S 2 d lt jz 88 8 2 885 5 21215 82 288 888 8 818 88 CC foe CC ju ju Defaut 0 0 0 0 7 1 0 0 7 0 0 1 101000 011101007107 0 g Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 18 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 Table 233A Encoder Input Filter Settings Table 233B Multiplier and Direction Settings Bit 319 2 8 117 0 16 Encoder Bit Filter Settings Bit 5 21 4 20 Mult Directions Comments 0 0 Filterdisabled Counts rise fall of phase A phase B only used to find 0 0 0 1 100 ns filter 0 0 2x fwd rev udi 0 0 1 0 900 filter 0 1 4 fwd rev Counts default setting 0 0 1 1 300 ns filter 1 0 1x fwdonly Counts rise of phase A Phase B ignored 0 1 0 0 400 ns filter 1 1 2X fwdonly Counts rise of phase A Phase B ignored Table 233C FIR Filter Setti 0 1 1 600nsfilter Oe 0 1 1 1 700 ns filter Bit 12 28 11 27 10 26 Taps 1 0 0 0 800 ns filter default setting 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 900nsfilter Wo Xe e 1 0 1 0 100nsfiler p X 1 0 1 1 1100nsfil
147. 547 77 85 116 150 HSJ150 50 67 9 454 65 98 130 150 HSJ150 20009617 5 75 105 3 68 3 96 106 144 200 HSJ175 2 60 845 547 7 116 154 150 HSJ175 200 125 5 100 137 1 88 9 125 138 163 250 HSJ200 75 105 3 68 3 96 144 168 200 HSJ200 20DJ156 7 6 125 1712 110 9 156 172 234 300 HSJ300 100 137 1 88 9 125 188 250 250 HSJ300 200180 6 150 204 1 132 2 180 198 270 400 HSJ400 125 1712 110 9 156 234 312 300 HSJ400 20DJ248 6 200 248 273 372 550 HSJ400 2 150 180 270 360 400 HSJ400 20DJ261 9 200 299 186 261 287 410 500 170M6608 150 235 146 205 308 410 500 170 6608 200300 9 250 343 213 300 330 500 630 170 6610 200 281 174 245 368 490 630 170 6610 200385 10 300 441 274 385 424 600 700 170 6611 250 343 213 300 450 600 700 170M6611 20DJ460 10 350 527 327 460 506 770 900 170M6613 300 44 274 385 578 770 900 170 6613 200500 10 450 572 356 500 550 750 1000 170M6608 350 481 299 420 630 840 1000 170M6608 20DJ590 11 500 676 420 590 649 956 630 2 170M6609 phs 450 595 370 520 780 956 630 2 170 6609 pns 20DJ650 11 500 744 463 650 715 1062 700 2 170M6610 phs 500 676 420 590 885 1062 100 2 170 6610 phs 20DJ730 11 600 836 520 730 803 1095 700 per 170 6611 500 744 463 650 975 1170 700 2per 170M6611 0 Also applies to R voltage class Fuses must be applied in the leg and leg of the DC Common Bus The power source to Common Bus inverters must be derived
148. 570 Trend In1 Setting bit 2 In2 Real specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 2 The source for Real data is Par 575 Trend In2 Real Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type The source for Integer data is Par 574 Trend In2 Dint Setting bit 3 In3 Real specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 3 The source for Real data is Par 579 Trend In3 Real Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type The source for Integer data is Par 578 Trend In3 Dlnt Setting bit 4 In4 Real specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 4 The source for Real data is Par 583 Trend In4 Real Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type The source for Integer data is Par 582 Trend In4 Dint Setting bit 15 Auto Output causes the trend output parameters to automatically cycle through the entire trend buffer at the rate specified in Par 559 Trend Rate Typically you link the output to an analog output for display on an oscilloscope e Auto output is accomplished by writing to Par 569 TrendBuffPointer Clearing this bit requires manual selection of Par 569 TrendBuffPointer to view the trend buffer contents Options lo lo Pe es t ___ oO oO oO 8588 E 0 E a jm ju Default 0 0 0
149. 6 745 PositRef EGR Mul Default 1 V RW 82 bit An integer value in the numerator of the EGR function that is precision multiplied by the Min Max 2000000 Integer selected position reference A negative value will effect a change in polarity Programming and Parameters 3 85 No 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 Description PositRef EGR Div An integer value in the denominator of the Electronic Gear Ratio EGR function that divides into the product of the numerator and the selected position reference Remainders are accumulated and not lost Position Cmmd Final accumulated command to the position regulator When the position regulator is not enabled this parameter is initialized to Par 762 Position Fdbk or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 740 Position Control bit 6 Thereafter its value will reflect the result of reference and offset changes CoarsePosit Trgt Input to the interpolator This is a course position target reference Interp Position Input to the interpolator This is a fine position target reference Course Spd Trgt Input to the interpolator This is a course speed target reference Interp Speed Output from the interpolator This is a fine speed target reference Interp AccelRate Output from interpolator This is a fine acceleration rate First derivative of Par
150. 60 Hz 44 6 Hz At 342V Actual Line Voltage the maximum power the 5 HP 460V motor can produce is 3 7 HP at 44 6 Hz 5 ee 5 i 2 1 Qu pee 2 a 5 Drive Output i 342V gt 480V gt 460V gt 528V Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Parameter 485 Motor Ctrl Mode selects the type of motor control to use This parameter is set during the HIM assisted startup when asked to select the Motor Control The settings for Parameter 485 Motor Ctrl Mode are e 0 selects field oriented control Field oriented control is used with AC squirrel cage induction motors for high performance e 1 FOC2 selects field oriented control and is only used for a specific type of AC induction motor with motor thermal feedback e 2 Pmag Motor selects control for permanent magnet motors e 3 V Hz selects volts per hertz control This selection is available in v2 003 and later e 4 Test puts the drive in a test mode to perform the direction test Test is automatically selected during the direction test portion of the Start Up routine and does not need to be set manually by the user Field Oriented Control Permanent Magnet Motor Control and Volts Hertz Control are described in further detail below Field Oriented Control Field oriented control is used with AC squirrel cage induction motors for high performance Motor data and an autotune is required for correct operation in this m
151. 6000 1326 430 460 3 9 67 7 2030 1 40 4 11 7 6 60 3000 1326AB B430G 460 5 6 114 3 3430 2 30 4 16 8 6 40 5000 1326AB B515E 460 6 1 70 3 2110 2 30 4 18 3 10 40 3000 1326AB B515G 460 9 5 88 7 2660 2 90 4 28 5 10 40 5000 1326AB B520E 460 6 7 71 0 2130 2 90 4 20 1 13 00 3000 1326AB B520F 460 8 8 70 3 2110 2 90 4 26 4 13 10 3500 1326AB B530E 460 9 5 74 3 2230 4 20 4 28 5 18 00 3000 1326AB B720E 460 17 5 70 0 2100 6 80 4 52 5 30 90 3500 1326AB B720F 460 27 5 117 0 3510 11 70 4 66 5 31 80 5000 1326AB B730E 460 22 8 78 3 2350 9 60 4 66 5 39 00 3350 1326AB B740C 460 20 9 52 3 1570 8 70 4 62 7 53 00 2200 1326 740 460 32 0 79 7 2390 12 70 4 66 5 50 80 3400 0 0 1326 5 310 460 0 8 204 5 4090 0 30 6 24 0 70 6200 1326 5 330 460 21 204 5 4090 0 90 6 6 0 210 6500 1326AS B420G 460 2 6 179 0 3580 1 20 6 7 8 3 20 5250 1326AS B440G 460 54 149 0 2980 2 00 6 16 2 6 40 5250 1326 5 460 460 6 2 148 5 2970 2 80 6 18 6 9 00 4300 1326 5 630 460 7 8 142 7 2140 2 40 8 18 5 10 70 4500 1326 5 660 460 11 8 100 7 1510 3 40 8 29 8 21 50 3000 1326 5 690 460 19 0 87 3 1310 5 00 8 41 3 36 40 3000 1326AS B840E 460 212 79 3 1190 4 70 8 39 5 37 60 3000 1326AS B860C 460 17 6 77 3 1160 6 00 8 44 4 49 30 2000 1326AH B330F 460 21 0 0 3000 0 75 9 0 3000 1326 440 460 3 3 0 0 2500 1 22 13 8 2500 1326 540 460 11 1 0 0 2500 2 60 47 2 2500 3050R 7 390 66 0 50 0 500 30 00 12 132 0 500 11050R 7 390 218 0 50 0 500 110 00 12 436 0 500
152. 7005 High Performance AC Drive Phase II Control User Manual publication 20D UMO006 since the August 2005 release Change The following new parameters were added for firmware versions 3 01 49 Selected SpdRefA 50 Selected SpdRefB 54 Inertia TrqLpfBW 119 SLAT ErrorSetpnt 120 SLAT Dwell Time 341 Mtr 121 Count 368 Cnv NotLogin Cfg 533 Flux Gain Adjust 551 CurrFdbk AdjTime 552 Slip Preload Val 553 Slip Slew Rate 554 LED Status 669 Write Mask 712 Write Mask Act 713 Logic Mask Act 714 Port Mask Act 717 PLL TP Select 718 PLL TP DataDint 719 PLL TP DataReal 720 PLL Control 721 PLL Position Ref 722 PLL BandWidth 723 PLL Rev Input 724 PLL Rev Output 725 PLL EPR Input 726 PLL EPR Output 727 PLL VirtEncdrRPM 728 PLL Ext Spd Ref 729 PLL Ext SpdScale 730 PLL LPFilter BW 731 PLL Posit Out 732 733 734 735 848 849 853 854 858 859 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 PLL Posit OutAdv PLL FiltPositOut PLL Speed Out PLL SpeedOut Adv Dig Out1 On Time Dig Out1 OffTime Dig Out2 On Time Dig Out2 OffTime Rly Out3 On Time Rly Out3 OffTime Anlg IniLossCnfg Anlg In2LossCnfg Anlg In3LossCnfg AddSub 1 Input AddSub 1 Add AddSub 1 Subtrct AddSub 1 Result AddSub 2 Input AddSub 2 Add AddSub 2 Subtrct AddSub 2 Result AddSub 3 Input AddSub Add AddSub 3 Subtrct AddSub 3 Res
153. 750 Course Spd Trgt if available or zero 0 if not available Posit Offset 1 Supplies a position reference offset which is summed after the EGR and used to phase trim position reference A step in the offset position will be internally rate limited and added to the selected reference position The rate of correction is set by Par 755 Posit Offset Spd The initial value of this parameter is latched upon position enable without causing a change in reference Subsequent changes to this value will be relative to the latched value See Par 740 Position Control bit 5 for re referencing the offsets Posit Offset 2 Supplies another position reference offset which is summed with Par 753 Posit Offset 1 Used to trim the phase of the selected position reference Position offset will be internally rate limited to a velocity set by Par 755 Posit Offset Spd Posit Offset Spd Sets the speed of position offset A position offset command will not exceed this speed The actual speed of offset is limited to a maximum value of 1 inertia pos gain so as not to cause a torque pulse greater than 1 per unit The speed will change exponentially X Offst SpdFilt Displays the output of a first order filter whose time response is shaped specifically to provide an output that represents the actual speed of offset correction It may be used as a feed forward into speed reference to secure minimal position error during changes to offset Abs Posit Offset
154. 79 99 FZL 919 LH Sk 6 2508002 VN 00 9 NINO INOT L Sp0 383 INOT 4 0 g l 92 09 001 09 407 129 6 091 Shr GL j 708000 VN 0007 282 38 1071 m 05 Sel 621 0 0 905 82 962 99 9 8208000 VN 0052 07 522 38 1071 929 38 01 522 320 0 1 0 001 001 0 05 0 82 820 690 28 O tc Y 99 2208002 VN 0c9 3843 INOvI 070 38Q INOvI 070 3c9 WOTL 0 0 0 02 92 0 691 921 29 2491 t 5108002 919 383 NOvL 915 4 915 L ki 0 07 ch 0c L Vel ve 6 91 94648000 VN 012 38 1071 019 38Q INOvVE 012 400 071 SI 0 0 0 SL Ol Sel 8 ve 89 5 70 911 L 8498002 VN 698 180 07 598 300 107 1 94 9 Ol 9 02 95 97 Eb 75 60190 L cdvaaoc VN Sc8 38Q0 INOvI 528 300 107 0 9 8 80 00 70 61 660 90 L 00 SHEM S equin 01 gj 2 MW 296 UIE 3002 V v 7 asny 3 uonedissiq 21019910 4 34eg osnJ ejoq ejog 1 gt Boeg 1uaun ejqeisn py uim 1 1040 WOP L 11210 1010 ynag juaulo 3 jenq jndjno 10 51 7 9620 9 Indu JY
155. 802 9 Supplemental Information VN a 00 09 092 0 099 092 07 506 5602 2124 66 9 VN 007 009 009 052 057 052 062 980 092 616 9921 001 9 0928002 VN 052 057 009 002 002 002 806 126 St 109 Srl 09 VN E 060 9 9 009 Sec 007 900 880 261 674 081 94 9 061900 VN 092 GLE 00S SZ 9 2 g l 0921 961 OE 209 eek OS VN 052 057 009 002 002 002 122 691 7911 109 09 9 51900 VN zi 091 002 00 Scl Scc Sel 921 991 01 907 96 VN x i 060 9 6 008 g l 9 0 GLI 92 EtL 021 209 09 S 0618000 VN 0006 NINO IWOT 001 00 006 001 941 001 091 001 08 906 57 OF VN 091 002 00 Scl Gee Scl 921 907 96 Ov S 019000 VN 0006 NINO INOY 001 006 00 001 08 001 92 SOL 08 905 c 4 Se 06 v 0808002 VN 0006 NINO INOT L 5 00 915 915 06 091 06 901 8 02 Z9c 2791 06 9 0208002 VN 0069 i 001 002 002 09 001 09 08 69 cS 861 227 SL 001 2208002 VN 0029 L SpO 383 INOT L 05 091 091 05 06 05 9 29 cv 091 SBE OL 511 2708000 VN 0007 0 383 INOV E 05 00 001 Ge 09 Ge 144 82 292 GZ 01 z 92048002 VN 0052 0 071 620 38 10 S0 38Q NOT L S20 320 WOT L
156. 9 paeds 2 pds sng vun Vm NO Id Bex pds 5 pds Sad 004 L 521 I 3 dues je9ur 95 g Jou peeds l lt or gt I pds pejeos pds pedwey pds Jes v Jeu peeds p gt 9530 uonisod 2 521 5 peeds pds CD 6 l Cz 9 Bay pds I Jeuueu o Cee Cis ueg Bey pds l 2 yoeqpse4 5 peeds l 195 Jeu 11504 1 1 JoyeinBay Id 1 Jou sojoyy 1934 Id epon Id Bes pds Cz L 521 peeds U9JON uonoejes z Bajul sod Joy 1502 xny suieJDel q LEN ood 3611 Z eseud S004 a JoyejnBay Z OMUOD UOIISOd Jes pds 623 Nds PAS 84d 195 d L Jeu pds 7 4 Sjulogise 5
157. 91607 ssed g joy pds Jey pds pedwey Jey pds pedwey ejeospeedsejeg Ces D Cus D uiecjeooyenieu erou 8101 dwog enau 31607 uv jeu pds xew Jespeeds erieu l odium b jodiun zt gt pds ZHE jeu pds jeu pds peyur H jeu pds pei ejes mea dweypds 6 NUD 2 ysel Xx eu enuut4 21607 92U919J8M J04ju02 peeds Je enbio 3959 4011 bays suondo 5 doaiq dooig Bay pds Control Block Diagrams Sess 5 90 Bays mo Beypds gt y pds sog pds Bay pds Bess gt 21607 7 maid uled 3201 gJ6eus qpJpds 5 e Woy UM 5 uM E poTos 5
158. Axis Min Max 2147483648 Integer 696 PositErrTol Default 4096 RW 32 bit Position error tolerance for the Motion Servo Axis Min Max 0 2147483648 Integer 697 PositLock Tol Default 0 RW 32 bit Position lock tolerance for the Motion Servo Axis Min Max 0 2147483648 Integer 698 Cmmd Default 0 RO 32 bit Position command input from the Motion Planner This is linked as the source to the Min Max 2147483648 Integer interpolator s CoursePosit Trgt 699 Mx Pos Trvl Unit P U RO Real Positive soft overtravel threshold for the Motion Servo Axis Default 0 0 Min Max 8 0 pu 700 Posit Sync Synchronization input signal from the Motion Planner Pulse received once per coarse update period This is linked as the course to Par 693 Interp Synchlnput Bits 2 4 have been changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Options 8 2 2 2 212 5 9 9 9 9 99 8 18 Zl alele Doo o gt CC E n Default 0 0 o 0 o O0 o jo o pj pomo fo pjo jj ji pj oj 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
159. Bit 14 Cnv NotLogin indicates that the converter expected but none logged in Bit 15 Cnv NotStart indicates that the converter commanded to start but did not become active Bit 16 Dsat Phs U2 indicates that the second structure detected a Dsat on phase U Bit 17 Dsat Phs V2 indicates that the second structure detected a Dsat on phase V Bit 18 Dsat Phs W2 indicates that the second structure detected a Dsat on phase W Bit 19 Ovr Current2 indicates that the second structure detected an over current Bit 20 Ovr Volt2 indicates that the second structure detected an over voltage Bit 21 Asym DcLink2 indicates that the second structure detected an unbalanced DC Link Bit 22 Pwr Suply2 indicates that the second structure detected a power supply failure Bit 23 HW Disable2 indicates that the second structure detected a hardware disable Bit 24 Latch Err2 indicates that the second structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 0 False 1 True N 9 HW Disablet gt 9 IPwr Suplyt 9 Asym DcLinkt 5 S Ovr Voltt 9 Ovr Dsat Phs W1 7 9 Dsat Phs V1 9 Dsat Phs U1 e 4A 20 19 18 17 16 A A A Options Asym DcLink2 lOvr Volt2 lOvr Current2 N
160. Bit 16 Ratio Calc was added for firmware version 2 04 Bit 5 AddSub Math and bit 6 Delay Timer were added for firmware version 3 01 Options 2 15350 6515 2 gt gt 8525 8 2 ja a a cm lt gt Default 0 jo 0 0 jo JO o o o jo jo jo 0 JO jo JO 0 JO 0 JO 0 0 0 59 ras Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 3 100 Programming and Parameters Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 1001 UserFunct Actual This parameter displays the actual status of the user functions If a bit is set then the corresponding function is active When Par 1001 UserFunct Actual does not match Par 1000 UserFunct Enable it is an indication that the function could not activate because of an error Typically the limitation is caused by processor overloading Adjust Par 146 FW TaskTime Sel to a slower task cycle more time Options sig 2 ULIS
161. BodyTemp 4 Max ElemTemp 5 BodyTemp Act 6 ElemTemp Act 7 BTmpTripStat 8 ETmpTripStat 9 Int DB Ohms 0 0000 2200000000 0000 Displays the power structure used in the drive This is an identifier to the firmware for power structure control 1 0000 1000000000 0000 Linkable Read Write Data Type Set bit 2 Bus Ref High to select the high voltage setting as the turn on point for the Bus Voltage Regulator With the high setting brake operation starts when bus voltage reaches the value of Par 415 BusReg Brake Ref and Bus Voltage Regulator operation starts when bus voltage reaches the value of Par 415 BusReg Brake Ref plus 4 5 With the setting the bus regulator turns on first at the value set by Par 415 BusReg Brake Ref and then the dynamic braking turns on when there are any transients above the value set in Par 415 BusReg Brake Ref Set bit 3 Bus Reg En to enable the Bus Voltage Regulator The output of the Bus Voltage Regulator is summed with Par 128 Regen Power Lim and fed into the Power Limit Calculator It in effect reduces regenerative torque references when the bus voltage is too high Notes This parameter was changed to non linkable and bits 5 and 6 were added for future use not active for use with firmware version 3 01 RW Real RW Real RW 10 Data State 11 BrakeEnbl 12 1 13 1 th_eb
162. CommFormat 153 Control Options 475 MC FaultTPSelect 906 SL Rx DirectSelO 157 Logic Ctrl State 486 Rated Slip Freq 907 SL Rx DirectSel1 165 Tune Test Status 490 Statorlnductance 908 SL Rx DirectSel2 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri 510 Mode Config 909 SL Rx DirectSel3 223 Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel 511 2 Mode Config 910 SL Tx Comm Format 224 TachSwitch Level 512 PMag Mode Config 911 SL Tx DirectSelO 259 Stegmann0 Cnfg 514 Test Mode Config 912 SL Tx DirectSel1 263 HeidenhainO 549 Fdbk Offset 913 SL Tx DirectSel2 264 HeidenhainO Stat 550 Vvw Fdbk Offset 914 SL Tx DirectSel3 266 Heidn Encdr Type 740 Position Control 1000 UserFunct Enable 306 DC Bus Voltage 741 Position Status 1047 DInteReal In 322 Exception Event3 742 Position Ref Sel 1048 DInt2Real1 Scale 325 Fault Status 3 777 PositionFdbk Sel 1049 DInt2Real1Result 328 Alarm Status 3 796 Posit Gear Ratio The following new fault codes were added for firmware version 3 01 4 4 76 HiHP HardwareVer 78 VoltUnbince 95 Analog In 2 Loss 77 CurrUnblnce 94 Analog In 1 Loss 96 Analog In 3 Loss Encoder specifications updated 1 amp A 6 Updated and new Control Block Diagrams B 1 soc 3 This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive Phase Control User Manual publication 20D UM006 since the August 2004 release S58
163. Comp The amount of voltage correction used to compensate for the loss of voltage during dead time Do not adjust Contact factory for alternative settings Power Loss Mode Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a loss of input power as sensed by an input voltage below the value specified in Par 408 Power Loss Level Enter a value of 0 to make the drive coast supply no current to the motor during the power loss time specified by Par 407 Power Loss Time Enter a value of 2 to make the drive continue normal operation during the power loss time Enter a value of 5 to make the drive provide only motor flux current during the power loss time Power Loss Time Sets the time that the drive will remain in power loss mode before a fault is detected Values Default Options Default Options Default Options Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Options Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Options Units Default Min Max o 2 Sg is S95 1 Alarm 0 Ignore 1 Alarm 2 FitCoastStop 3 Fit RampStop 4 FitCurLimStp 1 Alarm 0 Ignore 1 Alarm 2 FitCoastStop 3 Fit RampStop 4 FitCurLimStp 1 Alarm 0 Ignore 1 Alarm 2 FitCoastStop
164. Description Values 5 els Hardware Present Indicates if optional hardware is installed ti Options _ e 5 x uy gt 4 5 8 olo lanlo flo E 22 8215 2 5 SIESIIEEEIIEISIS 2 2 25 2 2222 8 5 5 l Slo 5 CC gt o Default 0 0 00 000 000000 00020 000 00 0 00 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 45 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 54 32 1 0 1 FW TaskTime Sel Default 0 0 5 2 8ms RW 16 bit Sets the scan times for the drive firmware Changing the firmware scan times will affect drive Qn ane 0 Integer 1 Options 0 0 5 2 8ms performance Faster scan times may allow for higher bandwidth of the internal regulators 12 0 25 1 2ms 147 FW Functions En Allows specific firmware functions to be disabled When a bit is false the associated function is disabled and all related parameters will be hidden When a bit is true the associated function is enabled and all related parameters will be displayed Notes Bits 18 20 amp 21 were changed to Reserved for firmware versio
165. Dig Out2 OffTime Units Defines the amount of time between a True to False transition on the output status and the Default corresponding change in state of Digital Output 2 If a transition on an output condition occurs Min Max and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Rly Out3 Sel Default Use to select the signal for use on Digital Output 3 If the desired signal is not available in the Options selection list choose option 0 User Select and link with Par 856 Rly Out3 Data and 857 Rly Out3 Bit to select the desired parameter for output Out3 Data Default Link a word to this parameter that will control the Relay Output 3 The bit within the selected Min word that will control Relay Output 3 is set by Par 857 Rly Out3 Bit Max Rly Out3 Bit Default Selects the bit from the word linked to Par 856 Rly Out3 Data that will change the status of Min Max the Relay Output 3 e g when Par 857 Rly Out3 Bit equals 0 bit 0 of Par 856 Rly Out3 Data will control the Relay Output 3 Rly Out3 On Time Units Defines the amount of time between a False to True transition on the output status and the Default corresponding change in state of Relay Output 3 If a transi
166. Divide 22 Speed Trim 2 174 Setpt 1 Limit 12 Speed Ref 2 25 STrim2 Filt Gain 175 Setpt 2 Data 13 Spd Ref2 Multi 26 SpdTrim2 Filt BW 176 Setpt2 TripPoint 14 Preset Speed 1 74 Atune Spd Ref 177 Setpt 2 Limit 15 Preset Speed 2 75 Rev Speed Lim 16 Preset Speed 3 76 Fwd Speed Lim 17 Preset Speed 4 301 Motor Speed Ref 18 Preset Speed 5 300 Motor Spd Fdbk 19 Preset Speed 6 88 SpdReg FilterSel 20 Preset Speed 7 93 SRegFB Filt Gain 29 Jog Speed 1 94 SReg FB Filt BW 39 Jog Speed 2 71 Filtered SpdFdbk 40 Selected Spd Ref 100 Speed Error 30 Min Spd Ref Lim 89 Spd Err Filt BW 31 Max Spd Ref Lim 84 SpdReg AntiBckup 41 Limited Spd Ref 85 Servo Lock Gain 32 Accel Time 1 87 SReg Trq Preset 33 Decel Time 1 9 Total Inertia 34 5 Curve Time 90 Spd Reg BW 43 Ramped Spd Ref 97 Act Spd Reg BW 53 Drive Ramp Rslt 91 Spd Reg Damping 45 Delayed Spd Ref 81 Spd Reg P Gain 61 Virt Encoder EPR 82 Spd Reg Gain 62 Virt Encdr Posit 92 SpdReg P Gain Mx 63 Virt Encdr Dlyed 86 Spd Reg Droop 37 Spd Ref Bypass 101 SpdReg Integ Out 35 SpdRef Filt Gain 106 SrLss Spd Reg BW 36 SpdRef Filt BW 104 SrLss Spd Reg Kp 38 Speed Ref Scale 105 SrLss Spd Reg 46 Scaled Spd Ref 102 Spd Reg Pos Lim 21 Speed Trim 1 103 Spd Reg Neg Lim 47 SpdRef SpdTrm1 95 SRegOut FiltGain 56 Inertia SpeedRef 96 SReg Out Filt BW 9 Total Inertia 302 Spd Reg Out 57 InertiaAccelGain 58 InertiaDecelGain 60 DeltaSpeedScale 55 Speed Comp 59 Inertia Trq Add 64 FricC
167. En Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Default Units Default Default Default Units Default 0 0 2147483648 RIS 20 00 0 00 8000 00 1 1000000 1 1 2000000 1048576 1 67108864 RW 32 bit Integer V RW Real RW 32 bit Integer RW 32 bit Integer RW 32 bit Integer 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 737 738 739 Description PLL EPR Output Edges Per Revolution of virtual output device Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL VirtEncdrRPM RPM of the virtual output device The value specified determines the 1 pu velocity at Par 734 PLL Speed Out and does not otherwise affect performance Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL Ext Spd Ref External Speed Reference This is a velocity feed forward input It is normally linked to an external velocity reference or the velocity output of the chosen physical encoder Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL Ext SpdScale External Speed Scale This parameter is used to properly scale the velocity feed forward Adjust for zero average at Par 733 PLL FiltPositOut while running at moderate speed Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL LPFilter BW Low
168. For Example the value of an analog input can be linked to Accel Time 1 Rather than entering an acceleration time directly via the link allows the value to change by varying the analog signal This can provide additional flexibility for advanced applications Each link has 2 components e Source parameter sender of information Destination parameter receiver of information Most parameters can be a source of data for a link except parameter values that contain an integer representing an ENUM text choice These are not allowed since the integer is not actual data it represents a value Refer to the list of parameters in Chapter 3 for information on which parameters can be destinations links must be established between equal data types D 6 HIM Overview parameter value formatted in floating point can only source data to a destination parameter value that is also floating point Establishing A Link Step Key s Example Displays 1 Selecta valid destination parameter to P be linked The parameter value screen li Parameter displays Decel Time 1 S Curve Time 2 Press Enter to edit the parameter The cursor will move to the value line 3 Press ALT and then View Sel Next Min 0 01000 press the Up or Down Arrow to change Max 6553 5 Present Value to Define Link Press or v Dflt 10 0 Enter Present Value 4 Enterthe So
169. Gain 522 PM Stator Resist 509 PM Test Ref 448 Slip Reg Gain 523 Mtr Coef 424 Flux Ratio Ref 446 Slip Gain Min 445 Slip Gain Max 552 Slip Preload Val 553 Slip Slew Rate 472 PreCharge Delay 431 Test Current Ref 432 Test Freq Ref 433 Test Freq Rate 477 Est Theta Delay 428 IReg IGain 537 SrLssAngleStblty 538 51155 VoltStblty 539 SrLss StbltyFilt 54 Inertia TrqLpfBW 551 CurrFdbk AdjTime Configuration 151 Logic Command 152 Applied LogicCmd 153 Control Options 158 Drive Logic Rslt 160 Zero Speed Lim 169 51155 ZeroSpdLim 335 Abs OverSpd Lim Programming and Parameters 3 5 Overload Protect Stop Brake Modes Power Loss 337 Mtr 2 Curr Min 168 Normal Stop Mode 406 Power Loss Mode 338 Mtr 2 Spd Min 414 Brake Bus Cnfg 407 Power Loss Time 339 Mtr 2 Calibrat 415 BusReg Brake Ref 408 Power Loss Level 340 Mtr 2 Trp ThrH 416 Brake PulseWatts 341 Mtr 2 Count 417 Brake Watts 343 OL OpnLp CurrLim 154 Stop Dwell Time 344 OL ClsLp CurrLim 545 Bus Reg Ki 546 Bus Reg Kp 547 Bus Reg Kd 1125 DC Brake Level 1126 DC Brake Time 3 6 Programming and Parameters c X User mm Fi E RE UNnicatign Puts Reference Regulator Setpoint Monitor 27 Speed Ref A Sel 48 Spd Ref Bypass2 171 Set Speed Lim 28 Speed Ref B Sel 23 Speed Trim 3 172 Setpt 1 Data 10 Speed Ref 1 24 SpdTrim 3 Scale 173 Setpt1 TripPoint 11 Spd Ref1
170. Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option card Hiperface is a registered trademark of Stegmann Inc pooocoooooooQ gt Remember to route wires through the sliding access panel at the bottom of the Control Assembly PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option F 3 Recommended Cables If you are using this motor and feedback device len Bradley 1326AB BXXXX 21ML and 21MKXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder gt Use this cable Allen Bradley 1326 CECU XXL XXX Terminal Signal Description 12 POWER COMMON Power supply for encoder 2 11 POWER interface 2 10 REFSIN Negative Sine signal a 9 SIN Positive Sine signal i 8 REFCOS Negative Cosine signal 2 7 5 Positive Cosine signal e 6 SHIELD Connection point for encoder 5 SHIELD cable shield a 4 N C Not connected 4 3 2 DATA RS 485 Positive DH485 terminal 1 DATA RS 485 Negative DH485 terminal See this wiring diagram Figure 1 on page F 4 gt len Bradley 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL S2L and S2KXL motors with embedded tegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley 2090 CDNFDMP SXX Figure 2 on page F 4 S Allen Bradley MP Series 460V motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley 2090 CDNFDMP SXX or 2090 XXNFMP SXX Figure
171. Incremental Dual Channel Quadrature type Encoder Voltage Supply 5V DC or 12V DC 320 mA per channel 5V DC requires an external power supply 12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7V DC maximum low state voltage of 0 4V DC Maximum Input Frequency 400 kHz Table Recommended Cable Cable Type and Length Wire Type s Description Encoder Pulse I O Combined Belden 9730 or equivalent 7 10 196 mm 24 AWG Less 30 5 m 100 ft individually shielded Encoder Pulse I O Signal Belden 9730 9728 or 0 196 mm 24 AWG 30 5 m 100 ft to 152 4 m equivalent 4 individually shielded 500 ft Power Belden 8790 2 0 750 mm 18AWG Combined Belden 9892 9 0380 mm or 0 500 mm Encoder Pulse I O Signal Belden 9730 9728 or 0 196 mm 24 AWG 152 4 m 500 ft to 259 1 m equivalent individually shielded 850 ft Power Belden 8790 2 0 750 mm 18AWG Combined Belden 9773 9774 or 0 750 mm 18AWG equivalent 4 individually shielded pair Belden 9730 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel plus power If 3 channel is required use Belden 9728 or equivalent 2 Belden 8790 is 1 shielded pair Belden 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs 3 channel 0 33 22 AWG plus 1 shielded pair 0 5 mm 20 AWG for power 8 Belden 9773 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel plus power If 3 channel is required use Belden 9774 or equivalent 2 PowerFlex 7005 2nd En
172. Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Options Units Default Min Max Default Options Sec 8 0000 0 0000 4095 8000 R S 10 0000 0 0000 30 0000 RPM 0 0 3000 0 Zero Zero Iq Rate BW Reserved Max BW BW Limit InertiaMaxBW BW Lim Stat BW Select Totl Inertia TI Lim Stat 10 Reserved 11 Reserved M gu n H H MH 12 Rate Limit 13 RtLim Stat 14 PGain 15 GnMx LimStat 16 Damping 17 Dmp Lim Stat 18 Reserved 19 5 KpMxBW 20 Srls BWLimit 21 SrisinrtMxBW 22 SrlsBWSelect 23 Srls BW Calc 24 Snsr BW Calc 25 Reserved 26 Reserved PU 0 0000 8 0000 pu Speed Reg Zero Torque Speed Reg Torque Ref Min Spd Trq Max Spd Trq 0000 gt 2200000000 0000 1 0 Rated Motor Torque 1 0000 42200000000 0000 0 0000 42200000000 0000 1 0 Rated Motor Torque 1 0000 42200000000 0000 P U 0 0000 48 0000 pu 1 0 Rated Motor Torque P U 0 0000 48 0000 pu 1 0 Rated Motor Torque 5 E 2 Bis 2 V V RWheal RO 16 bit Integer 27 5 FiltOut 28 Servo Lock 29 Spd ServLo
173. Net Loss DPI P3 A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 3 and the network Verify status of network 58 Net Loss DPI P4 A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 4 and the network Verify status of network 59 Net Loss DPI P5 A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 5 and the network Verify status of network 60 Loss DPI P6 A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 6 and the network Verify status of network 61 Logix Out of Run Q The DriveLogix controller is in Non Run mode Non Run Clear fault modes include program remote program and faulted modes 62 Logix Timeout Q The communication connection to the DriveLogix controller has timed out 63 Logix Closed The DriveLogix controller has closed the Controller to e Verify drive is present in Drive connection Troubleshooting 4 9 No Name Type Description Action 64 Logix Link Chng A required link in the Controller to Drive Communication Format Clear fault has been modified 65 HiHpInPhasels High Horse Power Only AC Input Phase Loss AC voltage is 1 Check for voltage on each AC input pha
174. NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 20 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 21 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 22 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 23 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 24 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 j Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved NonCn NonCn NonCn NonCn INonCn NonCn INonCn NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault Reserved Reserved Default 0 0 Reserved Reserved Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions for PowerFlex 700L LiquiFlo drive Linkable j B Reserved 0 1 20 19 18 17 16 1 NI 4A Bit c Abs OverSpd Lim Sets an incremental speed above Par 76 Fwd Speed Limit and below Par 75 Rev Speed Limit that is allowable before the drive indicates its speed is out of range Motor OL Factor Sets the minimum level of current that causes a motor overload trip under continuous operation Current levels below this value will not result in an overload trip For example a service factor of 1 15 implies continuous operation up to 115 of nameplate mo
175. Output The digital output common return is connected to the power supply common The device to be controlled by the digital output is connect to the positive voltage and the device common is connected to the digital output Sinking a Digital Output The digital output common return is connected to the power supply positive voltage The digital output is connect to the device to be controlled and the device common is connected to the power supply common Note Digital Inputs 1 3 can only be configured as sourcing inputs Digital Inputs 4 6 can be configured as sourcing or sinking inputs Installation Wiring 1 27 Input Output Connection Example Digital Inputs Sourcing Digital Inputs Internal Power Supply 2 Wire Control Required Parameter Changes 24V DC Bont Set Par 829 DigIn 5 Sel to value 7 Run 1 Par 153 Control Options bit 8 3WireControl will automatically be OFF for 2 wire control 3 e Set Par 168 Normal Stop Mode for the des
176. Parameters Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 693 Synchinput Bit zero of this parameter is used as the synchronization pulse for he Interpolator This parameter is linked to Par 700 Motn Posit Sync for a Motion Servo Axis It is linked to Xsync Status for SynchLink application Bits 1 4 have been changes to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Options 5 lols lols gt 8 o o oO 9 9 9 9 99 818 8 8 8 88 o o o o gt n Defaut 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 JO 0 JO 0 jO JO 0 0 0 0 0 j 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 0 1 694 Mx Pos Trvl Default 0 RW 32 bit Positive soft overtravel threshold for the Motion Servo Axis Min Max 2147483648 Integer 695 Mx Neg Trvl Default 0 RW 32 bit Negative soft overtravel threshold for the Motion Servo
177. RPM 1 0 pu 32 Accel Time 1 Units Sec RW Rea Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases with time in seconds to base speed Default 10 0000 Accel Rate Par 4 Motor NP RPM Par 32 Accel Time Min Max 0 0100 6553 5000 33 Decel Time 1 Units Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases with time in seconds to base speed Default 10 0000 Decel Rate Par 4 Motor RPM Par 33 Decel Time Min Max 0 0100 6553 5000 34 5 Curve Time Units RW Rea Sets the S time Round In and Round Out in seconds Half of the time specified is added to Default 0 5000 the beginning and half to the end of the applied ramp The S time is independent of speed and Min Max 0 0000 4 0000 results in a trapezoidal torque profile For example Time in Seconds 0 5 sec 0 5 sec Accel Time 5 0 seconds S Curve Time 1 0 second Total Ramp Time 6 0 seconds 35 SpdRef Filt Gain Default 1 0000 RW Rea Sets the lead term for the Speed Reference filter Values greater than 1 will result in lead 5 0000 function and values less than 1 will result in a lag function A value of 1 will disable the filter 36 SpdRef Filt BW Units R S V RW Real Sets the frequency for the Speed Reference filter Default 0 0000 Min Max 0 0000 500 0000 37 Spd Ref Bypass Units The speed command after the limit ramp and s curve blocks L
178. Real Real Real 32 bit Integer Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 32 bit Integer 3 18 Programming and Parameters No 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 71 72 73 74 97070 Description Virt Encdr Posit A 32 bit pulse accumulator of the virtual encoder The accumulated pulse count is equivalent to the hardware accumulator of a real encoder It accumulates at a rate of 4x the value placed in Par 61 Virt Encoder EPR The accumulator starts at zero upon position enable Virt Encdr Dlyed One sample period delayed output of Par 62 Virt Encdr Posit Used in some applications to phase synchronize position reference through SynchLink The master is delayed one sample while the downstream drives update their position references then all drives sample position simultaneously The downstream drives do not select a delay FricComp Spd Ref Supplies a input to the Friction Compensation algorithm This input is normally a speed reference from a motion planner or ramped speed reference It will trigger a torque feed forward response depending on its value FricComp p Setup Enter or write a value to configure the friction compensation algorithm This is a packed word of 3 digits Each digit has a possible selection of 10 levels e The least significant digit sets the speed threshold in intervals of 0 0005 pu speed The next middle digit sets th
179. Reserved Reserved Default 0 0 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 True N 9 Cond Hold gt eS Curve En 9 9 Over Ride En gt Scaling En 9 Reserved 9 Incremental 8 m e 0 0 8 2 Units Default Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Sec 0 0 0 0 655 0 0 2147483648 1 1 2000000 1 1 2000000 0 2147483648 RW RW RW RW RO Real Real 32 bit Integer Real Real 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 Description PPMP Status Displays the current operating status of the Motion Planner Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options 3 cu 3 275 5 2 5 2128 57525 S8 5 5 5 9 4 5 8 06 46 8 CC IN 1 JA O OJE 0 lt Defaut o o 0 o p lo jo o lo o o lo fo 0 g ratge Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 PPMP Rev Spd Lim Sets the maximum reverse speed reference limit Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Fwd Spd Lim Sets the maximum forward speed reference limit Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Over
180. Ride Multiplies both forward Par 1136 PPMP Rev Spd Lim and reverse Par 1137 PPMP Fwd Spd Lim speed limits by this value Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Accel Time Sets the ramp time for acceleration time to go from zero to full speed Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Decel Time Sets the ramp time for deceleration time to go from full speed to zero speed Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP SCurve Time Sets the amount of time that is applied to the S Curve Half of the time specified is added at the beginning and half end of the acceleration and deceleration ramp Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Spd Output Provides a speed reference output from the Motion Planner Typically this parameter would be used by the drives speed loop A link could be made from a velocity reference input to this parameter Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Pos Output Provides a position reference output from the Motion Planner This output is scaled in counts Typically this parameter would be used by the drive s Position Loop A link could be made from auxiliary position input to this parameter Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Pos To Go Provides indication of feedback counts remaining in the move Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP TP Sel
181. Scaled Cmd 1133 Output Voltage 307 PM Test Ref 509 PPMP SCurve Time 1141 ParamAccessLevel 196 Test Idc Ramp 506 PPMP Spd Output 1142 PeakDetect1 Out 215 PM TestWait Time 505 PPMP Status 1135 PeakDetect2 Out 219 PMag Mode Config 512 PPMP TP DataDint 1146 PeakDtct Ctrl In 210 PMag Tune Config 517 PPMP TP DataReal 1147 PeakDtct Status 211 Port Mask Act 714 PPMP TP Select 1145 PeakDtct1 Preset 214 Posit Actl Load 765 PreCharge Delay 472 PeakDtct2 Preset 218 Posit Detct In 784 PreChrg Control 411 PI Error 183 Posit Detct2 In 785 PreChrg Err Cnfg 381 Feedback 182 Posit FB EGR Div 767 PreChrg TimeOut 410 PI High Limit 191 Posit FB EGR Mul 766 Preset Speed 1 14 PI Integ HLim 188 Posit Gear Ratio 796 Preset Speed 2 15 PI Integ LLim 189 Posit Load Fdbk 764 Preset Speed 3 16 PI Integ Output 190 Posit Offset 1 753 Preset Speed 4 17 PI Integ Time 187 Posit Offset 2 754 Preset Speed 5 18 PI Lower Limit 192 Posit Offset Spd 755 Preset Speed 6 19 PI Lpass Filt BW 184 Posit Spd Output 318 Preset Speed 7 20 Output 180 Posit TP Select 737 Pt Pt Accel Time 759 PI Preload 185 PositDetct1 Stpt 780 Pt Pt Decel Time 760 PI Prop Gain 186 PositDetct2 Stpt 781 Pt Pt Filt BW 761 Reference 181 Position Actual 763 Pt Pt Posit Ref 758 PI TP Data 179 Position Cmmd 747 PWM Frequency 402 PI TP Sel 178 Position Control 740 Pwr Strct Mode 420 PkDtct1 In Dint 212 Position ErrCnfg 399 Ramped Spd Ref 43 PkDtct1 In Real 213 Position Error 769 RatCalc BldUpRec 1
182. Set bits to cene the SynchLink node Setting bit 0 Time Keeper configures the local node as the Time Master Setting bit 2 Sync Now configures the node to synchronize with the Time Master immediately 1 25 per node on power up or recovery If you do not set bit 2 the node will stay in the fast mode taking up to 36S per node to synchronize on power up or recovery e Setting bit 3 Reset SL resets SynchLink This can be used to reset SynchLink after a configuration change instead of cycling the drive s power Note This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Options 5 9 2 9 o 29 2 26 8 8 65156 656 8 2 5 CC CC c Default 0 jO 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 18 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True st f f SynchLink data This d h efines the node s communication format for receiving SynchLink data This determines the number of axis data direct data and buffered data words received Configure the format by Axis A Direct D Buffered B using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software Options 0 0 0 0 e Option
183. Setpt 2 TripPoint P176 Setpt 2 TripPoint P177 Setpt 2 Limit P176 Setpt 2 TripPoint 2 x P177 Setpt 2 Limit Overview For Information External and Internal Connections D 1 LCD Display Elements D 2 ALT Functions D 2 Menu Structure D 3 Viewing and Editing Parameters D 5 Linking Parameters D 5 Removing Installing the HIM D 6 External and Internal The PowerFlex 7008 provides cable connection for a hand held HIM or Connections Port Expander Splitter Frame 1 shown OOCO Description DPI Port 1 HIM connection when installed in cover DPIPort2 Cable connection for handheld and remote options DP Port3 or2 Splitter cable connected to DPI Port 2 provides additional port D 2 HIM Overview LCD Display Elements ALT Functions Display Ew stoppeda 0 0 RPM Main Menu Device Select Description Direction Drive Status Alarm Auto Manual Information Commanded or Output Speed Programming Monitoring Troubleshooting To use an ALT function press the ALT key release it then press the programming key associated wi
184. Snie1sore2o1 1 eoxibo1enug OL 629 ueun2yndino 1 zoxibo1e ug OL 1 OL 129 01607 x1607 ooxiBo1eAud Cazo OMUOD xxe oremus Z S004 4 Idd 16011 5 05 uonisod Cor peeds Cis 9 607 uonisod 4 smeis uonisod smes 12907 snes 91607 uonisog Z jeuuoJ uiuo x51 Coos OL JOMUOD eAug 27 Control Block Diagrams 00089xibo1S 4 Jo uoiSJ8A uoneunByjuoo AjUO y yew Ul ys sw 2 ui unu doo uonisog 0 9r Ld S2 e syoda JO JAS JOU S J uonoeuuo JO yUITYOUAS Jeujoue 9A19991 JO 1 0 9S eq 0 4q uonoeuuoo BU JO 103 jou e moys 10 195 eq jsnui sJejeuieJeg 95941 z eye xibo1eAug OL esce xiBo1eAug OL z eyeqreeypeuyeqiesn xiBo1e ug OL o Jejeareesipeuyeguesn
185. Status 540 Trend In4 Real 583 Vds Command 498 Trend Mark Dint 567 Vds Fdbk Filt 441 Trend Mark Real 568 Vds Max 438 Trend Out1 Dint 572 Vds Min 440 Trend Out Rea 573 Virt Encdr Dlyed 63 Trend Out2 Dint 576 Virt Encdr Posit 62 Trend Out2 Rea 577 Virt Encoder EPR 61 Trend Out3 Dint 580 Virtual Edge Rev 225 Trend Out3 Rea 581 Voltage Class 403 Trend Out4 Dint 584 VoltFdbkLossCnfg 394 Trend Out4 Rea 585 VPL Build Number 315 Trend PreSamples 566 VPL Firmware Rev 314 Trend Rate 559 VPL Mem Address 479 Trend State 558 VPL Mem Data Bit 482 Trend Status 557 VPL Mem Data Fit 481 Trend Trig Bit 565 VPL Mem Data Int 480 Trend Trig Data 564 VPL Mem Link Fit 484 Trend TrigA Dint 560 VPL Mem Link Int 483 Trend TrigA Real 561 VPL Mem Password 478 Trend TrigB Dint 562 Vqs Command 497 Trend TrigB Real 563 Vas Fdbk Filt 442 TrendBuffPointer 569 Vqs Max 437 Trq CurFdbk 1 499 Min 439 NegLim 124 Fdbk Offset 549 Trq PosLim Actl 123 Fdbk Offset 550 Trq Ref TP Data 181 Write Mask 669 Trq Ref TP Sel 130 Write Mask Act 712 Tune Test Status 165 X Notch Attenu 778 Tx Buf Data Type 969 X Notch FiltFreq 779 Tx Dir Data 964 X Offst SpdFilt 756 UserData Dint 01 1002 XReg Integ HiLim 773 UserData Dint 02 1003 XReg Integ LoLim 772 UserData Dint 03 1004 XReg Integ Out 774 UserData Dint 04 1005 XReg Spd HiLim 776 UserData Dint 05 1006 XReg Spd LoLim 775 UserData Dint 06 1007 Xsync Gen Period 787 UserData Dint 07 1008 Xsync In 1 7
186. Torque Est Trq Est Filt PowerCalc ThetaELiner PprCntDfcOt PprCntDfcTh LinearPprOnt ActiveFdbk VdsComp Default 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 0 VqsComp 215 4096 2 5V 216 IqsLimFlux 217 IqsLimSlip 218 StatorCLimVp 219 Torque Err 220 Torque Prop 221 Torque Int 222 IqsCmd2 223 Torque 224 225 RotorFluxEst 226 VLmtVqsRef 227 VRefVqsRefNm 228 VRefRslqsNm 229 VRefVqsSpdVN 230 EconoVoltGn 231 F Output Fre 232 TrqCreflgsCm 233 Snk Wr 234 SrLssWrAve 235 CurFbklgsFbk 236 ACRIqsErr 237 CrefsqidsCmd 238 CurFbkldsFbk 239 VqsCmd700B 240 VdsCmc700B 241 VqsRefNom 242 VqsRslqsNom 243 VqsSpdVitNom 244 VitLmtVqsRef 245 IdsFbkDeriv 246 VdsRefNom 247 VdsRsldsNom 248 VdsSpdVitNom 249 VitLmtVdsRef 250 IdsFbkDeriv 251 VuvFbkOffset 252 VvwFbkOffset 253 luFbkOffset 254 IwFbkOffset 255 KSlipNP IUnbalanceSt Displays the data selected by Par 466 MC TP1 Select This display should only be used Min Max 2147483648 if the selected value is integer data This parameter is a diagnostic tool you can use to view internal drive parameters CurrSnsChck1 CurrSnsChck3 CurrSnsChck5 Fr
187. Units 96 RW 16 bit Defines the amplitude of the Flux Producing d axis current reference that is used for the Default 30 0 Integer automated measurement of Par 504 PM AbsEncd Offst for a Permanent Magnet 0 0 799 9 motor Scale 10 510 Mode Config Configures Field Oriented Control FOC operation Notes Bit changes were made for firmware version 2 03 Bits 10 and 11 were added for firmware version 3 01 ATTENTION Do not modify this parameter Motor Drive instabilities and damage could result Options gt 2 2 s EE e 5 5 5 8 8 _ 35 diolo l l 9 596 2 W 55 272 22 5 lt 5 2129 2222222222222223225293z282 222523222 o6z 2592990 22 99752595529 95295 9 CC gt 0 V E Defaut o o jo o joj on o ft ft 0 0 0 0 0 Fase Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 511 2 Mode Config Configures Field Oriented Control 2 FOC2 operation Notes Bit changes were made for firmware version 2 03 This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 ATTENTION Do not modify this parameter Motor Drive instabilities and damage could result ae Options 8 8 E 5 2 2
188. Values 2025 704 Motn TP Value Default 0 RO 32 bit Data for diagnostic testpoint relating to Motion functionality Min Max 2147483648 Integer 705 RotaryCmmd Default 0 RO 32 bit Position command input from the Motion Planner to the ServoAxis when configured in rotary Min Max 0 4294967295 Integer mode 706 MotnUnwdTurnCmmd Default 0 RO 16 bit Position unwind turns command input from the Motion Planner to the Servo Axis when Min Max 32767 Integer configured in rotary mode 707 SrvoAxis RotFdbk Default 0 RO 32 bit Position feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Servo Axis when configured in rotary Min Max 0 4294967295 Integer mode 708 SrvoAxisUnwdFdbk Default 0 RO 16 bit Potion unwind feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Servo Axis when configured Min Max 32767 Integer rotary mode 709 FdbkAxis RotFdbk Default 0 RO 32 bit Positon feedback output the Motion Planner for the Feedback Only Axis when configured Min Max 0 4294967295 Integer rotary mode 710 FdbkAxisUnwdFdbk Default 0 RO 16 bit Position unwind feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Feedback Only Axis when Min Max 32767 Integer configured in rotary mode 711 MotnCnfgErrParam Default 0 RO 16 bit Indicates a parameter that is not configured properly for a motion connection to be accepted Min Max 0 65535 Integer Parameter could either have a wrong value or an incorrect link
189. WER 201919191 d Ii Ii iii J Wi O ONLY U w PE PE www 6 OUTPUT FH U V R S T VAC Ti T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 OUTPUT INPUT 0 120V AC 40V AC Shaded terminals BR1 amp BR2 will only be present on drives ordered with the Brake Option 1 16 Installation Wiring Terminal Description Notes BR1 DC Brake 4 Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection BR2 DC Brake Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection DC DC Bus DC Input Power or Dynamic Brake Chopper DC DC Bus DC Input Power or Dynamic Brake Chopper PE PE Ground Refer to Figure 1 5 on page 20 for location on 3 Frame drives Motor Ground Refer to Figure 1 5 on page 20 for location on 3 Frame drives U U T1 To motor V V T2 To motor W W T3 To motor R R L1 AC Line Input Power S S L2 AC Line Input Power T L3 AC Line Input Power Dynamic Brake Resistor Considerations externally mounted brake resistors A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be self protected from over temperature or a circuit equivalent to the one shown below must be supplied ATTENTION The drive does not offer protection for Figure 1 1 External Brake Resistor Circuitry Three Phase AC Input Input Contactor M Power Off Power On DB Om
190. amp Hiedn TPDta Aid ae nie elects data displayed by Par 262 Steg amp Hiedn ta ione 0 Zero E Hh0 Edge Time Latency counter value not used for Hi Resolution Feedback Option Options Ha Sid EdgeTime oho EdgeTime Hh0 dEdge Change in edge counts for one 500 microsecond update At constant speed 2 510 dEdge 12 HhO dEdge this value should be constant 3 St0 dTime 13 Hh0 dTime e dTime Change in update time This value should be constant 500 microseconds 4 St0 EPR 14 Hh0 EPR Hh0 EPR This value should be 1 048 576 counts per revolution this is a constant value 5 510 EdgeMode 15 EdgeMode Hh0 nMax This is a scaled value of 2 6 St0 nMax 16 Hh0 nMax Hho Delta2Err Derivative of value 2 7 0 Delta2Er 17 z Hh0 Delta2Er 8 Reserved 9 Reserved Steg amp Hiedn TPDta Default 0 RO 16 bit Displays data selected by Par 260 Stegmann0 Status Min Max 32768 Integer Heidenhain0 Cnfg Configures the Heidenhain Encoder Feedback Option Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 e Bit 5 Direction determines the counting direction Set this bit to 0 to count up or forward Set this bit to 1 to count in reverse or down Bit 6 SW Reset setting this bit to 1 resets and restarts the option card Bits 10 12 form a 3 bit moving average filter sampling rate See Par Table 263A Sample Rate Bit Settings Not
191. atte Statius 4 Class 1 LED Product de RR 4 Catalog Number Explanation P 5 Catalog Number Explanation P 6 ii Table of Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter Objectives sse rete eee RUE EIS 1 1 Opening tlie Covers e per RR IR OUR e ER ee aS 1 2 Mounting 1 3 Operating 2 2 2 1 3 AC Supply Source 1 4 Unbalanced Ungrounded or Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems 1 4 Input Power 1 1 5 Grounding 1 5 Recommended Grounding 5 1 5 Shield Termination 1 6 RELEilter Grounding 1 6 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1 6 Power Wiring osea ne Eee owes a cee a 1 7 Power Cable Types Acceptable for 200 600 Volt
192. bit 4 X Offset Pol reverses polarity of offset parameters Setting bit 5 X Offset Ref permits changing the value of position offsets without changing actual position Resetting it makes the position offset relative to the re referenced value or the latched value upon enable if re reference was not performed e Bit 6 AbsPositCtrl may be set when a multi turn absolute feedback device is used for Point to Point positioning Activating this bit will ReRef the position reference to the absolute feedback when position control is activated in bit 7 Regulator On of Par 741 Position Status If the value at Par 758 Pt Pt Posit Ref is different than the feedback in Par 763 Position Actual a position error will exist and the machine will move to position when activated When bit 6 AbsPositCtrl is high bit 9 SetZeroPosit of Par 740 Position Control may be used to set the zero home position accumulators This can only be used when the drive is not in run and Par 740 Position Control bit 6 1 true Setting bit 7 AbsoluteMode puts the position regulator in Absolute mode Setting bit 8 Xzero Preset presets Par 744 PositRef EGR Out Par 747 Position Cmmd Par 763 Position Actual and Par 765 Posit Load with the value in Par 762 Position Fdbk minus Par 757 Abs Posit Offset upon drive enable Setting bit 10 Pt Pt ReRef enables setting or changing Par 758 Pt Pt Posit Ref without changing the actual position Setting
193. control the sequence of Min Max precharge completion in a drive system The maximum value of this parameter is calculated as follows Par 472 PreCharge Delay Par 410 PreChrg TimeOut 1 0 second 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 11111111111111111111111111111111 0 0 100 1000 0 32767 0 0 8 0 Sec 2 0 0 0 Calculated Linkable Read Write RW RW RO RW 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Real 16 bit Integer 3 66 Programming and Parameters No 473 474 Name Description MC TP2 Select Linkable Read Write Data Type Enter a value to select Motor Control MC data displayed in Par 474 MC TP2 Value and Par 468 MC TP1 Bit Par 474 MC TP2 Value and Par 468 MC TP1 Bit are diagnostic tools you can use to view internal drive parameters This parameter should not be changed by the user The default value is option 0 MulqsRef2 Note This parameter was added Options 0 MulgsRef2 1 SlipRatio 2 Ws 3 WrEst2 4 We 5 VdsCmd 6 VgsCmd 72 VuCmdi 8 9 VwCmdl 10 luFdbk 112 lwFdbk 12 ldsFdbk 13 IgsFdbk 14 VdsFdbk 15 VuvFdbk 16 VvwFdbk 17 VgsFdbk 18 IdsCmd 19 IgsRatio 20 MulgsRef 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 VwCmd2 29 30 Vds 31 Vqs cemf 32 VdsCmd2 33
194. drive 815 In3 Offset Units Volts RW Real Applies an offset to Analog Input 3 Use the offset to correct for zero signal errors or to create Default 0 0 an offset to the actual input The output of the A D converter is summed with this parameter to Min Max 20 0 produce Par 813 Anlg In3 Value 816 AIS3Filt Gain Default 1 0 RW Real Provides the Lead term for the Analog Input 3 filter Min Max 5 0 817 In3 Filt BW Units R S 4 RW Real Provides the Lag term for the Analog Input 3 filter Default 0 0000 Min Max 0 0000 3760 0000 Light Heavy Par 816 AI 3 Filt Gain 0 25 01 Par 817 Anlg In3 Filt BW 50 10 821 Analog I O Units Use to configure the type of units for the analog 1 For analog inputs configure bits 0 amp 1 to match the selection with hardware switch S5 Bit 2 AI3 Thermstr configures analog input 3 for a thermistor input with range of 0 to 3V Bits 16 amp 17 are used to configure the analog outputs for current or voltage No hardware configuration is needed for the analog outputs Options cle 8 22 2 2 5 15 8 68669860588 6 6 66 8838 lt lt
195. fault was generated but no indicating bi Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Options Asym DcLink2 Ovr Volt2 Cnv NotStart Cnv NotLogin Reserved Reserved o Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Latch Err2 HW Disable2 Pwr Suply2 lOvr Current2 Dsat Phs W2 Dsat Phs V2 Dsat Phs U2 Reserved Reserved 2 9 Reserved 9 lLatch Default 0 0 333 17001 FaultStatus Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions for PowerFlex 700L LiquiFlo drive Bit 0 Dsat Phs U1 indicates that the primary structure detected Dsat on phase U Bit 1 Dsat Phs V1 indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase V Bit 2 Dsat Phs W indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase W Bit 3 Ovr Current1 indicates that the primary structure detected an over current Bit 4 Ovr Volt1 indicates that the primary structure detected an over voltage Bit 5 Asym DcLink1 indicates that the primary structure detected an unbalanced DC Link Bit 6 Pwr Suply1 indicates that the primary structure detected a power supply failure Bit 7 HW Disable1 indicates that the primary structure detected a hardware disable Bit 8 Latch Err1 indicates that the primary structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set
196. firmware version 2 04 These parameters were 11 Reserved 25 0 Accum changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 12 Reserved 26 Accum 13 Reserved SL m f f SynchLink data This d efines the node s communication format for transmitting SynchLink data This determines 1 the number of axis data words direct data words and buffered data words transmitted Axis Direct D Buffered B Configure the format by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive Options 0 0 0 0 programming software 7 0 2 18 Value 14 can be used to allow the drive to transmit position data that can be used as a position reference 9 0 4 8 Option 14 was added and this parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware 14 1 3 14 version 3 01 17 0 4 18 911 SL Tx DirectSel0 Default 0 No Data Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 0 The source type Options 0 No Data 14 Reserved selecti ons are no data event feedback and drive parameter 1 SL Multiply 15 Reserved 912 51 Tx DirectSel1 2 Event PO 16 Reserved Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 1 The source type 3 Event P1 17 Reserved selections are no data event feedback and drive parameter 4 Reserved 18 Reserved 913 SLTx DirectSel2 5 Reserved 19 Reserved Deter
197. for RG connector or integral P See this wiring diagram Figure 1 on page H 3 Allen Bradley 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL S2L and S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley 2090 CDNFDMP SXX Figure 2 on page H 4 Allen Bradley MP Series 460V motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley 2090 CDNFDMP SXX 2090 XXNFMP SXX Figure 2 on page H 4 Allen Bradley MP Series 230V motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley 2090 UXNFDMP SXX or 2090 XXNFMP SXX Figure 3 on page H 4 Any other motor with external Stegmann SHS 170 rotary encoder Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 12 pin DIN style connector Figure 4 on page H 4 Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS 60 SCS 70 SCM 60 or SCM 70 Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 10 pin MS style connector Figure 5 on page H 5 SRS 50 585 60 SRM 60 SRM 60 SRS 25 or SRM 25 rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS Kit 101 or SCK Kit 101 rotary encoder Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 8 pin Berg style connector Figure 6 on page H 5 Any other motor with external Stegmann SRS660 rotary encoder 15 available only with pre attached Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable of various lengths Figure 7 on page H 5 PowerFlex 7005 Multi Device Interface Option Card H 3 Wiring the MDI Option Card N N 5 S S X S S S S
198. from 1 0000 to 0 5000 for firmware version 2 03 Atune Trq Ref Sets the motor torque that is applied to the motor during the flux current and inertia tests Note The minimum value for this parameter was changed from 0 2500 to 0 2000 for firmware version 2 03 Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default M Units Default Units Default Units Default Scale in Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 50 0 500 Hz 0 0000 0 0000 500 0000 RPM 0 005 0 0 0 1 Sec 0 0 0 0 2 0 P U 1 0 0 0 8 0 P U 1 0 8 0 0 0 P U 2 0000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 2 0000 8 0000 0 0000 P U 8 0000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 0 5000 8 0000 0 0000 P U 0 50 0 2 1 0 1 0 PU Motor to Torque Linkable 20 Read Write Data Type RW RW RW RO RO RW RW RW RW RW Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Programming and Parameters 3 23 8 575 ig No Description Values 525 130 Ref TP Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select torque reference data displayed in Par 131 Trq Ref TP Data Options 0 Zero 16 Neg Lim Src Note The value for option 5 was changed to Reserv
199. function This input will be Min Max 2200000000 0000 multiplied byPar 1058 MulDiv 2 Mul and then divided by Par 1059 MulDiv 2 Div The result will be loaded to Par 1060 MulDiv 2 Result Equation Par 1057 Par 1058 Par 1059 Par 1060 1058 MulDiv 2 Mul Default 0 0000 IRW Real Set this value as the multiplier to the value of Par 1057 MulDiv 2 Input The result willbe Min Max 2200000000 0000 divided by Par 1059 and loaded into Par 1060 See Par 1057 1059 MulDiv 2 Div Default 0 0000 RW Real Set this value as the divisor of the result of Par 1057 Par 1058 The result will be loaded into Min Max 2200000000 0000 Par 1060 See Par 1057 1060 MulDiv 2 Result Default 10 0000 RO This is the result output from the Multiplication and Division function See Par 1057 Min Max 2200000000 0000 Equation Par 1060 Par 1057 Par 1058 Par 1059 3 102 Programming and Parameters No 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 Name Description Logic Config operation selection for one block will result in the first selection LSB being the active mode Linkable Read Write Data Type Setthis
200. gain for the slip regulator Do not change this value Min Max 0 32767 Integer SrLss FreqReg Ki Default 250 RW 16 bit Sets the integral gain of the Frequency Regulator which estimates motor speed when Min Max 0 32767 Integer sensorless feedback is selected Do not change this value 511155 FreqReg 9 Default 350 RW 16 bit Sets the proportional gain of the Frequency Regulator which estimates motor speed Min Max 0 32767 Integer when sensorless feedback is selected Do not change this value lu Offset Default 0 RW 16 bit Sets the current offset correction for the phase U current This value is set automatically 32767 Integer when the drive is not running and Motor Control MC is not faulted Do not change this value Iw Offset Default 0 RW 16 bit Sets the current offset correction for the flux producing d axis current regulator This Min Max 32767 Integer value is set automatically when the drive is not running and Motor Control MC is not faulted Do not change this value MC Build Number Default RO 16 bit Displays the build number of the drive s Motor Control MC software Min Max 0 65535 Integer MC Firmware Rev Default 0 00 RO 16 bit Displays the major and minor revision levels of the drive s Motor Control MC software 0 00 655 35 Integer Scale 10 MC Diag Error 1 Displays the first diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control MC Errors appear in this par
201. inert Adapt Gain Default 0 500 Vv RW Real This parameter sets a multiplier of system inertia when the Inertia Adaptation function is Min Max 0 300 1 000 selected Par 132 Inert Adapt Sel bit 0 1 Higher values may cause high frequency ringing while smaller values may cause fundamental load instability A typical value is 0 5 This parameter has no affect on the Load Estimate function 136 Skip Speed 1 Units 4 RW 16 bit 137 Skip Speed 2 Default 0 0 Integer 138 Speed 3 Min Max 30000 0 Sets a frequency at which the drive will not operate Skip Speed 1 3 and Par 139 Skip Speed Band must not equal 0 Note These parameters were added for firmware version 2 03 139 Skip Speed Band Units 4 RW 16 bit Determines the bandwidth around a skip frequency Skip Speed Band is split applying 1 2 Default 0 0 Integer above and 1 2 below the actual skip frequency The same bandwidth applies to all skip Min Max 0 0 1000 0 frequencies Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 3 24 Programming and Parameters No 145 146 achieve faster scan times some functions may need to be disabled Only the most demanding application may benefit from faster scan times Typically adjusting this parameter is not needed it is recommended you consult the factory before changing 45 8 Sg ls
202. integrator XReg Integ HiLim The positive limit of the position integrator XReg Integ Out The output of the position regulator integral channel after application of the limits This output is set to zero if the integral gain is set to zero or the integrator is not enabled XReg Spd LoLim The negative limit of total position regulator output Point to point mode uses this parameter to set the reverse speed reference Values Default Default Default Mi Max Default Default Units Default Default Units Default Default Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 0 42147483648 1000000 1 1 2000000 R S 4 0000 0 0000 200 0000 0 2147483648 52 4 0000 0 0000 1000 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 2500 176 4000 14112 0000 0 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 176 4000 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 0 4 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 176 4000 14112 0000 0 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Linkable Read Write 2 o RW RO RW RW RW RO RW RW RW RW RO
203. is not desired or possible To use the motor simulator enter a value of 4 in Par 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri or 223 Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel 230 Position Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the position feedback accumulator from encoder 0 The value changes by a value Min Max 2147483648 Integer of four times 4x the Pulses Per Revolution PPR rating of the encoder for each full revolution of the encoder shaft Used by the Velocity Position Loop VPL to close the position loop if position control is selected 231 Encdr0 Spd Fdbk Units RO Real Displays the speed feedback from encoder 0 Calculated from the change of Par 230 EncdrO Default 0 0000 Position and Par 232 Encoder0 PPR Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu Programming and Parameters 3 33 5075 5 No Description Values 512 8 232 Encoder0 PPR Units RW 16 bit Sets the pulse per revolution rating of the feedback device connected to the Encoder 0 input Default 1024 Integer This parameter must be set to one of the values displayed in bold in Table 232A below Min Max 10 20000 Table 232A PPR Rating Values n 2 x mod75 jmod125 mod225 375 mod625 001125 0 1 75 125 225 375 625 1125 1 150 250 450 750 1250 2250 2 300 500 900 1500 2500 4500 3 600 1000 1800 3000 5000 9000 4 16 1200 2000 3600 6000 10000 18000 5
204. latch is armed e Bit 1 OptO Found indicates the registration event has triggered the latch Rising edge of Arm request will set the Armed status bit Rising edge of Disarm request will clear the Armed status bit Options 2 3 219 555 5 5 5 55 lt 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 z x 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 2 9 818 9 9 9 0 CC a cc Defaut 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 0 0 JO 00 0 jO 0 0 JO 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oc rFale Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 3 38 Programming and Parameters No 257 258 259 260 o e 5755 Description Values 52 5 Opt 0 Regis Ltch Default 0 RO 32 0 Displays the registration data of the feedback option card port 0 The registration data is the 2147483648 Integer position reference counter value latched by the external strobes The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by the Par 254 Opt0 1 RegisCnfg Opt 1 Regis Ltch Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the registra
205. limits are provided Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 Mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity Shielded Armored Cable Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications networking are also good candidates for shielded cable Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications In addition the increased impedance of shielded cable may help extend the distance the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks Refer to Reflected Wave in Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation including temperature flexibility moisture characteristics and chemic
206. minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum 4 Motor Circuit Protector instantaneous trip circuit breaker For US NEC minimum size is 12596 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum 5 Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip 9 Manual Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta 240 Wye or Delta 480Y 277 or 600Y 347 Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta Delta systems 7 The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary See publication 140M SG001 8 20 085 current rating is limited to 45 degrees C ambient 9 20 205 current rating is limited to 40 degrees C ambient 10 Maximum allowable rating by US NEC Exact size must be chosen for each installation 11 These values are approximate 12 Frame 9 and up are measured at 2 kHz frequency 540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices HP Rating DC Input Ratings Output Amps Drive Catalog Number Frame ND HD Amps kW Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Fuse Non Time Delay Fuse 20DD014 1 10 7 5 147 95 15 4 16 5 22 30 HSJ25 20DD022 1 15 10 23 3 15 1 22 242 33 45 HSJ400 20DD027 2 20 15 28 9 18 8 30 33 44 60 HSJ50 2000034 3 25 20 36 4 23 6 37 40 5 54 70 HSJ70 20DD040 3 30 25 42 9 27 8 43 51 68 80 HSJ90 2000052 3 40 30 55 7 36 1 56 60 80 100 HSJ100 2
207. n n d o o o Won m Hn H H H I Wow H H H H H MH Of HHH O C 1 uH H H H MH Linkable Read Write Data Type 20 Accel Decel2 21 Step 22 StepRev 23 Inc 24 MOP Dec 25 Reset 26 PI Trim En 27 PI Hold 28 PI Trim Rst 29 Trend Trig 30 PreCharge En 31 Regis 1 Ltch 32 OvrTrvl 33 OvrTrvl 34 UserGen Sel0 35 UserGen Sel1 36 UserGen Sel2 37 UserGen Sel3 38 ExtFault Inv 39 Home Switch 20 Accel Decel2 21 Step 22 StepRev 23 Inc 24 Dec 25 Reset 26 PI Trim En 27 PI Trim Hold 28 PI Trim Rst 29 Trend Trig 30 PreCharge En 31 Regis 2 Ltch 32 Hrd OvrTrvl 33 OvrTrvl 34 UserGen Sel0 35 UserGen Sel1 36 UserGen Sel2 37 UserGen Sel3 38 ExtFault Inv 39 Home Switch 20 Accel Decel2 21 Step 22 Indx StepRev 23 MOP Inc 24 MOP Dec 25 MOP Reset 26 PI Trim En 27 PI Trim Hold 28 PI Trim Rst 29 T
208. o 1 Z vaa T Motor i wa RUI so 9t Input AC Line BRI BR2 DC DC U V W R S T T 4 2 9 5 BR2 ber DC DC UMi V T2 PE PE 5 12 TA3 Frame 5 75 HP Normal Duty 480V AC Input 2 911810 Oo o SOOO gt O O gt 3 PS Frame 5 100 HP Normal Duty 21019 olo 480V AC Input EISE PS BR2 DC DC UTI V T2 WT3 PE ME E PE lead Frame 5 75 HP Normal Duty lt ssoe oJom mB Diolalo 650V DC Input 2 ololo ol ojo o o vic T Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP 15A14F Common Bus Drives w Precharge Only BRI DC DC 0 240 puc BR2 DC PEVAC VAC Frame 5 100 HP Normal Duty 6 P 5 9 goo 2 650V DC Input e
209. o a 6 Application Notes Figure C 4 Drive Operation When Par 154 Stop Dwell Time is Greater Than Zero Speed When Par 154 Stop Dwell Time is greater than zero the drive delays turning off the velocity and torque regulators for the amount of time specified in Par 154 lt 154 Stop Dwell Time P 160 Zero Speed Lim 0 Time Drive Receives Stop Command Drive Detects Zero Speed Drive Turns Off Regulators Setpt 1 Data Provides data for comparison of Par 172 Setpt 1 Data to Par 173 Setpt1 TripPoint driving bit 16 At Setpt 1 of Par 155 Logic Status Figure C 5 At Setpoint 1 Status P172 Seipt 1 Data bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns on bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns off bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns on bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns off bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns on bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns off bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns on bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns off bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns on bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns off P173 Setpt1 TripPoint 2 x P174 Setpt 1 Limit P173 Setptt TripPoint P174 Setpt 1 Limit P173 Setpt1 TripPoint P173 Setpt1 TripPoint P174 Setpt 1 Limit P173 Setptt TripPoint 2 x P174 Setpt 1 Limit Setpt 2 Data Provides data for comparison of Par175 Setpt 2 Data to Par 176 Setpt2 TripPoint driving bit 17 Above Setpt 2 of Par 155 Logic Status Figure C 6 Above Setpoint 2 Status bit 17 Above Setpt 2 turns on bit 17 Above Setpt 2 turns off P175 Setpt 2 Data P176
210. occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Motor Stall Time Enter a value to specify the time delay between when the drive detects a Motor Stall condition and when it declares the exception event Values Default Default Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Units Default Min Max on o m 3 FltCoastStop FitCoastStop Ignore larm FltCoastStop larm Ignore Alarm tCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp How od 25 er m n ai Fit RampStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FitCurLimStp FitCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp uon ou n Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp 1 0000 0 1000 3000 0000 Linkable Read Write Data Type RW Real 374 37
211. of time between a False to True transition on the output status and the change state of Digital Output 1 If a transition on an output condition occurs and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state Par 848 Dig Out1 On Time can be disabled by setting the delay time to 0 zero Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Dig Out1 OffTime efines the amount of time between a True to False transition on the output status and the change state of Digital Output 1 If a transition on an output condition occurs and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 g Out2 Sel Dig to select the signal for use on Digital Output 2 If the desired signal is not available in the selection list choose option 0 User Select and link with Par 851 Dig Out 2 Data and 852 Dig Out Bit to select the desired parameter and bit for output Dig Out2 Data Link a word to this parameter that will control Digital Output 2 The bit within the selected word that will control Digital Output 2 is
212. parameter to configure the logic routine in Par 1063 1070 The result of this logic routine is displayed in Par 1062 Logic Cmpr State There are three configurable logic blocks as displayed below Each block can be configured as AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR Select the functions as desired Multiple Logic Config 1061 xx Logic Cmpr State Logic 1 Result Logic 1A Data 1063 And 1 Or Ne 1052 00 Logic 1B Data 105 Ne sand Logic 3 Result Logic 1B Bit 1066 Or Nox 1062 02 Logic 2A Data 1067 And er Nand Logic 2 Result Logic 2A Bit 1068 295 1062901 Logic 2B Data 1069 Logic 28 1070 Options 5 c e 5 la 5 mc S 2 252 2 2 2952 2 2 9955 2 2 2 2 ler for joo jer foo fou few 299 229 88888 88 555 85185518 851881818 8 5 ce foe foe oe oe foe oe oe ee ele le 819 99 9 9899 99 5 5 59 9 898198 Default 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OQ False 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 41 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Tue Logic Cmpr State Displays the logical states of the Logic routine Par 1063 1070 and the results of the compare functions Par 1071 1074 Logic Cmpr State E 1 A lt B Compare 7 ED 1062 05 Cmpr 1 gt Logic Cmpr State
213. phases hence 4 edges per pulse In 4x mode the encoder position will change by four times the encoder pulses per revolution rating PPR per encoder revolution 0 it increments the value in Par 230 Encdr0 Position by 4096 for one revolution of a 1024 PPR encoder Bit 6 0 Dir and 22 Enc1 Dir inverts the channel A input thus reversing the direction of the feedback Note that changes in encoder direction bit 6 or 22 may require changing Par 153 Control Options bit 10 Motor Dir Bit 7 0 EdgTime or bit 23 Enct EdgTime configures the method of sampling used by the Velocity Position Loop VPL Setting the bit chooses Edge to Edge sampling while resetting the bit to zero chooses Simple Difference sampling Simple Difference sampling calculates speed by examining the difference between pulse counts over a fixed sample time Edge to Edge sampling adjusts the sample time to synchronize with the position count updates from the daughter card improving the accuracy of the speed calculation Bits 10 EnOSmplRate bt0 through 12 EnOSmplRate bt2 or bits 26 EntSmplRate 610 through 28 Ent SmplRate bt2 configure the Finite Impulse Response FIR Filter see Par Table 233C FIR Filter Settings This setting reduces the effect of noisy feedback on the system Refer to the Speed Position Feedback section of the PowerFlex 7005 with Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for details Note Bit
214. requirements specify that UL Class CC T or J fuses must be used for all drives in this section 9 1 Typical designations include but may not be limited to the following Ora 1 amp 2 AC AD BC BD CD DD ED EFS EF FF FG GF GG GH Typical designations include CC FNQ R Type J JKS LPJ Type T JUS JN Supplemental Information A 8 VN 00 09 084 0 098 092 07 SOE 502 24 661 99 VN 00 009 009 05 097 0521 066 982 090 616 5 99 9 0928002 VN x 052 008 00S Scc 092 Gec 805 998 221 109 291 Sh VN 007 009 009 006 09 002 806 670 102 09 800 99 9 61910 VN 052 097 00S 002 002 002 008 Sec 091 605 Ze VN 092 00S 00S Scc 056 Scc 9921 9611 7 11 09 791 Sb 9 5 8002 VN 091 006 00 Scl Gee 9 1 991 vOL ESE 86 09 VN 092 9 6 00S SZ 9 0 921 921 02 06 S 0618002 VN 0006 NINO INOT L 091 002 092 Scl 002 9 1 91 26 5406 278 ec VN 051 066 Sly 0541 092 091 9411 c l 0011707 02 9 7018002 YN 0006 NINO IWOT L T 091 056 OSE OLL 002 OLL 79011 6 0 c6 905 27898 02 v 0808002 VN 0006 NIWO INOv L 001 00 00 06 921 06 98 28 690 eZ 8 1981 0208002 VN 00 9 NINO INOT L 5 001 002 002 08 60 08 98
215. set by Par 852 Dig Out Bit Dig Out 2 Bit Selects the bit from the word linked to Par 851 Dig Out 2 Data that will change the status of Digital Output 2 e g when Par 852 Dig Out 2 Bit equals 0 bit 0 of Par 851 Dig Out 2 Data will control Digital Output 2 Dig Out2 On Time efines the amount of time between a False to True transition on the output status and the 1 change state of Digital Output 2 If a transition on an output condition occurs and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state Par 853 Dig Out2 On Time can be disabled by setting the delay time to 0 zero Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Values Default Options Default Min Max Default Units Default Units Default Default Options Default Min Max Default Units Default 2 8 3 Ready 0 User Select 15 Torque Limit 1 Not Fault 16 Power Limit 2 Not Alarm 17 z Fault 3 Ready 18 Alarm 4 Running 19 Command Dir 5 Reserved 20 Actual Dir 6 Reserved 21 Jogging 7 Enable On 22 In Position 8 Active 23 Watch1
216. terminals To remove simply slide it down and out Replace the cover when wiring is complete dangerous voltages on the terminals and negates the enclosure type rating Replace the access panel cover when service is complete Failure to comply may result in personal injury or equipment damage ATTENTION Removing the access panel cover exposes AC Input Phase Selection Frames 5 amp 6 Only power to the drive has been removed before performing ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard ensure that all the following Moving the Line Type jumper shown in Figure 1 2 will select single or three phase operation Remove plastic guard to access jumper Important When selecting single phase operation input power must be applied to the R L1 and 5 L2 terminals only Precharge Common Bus High Power Only AC drives have internal precharge Frame 9 amp higher DC fed drives require external precharge consisting of precharge contactors and current limiting resistors Refer to Table 1 C for contactor and resistor values Table 1 C Precharge Resistor Values Frame Precharge Contactor Precharge Resistor Series 9 318 A or greater 2 15 240 W Cooling Fan Voltage Common Bus drives require user supplied 120 or 240V AC to power the cooling fans Power source is connected between OV AC and the terminal corresponding to your source voltage see page 1 16 Installation Wiring 1 11 Table 1 D Fan VA Rating Frame
217. the Customer I O plug on the Resolver Interface Board Connector Weidmuller Number P1 594262908 BL3 50 90 8BK Auxiliary Power Supply The following are manufacturers of Auxiliary Power Supplies for 300V DC Frame Size Manufacturer Manufacturer Part Number 14 Phoenix Contact 24V Input 2949 826 230V Input 129 49 81 3 1 6 Acopian U300Y20 Supplemental Information A 19 Dimensions Table PowerFlex 7005 Frames AC Input DC Input 208 240 380 400V 480V 600V 690V 540V 650V NDHP HDHP HDHP NDkW HDkW NDHP HDHP NDHP NDHP HDHP NDHP HDHP HDHP 1 10 75 0 37 10 075 075 0 55 1 0 75 1 0 5 1 5 0 75 2 0 1 5 1 5 075 2 1 5 2 1 22 1 5 3 0 2 0 22 1 5 3 2 3 2 4 0 2 2 5 0 3 0 4 0 2 2 5 3 5 3 5 5 40 75 5 0 5 5 40 7 5 5 7 5 5 7 5 5 5 10 7 5 10 7 5 11 7 5 15 10 15 10 2 2 75 5 5 10 7 5 15 11 20 15 20 15 185 15 25 20 25 20 3 11 7 5 15 10 22 185 30 25 30 25 15 11 20 15 30 22 40 30 40 30 E m s 59 59 mp w E 4 185 15 5 00 45 57 60 0 4050 E z 22 185 30 25 5 30 22 40 30 55 45 75 60 75 60 75 55 55 45 75 60 30 30 50 40 55 45 100 75 100 75 90 75 55 45 75 60 E E m 55 45 100 75 Lr Lr z E 55 _ 45 100 75 6 45
218. the Resolver Terminal Signal Description Feedback Option Card to a 8 REF HIGH Positive Reference signal Resolver 2 7 SHIELD Connection point for resolver cable J A shield gt 6 REF LOW Negative Reference signal p 4 5 SIN HIGH Positive Sine signal M T 4 SHIELD Connection point for resolver cable shield p 3 SIN LOW Negative Sine signal 2 COS HIGH Positive Cosine signal 1 COS LOW Negative Cosine signal Connection Examples Resolver Interface Clockwise Rotation Count Up REFHIGH8 f xx N SHIELD7 F 1 REFLOWe 01 SINHIGHS ll j f N SHIELD4 3 sINLOW3 COSHIGH2 ie xx i COSLOW1 Resolver Interface Clockwise Rotation Count Down Reverse Polarity of Sine or Cosine Signals REFHIGH8 F GROUND7 6 SINHIGH5 GROUND4 SINLOW3 COSHIGH2 COSLOW1 REFHIGH8 SHIELD7 REFLOW6 SIN HIGH5 SHIELD 4 SINLOW3 COS HIGH 2 COS LOW1 7
219. the Slip Gain Regulator output transitions from the inactive state to Default 2 000 the active state Min Max 0 010 16 383 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 3 74 Programming and Parameters E Name L S is No Description Values 52 2 554 LED Status Bit 0 Sts Active Drive running no faults are present Bit 1 Sts Ready Drive ready but not running amp no faults are present Bit 2 Sts HW Fault A non resettable fault has occurred in the drive Bit 3 Sts Fault A fault has occurred in the drive Bit 4 Sts Alarm A type 1 user configurable alarm condition exists but the drive continues to run Bit 5 Sts RunInhbt A type 2 non configurable alarm condition exists drive continues to run Bit 6 Sync InSync The module is configured as the time keeper or the module is configured as a follower and synchronization is complete Bit 7 Sync NotSync The follower s are not configured with the time keeper Bit 8 DL Run Mode The controller is in Run mode Bit 9 DL Force Act I O forces are active enabled but may or may not exist Bit 10 DL ForceNtEn One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled Bit 11 DL Battery Either the battery is not installed or 95 discharged and should be replaced Bit 12 D
220. the control for registration latch 0 and 1 e Set bit 0 RLO Arm Req and bit 16 RL1 Arm Req to arm the registration logic for the next trigger event The particular latch will be armed and ready to be strobed on the next occurrence of the trigger input e Set bit 1 RLO DisarmReq and bit 17 RL1 DisarmReq to disarm the registration logic for next trigger event After the registration is captured bit 0 RLO Arm Req and bit 16 RL1 Arm Req automatically resets back to 0 after found Bit 1 RLO DisarmReq and bit 17 RL1 DisarmReq are only needed to disarm registration latch that has not been found yet Setting bits 1 and 17 will clear the bits 0 and 6 Setting bits 0 and 6 sets bits 0 RLO Armed and bit 16 RL1 Armed and clears bits 1 RLO Found and bit 17 RL1 Found of Par 238 RegisLtch0 1 Stat Options g le 1515 15 15 S lt 8 8 818181818181 8181 1 181 818 818 8181818181 818 81 8 elo 1 1 0 ja j CC J a Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 JO 00 00 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28
221. the next trigger event The particular latch will be armed and ready to be strobed on the next occurrence of the trigger input Setbits 1 00 DisarmReq and 17 01 DisarmReq to disarm the registration logic for next trigger event After the registration is captured bit 0 00 Arm Req and bit 16 O1 Arm Req automatically resets back to 0 after found Bit 1 00 DisarmReq and bit 17 O1 DisarmReq are only needed to disarm a registration latch that has not been found yet Setting bits 1 and 17 will clear the bits 0 and 6 Setting bits 0 and 6 sets bits 0 OptO Armed and bit 16 Opt1 Armed and clears bits 1 OptO Found and bit 17 Opti Found of parameter 256 Opt0 1 RegisStat H o Options 8 z 8 z 2 818 8 8 8 81 81 181 8 8 lt CC Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 256 1 0 1 RegisStat Indicates the registration control status on port 0 of the feedback option card Bit 0 OptO Armed indicates the registration
222. to Defaults D 4 Residual Current Detector 1 4 Resistor Brake 1 16 Resolver E 1 G 1 Resolver Feedback Specifications G 1 Wiring G 3 Resolver Feedback Option Card E 1 G 1 Resolver Interface Board A 18 Rotary Stegmann H 2 Rotary Encoders Stegmann H 2 Run Inhibit Common Causes Run Inhibit 2 4 4 3 S Saving Data D 4 Scheme Recommended Grounding 1 5 Selection Jumper 1 14 Setting Preferences D 4 Shielded Cables Power 1 8 SHLD Terminal 1 6 Side Covers Removing 1 2 Signal Wire 1 21 Sinking Input Output 1 26 Sourcing Input Output 1 26 Spare Connectors A 18 E 1 G 1 Specifications 1 14 A 1 Speed Control Reference 3 6 Speed Posit Fdbk 3 10 Start Up 2 1 Assisted 2 5 Checklist 2 1 Faults 2 5 Status Indicator 2 4 Status Word Logic A 6 Stegmann High Resolution F 1 Support Encoders F 1 Stegmann Hi Resolution Specifications F 1 Supplemental Information A 1 Supply Source 1 4 Support P 2 Surrounding Air 1 3 Operating Temperatures 1 3 T Tap Access 1 11 TB1 Row B Bottom Terminals 1 26 TB2 Row T Top Terminals 1 26 Technical Support P 2 Terminal Block 1 9 Location 1 14 Specification 1 14 Wire Size Power 1 12 Thermistor Ratings A 17 THWN THHN 1 7 Torque Control Torque 3 7 Troubleshooting 4 1 Tuning 3 4 Typical Jumper Locations 1 20 U Unbalanced Ungrounded Supply 1 4 Ungrounded Distribution Systems 1 18 Unshielded Power Cables 1 7 User Functions Param amp Config 3 14 User Set
223. trigger data When the Auto Output function is running this parameter will automatically sequence through it s full range at a rate set by Par 559 Trend Rate Trend In1 Dint Provides integer input to the Trend 1 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 1 if bit 1 In 1 Real is cleared Trend In1 Real Provides real input to the Trend 1 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 1 if bit 1 In 1 Real is set Trend Out1 Dint Displays the output for Trend Buffer 1 if the buffer is using integer data This will equal the value of the element in Trend Buffer 1 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer Trend Out Real Displays the output for Trend Buffer 1 if the buffer is using real data This will equal the value of the element in Trend Buffer 1 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer Trend In2 Dint Provides integer input to the Trend 2 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 2 if bit 2 In 2 Real is cleared Trend In2 Real Provides real input to the Trend 2 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 2 if bit 2 In 2 Real is set Trend Out2 Dint Displays the output for Trend Buffer 2 if the buffer is using integer data This will equal the value of the element in Trend Buffer 2 specified by PPar 569 TrendBuffPointer Trend Out2 Real Displays the output for Trend Buffer 2 if the buffer is using real data This will equal the value o
224. unipolar mode the speed reference is limited to a minimum value of zero 0 In this case Par 40 Selected Spd Ref supplies only the speed magnitude The direction is determined by Par 152 Applied LogicCmd bits 20 Forward and 21 Reverse The forward reverse direction button on the is one possible source for the Applied Logic Command direction bits The following chart explains the effect that the direction button on the HIM has based on the condition of the Bipolar SRef bit Bipolar Reference Controlled By HIM HIM Direction Button Enabled Yes Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied or command signal Enabled No Has no effect on motor direction Direction determined by sign of Par 40 Selected Spd Ref Disabled Yes Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied Forward or Reverse Logic Command bit Disabled Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied Forward or Reverse Logic Command bit In either Bipolar or Unipolar mode the selected direction can be determined from the sign of Par 41 Limited Spd Ref Positive values indicate forward rotation and negative values indicate reverse rotation SRef LdLg En Enables disables the Speed Reference Lead Lag Filter SErrFiltiStg Setting this bit will configure the speed error filter as a single first order low pass filter Clearing this bit will configure the speed error filter as two cascaded first order low pass filters 3 Flying Start Enables di
225. up 500 500 250 500 500 450 8 For DC input on Frames 1 4 use the 590 590 315 590 590 500 corresponding AC input code B C D or E _ 650 650 355 650 650 500 730 730 400 730 730 600 c1 820 820 450 820 820 700 ND Rating 920 920 500 920 920 800 208 240V 60Hz Input 1KO 1030 560 1K0 1030 900 Code 208V 240V Hp Release pending at date of printing Verify Release pending at date of printing Verify Amps Amps before ordering before ordering 4P2 4 8 4 2 1 0 6P8 7 8 6 8 2 0 9P6 11 9 6 3 0 015 17 5 15 3 5 0 022 25 3 22 1 5 028 32 2 28 10 042 48 3 42 15 052 56 52 20 070 78 2 70 25 080 92 80 30 104 120 104 40 130 130 130 50 154 177 154 60 192 221 192 75 260 260 260 100 p 5 6 Overview Catalog Number Explanation Cont d c4 c5 ND Rating ND Rating Comm Slot 600V 60Hz Input 690V 50 Hz Input Code Version Code Amps Hp Code Amps Hp N None 17 1 052 52 45 DPI ControlNet Coax 2P7 2 7 2 060 60 55 D DPI DeviceNet 3P9 3 9 3 082 82 75 E DPI EtherNet IP 6P1 6 1 5 098 98 90 Q DPI ControlNet Fiber 9PO 9 7 5 119 119 110 R DPI RIO 011 11 10 142 142 132 S DPI RS 485 DF1 017 17 15 170 170 160 il DriveLogix ControlNet Coax 022 22 20 208 208 200 2 DriveLogix Contro
226. 0 08 08 Gc 05 Gc 8 661 92 2208002 VN 912 48 0 1 912 480 L 919 3 9 INOT 06 09 09 02 06 02 74 76 64 1 508002 VN 012 48 0 1 0L0 38Q INOP OLO 3CO INOT L Gk SE 96 0 901 96 76 28 c 9468002 VN 010 385 071 019 38Q INOV 0LO 3CO INOT 9 Sc 0 9 01 6 89 72 69 91 z 8498002 VN 899 380 0 L 98 3cO INOVI 4 Sl Sl 6 8 6 v9 87 ov vl 22920 L edvaaoc VN 508 280 1071 Sc8 329 INOY L 6 GL 0L 6 9 6 65 oc L0 L1 60 0 64 4000 SHEM S equinN 2 gj o 99S 6 UN L 3009 WAX sdwy GN 2 jequnw uonedissiq 10981014 c 1918919 Aejag asny 3 ejqeisn py JOJOW WOY L 1012412 103014 1 jeng nd no yndu dH 10 51 7 9620 eec 9 seure14 JY HOA Supplemental Information A 10 VN 007 009 009 052 00 054 0 906 SOC 851 66110811 VN E 007 09 1 08 056 056 OSE 068 9982 092 7111 992 9 80008 VN 052 009 009 092 GLE 092 212 550 021 901 791 06 VN a 00
227. 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 329 Fault TP Sel Default 0 Enter or write value to select Fault data displayed in Par 330 Fault TP Data Options 0 Zero 12 Mtr OL Input 1 Abs OverSpd 13 Mtr OL Outpt 2 EE Pwr State 14 MtrStallTime 3 Inv DataStat 15 MC Handshake 4 Run Time 16 VPL Handshak 5 LowBus Thres 17 Diag 6 LowBus Detct 18 PwrLossState 7 PwrLosBusVIt 19 12 volt loss 8 MCPLosBusVIt 20 PwrEE Chksum 9 MC Fit Reset 21 Db Read 10 Ext Fit Stat 22 Db Read Cnt2 11 VPL TaskErr 23 Db Read Cnt3 330 Fault TP Data Default 0 RO Real Displays the data selected by Par 329 Fault TP Sel Min Max 2200000000 3 48 Programming and Parameters Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type gnore gnore 3 Alarm 4 FitCoastStop 331 LstFaultStopMode Default 0 Displays the action taken by the drive during the last fault When a fault occurs an action is Options 0 Fit RampStop 1 2 FitCurLimStop taken as a result of that fault 332 7001 EventStatus Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies for PowerFlex 7001 LiquiFlo drive Bit 0 Dsat Phs U1 indicates that the primary structure detected Dsat on phase U Bi
228. 0 MPL B420P 460 45 255 8 3830 1 90 8 92 4 74 5000 MPL B430P 460 6 5 214 0 3210 2 20 8 12 0 6 55 5000 MPL B4520P 460 6 0 236 7 3550 2 10 8 17 0 5 65 5000 MPL B4530F 460 5 0 162 0 2430 2 10 8 134 8 25 3000 MPL B4530K 460 7 8 200 7 3010 2 60 8 19 1 8 25 4000 MPL B4540F 460 64 162 0 2430 2 60 8 16 3 10 20 3000 MPL B4560F 460 8 3 144 7 2170 3 20 8 25 5 14 10 3000 MPL B520K 460 8 1 208 0 3120 3 50 8 23 3 10 70 4000 MPL B540K 460 14 5 177 3 2660 5 40 8 42 4 19 40 4000 MPL B560F 460 145 130 7 1960 5 50 8 424 26 80 3000 MPL B580F 460 184 132 7 1990 7 10 8 66 5 34 00 3000 MPL B580J 460 22 6 148 0 2220 7 90 8 66 5 34 00 3800 MPL B640F 460 22 7 106 0 1590 6 11 8 46 0 36 70 3000 MPL B660F 460 27 2 81 3 1220 6 15 8 67 9 48 00 3000 MPL B680D 460 24 0 94 0 1410 9 30 8 66 5 62 80 2000 MPL B680F 460 33 9 79 3 1190 7 50 8 67 9 60 00 3000 MPL B860D 460 33 6 96 0 1440 12 50 8 67 5 83 10 2000 MPL B880C 460 33 6 72 7 1090 12 60 8 69 0 110 00 1500 MPL B880D 460 40 3 86 7 1300 15 00 8 113 2 110 00 2000 MPL B960B 460 29 7 62 0 930 12 70 8 63 6 130 00 1200 MPL B960C 460 38 9 76 0 1140 14 80 8 88 4 124 30 1500 MPL B960D 460 50 2 76 7 1150 15 00 8 102 5 124 30 2000 MPL B980B 460 31 8 59 3 890 15 02 8 70 7 162 70 1000 MPL B980C 460 48 2 67 3 1010 16 80 8 99 0 158 20 1500 MPL B980D 460 63 6 74 7 1120 18 60 8 141 4 158 20 2000 2 PowerFlex 7005 Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications
229. 0 4 1500 280 5 4 22 20 4 1500 280 7 3 37 20 4 1500 280 12 3 5 5 20 4 1500 280 17 3 7 5 20 4 1500 280 22 11 20 4 1500 280 34 15 20 4 1500 280 42 22 20 4 1500 280 58 5 22 20 4 1500 280 58 5 30 20 6 1000 280 88 37 20 6 1000 280 125 Manufacturer Reliance Electric Japan catalog number for ordering Spare Connectors This section provides part numbers for Customer I O plugs both Allen Bradley numbers and connector manufacture numbers This allows users to procure spare or replacement parts from Allen Bradley or directly from the connector manufacturer Main Control Board Phoenix Contact manufactures all four Customer I O connectors for the Main Control Board according to Allen Bradley specifications Allen Bradley specifies custom markings on standard Phoenix Contact plugs Connector Allen Bradley Number Phoenix Contact Standard Number TB1 Row T 305334 Q01 MCV 1 5 13 ST3 81 27 21 1 TB1 Row B 305334 Q02 MCV 1 5 13 ST3 81 27 21 1 TB2 Row T 305335 001 MCV 1 5 13 5 3 81 18 03 68 8 2 Row 305335 002 MCV 1 5 13 5 3 81 18 03 68 8 High Resolution Encoder Interface Board Weidmuller manufactures the Customer I O plug on the High Resolution Encoder Interface Board Connector Weidmuller Number P1 594262912 3 50 90 12 Resolver Interface Board Weidmuller manufactures
230. 0 JO 0 0 0 00 0000 0 O False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 21 0 555 Status Indicates the status of the Motor Control MC Processor and related functions Options us T 5 ole rales HE 58 25 a lt 2 lt 5 5 2 2965155 52 2 255 2152 lt 5 282212121822 5 amp gt 5 5 2 5 lt 22 2 a ale 8 2 2 2 2 e 2 8185 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 j0 0 0 0 j0 0 0 0 GQ 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 556 Control Set bits to configure the Data Trend function e Bit 0 Enbl Collect Trend data collection begins on the rising edge of this bit and continues until either this bit is set low or the trend data has been completely collected This bit should be cleared following either the Triggered status or Complete status in order to complete the trend sequence This bit can also be cleared at any time to force the trend data sampling to stop and set the Complete status bit Setting bit 1 In1 Real specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 1 The source for Real data is Par 571 Trend In1 Real Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type The source for Integer data is Par
231. 0 mm 40N m 40 N m m 1 0 AWG 8 AWG 24 Ib in 24 Ib in 5 S T BRI 2 DC DC 50 0 mm 2 5 mm 75 U V and W 1 0 AWG 14 AWG 500mm 4 0 t OAWG 12 AWG 5 R S T DC DC U Vand 70 0 mm 16 0 mm 100 HP 2 20 AWG 6 AWG See Note See Note BR1 2 50 0mm 2 5 mm 1 0 AWG 14 AWG PE 50 0mm 4 0 mm 1 0 AWG 12 AWG 6 All power terminals 120 0mm 25mm 6N m 6 Nm 4 0 AWG 14 0 52 Ib in 52 Ibin SHLD Terminal 1 6 Terminating point for wiring 16N m 1 6 12 shields 14 Ib in 14 Ib in Installation Wiring 1 13 UR Bb SS Range Torque Terminal Bolt Size Name Frame Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended AUX Terminal Block 1 4 Auxiliary Control Voltage 1 5 mm 02mm PS PS 16 AWG 24 AWG 5 6 4 0mm 05mm 06N m 0 6 10 AWG 22 AWG 5 3 Ib in 5 3 Ib in Fan Terminal Block 5 6 User Supplied Fan Voltage 4 0 mm 0 5 mm 0 6 0 6 N m 10 OV AC 120V 240V 10 AWG 22 AWG 5 3 5 3 Ib in Maximum minimum sizes that terminal block will accept these are not recommendations 2 Apply counter torque to the nut on the other side of terminations when tightening
232. 00 P U 1 0000 0 0000 8 0000 Sec 1000 0000 5 0000 10000 0000 PU 0 0000 8 0000 pu PU 1 5000 0 0000 Calculated Zero Zero Iq Sum Iq Lim In Iq Lim Out Iq Rate Stat IqLmOutNoFil MtrCrLimStat Lim dMtrCrLm Iq Act Limit Iq Cal Gain gt 0 0000 8 0000 pu P U 0 0000 8 0000 pu PU 0 2500 0 2500 1 0000 5 12 0000 0 5000 100 0000 250 0 10000 1500 0 10000 500 0 10000 Linkable Read Write lt 20 RO 10 Min Lim Stat 11 Iq Prescale 12 Igtols Stat 13 Flux Status 14 Flux LPF Out 15 5 Per Unit 16 Iq Lim 17 Ig Lim 18 Fix Filt Hid 19 Inverse Flux RO RO RW RW RW RW Data Type D Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 3 52 368 369 370 371 372 373 Programming and Parameters Name Description Fdbk LsCnfg Pri Alt Fdbk LsCnfgPosit Enter a value to configure the drive s response to an Encoder 0 1 Loss exception event Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occ
233. 05 Rotary Encoder SIN 14 ud HIRD gt p mEFCOS Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 DIE WH RD HH GN E DATA RS 485 Rotary Encoder COS 12 DIE RD Hd H WHIGN __ _ DATA RS 485 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 11 wd POWER Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 10 H E WH GY COMMON Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 I WH BN BU R TS LinearSensorCLOCK 8 7 LL WHBU gt Linear Sensor DATA 7 IE CR eN Linear Sensor DATA 6 WHIGN Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 1 1 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 4 Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONt 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 1 1 CHASSISGND 1 Figure 4 Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 12 pin DIN style connector Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 IL 8 BU RDI POWER POWER 11 DE RD XX 11 NC REFSIN 10 DIR BN BU 10 POWER COMMON SIN 9 4 E 9 SHIELD 5 8 gt 8 3605 4COS 7 DIE PK xX GN 7 DATA RS 485 SHIELD 6 gt 6 REFSIN SHIELD 5 5 SiN NC 4 gt 4 NC 3 DL 1 T RS 485 2 XX 2 DATA RS 485 DATA RS 485 1 DIE 5 BK 5 REFCOS PowerFlex 7005 Multi Device Interface Option Card H 5 Connection Examples Figure 5 Rotary Encoder Connections with Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable and 10 pin MS style connector
234. 084 PkDtct2 In Dint 216 Position Fdbk 762 RatCalc Build Up 1083 PkDtct2 In Real 217 Position Ref Sel 742 RatCalc Filter 1082 PLL Bandwidth 722 Position Status 741 RatCalc Inertia 1085 PLL Control 720 PositionFdbk Sel 777 RatCalc MinSpeed 1079 PLL EPR Input 725 PositRef EGR Div 746 RatCalc Mx BldUp 1078 PLL EPR Output 726 PositRef EGR Mul 745 RatCalc RateLim 1080 PLL Ext Spd Ref 728 PositRef EGR Out 744 RatCalc ResetVal 1077 PLL Ext SpdScale 729 PositReg Droop 771 Rated Amps 400 Programming and Parameters 23 113 Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter RatedSlipFreq 486 SelSwchli 1043000 SL Buf Data Rx27 961 Rated Volts 401 Sel Swtch In15 1044 SL Buf Data Rx28 962 RatioCalc Status 1076 Selected Spd Ref 40 SL Buf Data Rx29 963 RatioCalcControl 1075 Selected SpdRefA 49 SL Buf Data Tx00 970 Real2DiInt In 1050 Selected SpdRefB 50 SL Buf Data Tx01 971 Real2DInt Result 1052 Selected Trq Ref 319 SL B
235. 0DD065 3 50 40 697 454 72 78 104 150 HSJ125 20DD077 4 60 E 84 5 54 7 77 85 116 150 HSJ150 50 67 9 45 4 65 98 130 150 HSJ150 200096 7 5 55 105 3 68 3 105 116 158 200 HSJ175 45 84 5 547 85 128 170 150 HSJ175 20DJ125 7 5 55 137 1 88 9 125 138 163 250 HSJ200 p 45 105 3 68 3 96 144 168 200 HSJ200 20DJ156 7 6 90 1712 110 9 170 187 255 300 HSJ350 75 137 1 88 9 140 210 280 250 HSJ350 200180 7 6 110 E 204 1 132 2 205 220 289 400 HSJ350 90 1712 110 9 170 255 313 300 HSJ350 20DJ248 6 132 260 286 390 550 HSJ400 111 205 308 410 400 HSJ400 20DJ261 9 200 299 186 261 287 410 500 170M6608 150 235 146 205 308 410 500 170M6608 20DJ300 9 250 343 213 300 330 500 630 170M6610 200 281 174 245 368 490 630 170 6610 200385 10 300 441 274 385 424 600 700 170M6611 250 343 213 300 450 600 700 170 6611 20DJ460 10 350 527 327 460 506 770 900 170M6613 300 441 274 385 578 770 900 170M6613 20DJ500 10 450 572 356 500 550 750 1000 170M6608 350 481 299 420 630 840 1000 170M6608 20DJ590 11 500 676 420 590 649 956 2 170146609 phs 450 595 370 520 780 956 E 2 1701 6609 pns 16 Supplemental Information HP Rating DC Input Ratings Output Amps Drive Catalog Number Frame ND HD Amps kW Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Fuse Non Time Delay Fuse 20DJ650 11 500 744 463 650 715 1062 700 2 170 6610 phs 500 676 420 590 885 1062 700 2
236. 1 0 296 Motor Freq Ref Units RO Real Currently Not Used Default Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 297 Output Curr Disp Units Amps RO 32 bit Displays measured current witha resolution of iio amp res Default 0 0 Integer Min Max 0 0 9999 9 Scale x10 3 44 Programming and Parameters No 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 Bit2 Bit4 815 Bit6 ClsLp e Bits e Bit9 e Bit 10 e Bit11 8112 Bit13 14 e 15 e Bit 16 e Bit21 OpnL Bit22 ClsLp CurrLim e Bit 24 Torq Limit indicates that the torque reference has reached the Negative Torque Limit set by Par 126 Torque Neg Limit Bit 25 Regen PwrLim indicates that the torque reference is being limited by the Regenerative Power Limit set by Par 128 Regen Power Lim Bit 26 Torq indicates that current reference has reached the Actual Torque Producing Current Limit set by Par 353 Iq Actual Lim e Bit 27 Bus Reg Tq Lim indicates the bus voltage regulator is active and limiting the regenerative torque Bit 28 0 Torq Ena indicates that the torque reference is limited to zero because Par 157 Logic Ctrl State bit 9 Torq Ref En is off o 8 e 255 Description Values 225 Elapsed Run Time Units Hrs RW 32 bit Displays the total time that the drive has be
237. 1 2 Operating Temperature 1 3 Operating Temperatures 1 3 Operator Interface D 5 Option Card E 1 G 1 MDI H 1 Resolver G 1 Output Devices A 6 P Parameter By Name 3 109 Changing Editing D 5 Data 3 15 Linear List Format 3 15 Viewing D 5 Parameters 3 1 About 3 1 Cross Reference 3 109 Organization 3 3 Programming 3 1 Parameters Groups Communication 3 4 Dynamic Control 3 3 Inputs amp Outputs 3 4 Monitor 3 3 Motor Control 3 3 Position Control 3 4 Process Control 3 3 Speed Control 3 3 Speed Posit Fdbk 3 4 Torque Control 3 3 User Functions 3 4 Utility 3 4 PE 1 5 Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications 1 Permanent Magnet Motors Compatible Motors 1 1 Motor Name Plate and Rating Specifications l 1 Phase Selection Input 1 10 Phase Selection Jumper 1 14 Position Control Position Config 3 9 Power 1 9 Power Conditioning Input 1 5 Power Supply Auxiliary 1 23 A 18 Power Terminal Block 1 9 1 14 Location 1 14 Power Wiring 1 7 Powering Up the Drive 2 1 Precautions P 4 Precharge Common Bus 1 10 DC 1 10 Preferences Setting D 4 Process Control Regulator 3 8 Programmable Controller Configurations 4 RCD Residual Current Detector 1 4 Recommended 1 21 F 3 Recommended Cables Cables F 3 Recommended Documentation P 1 Recommended Grounding Scheme 1 5 Reflected Wave 1 8 Removal 1 10 Access Panel 1 10 Removing the Cassette Cassette Removal 1 2 Removing the Side Covers 1 2 Reset
238. 1 Anlg In2 Filt BW 842 Out2 Scale 857 Rly Out Bit 872 BitSwap Data 806 0 In2 Data 843 Out2 Zero 858 Rly Out3 On Time 873 BitSwap Bit 1094 Anlg In2LossCnfg 844 Anlg Out2 Value 859 Out3 OffTime 874 BitSwap 3 Result 815 Anlg In3 Offset 824 Local I O Status 875 BitSwap 4A Data 813 Anlg In3 Value 876 BitSwap 4A Bit 814 Anlg In3 Scale 877 MBitSwap 4B Data 816 Gain 878 BitSwap 4B Bit 817 Anlg In3 Filt BW 879 BitSwap 4 Result 812 0 In3 Data 880 BitSwap 5A Data 1095 Anlg In3LossCnfg 881 BitSwap 5A Bit 882 BitSwap 5B Data 883 BitSwap 5B Bit 884 BitSwap 5 Result 885 BitSwap 6A Data 886 BitSwap Bit 887 BitSwap 6B Data 888 BitSwap 6B Bit 889 BitSwap 6 Result 3 14 Programming and Parameters Param amp Config Select Switches Math amp Logic Timers 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 UserFunct Enable UserFunct Actual UserData Dint 01 UserData Dint 02 UserData Dint 03 UserData Dint 04 UserData Dint 05 UserData Dint 06 UserData 07 UserData 08 UserData 09 UserData Dint 10 UserData Real 01 UserData Real 02 UserData Real 03 UserData Real 04 UserData Real 05 UserData Real 06 UserData Real 07 UserData Real 08 UserData Real 09 UserData Real 10 1022
239. 1 Linear Sensor Connections with MDI RG Connector or P Integral Cable POWER SUPPLY Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder COS Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 Linear Sensor CLOCK Linear Sensor CLOCK Linear Sensor DATA Linear Sensor DATA Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION CHASSIS GND EXTERNAL 24 Vdc 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 m RO or BN WH o 1 n s ion Board YE GN GY N PK LINEAR SENSOR gt gt 7 Connection N 6 DC Ground RDorBN 5 H YE 3 CLOCK Gy DATA PK DATA ETE ESI 4 PowerFlex 7005 Multi Device Interface MDI Option Card Connection Examples Figure 2 Rotary Encoder Connections for 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL S2L and S2KXL motor or 460V MP Series Motor with 2090 CDNFDMP SXX or 2090 XXNFMP SXX cable
240. 11111111111111111111111111 565 Trig Bit Default 0 RW 16 bit Specifies the bit in Par 564 Trend Trig Data that will cause a Trend Trigger to occur Min Max 32 31 Integer Positive numbers specify rising edges and negative numbers specify falling edges 566 Trend PreSamples Default 511 V RW t6 bit Specifies the number pre trigger samples in the trend buffer Pre trigger samples are the Min Max 0 1022 Integer samples that occur before the trigger and remain in the buffer The remainder of the trend buffer will contain post trigger samples 3 76 Programming and Parameters No 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 600 Description Trend Mark Dint Marks the start of data for trend buffers that are using integer data The Trend Marker can be used to provide a scope trigger signal for the Auto Output function Trend Mark Real Marks the start of data for trend buffers that are using real data The Trend Marker can be used to provide a scope trigger signal for the Auto Output function TrendBuffPointer Selects the trend buffer element to be displayed in the Trend Output Parameters when the trend function is inactive not collecting data samples A zero value points to the element that corresponds to the trigger event Negative values point to pre trigger data Positive values point to post
241. 14 can be used to allow the drive to receive position data that can be used as a 6 1 2 4 position reference Notes Options 6 and 16 were added for firmware version 2 04 Option 14 was added and this 7 0 2 18 parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 9 0 4 8 14 1 3 14 16 1 4 4 17 0 4 18 906 SLRxDirectSel Default 0 No Data Determines the destination for the data received at word 0 of direct received data Configure Options 0 No Data 14 Reserved the se ection by using the Peer Communication window 1 SL Multiply 15 Reserved 907 SLRxDirectSeli 2 Event PO 16 Reserved Determines the destination for the data received at word 1 of direct received data Configure 3 Event P1 17 Reserved the sel ection by using the Peer Communication window 4 Reserved 18 Reserved 908 ISL Rx DirectSel2 c 5 Reserved 19 Reserved Determines the destination for the data received at word 2 of direct received data Configure 6 Reserved 20 Reserved the sel ection by using the Peer Communication window 7 Reserved 21 Dir Tx Data 909 51 Rx DirectSel3 8 Reserved 22 Dir Rx Data Determines the destination for the data received at word 3 of direct received data Configure 9 Reserved 23 EQ Accum the selection by using the Peer Communication window 10 Event Status 24 E1 Accum Notes Options 16 26 were added for
242. 15 16 ba 1 DB IGBT Amp 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 437 Description 195 integ Freq ri Sets the break frequency of the torque producing q axis current regulator This and 422 lqs Reg P Gain determine the integral gain for the q axis current regulator Set by the autotune procedure Do not change this value 145 Reg P Gain Sets the proportional gain of the torque producing q axis current regulator Set by the autotune procedure Do not change this value 145 Rate Limit Sets the limit of the rate of change for the torque producing q axis current regulator Do not change this parameter Use Par 355 Iq Rate Limited to control the q axis current rate limit Flux Ratio Ref Active only in the Field Oriented Control FOC 2 motor control mode when Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode equals 2 FVC 2 Provides scaling factor for the flux producing d axis current reference When active Par 511 FVC2 Mode Config bit 28 FIxRatRef Use is set Flux Producing d axis Current Reference Par 488 Flux Current x Par 424 Flux Ratio Ref e When inactive Par 511 FVC2 Mode Config bit 28 FIxRatRef Use is cleared Flux Producing d axis Current Reference Par 488 Flux Current below base speed and Flux Producing d axis Current Reference Par 488 Flux Current x motor b
243. 15 Task 2 time 45 Cmd DPI 5 16 Task 2 46 DPI 6 17 Task 3 time 47 Cmd ELC 18 Task 3 max 48 Debugger 19 BkGnd Time 49 Reserved 20 BkGnd 50 SelSw Posit 21 Task 1 51 DI SelSw 00 22 Task 2 52 DI SelSw 01 23 Task 3 53 DI SelSw 02 24 BkGnd 54 DI SelSw 03 Logic TP Data Default 0 0000 RO Real Displays the indication selected by Par 161 Logic TP Sel Min Max 2200000000 0000 Stop Oper TP Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select data displayed in Par 164 StpOper TPData at the time of the Options 0 Zero 14 ZM1 Spd last initiated stop 1 Logic State 15 Speed Ref 2 Logic Input 16 Avg Spd Ref Lel In State 17 ZM1 Spd Ref 4 Logic Status 18 SReg Out 5 Run Inhibit 19 Ref 6 Logic Ctrl 20 TrqRef Stat 7 Mtr Ctrl 21 DC Bus Volts 8 Mtr Ctrl Ack 22 Motor Volts 9 Reserved 23 Mtr Current 10 Fit Status 1 24 Motor Flux 11 Fit Status 2 25 Motor Freq 12 Motor Speed 26 Motor Power 13 Spd Fdbk 27 Fit Status 3 StopOper TP Data Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the data selected by Par 163 Stop Oper TP Sel 2147483648 Integer Programming and Parameters 3 29 N
244. 153 Control Options Drive OL JnctTmp Displays the calculated junction temperature of the power semiconductors in the inverter The calculation uses the values of Par 313 Heatsink Temp Par 355 Iq Ref Limited and inverter thermal characteristics contained in the power EE memory If this value exceeds the maximum junction temperature visible in Par 348 Drive OL TP Data when Par 347 Drive OL TP Sel option 12 fJunTmprMax is selected two faults occur Inverter Overtemperature Fault fault code 15 and Junction Overtemperature Fault indicated by bit 7 Jnc OverTemp Values Units Default Units Default Units Default of Par 346 Drive OL Status Drive OL Status Indicates the status of various overload OL conditions Bit 1 NTC Open indicates the NTC has an open circuit Bit 5 IT Pending indicates the drive OL integrator is at 50 of the time out time temperature p p Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved e c e e gt Default 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 10 1 Drive OL TP Sel Enter or write a value to select the drive overload data displayed in Par 348 Drive OL TP Data Note Option 44 HH PwrBdTemp was added for firmware version 2 04 e Reserved Reserved N OverTem 9 IT Foldback 9 IT Pending gt SJIT Trip 62 S HS Pending
245. 157 Logic Ctrl State bit 11 CurrRef En is off Bit 30 Torque Limit indicates the collective status of all torque limitations Bit 31 Power Limit indicates the collective status of all power limitations Options c 5 es ja _ 8 Ele 5 2 Z 5 2 5 52 le 21885 515 512 2 5 5 le le 2 5 lL 15 1 5 o 5 55 5 5 2 6 5 5 2 E 6 9 5 IE 5 amp 2 t IF 8 2 9 2 o 2 o o 2 8 8 5 IE 8 8 IS 3 Default 0 O 0 0 JO JO 0 0 lO 0 JO JO 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 65 4 3 2 10 2 Mtr Trq Curr Ref Units P U RO Real Displays the torque current reference present at the output of the current rate limiter 100 is Default 0 0000 equal to 1 per unit pu rated motor torque Min Max 8 0000 pu Programming and Parameters 3 45 No 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 8 s Description Values Bus Voltage Units RO Real Displays measured bus
246. 2 103 104 Programming and Parameters Name Description Spd Err Filt BW Skis the bandwidth of a 2nd order Butterworth low pass filter which reduces quantization noise The units are rad sec A value of 0 will disable the filter The value should be greater than 5 times the value of Par 90 Spd Reg BW Note The default value for this parameter was changed from 200 0000 to 700 0000 for firmware version 2 03 Spd Re Skis the m of the speed regulator in rad sec Bandwidth is also referred to as the crossover frequency Small signal time response is approximately 1 BW and is the time to reach 63 of set point A change to this parameter will cause an automatic update of Par 81 Spd Reg P Gain and Par 82 Spd Reg Gain To disable the automatic gain calculation set this parameter to a value of zero Spd Reg Dampi ping Sets the damping factor of the drive s characteristic equation and factors in the calculation of the integral gain A damping factor of 1 0 is considered critical damp Lowering the damping will produce faster load disturbance rejection but may cause a more oscillatory response When Par 90 Spd Reg BW is set to zero damping factor has no effect spdiieg P Gain Mx Places a limit on the maximum value of proportional gain in Par 81 Spd Reg P Gain Par 104 Srlss Spd Reg Kp When gains are automatically calculated this parameter is necessary to limit the amplification of noise with increased inertia N
247. 2 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 Description Anlg In1 Value Displays the actual input value at Analog Input 1 Analog Input 1 may be configured for voltage or current input signal For proper selection of the input signal the DIP switch and Par 821 Analog Units must be set to match Type of Input Configurable Voltage or Current Polarity Bi Polar Resolution 14 bit 8191 to 8191 DIP Switch Analog I O Units Al 1 Voltage 55 2 Open Par 821 Bit 0 0 False Al 1 Current 55 2 Closed Par 821 Bit 0 1 True Ini Scale Scales the range of Analog Input 1 to the range of Par 800 Anlg In1 Data 801 Anlg 1 1 Value is multiplied by this number to produce the input to the lead lag filter function Par 802 Anlg In1 Scale 1 and Par 800 Anlg In1 Data 10 when 10V is applied Anlg Ini Offset Applies an offset to Analog Input 1 Use the offset to correct for zero signal errors or to create an offset to the actual input The output of the A D converter is summed with this parameter to produce Par 801 Anlg In1 Value Al 1 Filt Gain Provides the Lead term for the Analog Input 1 filter Anlg Ini Filt BW Provides the Lag term for the Analog Input 1 filter Light Heavy Par 804 AI 1 Filt Gain 025 01 Par 805 Anlg In1 Filt BW 50 10 Anlg In2 Data Displays the scaled final value for Analog Input 2 A
248. 2 Down Closed On SWITCH 53 SIDE VIEW FRONT TOP VIEW Up Open am HE Down Closed On 12 Table Switch Settings Function Switch Open Closed Default Notes HW Enable Jmp SHUNT 2 4 1 3 2 4 No Jmpr HW Enbl Jumper HWEnbl NoEnb HWEnb window for Cnfg Analog Input 1 52 Voltage Current Voltage Change with Power Off Analog Input 2 55 1 Voltage Current Voltage Change with Power Off Digital Inputs 4 6 54 12 115V 24VDC 24VDC Change with Power Off Voltage Digital Input 1 53 1 24V DC 12VDC 24VDC Change with Power Off Voltage Digital Input 2 53 2 24V DC 12VDC 24VDC Change with Power Off Voltage Encoder Supply 52 4 12VDC 5VDC 12VDC Change with Power Voltage EncoderSignalA 521 12VDC 5SVDC 12VDC set all switches the Voltage same Encoder Signal B 92 2 12VDC 5VDC 12V DC Voltage Encoder Signal Z S2 3 12VDC 5VDC 12V DC Voltage Function Switch Up Center Down Notes DriveLogix 1 Prog Remote RUN Processor Mode Processor Please note there are two separate values for an encoder Conformity Installation Wiring 1 29 Conformity with the Low Voltage LV Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm EN standards published in t
249. 2 2 Z 5 E 5 X lt X lt lt gt 22 x x 5 19 9 19 2 9 e 5 r S Eg u3BeunANd 9e z 9 5 8 59 2 2 5 o 8 3 _ gt 3 o o 9 m 8 8 Q go S 82 S j 2 5 8 5 20 81 A E youl a E A e 2 28 25 N p5 N N E E Q gt E Q oe Q a ss 6 58 esr JIN3O 2 E 83 X X S is SE amp 8 9 g 285 o 9 9685 Q Se 5 5 Zo eo Biz S 85 gt S 55 2 S 7 2c o 88 2 o N 88 E
250. 2 FromDriveLogix00 906 SL Rx DirectSel0 603 FromDriveLogix01 907 SL Rx DirectSel1 604 FromDriveLogix02 908 SL Rx DirectSel2 605 FromDriveLogix03 909 SL Rx DirectSel3 606 FromDriveLogix04 910 SL Tx CommFormat 607 FromDriveLogix05 911 SL Tx DirectSel0 608 FromDriveLogix06 912 SL Tx DirectSel1 609 FromDriveLogix07 913 SL Tx DirectSel2 610 FromDriveLogix08 914 SL Tx DirectSel3 611 FromDriveLogix09 915 SL Rev Events 612 FromDriveLogix10 916 SL Clr Events 613 FromDriveLogix1 1 917 SL Rx Regis 614 FromDriveLogix12 918 SL Rx P1 Regis 615 FromDriveLogix13 921 SL Real2DInt In 616 FromDriveLogix14 922 SL Real2DInt Out 617 FromDriveLogix15 923 SL Mult Base 618 FromDriveLogix16 924 SL Mult A In 619 FromDriveLogix17 925 SL Mult B In 620 FromDriveLogix18 926 SL Mult Out Masks amp Owners 670 Logic Mask 671 Start Mask 672 Jog Mask 673 Direction Mask 674 Fault Clr Mask 677 Stop Owner 678 Start Owner 679 Owner 680 Direction Owner 681 Fault Clr Owner SynchLink Output 964 Tx Dir Data Type 965 SL Dir Data Tx00 966 SL Dir Data Tx01 967 SL Dir Data Tx02 968 SL Dir Data Tx03 969 Tx Buf Data Type 970 SL Buf Data Tx00 971 SL Buf Data Tx01 972 SL Buf Data Tx02 973 SL Buf Data Tx03 974 SL Buf Data Tx04 975 SL Buf Data Tx05 976 SL Buf Data Tx06 977 SL Buf Data Tx07 978 SL Buf Data Tx08 979 SL Buf Data Tx09 980 SL Buf Data Tx10 981 SL Buf Data Tx11 982 SL Buf Data Tx12 983 SL Buf Data Tx13 984 SL Buf Data Tx14
251. 21 XXe vemu Bojeuy 9 5 AOL ju Jos bal ees ue sBumes 1 J le 80 181 uep IV BENS Cris ejeos Bjuy 6e7 peor Cs18 suo eui UM S UM S gul nsuueu ev SHUN Bojeuy 2 15 Z IV pea uM s sora zul 21 SHUN Bojeuy Lu Buy ueg 114 LIV eq Lui queun9 spun 13 Control Block Diagrams ejqeu3 pesn s big pue o qe ieAe ou S 0288 MOI S Q1Id 7284 UYM sd g qua JeuMQ JID 1ne 4 yseW smeis 12907 suqiuur yes 9519 JUNO BOT snes 216011 94 AWIS 4 JeuMQ 015 yseyy 21601 91607 joguo 10 BuunBguoo Jeduinr AjeotdA 941 e qeu3 H B 9o JON 158 Id m 2195 Jeu pds Id 2195 pds gui Les jeu pds ug uonisod jeu pds o 9 qeua eA 0195 Jeu pds ug Id oles jeu pds paniasay dwo9 1204
252. 25 29 5 5225 25259 5 22952 5725 52 SETZE 55 22 2 9 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 O jen n Defaut 0 00 01 j0 0 0 o 0 jo jojo o ojojoj 00000000 p n Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 87 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 Programming and Parameters 3 70 Be Be ea BE SE o o oM on on Sigexur _ o lt lt peuesed o panesey _ _ _ a gt gt _ peueseu 2 o s panlesey o lo peueseu o o lo wo gt n n dwog _ gt dwog uregsng _ dwog uregsng _ _ _ dwog _ o o S o S o S Q
253. 2500 0 0000 8 0000 Linkable Read Write RO RW RW RW RW RW RO RO RO RW RW RW RW 32 bit Integer Real 16 bit Integer Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 77 78 79 81 82 84 85 86 87 Description Spd Ref TP Sel Enter or write a value to select speed reference data displayed in Par 79 Spd Ref TP Data and Par 78 Spd Ref TP RPM Note The values for options 7 8 amp 9 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Spd Ref TP RPM Displays the value selected in Par 77 Spd Ref TP Sel in RPM This display should only be used if the selected value is floating point data Spd Ref TP Data Displays the value selected in Par 77 Spd Ref TP Sel This display should only be used if the selected value is integer data Spd Reg P Gain Sets the proportional gain of the speed regulator This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in Par 90 Spd Reg BW Proportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 90 Spd Reg BW to a value of zero Units are per unit torque per unit speed Note The Max value was increased from 600 0000 for firmware version 3 01 Spd Reg Gain Sets the integral gain of the speed regulator This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in Par 90 Spd Reg BW Integral gain may be manually adj
254. 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1 109 8 7 654 32 1 0 Tue 3 36 Programming and Parameters fg 5 2 Liz is No Description Values 525 238 RegisLtch0 1Stat Indicates the control status of registration latch 0 and 1 e 0 Armed and bit 16 RL1 Armed indicates the registration latch is armed e Bit 1 RLO Found and bit 17 Found indicates the registration event has triggered the latch Rising edge of Arm request will set the Armed status bit Rising edge of Disarm request will clear the Armed status bit Options 1 1 1 1 1 1 leleleleleisisi amp l lslslslslsleleleslsilsilssss5 8 9 5 5 5 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 1 lt 5555 5 65 o o o o 5 5 5 5 lt 8 8 9 18818181818 CC CC CC E ac rc rc cc rc Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 5 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 654 32 10 239 RegisLtch1 Value Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the registration data of port 1 Indicates the position reference counter value latched Min Max 2147483648 Integer by the exter
255. 3 2400 4000 7200 12000 20000 6 64 7 128 8 256 9 512 10 11024 11 2048 12 4096 13 8192 14 16384 3 34 Programming and Parameters No 233 234 235 N Description Values 5 Linkable Read Write Data Type Encdr 0 1 Config pecifies the configuration options for the encoder 0 and encoder 1 e Bits 0 Filt bt0 through 3 EncO Filt bt3 or Bits 16 Enc1 Filt bt0 through 19 Enc1 Filt bt3 configure the encoder input filter see Par Table 233A Encoder Input Filter Settings The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored Bits 0 3 or 16 19 add 100ns filtering per stage to encoder inputs Bits 4 0 4x and 5 0 A Phs or 20 Enc1 4x and 21 1 A Phs determine how the encoder channel and B signals will be interpreted Typically both encoder phases A and B are used so that direction information is available Par 230 EncdrO Position counts up for forward rotation and down for reverse rotation If bit 5 is set then the B phase signal is ignored As a result the encoder position will only increase regardless of rotation direction Bits 4 and 5 together also determine the number of edges counted per encoder pulse see Par Table 233B Multiplier and Direction Settings 4x sampling counts both rise and fall of both A and B encoder
256. 3 on page F 4 Allen Bradley MP Series 230V motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley 2090 UXNFDMP SXX or 2090 XXNFMP SXX Figure 3 on page F 4 Any other motor with external Stegmann SHS 170 rotary encoder Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 12 pin DIN style connector Figure 4 on page F 5 Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS 60 SCS 70 SCM 60 or SCM 70 SRS 50 585 60 SRM 60 SRM 60 SRS 25 or SRM 25 rotary encoder Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 10 pin MS style connector Figure 5 on page F 5 Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS Kit 101 or SCK Kit 101 rotary encoder Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 8 pin Berg style connector Figure 6 on page F 5 Any other motor with external Stegmann SRS660 rotary encoder Is available only with pre attached Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable of various lengths Figure 7 on page F 6 FA PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Connection Examples Figure 1 1326 CECU XXL XXX cable Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 D NR A A BK 5 A POWER POWER 11 POWER COMMON REFSIN 10 BK gt C REFSIN 4SIN 9 DI BD REFCOS BK E REFCOS 3008 7 DR BU BU 008 SHIELD 6 BK DATA RS 485 SHIELD 5 DI
257. 320 Exception Event1 Options 5 5 2 a jas BD 5 gE Es 2 2 8 518 8 8 8 gt Sls 2 s E E 5 5 2 O 5 oloooooooosiooboo 5 0 5 5 65 5 5 S 512 55155 5155 5 55755 lt gt gt 5 gt 155155 5 22 55 lt Defaut 0 0 0 00 0 0 jO O 0 0 JO 0 jO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 327 Alarm Status 2 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions These events are from Par 321 Exception Event2 wl am pam jam Dey pam Options E 5 5 5 5 2 2 1 2 2 e l 2 S 5 D 5 ole la 9 8 6 6 8 gt 2 4 gt 2 2199 5 210 5 se gt E x E m m m on E m 52 1212212 5 BABS 2 2 1515 2522 82 Defaut 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
258. 384 010 98 3cO WOFI L 0c 02 9 0 91 92 99 09 22 97 61 0450002 VN 078 80 1071 0 8 320 071 4 Sl ch 9 4 9 09 46 Cc 051940 St vYdeaaoc VN Sed 38Q WNOvL Sc8 3c9 WOTL 9 8 B 9 22 be fb 81 990930 L 1420002 SHEM Stoquinn gy XEN o XEN XEN o 296 uN 1900 3 6 10129101 asn4 3 Jequiny uonedissiq 06 yn21I ejoq J9MOd yuan ejqeisn py aeS 210301 2 eul UON jeng sdwy 1ndino 10 21 7 2620 eec 9 4 Indu JY HOA 007 11 Supplemental Information sud 198 2 098 sud 097 sud 2 099 sud sed 2 06 VN B 0021 0091 sud ed 0021 sud sed 006 sud ed 0061 549 006 ogzi 976 059 097 099 sse sud 19d 2 0001 6 4190 2 008 549 190 2 092 sud 2 008 VN 0002 0002 sud sed 0002 sud ed 0001 sud ied 0061 sud ied ooo 9601 608 062 90S oez 00 0270002 sud sad 2 0958 sud ed 2 059 sud 2 9 6 VN 0021 0091 sud 0021 sud
259. 4 Spd Ref Bypass2 48 SrvoAxisUnwdFdbk 708 To DriveLogix19 645 Spd Ref TP Data 79 Start Acc Boost 527 To DriveLogix20 646 Spd Ref TP RPM 78 Start Inhibits 156 Torque En Dly 501 Spd Ref TP Sel 77 Start Mask 671 Torque Neg Limit 126 Spd Divide 11 Start Owner 678 Torque Pos Limit 125 Spd Ref2 Multi 13 Start Acc Boost 527 Torque 111 Spd Reg BW 90 Startup State 452 Torque Div 112 Spd Reg Damping 91 Stator Frequency 526 Torque Ref2 113 Spd Reg Droop 86 Statorinductance 490 Torque Ref2 Mult 114 Spd Reg I Gain 82 StatorResistance 491 Torque Step 116 Spd Reg Neg Lim 103 Steg amp Heidn TPDta 262 Torque Trim 115 Spd Reg P Gain 81 Steg amp Heidn TPSel 261 Total Inertia 9 Spd Reg PI Out 302 Stegmanno Cnfg 259 Trend Control 556 Spd Reg Pos Lim 102 Stegmanno Status 260 Trend In1 Dint 570 Programming and Parameters 3 115 Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter TrendintReal UserData Real 09 1020 Trend In2 Dint 574 UserData Real 10 1021 Trend In2 Real 575 UserFunct Actual 1001 Trend In3 Dint 578 UserFunct Enable 1000 Trend In3 Real 579 V Hz Mode Config 513 Trend In4 Dint 582 V Hz
260. 5 RAB 2 Terminals Wo co AAH E 2 U RLI Han ES pe TL3 O Installation Wiring 1 23 Auxiliary Power Supply High Power Only You may use an auxiliary power supply to keep the 700S Control Assembly energized when input power is de energized This allows the Main Control Board DriveLogix controller and any feedback option cards to continue operation See Power Terminal Block Specifications for connection information You must set Par 153 Control Options bit 17 Aux Pwr Sply to enable this feature Table 1 1 Auxiliary Power Supply Specifications Voltage Current Min Power Min 24V DC 5 3A 75W Hard Enable Circuitry By default Digital Input 6 is configured for hardware Enable input This is for applications requiring the drive to be disabled without software interpretation With the HW Enable Jumper Shunt on the pins closest to the PCB Digital Input 6 is configured as a dedicated hardware enable If this configuration is not required the WH Enable Jumper Shunt may be moved to the out board pins making Digital Input 6 user programmable via Par 830 Dig In 6 Sel Table 1 TB1 Terminals 5 55 Terminal Signal Default Description
261. 5 376 377 378 379 Description Motor Stall Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Motor Stall exception event Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Inv OT Pend Cnig Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Inverter Over Temperature OT Pending exception event This event is triggered when the Inverter NTC Temperature protection function detects the heat sink temperature reaches to the overload warning level Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and s
262. 58 Troubleshooting 4 11 Fault No Fault No DSP Device Error 20 Net Loss DPI P5 58 DSP Memory Error Net Loss DPI P6 60 Enable Health 45 No Ctrl Device 48 Encoder 0 Loss 3 Over Frequency Fault 22 Encoder 1 Loss 4 Opt Port 0 Loss 5 Ext Fault Input 18 Opt Port 1 Loss 6 Faults Cleared 129 Parameter Chksum 35 Fault Q Cleared 130 Params Defaulted Z Ground Fault 26 Position Error 85 HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 PowerEE CRC Fail 39 HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Precharge Error 31 HiHp WtchDog 69 PWM Asynch 32 HiHp Bus Link Ls 67 PWM Signal short 29 HiHP CurrUnblnce 77 Ridethru Timeout 41 HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Runtime Data Rst 44 HiHp Fan Ls 70 SLink Comm Fail 9 HiHP HardwareVer 76 SLink HW Fail 8 HiHp In PhaseLs 65 SLink Mult Oflow 40 HiHp PrChrg 18 Stahl Optics 88 HiHP PwrBd Otemp 75 VoltageFdbk Loss 43 HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 VPL MC Comm Fail 28 HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Vref Decel Fail 2 78 HiHP VoltUnbInce 4 12 Troubleshooting Notes Appendix A Supplemental Information Chapter Objectives For Information See Page Specifications A 1 DPI Communication Configurations 4 Output Devices A6 Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings 6 List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor Ratings 17 Spare Connectors A 18 Dimensions 19 Specifications Category Specification
263. 6 FW TaskTime Actl 1489 0 Task1 0 5 mS Task2 2 0 mS Task 3 8 0 mS Notes Important 1 Parameter 147 FW Functions En is used to activate and deactivate firmware functions The PowerFlex 7005 drive ships with the position regulator deactivated To enable the position regulator set p147b16 on 2 Parameter 1000 UserFunct Enable is used to activate and deactivate the User Functions 3 These diagrams are for reference only and may not accurately reflect all logical control signals actual functionality is implied by the approximated diagrams Accuracy of these diagrams is not guaranteed 3 Control Block Diagrams __ _ _ _ 2 pds Sad I Id Ula 5584 Id Id Se Id xoeqpeed d A S M Id WA Y 1e 9 jou yur nano 1 2 4se1 1 N NS em um mm eni am am 47 uondepy s ndu enbio 1 3010 9 eau 9 pds lt 6s gt eaul S pds 19 dg 1 lt 69 gt dwog 4 Jepoou3 jen PAS sald 5 a E pdg asaid JOMOd
264. 686 Config 687 Motn Axis Status 688 Motn AxisControl 689 Axis Resp 690 Cnct Status 691 EventStatus Homing 692 Motn Event Ctrl 1120 Home Accel Time 694 Motn Mx Pos 1121 Decel Time 695 Motn Mx Neg 1122 Home Speed 696 PositErrTol 1123 Home Position 697 MotnPositLockTol 698 Posit Cmmd 699 Motn Speed 700 Posit Sync 701 FdbkAxis FdbkSel 702 FdbkAxis FdbkVal 703 TP Select 704 TP Value 705 Motn RotaryCmmd 706 MotnUnwdTurnCmmd 707 SrvoAxis RotFdbk 708 SrvoAxisUnwdFdbk 709 FdbkAxis RotFdbk 710 FdbkAxisUnwdFdbk 711 MotnCnfgErrParam 3 9 Note The Position Control function is disabled by default To enable the Position Control function set Par 147 bit 16 to 1 enable 3 10 Programming and Parameters Feedback Config Encoder Port 0 1 Calculated Fdbk Feedback Opt 0 1 222 MtrFdbk Sel Pri 233 Encdr 0 1 Config 225 Virtual Edge Rev 249 Fdbk Option ID 223 MtrFdbk Sel Alt 234 Encdr 0 1 Error 226 Motor Speed Est 251 FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk 777 PositionFdbk Sel 232 Encoder0 PPR 227 Motor Posit Est 250 FB 0 Posit 224 TachSwitch Level 231 Spd Fdbk 228 MtrSpd Simulated 253 FB Spd Fdbk 300 Motor Spd Fdbk 230 Encdr0 Position 229 MtrPosit Simulat 252 FB Posit 762 Position Fdbk 242 PPR 259 Cnfg 73 Sp
265. 7 SinThetaE2 68 SinThetaE3 69 SinThetaE4 70 SinThetaE5 71 SinThetaE6 72 ThetaEcor 73 SinThtaEcor1 74 5 2 75 SinThtaEcor3 76 SinThtaEcor4 77 MulRef2B 78 SpdFdbk 79 Spdintegral 80 SpdPrportnal 81 SpdPI 82 SpdRef 83 SlipGainEst 84 SlipGainFf 85 Ws2 SlipGain 129 SlipGainFltr 130 SlipVdsCmd 131 SlpVdsCmdFit 132 VdsLastError 133 VdsPrportnal 134 VdsIntMnitor 135 MotorVIts 136 BusUtil 137 FieldlnitTm 138 IqsLimit 139 VqsCmdMotor 140 We2FieldWeak 141 Vqs2FieldWeak 142 VqsldsCmd 143 VqsMaxMotor 144 VqsMaxVbus 145 CalcPUMtrFIx 146 FldWklnitTim 147 FluxldsFfFit 148 FixVqsCmdFit 149 VqsError 150 VqsFluxPI 151 Vasintegral 152 VasPrportlt 153 VasPrportnl2 154 TestMark70 155 TestMark71 156 TestMark72 157 TestMark73 158 TestMark74 159 TestMark75 160 TestMark76 161 TestMark76 162 TestMark78 163 TestMark79 164 TestMark7A 165 TestMark7B 166 TestMark7C 167 TestMark7D 168 TestMark7E 169 TestMark7F 170 RWVuOut 171 RWVvOut RWVwOut RWuErr RWveErr RWwErr RWVuOut2 RWVvOut2 RWVwOut2 RWPosState RWNegState BusDropVolts RecoverVolts DbDuty VdsFdbkFltr VqsFdbkFltr VbusFdbkFltr VbusMemory VpEncOVelFbk VpEnc1VelFbk VPOptOVelFbk VPOptt VelFbk BitSelect1 BitSelect2 SrLssWeEst2 MulqsRef2 EstThetaByMV ETVdsFbkA ETVqsFbkA ETVdsFbkS ETVqsFbkS ETAtanVqVd ETByMtrVDfr VelRef2 VelOutput
266. 7 009 009 092 00 092 682 O22 500 87 661 00 9 0810002 VN 052 007 099 002 00 0041 082 Olc OrL 601 9 amp 1 SZ VN 052 009 009 052 9 6 092 952 2911 021 9 79 06 9 9510002 VN gt 051 9 6 SLE Gel 002 ScL 89 vvl 96 259 616 Sr VN 052 9 6 009 091 9 2 091 29 8EL 921 66817121 99 S lt 410002 VN 091 002 006 OLL 911 OL 0 821 98799 vi8 Sr VN 061 006 007 921 Gee ScL 8911 911 SOL 969 9001 SS 9 9600002 VN 001 006 lt 0 06 GLI 06 rl 901 48 7 689 LE VN 091 006 006 OLL 002 OLL 881 76 08 795 18 9 4 04002 VN 001 0521 0 06 091 06 cl v8 cL 84v 689 02 6 5900002 VN 001 ooz 002 0 Gel 04 98 v9 99 291 50 06 2402002 VN z 09 0911 051 09 06 09 bl 99 782 981 zz 0700002 VN Sv9 383 WOvL 08 Gcl Sek Gy 08 Sy 09 LE OSE SL S8I z veodaoc c 9 383 WOvL 09 Oct 01 Ris 09 Ge Sy 06176 1 v8c Sk e 7200002 VN ScO 383 NOvL ScO 38Q NOvL 520 00 01 0 08 08 0 Gy 06 evc 902 SZ 0000 020 384 0 9 98 0 020 3c9O WNOTL 0 09 09 0c 06 02 Fee 221 vSL OOL WHEL GS GZ 100 0 910 383 WNOPL 912 180 07 912 100 071 SI Gy Gy 9 Ge 91 v4 GZ 801 Y 99 00002 VN 012 48 0 1 012 80 09 019 320 0 91 0 0 S 94 St CELI 66 28 99 6 1 0480002 VN 699
267. 7 Mtr Current Lim 356 Limit Status 304 MC TP2 Select 473 Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt 223 Limited Spd Ref 4 MC TP2 Value 474 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri 222 Update Rate 289 Min Flux 360 Mtr I2T Calibrat 339 Lin1Stahl Status 291 Min Spd Ref Lim 30 Mtr 2 Count 341 Line Undervolts 409 MOP Control 1086 Mtr 2 Curr Min 337 Linear1 Config 285 MOP High Limit 1088 Mtr 2 Spd Min 338 Lineari CPR 290 MOP Level Dint 1092 Mtr 2 Trp ThrH 340 Linear1 Status 286 MOP Level Real 1090 Mtr NP Pwr Units 6 Linear1 TP Data 288 MOP Low Limit 1089 Mtr OL Pend Cnfg 372 Linear1 TP Sel 287 MOP Rate 1087 Mtr OL Trip Cnfg 371 Load Estimate 221 MOP Scale Dint 1091 Mtr Trq Curr Ref 305 Load Frm UserSet 198 Motn Axis Resp 689 Mtr Vds Base 434 Local I O Status 824 Motn Axis Status 687 Mtr Vqs Base 435 Logic 1A Bit 1064 Motn AxisControl 688 Mtring Power Lim 127 Logic 1A Data 1063 Motn Cnet Status 690 MtrPosit Simulat 229 Logic 1B Bit 1066 Motn CoarseMulti 685 MtrSpd Simulated 228 Logic 1B Data 1065 Motn Config 686 MulDiv 1 Div 1055 Logic 2A Bit 1068 Motn Event Ctrl 692 MulDiv 1 Input 1053 3 112 Programming and Parameters
268. 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 1 701 FORE ro MR Default 0 Encoder 0 election for the Motion Feedback Only Axis feedback source ione 0 4 24 Note Options 5 6 are only available when compatible feedback option card is installed Options E 1 2 Reserved 8 SL DirlntRx1 3 Reserved 9 SL DirlntRx2 4 Motor Sim 10 SL DirlntRx3 5 FB Opt Porto 702 FdbkAxis FdbkVal Default 0 RO 32 bit Present value of the selected feedback for the Motion Feedback Only Axis Min Max 2147483648 Integer 703 Motn TP Select Default 0 SrvoAxisCnfgxe Selector for diagnostic testpoint relating to Motion functionality Options 0 SrvoAxisCnfg 16 CST Upper 1 2 SrvoAxisUnwd 17 FBonlyFbkRaw 2 Marker Dist 18 Reserved 3 HomeEvent X 19 Rx Seq 4 Watch Posit 20 0 Rx Msg 5 Posit 21 0 Tx Msg 6 SrvoMRP 22 Syn Rx Seqi 7 SrvoAct Ofst 23 Syn Rx Msg 8 PositRegis1 24 Syn Tx Msg 9 PositRegis2 25 Rx Seq 10 FdbkAxisCnfg 26 Rx Msg 11 FdbkAxisUnwd 27 Tx Msg 12 FdbkMRP 28 Rx Seq 13 FdbkAct Ofst 29 Asy Rx Msg 14 TimeEvntStat 30 Asy Tx 50 15 CST Lower 31 Reset Msg Programming and Parameters 3 81 za 5 5755 No Description
269. 8 Unbalanced 1 4 Ungrounded 1 4 Documentation P 1 DPI Communication Configurations A 4 Index 2 Drive Config 3 4 Drive Frame Sizes P 3 Drive Ratings A 8 Drive Status 4 1 Drive Status Indicator 2 4 DriveLogix Controller P 2 Drives Support P 2 Dynamic Brake Resistor 1 16 Dynamic Control Configuration 3 5 E Electrostatic Discharge P 4 EMC Directive 1 29 EMI RFI Filter Grounding RFI Filter 1 6 Enclosure Rating 1 3 Encoder Interface Board High Resolution A 18 Encoders H 2 ESD P 4 F Factory Defaults Resetting to D 4 Fan Voltage 1 10 1 14 Fault Non Resettable 4 1 Fault Descriptions 4 4 Fault Queue D 4 Faults Common Start Up 2 5 Manually Clear 4 4 Manually Clearing 4 4 Faults and Alarms 4 1 Feedback Option Resolver G 1 Filter RFI 1 6 Frame Sizes P 3 Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings A 6 Fuse Ratings A 8 Fuse Size A 6 Fuse Type A 7 G General Precautions P 4 Grounding Filter 1 6 Recommended Scheme 1 5 Shields 1 6 Grounding Requirements 1 5 H Hard Enable Circuitry 1 23 High Resolution Stegmann Specifications F 1 High Resolution Encoder Interface Board A 18 High Speed Inputs 1 27 HIM D 1 ALT Functions D 2 External and Internal Connections D 1 External Connections D 1 Internal Connections D 1 LCD Display Elements D 2 Removing the HIM D 6 HIM Indication 4 4 HIM Menu Structure D 3 D 4 HIM Menus Diagnostics D 4 Memory Storage D 4 Preferences D 4 Hi Resolution Encoder Fee
270. 8 8 5 lt 25 2 2 2 88 o o o 5 CC 02 O Default 0 0 0 JO lO 0 JO 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 1 True Table 259A FIR Filter Settings Bit 12 11 10 Taps 000 1 64 127 a a 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 16 0 1 1 0 1 1 Status Indicates faults on the Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option e Bit 8 Open Wire indicates an open wire fault The feedback option card checks for a pre determined constant value If this value is not within tolerances an open wire fault is declared A quadrature check also is done If an error occurs during the check the ope wire check is aborted If 3 quadrature errors occur in succession the open wire check will complete and the constant value checked again If this value is not within tolerances the fault is declared Bit 9 PowerSup Er indicates the failure of the power supply Bit 10 PwrUpDiag Er indicates the option board failed its power up diagnostic test The pattern on the FPGA must be identical to the pattern written from the DSP or the board status test will fail Bit 11 MsgChksum Er indicates a messag
271. 88 UserData Dint 08 1009 Xsync In 2 790 UserData Dint 09 1010 Xsync In 3 793 UserData Dint 10 1011 Xsync Out 1 789 UserData Real 01 1012 Xsync Out 2 791 UserData Real 02 1013 Xsync Out 2 Dly 792 UserData Real 03 1014 Xsync Out 3 794 UserData Real 04 1015 Xsync Out 3 Dly 795 UserData Real 05 1016 Xsync Status 786 UserData Real 06 1017 Zero Speed Lim 160 UserData Real 07 1018 UserData Real 08 1019 3 116 Programming and Parameters Notes Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the PowerFlex 7008 A list and description of drive faults with possible solutions when applicable and alarms is included For Information on See page Faults and Alarms 4 1 Drive Status 4 1 Manually Clearing Faults 4 4 Fault Descriptions 4 4 Faults and Alarms A fault is a condition that stops the drive There are two fault types Table 4 A Fault Type Descriptions Type Fault Description D Non Configurable cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared Q User Configurable Programming and commissioning personnel can configure the drive s response to these exception events Responses include e gnore Alarm Fault Coast Stop Fault Ramp Stop Fault Current Limit Stop Drive Status The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored Any changes will be indicated through the front panel LEDs and or t
272. 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 328 Alarm Status 3 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions These events are from Par 322 Exception Event3 Bit 11 HH HW Ver is used to indicate a non configurable High Horsepower hardware version fault Bit 12 HH CurUnbinc is used to indicate a non configurable High Horsepower output current unbalanced fault e Bit 13 HH VitUnbInc is used to indicate a non configurable High Horsepower Bus voltage unbalanced fault Bit 29 Anlgin1 Loss is used to indicate non configurable Analog Input 1 loss fault Bit 30 2 Loss is used to indicate non configurable Analog Input 2 loss fault Bit 31 Anlgln3 Loss is used to indicate non configurable Analog Input 3 loss fault Notes Bits 16 20 and 23 were added for firmware version 2 04 Bits 11 12 13 29 30 and 31 were added for firmware version 3 01 Options 5 5 5 Lx 5555555555553 DPA 8 olo gt g gg glg ggl gl l l gt l 5 5 z 5 O IO IO JO IO IO JO IO E 515 5158 686666866 58855 55 55555 55 75 5 0 es J gt gt gt gt Defaut 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 jO 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 JO 0 0 0
273. 902 see sud sed oss sud 190 2 see VN 008 002 sud1ed 0091 sud 198 099 sud 0011 sud 089 996 084 089 ces 009 OSv sud ied 2 098 sud jed 2 972 sud 2 oo9 sud Jed 2 SZE VN 0021 0091 syd 198 0024 sud 08 sud ied 0061 640190 osz 906 679 069 067 069 009 0690002 0079 008 0021 0001 928 000 azg Or8 029 00 sce veelose 0079 008 0021 007 529 0011 929 092 099 009 06 607 097 01 0090002 0099 008 008 000 005 008 009 0 4 8 9 982 Loe 096 006 0099 z 008 0021 0021 9 9 006 9 9 044 909 097 692 056 0 0971002 00 7 009 008 008 9 6 9 9 9 6 009 097 002 rez 082 052 0027 008 008 0001 005 008 009 009 707 982 toe 292 006 01 5820002 0012 007 00 099 506 005 067 9892 161 062 002 0012 00 008 008 9 6 9 9 9 6 09 062 008 282 09 6 004002 00 2 007 009 099 092 007 osz 017 906 602 091 66 001 00 2 007 00 00 008 Sze Oky 282 192 702 92 1002 6 1921002 StoquiNn o gj XEN 2 XEN MIN g XEN 296 u 1 3009 QN 2 p 40199104d 3 5510 9042 uan aiqeisnipy Jexeeug 5 sBuneu gt
274. 99 O O O PS 120 y Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP 15A14F Common Bus Drives w Precharge Only Frame 6 150 HP Normal Duty Frame 6 150 HP Normal Duty 650V DC Input 480 V AC Input IS I Hi fi i amp MOV Jumpers BR2 BR1 DC Dc USE7S COPPER WIRE ONLY TORQUE 52 INLB 6 NW Input Filter Capacitor Common Mode Capacitor Common Mode Capacitor 15 Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP 15A14F BR2 pri DC DC amp MOV Jumpers Aral Common Bus Drives wPrecharge Oniy 75 COPPER WIRE ONLY TORQUE 52 NLB 6 NW Z nput Filter Capacitor HI d 9 Oh o 2
275. Beyujpeuye queasy queasy 0 eye queasy Wo4 eleyeqieeypeuye queasy Wo4 gleyeqleeypeuye queasy 1 2 pouyo quesm ejegjeespeuyequesm ejegjeespeuygequesm ejegjeespeuygequesm woy eyegjieespeuyequesm ejegjeespeuyequesm ejegjeespeuygequesm geqe ypauya gsn eyegjieespeuyequesm doo1gBewpds 1 4 deigenbuo 1 oejesepojybuo pds 1 4 1 Be 1 zoxiBo1eAuquioi J 1 OL 1 OL Aueun2 1 OL Jewenbuo 1 OL 4 1 OL 561521601 x1607 OL J043u02 lt
276. DI Bit 8 Open Wire indicates an open wire fault Options B 5 5 55 5 55 5 5 515 5 5 81818181818 8 IE Default 0 0 0 O 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 JO JO 0 0 0 j0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 287 Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select Linear Feedback data displayed in Par 288 Linear TP Data Options 0 Zero 4 L1 EPR e Value 0 Zero displays a value of zero _ 4 T 3 1 L1 Edge Time 5 L1 Edge Mode e Value 1 L1 Edge Time displays the change displays the latency or edge time the time 4 2 L1 dEdge 6 L1nMax since the last update of Par 252 FB Posit 3 1dTime 7 41 Delta2Err Value 2 L1 dEdge displays the change in Par 252 FB Posit since the last feedback sample Value 3 L1 DTime displays the change in
277. DPI port 2 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional drive at port 2 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud 51 Loss Port 3 D The device at DPI port 3 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional drive at port 3 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud 52 DPI Loss Port 4 D The device at DPI port 4 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional drive at port 4 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud 53 DPI Loss Port 5 The device at DPI port 5 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional drive at port 5 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud 54 DPI Loss Port 6 D The device at DPI port 6 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional drive at port 6 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud 55 Net Loss DPI P1 A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 1 and the network Verify status of network 56 Net Loss DPI P2 A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 2 and the network Verify status of network 57
278. Enable to enable the operation of the internal brake transistor e Setbit 1 Brake Extern to configure the brake to use an external resistor Bit 0 PowerFlex 7005 Frame 1 to 6 Lo Pwr Strct Bit 1 PowerFlex 7005 above Frame 6 Hi Pwr Strct Bit 3 PowerFlex 7005 Frame 12 Note Bit 3 Parallel was added for firmware version 3 01 Options o lt 5 2222 5 29525 5 5 515 5 5 5 5 5 5 lt lt gle CC 0 Defaut 0 O 1 1 000000 1 JO 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 BusReg Brake Ref Units Sets the turn on voltage for the bus regulator and brakes Enter a percentage of the high Default voltage setting for the voltage class 0 a 400 480V drive 111 x 2 x 480 VDC Brake Units Limits the power delivered to the external Dynamic Brake DB resistor for one second Default without exceeding the rated element temperature You may change the value of this parameter only if you have selected and external DB resistor set bit 1 Brake Extern of Par 414 Brake Bus Cnfg If this rating is not available from the resistor vendor you can approximate it with this equation Par 416 Brake PulseWatts 75 000 x Weight where Weight equals the weight of resistor wire element in pounds not the entire weigh
279. False Bit 7 654 3210 1 True Logic Mask Determines which adapters can control the drive Start Mask Controls which adapters can issue start commands Jog Mask Controls which adapters can issue jog commands Direction Mask Controls which adapters can issue forward reverse direction commands Fault Mask Controls which adapters can clear a fault Stop Owner Indicates which adapters that are presently issuing a valid stop command Start Owner Indicates which adapters that are presently issuing a valid start command Jog Owner Indicates which adapters that are presently issuing a valid jog command Direction Owner Indicates which adapter is currently has exclusive control of direction changes Fault Clr Owner Indicates which adapter is currently clearing a fault Options Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Terminal Default 1 1 11 WW Woy 0 False Bit 7 654 3210 1 True MotnUpdatePeriod Unit uSec RO 32 0 Servo update period for the servo axis drive Default 2000 Integer Min Max 1 999999 Motn CoarseMulti Default 4 RO 32 bit Number of Par 684 MotnUpdatePeriod comprising one Course Update Period from the Min Max 2 16 Integer Motion Period Motn Config Configuration bits pertaining to Motion related functions for the Servo axis o Options O 2
280. L Activ The controller is communicating with all the devices in its configuration Bit 13 DL I O Alarm One or more devices in the I O configuration of the controller are not responding Bit 14 DL Fault The controller is not communicating to any devices and is faulted Bit 15 DL ComActive RS 232 activity Bit 16 DL Fault The controller detected a non recoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Bit 17 DL NotActive If the controller is a new then it requires a firmware update or if the controller is not new a major fault occurred Bit 18 DL OK Controller is OK Bit 19 DL Loading The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory Bit 20 DL CF Flash The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card Bit 21 DL CF Format The CompactFlash memory is not initialized Bit 22 DL CF Error CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options L Gis iSlelols 5 5 gt 5 2 8 5 2 5 2 2 2 5555 515 5555 55 3 5 2 S S B 2 cle e 2 5 15 5 52 2222 cC C IA 9 0 0 0 02 0 0 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 jO 0 0
281. LAT Maximum Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 SLAT Dwell Time SLAT control dwell time The time in seconds that the drive can be above the error setpoint in Par 119 SLAT ErrorSetpnt before returning to the SLAT min or SLAT max mode Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Trq PosLim Actl Sets the internal torque limit for positive torque reference values The positive internal motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value Trq NegLim Actl Sets the Internal torque limit for negative torque reference values The internal negative motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value Torque Pos Limit Sets the external torque limit for positive torque reference values The external positive motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value Torque Neg Limit Sets the external torque limit for negative torque reference values The external negative motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value Mtring Power Lim Sets the maximum motoring positive power of the drive This can be calculated by multiplying the desired maximum motor torque and the maximum motor speed A value of 1 0 nominal motor power Regen Power Lim Sets the maximum regenerative negative power of the drive This can be calculated by multiplying the desired maximum motor torque and the maximum motor speed A value of 1 0 nominal motor power Note The default value for this parameter was changed
282. Logic Status 155 Motn TP Value 704 5 Actual Lim 352 Logic TP Data 162 MotnCnfgErrParam 711 u Offset 453 Logic TP Sel 161 MotnPositLockTol 697 w Offset 454 Logic Cmpr State 1062 MotnUnwdTurnCmmd 706 Jerk 42 LstFaultStopMode 331 MotnUpdatePeriod 684 Jog Mask 672 Max Spd Ref Lim 31 Motor Ctrl Ackn 167 Jog Owner 679 Maximum Freq 532 Motor Ctrl Cmmd 166 Jog Speed 1 29 Maximum Voltage 531 Motor Ctrl Mode 485 Jog Speed 2 39 MC Build Number 456 Motor Flux Est 359 Kd Current Limit 364 MC Cmd Lim Cnfg 382 Motor Freq Ref 296 Ki Current Limit 363 MC Diag Done 519 Motor NP FLA 2 Language 201 MC Diag Error 1 463 Motor NP Hertz 3 Leak Indc 493 Diag Error 2 464 Motor NP Power 5 Leak Indc Satur2 494 MC Diag Error 3 465 Motor NP RPM 4 Leak Inductance 492 MC Diag Status 518 Motor NP Volts 1 LED Status 554 MC FaultTPSelect 475 Motor NTC Coef 487 Lgx Closed 388 MC FaultTP Value 476 Motor OL Factor 336 Lgx Comm Format 600 MC Firmware Rev 457 Motor Poles 7 Lgx CommLossData 385 MC Generic 1 459 Motor Posit Est 227 LinkChngCnfg 389 MC Generic 2 460 Motor Spd Fdbk 300 Lgx OutOfRunCnfg 386 MC Generic 3 461 Motor Speed Est 226 Lgx Timeout Cnfg 387 MC Generic 4 462 Motor Speed Ref 301 LimGen X axis In 206 MC Self Diag Err 458 Motor Stall Cnfg 374 LimGen Y axis Mn 205 MC Status 555 Motor Stall Time 373 LimGen Y axis Mx 204 MC TP1 Bit 468 Motor Torque Ref 303 Limit Gen Hi Out 207 MC TP1 Select 466 MotorFluxCurr FB 312 Limit Gen Lo Out 208 MC TP1 Value 46
283. MC TP1 Select 905 SL Rx CommFormat e 266 Heidn Encdr Type 787 Xsync Gen Period 906 SL Rx DirectSel0 268 Resolver Cnfg 825 Dig In1 Sel 907 SL Rx DirectSel1 e 272 0 SpdRatio 826 Dig In2 Sel 908 SL Rx DirectSel2 e 316 SynchLink Status 827 Dig In3 Sel 909 SL Rx DirectSel2 322 Exception Event3 828 Dig In4 Sel 1000 UserFunct Enable e 328 Alarm Status 3 829 Dig In5 Sel Added new fault codes and descriptions actions 4 4 Specifications Table and Recommended Protection Devices tables updated 1 amp 6 Updated and New Control Block Diagrams 1 Updated HIM Overview to include HIM menu chart and steps for viewing editing and linking D 1 parameters using the HIM Added new Appendix PowerFlex 700S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications soc 4 Notes Summary of Changes Preface Table of Contents Important User Information 1 2 Manual Updates i 1 Who Should Use This Manual P 1 What Is Not This 1 P 1 Recommended P 1 Conventions ne bee BAe Bea EOS E REI ONES P 3 Driver Brame SIZES 5i uw uei eR ER ee Wot bee iy aes 3 General Precautions 0 rs
284. Motor Name Plate and Rating Specifications Motor NP System Cont Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA Frequency Motor NP RPM Motor NP Motor Current peak Stall Torque Motor Max Model Number line to line V rms rms Hz oper rpm Power KW _ Poles Arms N m RPM rpm Parameter 1 2 3 4 5 7 MPL A310P 230 3 4 294 0 4410 0 73 8 9 9 1 58 5000 MPL A310F 230 21 185 3 2780 0 46 8 6 6 1 58 3000 MPL A320P 230 6 4 271 3 4070 1 30 8 20 9 3 05 5000 MPL A320H 230 4 6 208 7 3130 1 00 8 13 6 3 05 3500 MPL A330P 230 8 5 280 7 4210 1 80 8 26 9 4 08 5000 MPL A420P 230 9 0 268 7 4030 2 00 8 32 5 4 74 5000 MPL A430P 230 11 9 234 0 3510 2 20 8 47 4 5 99 5000 MPL A430H 230 8 6 184 7 2770 1 80 8 31 8 6 21 3500 MPL A4520P 230 124 234 0 3510 2 20 8 35 4 5 99 5000 MPL A4520K 230 10 6 223 8 3350 2 10 8 30 4 5 99 4000 MPL A4530F 230 9 5 144 7 2170 1 90 8 29 7 8 36 2800 MPL A4530K 230 144 196 0 2940 2 50 8 43 8 8 13 4000 MPL A4540C 230 6 6 93 3 1400 1 50 8 20 5 10 20 1500 MPL A4540F 230 13 0 162 0 2430 2 60 8 38 2 10 20 3000 MPL A520K 230 16 3 208 0 3120 3 50 8 46 0 10 70 4000 MPL A540K 230 29 3 180 7 2710 5 50 8 84 9 19 40 4000 MPL A560F 230 29 3 125 3 1880 5 50 8 84 9 27 90 3000 MPL B310P 460 17 310 0 4650 0 77 8 3 0 1 58 5000 MPL B320P 460 32 318 8 4700 1 50 8 5 0 3 05 5000 MPL B330P 460 43 274 0 4110 1 80 8 7 0 4 18 500
285. Motor Power Ratio The drive to motor rating cannot exceed a 2 1 ratio The drive to motor rating cannot exceed a 2 1 ratio Category Control Specification Supplemental Information A 3 Method Induction Motor Brushless Motor Frames 1 6 690V Drive frames 5 amp 6 only Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency Indirect Self Organized Field Oriented Control Current regulated Ratings apply to all drives Refer to the PowerFlex 7005 Phase Il Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for derating guidelines The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12 pulse in a configured package Frames 9 amp up Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency Indirect Self Organized Field Oriented Control Current regulated Ratings apply to all drives Refer to the PowerFlex 7005 Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for derating guidelines The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12 pulse in a configured package Carrier Frequency Drive rating 4 kHz Settings 2 4 6 8 10 kHz 6 kHz is for V Hz operation only Drive rating 2 kHz Settings 2 4 6 8 10 kHz 6 kHz is for V Hz operation only Output Voltage Range 0 to rated motor voltage 0 to rated motor voltage Output Frequency Range 0 400 Hz 0 400 Hz Speed Control Speed regulation without feedback Speed regulation without feedback 0 1 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 120 1 operat
286. Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel 2 Sensorless Notes Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode must be set to FOC for Sensorless feedback selection to be 3 Reserved active Selection 5 is only available when compatible feedback option card is installed This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 223 Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel Default 2 Sensorless Selects alternate feedback device if the feedback device selected in Par 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Options 0 Encoder 0 4 Motor Sim Pri fails 1 Encoder 1 5 FB Opt Porto Notes Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode must be set FOC for Sensorless feedback selection to be 2 Sensorless active Selection 5 is only available when compatible feedback option card is installed This 3 Reserved parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 224 TachSwitch Level Units RW Real Sets the detection level for the automatic tach loss switchover routine A drop in feedback Default 10 0000 speed at this percent of rated speed over 0 5 msec will cause a tach switch from primary to Min Max 5 0000 25 0000 alternate feedback device This feature is enabled when bit 16 Auto Tach Sw in Par 153 Control Options is selected Setting this level lower will make the tach switch detection more sensitive and lower the minimum speed at which a tach switch can occur Setting this level higher will make the tach Switch less sensitive and raise the minimum speed for tach switch
287. N S IHS OverTem a 0 1 9 9 NTC Shorted Drive OL TP Data Displays the value selected by Par 347 Drive OL TP Sel Bit 0 NTC Shorted indicates the Negative Temperature Coefficient NTC device has a short circuit Default Options Default Min Max P U 8 0000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 8 0000 0 0000 8 0000 degC 0 0000 50 0000 300 0000 Bit 2 HS OverTemp indicates heatsink temperature is above 105C for ratings 1 1 11 0A 115C for 14 34A 100C for 40 52A Bit 3 HS Pending indicates heatsink temperature is above 95C for ratings 1 1 11A 105C for 14 34A 90C for 40 52A Bit 4 IT Trip indicates the drive has exceed the 3 second rating of either the 150 normal duty rating or 200 of the heavy duty rating Zero Zero fAbslsCurr fDelta fAbslqCurr OL P OL m OLK fOL_g fOL intg intg 10 flnvOLClim 11 fJuncDegc 12 13 4605 14 4605 15 435 16 f8sAmp 17 fRatiolnvMtr 18 fRatioMtrInv 19 iConvertStat 20 flgotThres 21 flgbtSlope 22 flgbtEnergy 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ig a RO Real RO Real RO Real Bit 6 IT Foldback indicates the drive closed loop current limit is in a fold back condition The value of the fold
288. NTION PowerFlex 7008 drives contain protective MOVs Grounding Requirements Installation Wiring 1 5 Input Power Conditioning Certain events on the power system supplying a drive can cause component damage or shortened product life These conditions are divided into 2 basic categories 1 All Drives The power system has power factor correction capacitors switched in and out of the system either by the user or by the power company The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6000 volts These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line or by events such as lightning strikes The power source has frequent interruptions 2 5 HP or Less Drives in addition to 1 above The nearest supply transformer is larger than 100 or the available short circuit fault current is greater than 100 000A The impedance in front of the drive is less than 0 5 If any or all of these conditions exist it is recommended that the user install a minimum amount of impedance between the drive and the source This impedance could come from the supply transformer itself the cable between the transformer and drive or an additional transformer or reactor The impedance can be calculated using the information supplied in the technical document Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI The drive Safety Ground PE must be connected to system ground Gro
289. OL g ee gueBeyupeuyequesq 0 aequeBeyupeuyequesm LL eiegieespeugequesm Wo4 o 195 suonoeuuo 1 LoxiboeAuquiou4 lt 1 4 lt 869 01607 1 0 oL Cazo 2 eseud S004 peeds dieu uv c Jeu peedg jndino pds sod z peeds les uonisod 0 0 UOHOW 20 eq JSNW jeseJg oJezx 0 JOUOD YO eq jsnuu 0 e qeu3 e qeu3 doo e qeuz 1611 pds D 16 snes 91607 UONOW 61 1euuo x61 OL eAug 28 Control Block Diagrams Notes Application Notes For additional application notes refer to the PowerFlex 7005 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO003 For Information on
290. Options Default Options Default Options Default Options m a Programming and Parameters Linkable Read Write Ignore Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop Alarm Ignore 3 Alarm 4 FltCoastStop FitCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp 3 53 Data Type 3 54 Programming and Parameters o 8 Description Values 52 5 381 PreChrg Err Cnfg Default 2 Alarm Enter a value to contigure the drive s response to a Precharge Error exception event Options 0 Ignore Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event H Alarm occurs Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit Er FitGoaststop when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event 382 MC Cmd Lim Default 2 Alarm Enter
291. P Sel 564 Trend Trig Data 896 51 Accum 363 HiHp GndFlt Cur 246 Spd Fdbk TP RPM 565 Tend 897 SLBOF 364 GndFit 247 Spd Fdbk TP Data 566 Trend PreSamples 898 SLCRC Err Limit 378 Interp Fit Cnfg 261 Steg amp Hiedn TPSel 567 Trend Mark Dint 899 SLBOF Err Limit 395 59 OvrTrviCnfg 262 Steg amp Heidn TPDta 568 Real 332 700LEventStatus 396 Sft OvrirviCnfg 270 Resivr0 TP Sel 569 TrendBuffPointer 333 TO0LFaulStatus 397 Hrd OvrTrviCnig 271 0 TP Data 570 Trend Int Dint 334 700L AlarmStatus 398 Hrd OvrTrviCnfg 287 Lineari TP Sel 571 Real 399 Position ErrCnfg 288 Lineari TP Data 572 Trend Out Dint 368 NotLogin 412 Power TP Sel 573 Tong Real 413 Power EE TP Data 574 Trend In2 Dint 466 TP1 Select 575 Trend In2 Real 467 MC TP1 Value 576 Trend Out2 Dint 473 MC Select 578 Trend In3 474 MC TP Value 579 Trend In3 Real 475 MC FaultTPSelect EM cu 476 FaultTP Value EDDIE 717 PLL TP Select 582 Trend In4 718 DataDint Trene int Maal 719 PLL TP DataReal 584 Trend Out4 Dint 585 Trend Out4 Real Note This parameter is used by PowerFlex 700L drives only 1145 PPMP TP Select 1146 PPMP TP DataDint 1147 PPMP TP DataReal 3 12 Programming and Parameters DriveLogix 1 0 SynchLink Config 600 Comm Format 904 51 Node Cnfg 601 From DL DataType 905 SL Rx CommFormat 60
292. Pass Filter BandWidth BW The filter has two functions e Basic noise reduction of input velocity Timed delay of input when feed forward is linked to an external master reference other than an input encoder The filter BW should be set for best tracking which occurs when the filter output coincides with the Loop filter output of PLL Usually that means setting its BW to the bandwidth of the master reference drive Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL Posit Out Phased Locked Loop position output This signal is precisely in phase with the input physical device A link should be made to it from the local drive auxiliary position input The local drive is the one implementing PLL Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL Posit OutAdv Phased Locked Loop position advanced output This signal is one position sample in advance of Par 731 PLL Posit Out A link is normally made to this parameter from SynchLink Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL FiltPositOut Phased Locked Loop internal low pass filter output This parameter is normally used to properly scale an external velocity reference See description of Par 729 PLL Ext SpdScale Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL Speed Out Phased Locked Loop velocity output This signal is used as a velocity feed forward It is precisely in phase with the physical input device A link should be
293. Provides an offset to absolute position Setting Par 740 Position Control bit 8 Xzero Preset presets Par 744 PositRef EGR Out Par 747 Position Cmmd Par 763 Position Actual and Par 765 Posit Actl Load with the value in Par 762 Position Fdbk minus Par 757 Abs Posit Offset upon drive enable pr Pt Posit Ref Provides position reference to the point to point position regulator when the value in Par 742 Position Ref Sel 2 Pt to Pt The initial value is latched upon position enable without causing movement changes to reference are relative to the latched position unless the position is re referenced by Par 740 Position Control bit 10 Pt Pt Position moves may be made within the limits of plus or minus 31 bits Point to point reference may be changed and even reversed during a move Pt Pt Accel Time Acceleration time sec to base speed active only in point to point mode Acceleration to a relatively low speed may be exponential Pt Pt Decel Time Deceleration time sec from base speed to zero active only in point to point mode Some tailing can be expected at the end of a move as the drive comes into command position It is left to the user to select a time that does not place the drive in current or torque limit Deceleration from relatively low speed may be exponential Pt Pt Filt BW Sets the bandwidth of a low pass filter which affects smoothness at the start of deceleration in the point to po
294. Prportl1 111 VasPrportnl2 112 TestMark70 113 TestMark71 114 TestMark72 115 TestMark73 116 TestMark74 117 TestMark75 118 TestMark76 119 TestMark77 120 TestMark78 121 TestMark79 122 TestMark7A 123 TestMark7B 124 TestMark7C 125 TestMark7D 126 TestMark7E 127 TestMark7F 128 RWVuOut 129 RWVvOut 130 RWVwOut 131 RWuErr 132 RWvErr 133 RWwErr 134 RWVuOut2 135 RWVvOut2 136 RWVwOut2 137 RWPosState 138 RWNegState 139 BusDropVolts 140 RecoverVolts 141 DbDuty 142 VdsFdbkFltr 143 VasFdbkFitr 144 VbusFdbkFltr 145 VbusMemory 146 VpEncOVelFbk 147 VpEnc1VelFbk 148 VPOptOVelFbk 149 VPOpt1VelFbk 150 BitSelect1 151 BitSelect2 152 SrLssWeEst2 153 MulgsRef2 154 EstThetaByMV 155 ETVdsFbkA 156 ETVqsFbkA 157 ETVdsFbkS 158 ETVqsFbkS 159 ETAtanVqVd 160 ETByMtrVDfr 161 VelRef2 162 VelOutput 163 Torque Est 164 TraEst Filt 165 PowerCalc 166 ThetaELiner 167 PprCntDfcOt 168 PprCntDfcTh 169 LinearPprCnt 170 ActiveFdbk 171 VdsComp Default if the selected value is integer data This parameter is a diagnostic tool you can use to view internal drive parameters This parameter should not be changed by the user Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 172 173 54096 2 5V 174 IgsLimFlux 175 IqsLimSlip 176 StatorCLimVp 177 Torque Err 178 Torque Prop
295. RO Real RO Real RO Real 17 MP Mtn Calc 18 MP AnlgPulse 19 MP Rate In 20 MP Rate Out 21 Gain 22 MP Kx 23 MP FrctAccmR 24 MP AccelRate 25 MP DecelRate 26 MP 27 5 Sum 28 5 Index 29 5 ArraySize 30 SC Once 31 SC Enable 32 SC Ipos RO 32 bit Integer 3 108 Programming and Parameters s No Description Values 5 1147 PPMP TP DataReal Default 0 0 RO Real Test point real data This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 1145 PPMP TP Min Max 2200000000 0000 Select is not integer data Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1150 2 2 In Default 0 V RW 32 bit Input value for a second Dint to Real value conversion Min Max 2147483648 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1151 2 12 Scale Default 0 0 4 RW Real Input value to scale the second conversion from Dint to Real This is a multiplication to the 2200000000 0000 input value after conversion to a Real value Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1152 Dint2Real2Result Default 0 0 RO Real This is the resultant output of the second conversion form value to Real value after Min Max 2200000000 0000 scaling Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Programming a
296. RS 485 2 DATA RS 485 1 WHIGN XX Connection Examples Figure 4 Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 12 pin DIN style connector PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 DIE BU f 42 POWER POWER 11 i J 11 NC REFSIN 10 I SH U 10 COMMON SIN 9 UT E gt 9 SHIELD REFCOS 8 Es PK ls g 4605 005 7 ox IL 2 gt 7 DATA RS 485 SHIELD 6 DIT 6 REFSIN SHIELD 5 DI WH 5 Li SIN NC 4 oL 4 NC 3 LI DATA RS 485 2 Ot 2 RS 485 DATA RS 485 1 1 REFCOS Figure 5 Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 10 pin MS style connector Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 DIE BU A RO POWER POWER 11 i m gt POWER COMMON REFSIN 10 DER C REFSIN 4SIN 9 NH REFCOS REFCOS 8 DIE BK GY E RS 485 GN 4COS 7 MAL DATA RS 485 SHIELD 6
297. RW 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Real 32 bit Integer Real Real Real Real Real Real Programming and Parameters 3 87 EE a Name Description Values 2025 776 XReg Spd Units RW Real The positive limit of total position regulator output Point to point mode uses this parameter to Default 176 4000 set the forward speed reference Min Max 0 0000 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu 777 PositionFdbk Sel Default 0 Encoder 0 Enter a value to select the position control feedback device The feedback device used for Options 0 Encoder 0 7 SL DirlntRx0 position control may be an independent selection from the motor speed control feedback 1 Encoder 1 8 SL DirlntRxt device in Par 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri or Par 223 Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel If the position feedback is to 2 Reserved 9 SL DirlntRx2 be the same as the motor feedback select option 3 Motor Fdbk This option will set the 3 Mtr Fdbk Pri 10 SL DirlntRx3 selected feedback of Par 222 Motor Fdbk Sel Pri or Par 223 Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt as the position 4 Motor Sim regulators position feedback 5 FB Opt Porto 6 FB Opt Notes Options 5 and 6 are only available when compatible feedback option card is installed This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 778 X Notch A
298. Real is multiplied by this number after the limit function Min Max 2200000000 0000 843 Anis Out2 Zero Units RW Real Applies an offset to the scaled value of Analog Output 2 This parameter is summed with the Default 0 0000 output of the scaling block This sum produces Par 844 Anlg Out2 Value Typically this value Min Max 20 0000 corresponds to 0 for Analog Output 2 844 Anlg Out2 Value Units Volt RO Real Displays the voltage reference for Analog Output 2 before the digital to analog conversion Default 0 0000 Min Max 10 0000 Programming and Parameters 3 93 No 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 Name ae CET E g Out Sel Dig to select the signal for use on Digital Output 1 If the desired signal is not available in the selection list choose option 0 User Select and link with Par 846 Dig Out1 Data and 847 Dig Outi Bit to select the desired parameter and bit for output Dig Outi Data ink a word to this parameter that will control Digital Output 1 The bit within the selected word that will control Digital Output 1 is set by Par 847 Dig Out Bit Dig Outi Bit Selects the bit from the word linked to Par 846 Dig Out1 Data that will change the status of Digital Output 1 e g when Par 847 Dig Out1 Bit equals 0 bit 0 of Par 846 Dig Out1 Data will control Digital Output 1 Dig Outi On Time efines the amount
299. Ref A Sel Default A 1 Spd Ref 1 28 Speed Ref B Sel TP the speed reference source for the drive The selected speed reference values Perault 2 gt Spo converge in the final selection of the drives speed reference with Par 152 Applied Logiccmd Options 0 Zero Speed 9 Preset Spd 5 and are selected with bits 28 29 30 nd a the Block Di in Appendix B f iption See the Block Diagrams in Appendix B for a description 32 Sum Sref 142 12 DPI Port 1 4 MOP Level 13 DPI Port 2 5 Preset Spd 1 14 DPI Port 3 6 Preset Spd 2 15 Reserved 7 Preset Spd 3 16 DPI Port 5 8 Preset Spd 4 29 JogSpeed 1 Units RPM RWiRea Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when responding to bit 18 Jog 1 of Par Default 0 0000 152 Applied LogicCmd Min Max 8 0000 pu Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 30 Min Spd Ref Lim Unit RPM RW Rea Sets the minimum speed reference limit This value may be negative or positive but not Default 0 0000 greater than Par 31 Max Spd Ref Lim Min Max 8 0000 Par 31 Max Spd Ref Lim Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 31 Max Spd Ref Lim Unit RPM RW Rea Sets the maximum speed reference limit This value may be negative or positive but not less Default 0 0000 than Par 30 Min Spd Ref Lim Min Max 30 Min Spd Ref Lim 8 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP
300. Reg TP Sel Enter or write a value to select Speed Regulator data displayed in Par 109 Spd Reg TP Data Note The values for options 10 amp 11 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Spd Reg TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 108 Spd Reg TP Sel Speed TorqueMode Selects the source for the drive torque reference Note Values 7 amp 8 were added for firmware version 3 01 Torque Ref 1 Supplies an external motor torque reference to the drive This parameter is divided by the value in Par 112 Ref1 Div A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor Torque Ref1 Div Par 111 Torque Ref 1 is divided by this number Use this parameter to scale the value of Par 111 Torque Ref 1 Torque Ref 2 Supplies an external motor torque reference to the drive This parameter is multiplied by the value in Par 114 Torq Ref2 Mult A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor Torque Ref2 Mult Par 113 Torque Ref 2 is multiplied by this number Use this parameter to scale the value of Par 113 Torque Ref 2 Torque Trim The amount added to Par 111 Torque Ref 1 and Par 113 Torque Ref 2 before the Speed Torque Mode Selector A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor Torque Step The amount added to the selected Torque Reference before notch filtering or limits are applied A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor Values Units Default Min
301. Rel800123 2T 3 T2014 2087x2 3 T2014 2087x2 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2087N11E9 x 1 HD foot mounted 1 Rel800123 2R 1 T2014 2087x1 1 T2014 2087x1 enclosure double shaft Advanced Micro 11 10 7 N A 14 AmciR11XC107 14 AmciR11XC107 Controls Inc AMCI G 2 PowerFlex 7005 Resolver Feedback Option Card Allen Bradley servo motors may be ordered with factory installed resolvers Table I specifies which factory installed resolvers are supported by the 7005 Resolver Feedback Option module Table Compatibility with Resolvers on Allen Bradley Motors Parameter 275 Parameter 275 Parameter 277 Reslvr0 Type Sel Reslvr0 Type Sel Reslvr0 Type Sel Setting for Phasel Setting for Phasel Setting for Phase Il Motor Resolver Type Compatible Notes Firmware 1 17 Firmware 2 XX Firmware 1 XX 1326 AB 230V Primary Resolver No Receiver type resolver not Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported supported 1326 AB 460V Primary Resolver Yes Transmitter type resolver 9 AB 164982 8 9 1326Ax 460v 9 1326Ax 460v supported 1326 AB 460V Secondary Yes e Secondary resolver is 13 129214 8 13 Reserved 13 Reserved Resolver geared to motor not intended for motor speed position feedback e Transmitter type resolver supported 1326AD 230V Rare Earth No Receiver type resolver not Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Primary Resolver supported 1326AH 460V Explosion Proof Yes Trans
302. Reserved lReserved Reserved lReserved 0 False 1 True e e e Default Bit M 0 0 1 1 e 5 14 13 12 0 28 4 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 RN Programming and Parameters 3 99 E 58558 No Description Values 2725 929 SL Dir Data Rx00 Default 0 RO 32 bit to Min Max 32 bits of data Integer 932 SL Dir Data Rx03 This is the SynchLink direct data received See Par 928 Rx Dir Data Type for data type configuration 933 Rx Buf Data Sets the data type for the SynchLink received buffered data If the word s bit is set the data type is floating point real If the bit is not set the data type is integer Options 515 515 5 8 8 8 8 8 8 55555 555 8 8 8 8 8 8 818 8 818 o dr acc S 5 85 leis fas CC 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 902 02 92 02 92 02 02 02 ND 02 02 92 92 Default 0 O 0 O 0 0 O
303. Rx09 646 DriveLogix20 944 SL Buf Data Rx10 945 SL Buf Data Rx11 946 SL Buf Data Rx12 947 SL Buf Data Rx13 948 SL Buf Data Rx14 949 SL Buf Data Rx15 950 SL Buf Data Rx16 951 SL Buf Data Rx17 Programming and Parameters Ser Functions 3 13 Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Digital Inputs Digital Outputs BitSwap Control 821 Analog I O Units 821 Analog I O Units 823 Digln Debounce 845 Dig Out Sel 860 BitSwap 1A Data 803 Anlg In1 Offset 831 Anlg Out1 Sel 825 Diglnt Sel 846 Dig Outi Data 861 BitSwap 1A Bit 801 Anlg Int Value 832 Anlg Out1 Dint 826 01912 Sel 847 Dig Outt Bit 862 BitSwap 1B Data 802 Anlg Ini Scale 833 Out1 Real 827 019113 Sel 848 Dig Outi On Time 863 BitSwap 1B Bit 804 Al1Filt Gain 834 Out1 Offset 828 Dig In4 Sel 849 Dig Outt OffTime 864 BitSwap 1 Result 805 AnlgIn1 Filt BW 835 Out Scale 829 Dig In5 Sel 850 Dig Out2 Sel 865 BitSwap 2A Data 800 Anlg Ini Data 836 Out Zero 830 Dig In6 Sel 851 Dig Out2 Data 866 BitSwap 2A Bit 1093 Anlg In1LossCnfg 837 Out Value 824 Local Status 852 Dig Out2 Bit 867 BitSwap 2B Data 809 Anlg In2 Offset 838 Anlg Out2 Sel 853 Dig Out2 On Time 868 BitSwap 2B Bit 807 Anlg In2 Value 839 Anlg Out2 Dint 854 Dig Out2 OffTime 869 BitSwap 2 Result 808 Anlg In2 Scale 840 Anlg Real 855 Rly Out3 Sel 870 BitSwap 3A Data 810 AI2Filt Gain 841 Out2 Offset 856 Rly Out3 Data 871 Bit 81
304. Sel 19 DSP Memory Error Flash memory does not match the SRAM memory Cycle the drive power If the fault remains replace the Main Controller Board 20 DSP Device Error A DSP VPL interrupt task has not been completed in the Cycle the drive power allotted time If the fault remains replace the Main Controller Board 22 Over Frequency Encoderless algorithm fails to converge on correct speed Two possible causes 1 Velocity regulator is attempting to run below motor s slip Speed 2 Frequency regulator pulls out and commanded motor frequency slows to maximum frequency limit 23 MC Commissn Fail The drive has failed to complete either the Motor Autotuning Verify that motor nameplate data is procedure or the Power Circuits Diagnostics test Parameters entered correctly into the drive 463 MC Diag Error 1 464 MC Diag Error 2 and 465 MC Verify the motor is wired for the correction Diag Error 3 display Motor Autotuning and Power Circuit voltage entering into the drive Diagnostic faults Verify the encoder if used and velocity Par 465 MC Diag Error 3 Drive current inductance voltage feedback is correct and speed are not within Motor Nameplate specifications This Change tuning mode in to Par 515 FVC fault occur most frequently on low HP motors Tune Config to 9 NoRotate Tune 24 DCBusOvervolt Bus voltage has exceeded 815V DC 400V class drives or Verify the AC Line 405V DC fo
305. Start command received amp controlling motor 11 AtLimit Speed Power Current or Torque is being limited referto 26 Command Run Run command received Par 304 12 Tach Loss SW Failure is detected in primary speed or position feedback 28 3 Spd Ref Act1 3 device amp drive has switched to secondary device 0 13 AtZero Spd Speed feedback is within limits defined in Par 160 31 LogixPresent 14 AtSetptSpd Speed feedback is within limits defined in Par 41 and 171 156 Start Inhibits Indicates which condition is preventing the drive from starting or running Note Bit 18 MC Config was added to this parameter for firmware version 2 03 ti c Options 2 gt v 121218 82122 215 5 215 2 15 2 2 5 5 2 5 5 8 5 2 5 8 gt 5 25 2 55 5 2 5 2 2 29 25 0 5 5 8 5 8 e S e 2 Ela G S 2 E E 5 5 2 2 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 157 Logic Ctrl State Indicates which logic control functions are enabled Bit 22 S Tst FulSpd set to 1 indicates that the Slip Auto Tune function is active Bit 23 Slip Test En set to 1 indicates that the drive is at speed for the Auto Tune function Note Bits 22 and 23 were added for
306. Switch Ctrl bit 0 SSW DataPass is not high the output will not be updated to the selected input If this parameter does not update check the setting of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable bit 1 User Params 1046 SelSwtch DintOut Default 0 RO 32 bit This value is the value of Par 1045 SelSwtch RealOut converted to a DInt value Use this Min Max 2147483648 Integer value for point to point positioning values 1047 Dint2Real1 In Default 0 4 32 0 Input value for a first DInt to Real value conversion Min Max 2147483648 Integer Note This parameter name changed from DInt2Real In to DInt2Real1 In for firmware version 3 01 1048 Dint2Real1 Scale Default 0 0000 4 Real Input value to scale the first conversion from Dint to Real This is a multiplication to the input Min Max 2200000000 0000 value after conversion to a Real value Note This parameter name changed from DInt2Real Scale to DInt2Real1 Scale for firmware version 3 01 1049 Dint2Real1Result Default 0 0000 RO Real This is the resultant output of the first conversion form value to a Real value after Min Max 2200000000 0000 scaling Note This parameter name changed from DInt2RealResult to DInt2Real1 Result for firmware version 3 01 1050 Real2DiInt In Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Input value for Real to Dint value conversion Min Max 2200000000 0000 1051 Real2Dint Scale Default 0 0000 RW Real Input value to scale the c
307. SynchLink data displayed by Par 893 SL Comm Data Options 0 Zero 13 BufSegErrTim 1 SL Src 14 Rx Sys Rev 2 SL Mult A In 15 Tx Axis Size SL Mult B In 16 Tx Dir Size 4 SL Mult Out 17 Tx Buf Size 5 Rx Axis Size 18 Tx Pkg Size 6 Rx Dir Size 19 Tx Seq Cnt 7 Rx Buf Size 20 Tx Index 0 8 Rx Pkg Size 21 Tx Index 1 9 Rx Seq Cnt 22 Tx Index 2 10 Rx Index 0 23 Rx Vendor ID 11 Rx Index 1 24 Rx ModuleTyp 12 Rx Index 2 25 Rx Serial 893 ISL Comm TP Data Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays data selected by Par 892 SL Comm TP Sel Min Max 2147483648 Integer 894 SL CRC Err Accum Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the total accumulated number of Cycle Redundancy Check CRC errors Clearing a Min Max 0 4294967296 Integer fault resets this accumulator This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window Refer to the SynchLink System Design Guide publication 1756 TD008 for PowerFlex 700S SynchLink topologies hardware and wiring details 895 SLCRC Error Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the number of CRC errors that occurred during the last test last 8 mS This data is Min Max 0 4294967296 Integer visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window 896 SL BOF Err Accum Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the tot
308. This will help minimize the possible shock hazard from cross coupled motor leads ATTENTION To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by Motor Cable Lengths Typically motor lead lengths less than 30 meters 100 feet are acceptable Motor lead lengths of 30 meters 100 feet to 246 meters 800 feet require shielded cable If your application dictates longer lengths refer to publication 20D TD002 Technical Data PowerFlex 7005 Drives Phase II Control for details Power Terminal Block Figure 1 3 shows the typical location of the Power Terminal Block in Frame drives The terminal block is located in the bottom section of the drive on Frame 2 5 drives Cable Entry Plate Removal If additional wiring access is needed the Cable Entry Plate on Frame 1 3 drives can be removed Simply loosen the screws securing the plate to the chassis The slotted mounting holes assure easy removal Important Removing the Cable Entry Plate limits the maximum surrounding air temperature to 40 C 104 F 1 10 Installation Wiring Power Wiring Access Panel Removal Frame Removal Procedure Replace when wiring is complete 1 2 amp 6 Partof front cover see page 1 2 3 Open front cover and gently tap slide cover down and out 4 Loosen the 4 screws and remove 5 Remove front cover see page 1 2 gently tap slide panel up and out Access Panel Removal Frame 3 drives utilize a panel cover over the power wiring
309. Used only in FOC modes Mtr Vqs Base Displays the motor torque producing q axis voltage command when running at nameplate motor speed and load This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Used only in FOC modes Vqs Max Displays the maximum torque producing q axis voltage allowed on the motor Adaptation is disabled below this voltage This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Used only in FOC modes Values Units Default Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Default Units Default Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Default Min Max Default Default Programming and Parameters R S 10 0 32767 1 0 0 0 100 0 x10 5 800 0 0 0 800 0 10 99 99 12 50 399 99 100 32767 5 1 0 0 0 195 3 x10 0 0 0 0 51 3 10 0 0 100 1 1 20 R S 10 0 32767 1 0 0 0 100 0 x10 96 50 0 0 0 799 9 x10 96 1 0
310. User Manual Status of secondary network if connected S9 7 Examine the Status STS LED Verify that it is flashing green If itis not in this state check the following possible causes and take the necessary corrective action Table D Common Causes of a Run Inhibit Examine Par 156 Run Inhibit Status bit Description Action 1 No power is present at the Enable Terminal TB2 16 Apply the enable 2 3 4 A stop command is being issued Close all stop inputs 5 loss event is in progress indicating a loss of the AC input voltage Restore AC power 6 supplied by the power structure EEprom is invalid or corrupt Cycle power If problem persists replace the power structure 7 Update in Progress Complete Flash Procedures 8 Drive is expecting a Start Edge and is receiving a continuous signal Open all start buttons and remove all start commands 9 Drive is expecting a Jog Edge and is receiving a continuous signal Open all jog buttons and remove all jog commands A conflict exists between the Encoder PPR programming Par 232 or Verify encoder data and reprogram 10 and the encoder configuration for edge counts Par 233 bits 4 4 5 T The drive cannot precharge because a precharge input is programmed Reprogram the input or close the precharge control contact and no signal is present Start input configured but stop not configured Prog
311. VN 0006 NWO INOY 001 002 006 001 0 1 00 91 8 24 109 60 1 09 2200002 VN 0006 NIWO INOY 00 0524 050 08 Scl 08 01 8 99 967 969 OS 5900002 80 00 9 NINO INOY 0 ooz 000 091 Obl 09 08 091 cS 2625 7 7 06 Ov 2500002 vS 000t NINO 0vL 879 38 0 09 091 0851 09 06 09 89 19 Ov SOE 7901 Se 0 0700002 615 000 0 9 72 48 1071 0s 601 Sel 0v 04 78 50 ve 692 16 amp Oc 9 7600002 497 000 282 18 1071 05 00117 00 Ge 09 96 144 661 42 900 Se St 02 2 7200002 682 0092 522 48 07 522 380 1071 522 302 071 0 08 08 90 09 90 991 661 OF SL L 2200002 2 9192 38 071 910 38C INOP E 9L0 420 W0rl 0c 06 06 92 0 94 SOL vk ScL GZ Ob L 7100000 eve 910 38 107 919 38 0 91 9 329 0 Sk 07 0v 02 Sj GOL 67 S6 54 92 00002 012 010 38 107 010 38Q INOV I 0L9 3c9 INOTI SI 0 0 Ol 91 01 0 88 08 29 69 6 9 0480002 SEL 98 38Q WOrL 98 3cO INOVL Jl 0c 0c 9 01 9 92 44 OS zel 6 z 1 0440002 LH 078 480 071 Org 3cO WOvL 4 Sl cl Y 8 Y 0 9 Sy 92 GI Z 601 908 120 07 SL 8 9 06 10 vi 9119 0 1420002 SREM Staquinn or XEN gj yy WIN o
312. a wn Q Cnv NotStart Cnv NotLogin Reserved HW Disable2 Reserved Pwr Suply2 8 gt oc Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Latch Err2 Phs V2 gt Phs U2 Reserved 2 9 Reserved O Latch Default 0 0 0 False 1 True B Reserved ha e D e N STHW Disable1 Suplyt 9 lAsym DcLinkt Ovr Volt e lOvr Currentt Dsat Phs W1 7 9 Dsat Phs V1 9 9 Dsat Phs Ut 0 0 0 1 1 11 A e 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 Programming and Parameters 3 49 No 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 Name Description Values 700L AlarmStatus Bit 0 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 1 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 2 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 3 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 4 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 5 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 6 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 7 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 8 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 14 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 15 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 16 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 17 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 18 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 19
313. a value to configure the drive s response to a Motor Controller MC Command d iso A Options 0 Ignore Limitation exception event This event is triggered when the motor controller detects limit of 1 Alarm the command values used in the motor controller and returns the exception event to the 2 FitCoastStop Velocity Position Loop VPL e Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event 383 SL CommLoss Data Default 1 Last State Enter a value to configures the drive s response to SynchLink communication loss Refer to Options 0 Zero Data Par 902 SL Error Status for possible causes of communication loss 1 Last State e Value 0 Zero Data Resets data to zero e Value 1 Last State Holds data in its last state ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 383 SL CommLoss Data lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive to hold the data in its last state You can set this parameter so that the drive resets the data to zero Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create haz
314. ak level detector Min Max 2200000000 0000 216 PkDtct2 In Dint Default 0 V RW 32 bit Integer input to second peak level detector Min Max 2147483648 Integer 217 PkDtct2 In Real Default 0 0000 4 IRW Real Floating point input to second peak level detector Min Max 2200000000 0000 3 32 Programming and Parameters ig 8 2585 lt No Description Values 512 8 218 2 Preset Default 0 0000 4 RW Real The second detector in set or hold modes compares this value to its input for level detection 2200000000 0000 When the detector trips in set mode it transfers the value of this parameter to its output 219 PeakDetect2 Out Default 0 00 RO Real Output from the second peak level detector Min Max 0 00 1200 00 221 Load Estimate Unis RO Real Displays the estimated load torque which is the side effect of the speed observer and does Default 0 0 not include torque to accelerate decelerate the motor if the inertia input is correct The 8 0 pu value is provided for display purposes 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri Default 0 Encoder 0 Selects primary feedback device The primary feedback device configuration must not be set Options 0 Encoder 0 4 Motor Sim to fault on an event in order to allow operational feedback switch over to the alternate M Encoder 1 5 FB Opt Porto feedback device set in Par 223
315. al accumulated number of Beginning of Frame BOF errors Clearing a fault Min Max 0 4294967296 Integer resets this accumulator This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window 897 SLBOF Error Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the number of BOF errors that occurred during the last test last 8 mS This data is Min Max 0 4294967296 Integer visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window 898 CRC Err Limit Default 2 RW 32 bit Identifies the number of CRC errors per test per 8 mS allowed before the drive declares 10 256 Integer SynchLink CRC Error exception event Set this limit on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window 899 SL BOF Err Limit Default 2 RW 32 bit The number of BOF errors per test per 8 mS allowed before the drive declares a SynchLink Min Max 0 256 Integer BOF Error exception event Set this limit on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window 900 SynchLink Rev Default 0 1 RO 16 bit Indicates the current revision of the local SynchLink Programmable Logic firmware Min Max 0 1 999 9 Integer 901 SL System Rev Default 10 001 RO 32 bit Indicates the system revision of the SynchLink network To be compatible on the network all Min Max 0 001 999 999 Integer nodes must have the same major revision 902 SLError Status 903 SLError History Indicates the presence of Syn
316. al resistance In addition a braided shield should be included and specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75 An additional foil shield can be greatly improve noise containment A good example of recommended cable is Belden 295xx xx determines gauge This cable has 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a 100 coverage foil and an 85 coverage copper braided shield with drain wire surrounded by a PVC jacket Other types of shielded cable are available but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length Particularly some of the newer cables twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known EMC Compliance Refer to CE Conformity on page 1 29 for details Installation Wiring 1 9 Cable Trays and Conduit If cable trays or large conduits are to be used refer to guidelines presented in the Grounding and Wiring Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives induced voltages unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends For the same reason if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled
317. al short This fault is detected when ever the actual IGBT gate is different than the commanded IGBT states This fault is detected by the Motor Control MC processor 30 MC Firmware One of the following Motor Control MC firmware errors has Cycle power occurred Reflash firmware MC Task Over Run Replace Main Controller Board Illegal Interrupt Self Diagnostic Fault Data Error 31 Error The precharge function has failed to complete within 30 Verify the value in Par 410 PreChrg seconds default of the precharge request The precharge time TimeOut out is configurable by Par 410 PreChrg TimeOut Verify the bit value in Par 411 PreChrg A precharge request is initiated when the DC Bus voltage is Control 1 Enbl PrChrg above the Undervoltage Trip level and the precharge input is high the requirement for the precharge being high can be bypassed by setting Par 411 PreChrg Control to 0 Hold PrChrg 32 PWM Asynch The Motor Control Processor is not synchronized with SynchLink 33 15volt Power The12V DC control voltage is outside the tolerance range The Replace switch mode power supply For positive voltage power must be within the band from 15 25 to smaller frames replace drive 11 4V DC The negative voltage power must be within the band from 16 6 to 10V DC 35 Parameter Chksum The checksum read from the EEPROM does not match the Cycle power che
318. ameSize Reserved Reserved Reserved RecBrkTimer ReconVmax1 ReconFreq ReconNgleAcc VsCmdAngleVf RecFreglnit SpeedRef CurFbkldsFbk CurFbklgsFbk VasThetaEst VdsThetaEst DebugFlag1 DebugFlag3 RecnSwitch SrLssSlip SrLssSlipFit BusLimitVBEr ParDecelRtMC ACRIqsRef ACRIqsCmd IqsCmdFltr AccDecRate RecThetaEx4 RecVqsFdbk RecVdsFdbk VdeFilter VaqsFdbkTrans VdsFdbkTrans Excitation ExciteStatus ExcitDir ThetaEsample Reserved RO 32 bit Integer Programming and Parameters 3 65 No 468 469 470 471 472 Description Values MC TP1 Bit Default Displays the data selected by Par 466 MC TP1 Select This display should only be used Min if the selected value is bit enumerated data Par 468 MC TP1 Bit is a diagnostic tool you Max can use to view internal drive parameters FVC CEMF Comp Units Displays the current regulator feedforward compensation Do not change this value Default Min Max Flux Reg P Gain2 Default Displays the additional proportional gain used at the start of Bus voltage limited field Min Max weakening Do not change this value Estimated Torque Default Displays the calculated motor shaft torque Min Max Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 PreCharge Delay Units Adjusts the delay between the time all other precharge conditions have been met and the Default time the drive leaves the precharge state Can be used to
319. ameter in the order in which they occurred Note Bits 7 amp 8 have been changed to Ground Fault for firmware version 2 04 Options M 85215 2 2 2 5 EE Ele e 1 gt 5 5 gt 88888 8888 3 8 lt lt 8 2518 gt 55 5 5 gt 55 5 5 Defaut 0 0 0 0 0 0 jO O jO 0 0 jO JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 020000 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 True Programming and Parameters 3 63 No 464 465 Bit 11 CurrSensor V indicates a current sensing fault in the V phase power structure of a frame 12 drive Bit 13 CurrSensor W indicates a current sensing fault in the W phase power structure of a frame 12 drive Bit 17 IFlux Range indicates that the Flux current is above 90 of the motor rated current 2 5 Name 5 Description Values sie MC Diag Error 2 Displays the second diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control MC Errors appear in this parameter the order in which they occurred i E E Options E E E E 8 2 525535 lt e lt
320. ar Table 268C Resolution and Resolver Tracking Speed e Setting bit 4 Energize energizes the resolver resetting the bit to zero de energizes the resolver Bit 5 Resolver Dir determines counting direction If clear direction is forward or up If set the direction is reverse or down Bit 9 Edge Time configures the method of sampling used by the Velocity Position Loop VPL Setting the bit chooses Edge to Edge sampling while resetting the bit to zero chooses Simple Difference sampling Simple Difference sampling calculates speed by examining the difference between pulse counts over a fixed sample time Edge to Edge sampling adjusts the sample time to synchronize with the position count updates from the daughter card improving the accuracy of the speed calculation Bits 10 SmplRate bt0 through 12 SmplRate bt2 configure the Finite Impulse Response FIR Filter see Par Table 2680 FIR Filter Settings This setting reduces the effect of noisy feedback on the system Refer to the Speed Position Feedback section of the PowerFlex 7005 with Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for details Note Bit 11 SmplRate bt0 is set to 0 False by default for firmware version 1 11 and bit 11 SmplRate1 is set to 1 True by default for firmware version 2 03 Options SIZ 5 o 2 le97 97275997 972799 997 5 2 2 9 9 92i 21 5 5 lt 21212 2 81212 2 18 212 1218 2
321. ards of injury or equipment damage 384 ISL Comm Loss Cnfg Default 2 FitCoastStop Enter a value to determine what is done with the data received from SynchLink when a ine 0 bap Options 0 Ignore communication loss occurs 1 Alarm Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event 2 FliCoastStop Occurs 3 Fit RampStop e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and the appropriate alarm bit 4 FltCurLimStp when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 384 SL CommLoss Cnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 385 Lgx CommLossData Default 1 Last State Enter a value to configure what drive does with the data recei
322. are in millimeters and inches 480 18 9 1150 45 28 3391337 400 15 75 1120 44 09 1142 9 315 176 9 390 Supplemental Information A 25 Figure 7 PowerFlex 7005 Frame 10 Dimensions 8 597 0 23 50 534 7 21 05 2275 0 erates 89 57 89 57 25 2201 8 86 68 T Y Y 632 5 24 90 605 5 23 84 32 3 498 0 42 0 1 27 19 61 lt 1 65 2234 0 87 95 7 This dimension is the depth for drives with the optional door mounted HIM installed Weight Ibs Drive Drive amp Packaging 597 23 5 2275 89 57 1632 45 24 9 1534 21 05 2201 75 86 68 432 950 447 985 Supplemental Information A 26 Figure PowerFlex 7005 Frame 11 621 74 24 48 605 5 23 84 498 0 420 ls 19 61 1 65 T E 32 25 1 27 A 2234 0 87 95 797 0 31 38 736 0 28 98 Allen Bradley
323. are version 2 03 Min Max 0 0 400 0 531 Maximum Voltage Units RW 16 bit Sets the highest voltage the drive will output Default 460 0 nteger Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Min Max 60 0 690 0 532 Maximum Freg Units RW 16 bit Sets the highest frequency the drive will output Default 1300 0 nteger Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Min Max 50 0 4000 0 533 Flux Gain Adjust Default 1055 0 RW 16 bit Adjusts the flux level used to enter the field weakening range Min Max 921 0 1126 0 nteger Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 537 SrLssAngleStbity Default 151 0 RW 16 bit Adjusts the electrical angle to maintain stable motor operation An increase in the value 0 0 32767 0 nteger increases the angle adjustment 538 51155 VoltStbity Default 93 0 RW 16 bit Adjusts the voltage to maintain stable motor operation An increase in the value increases Min Max 0 0 32767 0 nteger the output voltage adjustment 539 SrLss StbltyFilt Default 3250 0 RW 16 bit The coefficient is used to adjust the bandwidth of a low pass filter The smaller the value of Min Max 0 0 32767 0 nteger the coefficient the lower the bandwidth of the filter Programming and Parameters 3 73 8 a s No Description Values ei 540 V Hz Status Indicates the limit status of the V Hz Contr
324. ase speed motor speed above base speed Flux Rate Limit Sets the limit for the maximum rate of change for flux producing d axis current Flux Satur Coef This represents the amount of flux current required to compensate for the flux saturation effect of the motor Active only for FOC 2 motor control mode PM Mtr CEMF Comp Provides compensation for the torque producing q axis current in the permanent magnet motor mode IReg IGain Fctr Adjustment for current regulator integral frequency factor gain Ids Integ Fre Sets the break frequency of the flux producing d axis current regulator This and Par 430 Ids Reg P Gain determine the integral gain for the d axis current regulator Set by the autotune procedure Do not change this value Ids Reg P Gain Sets the proportional gain of the flux producing d axis current regulator Set by the autotune procedure Do not change this value Test Current Ref Sets the current reference used for Motor Control MC Test Mode Test Freq Ref Sets the frequency reference used for Motor Control MC Test Mode Note The default value was changed for firmware version 2 03 Test Freq Rate Sets the rate of change of frequency reference used for Motor Control MC Test Mode Mtr Vds Base Displays the motor flux producing d axis voltage command when running at nameplate motor speed and load This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value
325. at the settings of these parameters do not create hazards of injury or equipment damage Catalog Number Explanation Overview Position 1 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 200 D 2 1 0 b C d e f g h 2 c3 Drive ND Rating ND Rating Code Type 400V 50 Hz Input 480V 60 Hz Input 20D PowerFlex 700S Code Amps kW Code Amps Hp 2P1 2 1 0 75 2P1 2 1 1 0 b 3P5 3 5 15 3P4 3 4 2 0 Voltage Rating 5P0 5 0 2 2 5P0 5 3 0 Code Voltage Ph Prechg SBO 8 30 BS 240V ac 3 011 11 5 5 5 011 11 7 5 015 15 4 7 5 014 14 10 8 SOME 3 022 22 11 022 22 15 DiS aBov ae 3 030 80 15 027 27 20 5 600Vac 3 037 37 18 5 034 34 25 F 36 690V 3 043 43 22 040 40 30 H 3 540V de N 056 56 30 052 52 40 J 650V dc 072 72 37 065 65 50 K 3 810V dc N 085 85 45 077 77 60 932V dc N 105 105 55 096 96 75 325V 125 125 55 125 125 100 540V dc 170 170 90 156 156 125 650 Y 205 205 110 180 180 150 T 810V Y 260 260 132 248 248 200 W 932V dc Y 261 261 132 261 261 200 Note CE Certification testing has not been OD 300 160 300 300 250 performed on 600V class drives 385 385 200 385 385 300 gt Frames 5 amp 6 Only 460 460 250 460 460 350 88 Frames 5 4
326. ault 1 Fault X Alarm 0 Alarm 1 Alarm X Flash Mode 0 Not in Flash Mode 1 In Flash Mode xX Ready 0 Not Ready to Run 1 Ready to Run x At Limit 0 Not At Limit 1 At Limit X Tach Loss 0 Not Tach Loss Sw Sw 1 Tach Loss Sw x At Zero Spd 0 Not At Zero Speed 1 At Zero Speed X AtSetpt 0 Not At Setpoint Speed Spd 1 At Setpoint Speed X Enable On 0 Not Enabled 1 Enable On See Par 304 Limit Status in the PowerFlex 700S drive for a description of the limit status conditions Common mode cores are internal to the drive For information on output devices such as output contactors cable terminators and output reactors refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual Vol 2 The tables on the following pages provide PowerFlex 7005 drive ratings including continuous 1 minute and 3 second and recommended AC input line fuses and circuit breakers Fuse Size Fuse sizes are the recommended minimum size based on 40 C ambient 75 C wiring and U S N E C Other country state or local codes may require different fuse circuit breaker ratings Supplemental Information A 7 Fuse Type The recommend fuse type is listed below If available current ratings do not match the tables provided the fuse rating that exceeds the drive continuous rating should be chosen e EC BS88 British Standard Parts 1 amp 2 EN60269 1 Parts 1 amp 2 type go or equivalent should be used for these drives e UL UL
327. avel setting Par 694 Mx Pos Trvl Motion Only Position feedback exceeds the maximum negative travel setting Par 695 Motn Mx Neg Q Motion Only Signal for the hardware positive over travel appears on a digital input 84 Hard Over Motion Only Signal for the hardware negative over travel 81 Soft Over 82 Soft Over 83 Hard Over appears on a digital input Motion Only Par 769 Position Error exceeded Par 696 Motn Verify the value Par 696 Motn PositErrTol PositErrTol Linear Stahl Encoder detected a fault Par 291 Lin1Stahl Reconnect encoder or replace encoder Status shows the details of the fault Reconnect option feedback card Analog Input channel 1 is lost For configuration of Analog Input Check condition of Analog Input channel channel 1 see Par 1093 Analog In 1 Loss 1 Change configuration for parameter 1093 Analog In 1 Loss 95 In 2 Loss Analog Input channel 2 is lost For configuration of Analog Input Check condition of Analog Input channel channel 2 see Par 1094 Analog In 2 Loss 2 Change configuration for parameter 1094 Analog In 2 Loss 96 In Loss Analog Input channel 3 is lost For configuration of Analog Input Check condition of Analog Input channel channel 3 see Par 1095 Analog In 3 Loss 3 Change configuration for parameter 1095 Analog In 3 Loss
328. back is proportional to the calculated junction Bit 7 Unc Over Temp indicates the junction temperature has exceeded the maximum temperature for the power semiconductor device 23 flgbtJuncase 24 flgbtWatts 25 ilgbtPerMod 26 fFdThres 27 fFdSlope 28 fFdJunCase 29 fFdWatts 30 fMaxHsDegc 31 fCslmp 32 fCsFitr 33 IPwmHz 34 fElecHz 35 fModldex 36 37 fTotalWatts 38 fHSDegc 39 iAdconv 40 Jct Temp 41 Jct HiHp 42 Jct Tmp Fwd 43 Loss Intg 44 HH PwrBdTemp 5 Programming and Parameters 3 51 No 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 Name Description Iq Actual Ref Displays the value of motor current reference that is present at the output of the divide by flux calculation Iq Ref Trim Provides an external source to command trim or offset the internal motor current reference This value is summed with Par 350 Iq Actl Ref before the current limit is applied Scaling is in per unit motor current Is Actual Lim Displays the largest allowable stator motor current The range of allowable motor current is limited by the maximum drive current Scaling is in per unit motor current Iq Actual Lim Displays the largest allowable torque producing Iq motor current The range of allowable Iq
329. being limited by Par 129 Atune Trq Ref 0 Torq Ena indicates that the torque reference is limited to zero because Par 157 Logic Ctrl State bit 9 Torq Ref En is off 0 Curr indicates that the current reference is limited to zero because Par 157 Logic Ctrl State bit 11 CurrRef En is off Speed Limit indicates the collective status of all speed limitations Current Lim indicates the collective status of all current limitations MCS Iq Lim indicates that torque producing current is at its negative limit Bit 17 MCS Ws Lim indicates that flux producing torque is at its negative limit Bit 18 0 la from indicates that torque producing current is limited to zero from the negative direction refer to Par 353 Iq Actual Lim Bit 19 19 Calc indicates the calculation for torque producing current has reached its negative limit Bit 20 Current Lim indicates that the current reference has reached the negative Motor Current Limit set by Par 356 Mtr Current Lim DriveProtOL indicates that the current reference has reached the negative current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload shown in Par 343 OL p CurrLim DriveProtCL indicates that the current reference has reached the negative current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload shown in Par 344 OL Bit 29 0 Curr indicates that the current reference is limited to zero because Par
330. bient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with the PowerFlex 700S Drive and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC amp DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block refer to Chapter 1 for location The voltage must be zero ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists DPI or SCANport host products must not be directly connected together via 1202 cables Unpredictable behavior can result if two or more devices are connected in this manner ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameters 365 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri 394 VoltFdbkLossCnfg let you determine the action of the drive in response to operating anomalies Precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create hazards of injury or equipment damage ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameters 383 SL CommLoss Data 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg let you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure th
331. bit 16 X Watch1 En enables position Watch 1 Resetting it clears Par 741 Position Status bit 8 Watch Setting bit 17 X Watch1 Dir causes Position Watch 1 output to be set when Par 763 Position Actual is greater than Par 780 PositDtct1 Stpt Re setting bit 17 X Watch1 Dir causes Position Watch 1 output to be set when Par 763 Position Actual is less than Par 780 PositDtct1 Setting bit 18 X Watch2 En enables position Watch 2 Resetting it clears Par 741 Position Status bit 9 Watch2 Setting bit 19 X Watch2 Dir causes Position Watch 2 output to be set when Par 763 Position Actual is greater than Par 781 PositDtct2 Stpt Re setting bit 19 X Watch2 Dir causes Position Watch 2 output to be set when Par 763 Position Actual is less than Par 781 PositDtct2 Setting bit 20 Pt Pt RampStop enables the Ramp to Stop function for point to point positioning When reset and the stop command is given during a move the drive will stop at 0 ramp time When set and the stop command is given during a move the rive will ramp to zero at Par 760 Pt Pt Decel Time Note Coast Stop or Removing Enable always causes a Coast to Stop function Bits 24 29 were added for future use not active for use with firmware version 3 01 Options S G 55 8 5 55 5 2 2 IS 5
332. bution system where the line to ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage To disconnect these devices remove the jumper s listed in Table 1 F Jumpers can be removed by carefully pulling the jumper straight out See the Grounding and Wiring Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for more information on ungrounded system installation voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before removing installing jumpers Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC amp DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block The voltage must be Zero ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the Table 1 F Jumper Removal Frames Jumper Component Jumper Location No 1 PEA Common Remove the Control Assembly and Cassette o Mode Jumpers are located on the drive Power Board see Capacitors Figure 1 5 PEB MOV s 2 4 Jumpers located above the Power Terminal Block Mode see Figure 1 5 Capacitors PEB MOV s 5 Wire Common Remove the I O Cassette The green yellow jumper is Mode located on the back of chassis in the area shown see Capacitors Figure 1 5 Disconnect insulate and secure the wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components MOV s Note location of green yellow jumper wire in Figure Input Filter 1 5 Disconnect insulate and secure the wire guard Capacitors against uni
333. chLink faults This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window Bit 0 Sync Loss indicates SynchLink communication has failed after it had been established Bit 1 Rx Loss indicates the receive port is not receiving data and the receive port configuration is set to receive data Bit 2 Many BOF Err indicates the number of Beginning Of Frame BOF errors exceeds limit set by Par 899 SL BOF Err Limit Bit CRC Err indicates the number of Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC errors exceeds limit set by Par 898 SL CRC Err Limit Bit 4 Pckg Msg Err indicates the received package sequence number has not matched for 1 05 Bit 5 CommForm Err indicates the format of received data does not match the configuration of the receive port Bit 6 Sys Rev Err indicates the system revision in the received data does not match the value of Par 900 SynchLink Rev Bit 7 Mult TKeeper indicates more than one node on the SynchLink system is configured as a time keeper Options a amp 515 LL B E 258 2 5 15155 515155 gt 91 88885 8885 S S CC C C Defaut 10 o o o lo Jo o o lo o lo 0 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 True Programming and Parameters 3 97 Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 904 SL Node Cnfg
334. ck 30 Prop Output 31 Intg Input 32 Scld Int Pre 33 Sel Int Pre 34 Droop Output 35 Out Lim Stat 36 Intg Hold 37 51155 ZeroWe 38 GainParLim 39 P GainParLim 40 SrvLck 41 AntiBkup PLm 42 Droop 43 Pos Lim Stat 44 Neg Lim Stat 45 Limiter Out 46 Active Pgain 47 Active gain 48 Reserved 49 Reserved 50 Reserved 51 Reserved 52 Reserved 53 Reserved RO Real 5 Sum Spd Trq 6 AbsMnSpd Trq 7 SLAT Minimum 8 SLAT Maximum V RWhRea V RWhRea V RWhRea V RWhRea 3 22 117 118 119 120 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 Programming and Parameters Name Description NotchAttenuation Sets the depth for the Notch Filter Attenuation is the ratio of the output to ithe input at the notch frequency An attenuation of 30 means that the notch output is 1 30 of the input at the specified frequency Calculation Attenuation Input Output Attenuation Freq Hz Notch Filt Freq The center frequency for Notch filter To disable set for zero 0 SLAT ErrorSetpnt Determines the RPMs at which the drive will switch from speed mode to the Speed Limited Adjustable Torque SLAT min or SLAT max mode identified in Par 110 Speed Torque Mode bit 7 SLAT Minimum or bit 8 S
335. cksum calculated Replace Main Controller Board 38 OL Trip The calculated temperature of the dynamic braking resistor is Verify actual temperature of brake too high The temperature is calculated by a thermal model If hot wait for brake to cool If the resistor is internal the model uses resistor characteristic If cold cycle power to the drive stored in the power structure EEPROM memory If cold verify Par 416 Brake PulseWatts If the resistor is external the model uses values of parameters and Par 417 Brake Watts are correct 416 Brake PulseWatts and 417 Brake Watts 39 PowerEE CRC Fail The Cycling Ring Checksum CRC of the data stored in the Cycle power Power Board EEPROM does not match the stored CRC If High Horse Power units Check communication bus lines 10 pin connector in Main Control Board High Horse Power interface board and fiber connections 40 SLink Mult Oflow A SynchLink Multiplier Overflow has occurred Par 927 SL Mult State displays SynchLink multiplier overflow errors 41 Ridethru Timeout The drive has been in a bus loss ridethrough condition for more Verify the AC Line than two seconds default The ridethrough timeout is Verify the value in Par 407 Power Loss configurable by Par 407 Power Loss Time Time 42 DC Bus Undervolt Bus voltage has fallen below the level configured by Par 409 Verify the AC Line Line Undervolts In frames
336. co 1 Analog Input 1 Comm Volt Bipolar differential input 10V 0 20 mA 13 bit sign 2 Analog Input 1 4 20k Ohm impedance at Volt 500 Ohm impedance at mA 800 E 2 8 Shield NA Analog Input Shield 4 Analog Input 2 Comm Volt Bipolar differential input 10 0 20 mA 13 bit sign 2 5 gt 5 Analog Input 2 20k Ohm impedance at Volt 500 Ohm impedance at mA 806 sel 6 Analog Input 3 NTC Comm Volt Differential input 0 10V 10 bit for motor control mode 2 7 Analog Input 3 NTC FVC2 this is the temperature adaptation input 812 8 Shield NA Analog Output Shield 7 5 9 Analog Output 1 Volt Bipolar differential output 10V 0 20 mA 11 bit sign 832 833 10 1 2k Ohm minimum load 11 Analog Output 2 Volt 839 840 12 Analog Output 2 13 10V Reference NA Rating 20 mA maximum load Recommend 5k Ohm pot 2 S 14 Reference Common NA 9 E 15 10V Reference NA 8 16 Normal current draw per channel 20 mA 230 233 2 17 Encoder A Not NA A E 5 18 Alo 9 19 Encoder B Not NA 2 20 Encoder Z NA 2 21 Encoder 2 Not NA 22 Encoder Reference NA 12 or 5V DC power supply for primary encoder interface 23 Encoder Reference NA Rating 300 mA maximum 24 Encoder Shield NA Connection point for encoder shield 1 24 Installation Wiring 2 NN c
337. coder Feedback Option Card Terminal block P1 contains connection points for a differential encoder This terminal block resides on the Second Encoder Option Card Terminal Signal Description 1 N C Not connected 2 N C 3 N C 4 N C 5 A Quadrature A input 6 Not A 7 B Quadrature B input 8 Not B 9 2 Marker Pulse 10 Not Z 11 Power DC Power for encoder interface 12 Common 13 Shield Connection point for encoder Wiring and Configuring the Second Encoder Option Card Connection Examples Differential Encoder with Internal Supply Encoder P1 N C N C N C N C A Not A B gt on co Not B 912 10 NotZ 11 Power 12 Common Lit 03 Shield Differential Encoder with External Supply Encoder A P1 N C N C N C N C A Not A Not A B Not B co no 2 Not B 9 z Not Z Power 10 NotZ 11 Power Common 12 Common 13 Shield O Power Common PowerFlex 7005 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card E 3 Dip Switch Settings o0 RES m
338. commendations are based on 75 C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire Table 1 B Recommended Cable Design Rating Type Description Standard Installations 600 90 C 194 F Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation 100 HP or less XHHW2 RHW 2 Type 2 2 AWG Standard Installations 600 90 C 194 F Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation plus 100 HP or less with RHH RHW 2 Brake Conductors one 1 shielded pair of brake conductors Type 3 500 MCM AWG Standard Installations rated 600V 90 C 194 F Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation 150 HP or more RHH RHW 2 and 3 bare copper grounds and PVC jacket Type 4 500 MCM AWG Water Caustic Chemical Tray rated 600V 90 C 194 F Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and Crush Resistance RHH RHW 2 three copper grounds on 10 AWG and smaller Acceptable in Class amp Il Division amp II locations Type 5 500 MCM AWG 690V Applications Tray rated 2000V 90 C 194 F Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation 3 bare copper grounds and PVC jacket Note If terminator network or output filter is used connector insulation must be XLPE not PVC Unshielded THHN THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and or conduit fill rates 1 8 Installation Wiring
339. configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 387 Lgx Timeout Cnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 388 Lgx Closed Cnfg Default 2 FltCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to the controller closing the Controller to Drive Options 0 Ignore connection 1 Alarm e Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event 2 FitCoastStop occurs 3 Fit RampStop Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit 4 FltCurLimStp when this event occurs Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage
340. cted SpdRefA 50 Selected SpdRefB 40 Selected Spd Ref 43 Ramped Spd Ref 301 Motor Speed Ref 319 Selected Trq Ref 300 Motor Spd Fdbk 72 Scaled Spd Fdbk 297 Output Curr Disp 499 Trq CurFdbk Iq 309 Motor Flux 312 MotorFluxCurr FB 307 Output Voltage 311 Output Power 762 Position Fdbk 299 Elapsed MWHrs 298 Elapsed Run Time 306 DC Bus Voltage 313 Heatsink Temp 345 Drive OL JnctTmp 824 Local I O Status 801 Anlg Ini Value 807 Anlg In2 Value 813 Anlg In3 Volts 837 Anlg Out1 Value 844 Anlg Out2 Value Programming and Parameters 3 3 DriveExecutive programming software displays parameters in Linear List or File Group Parameter format Viewing the parameters in File Group Parameter format simplifies programming by grouping parameters that are used for similar functions There are twelve files Each file is divided into multiple groups of parameters Control Status Drive Data 150 Logic State Mach 400 Rated Amps 155 Logic Status 401 Rated Volts 157 Logic Ctrl State 420 Pwr Strct Mode 156 Start Inhibits 404 Dead Time 166 Motor Ctrl Cmmd 314 VPL Firmware Rev 167 Motor Ctrl Ackn 315 VPL Build Number 555 MC Status 457 MC Firmware Rev 346 Drive OL Status 456 MC Build Number 159 Digln ConfigStat 900 SynchLink Rev 165 Tune Test Status 901 SL System Rev 317 SL System Time 554 LED Status Programming and Parameters Motor Data Monitoring Drive Config Tuning Autotu
341. ctives ede P RR Eee e ter rey er ee eke G 1 Specifications rebos Iter IN LUE Mel e G 1 Resolver Feedback Option Card Specifications G 1 Compatible Resolvers G 1 Recommended 0 G 2 Wiring the Resolver Feedback Option Card to a Resolver G 3 SpecLieatiols usu cow mec Up REN Rape H 1 MDI Option Card H 1 Supported Linear Sensors H 1 Supported Rotary H 2 Recommended 7 2 Wiring the MDI Option 3 Compatible Permanent Magnet 1 1 Who Should Use This Manual What Is Not In This Manual Recommended Documentation Preface Overview The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed to install start up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex amp 7008 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with Phase II Control For information on See page Who Should Use This Manual Preface 1 What 5 Not In This Manual Pr
342. d Fdbk Scale 241 Encdr1 Spd Fdbk 260 Status 72 Scaled Spd Fdbk 240 Encdr1 Position 263 HeidenhainO Cnfg 236 0 1 RegisCnfg 264 HeidenhainO Stat 237 Enc0 1 RegisCtrl 265 Heidn Mkr Offset 238 0 1 RegisStat 266 Heidn Encdr Type 235 RegisLtch 267 Heidn Encdr PPR 239 Encdr1 RegisLtch 268 Resolver0 Cnfg 269 Resolver Status 277 Reslvr0 Type Sel 272 Reslvr0 SpdRatio 273 Reslvr0 Carrier 274 Reslvr0 In Volts 275 Rslvr0 XfrmRatio 276 Reslvr0 CableBal 254 Opt0 1 RegisCnfg 255 Opt0 1 RegisCtrl 256 Opt0 1 RegisStat 257 Opt 0 Regis Ltch 258 Opt 1 Regis Ltch 286 Linear1 Status 289 Lint Update Rate 290 Lineari CPR 285 Lineari Config 291 LintStahl Status Programming and Parameters 3 11 Drive Memory Diagnostics Fault Alm Config Test Points Peak Detection 196 ParamAccessLevel 155 Logic Status 379 Ext Fit Alm Cnfg 161 Logic TP Sel 210 PeakDtct Ctrl In 145 ApplicationGroup 156 Start Inhibits 374 Motor Stall Cnfg 162 Logic TP Data 211 PeakDict Status 147 FW Functions En 304 Limit Status 373 Motor Stall Time 163 Stop Oper TP Sel 212 PkDtcti In Dint 149 FW FunctionsActl 824 Local I O Status 382 MC Lim Cnfg 164 StopOper TP Data 213 PkDtct1 In Real 146 FW TaskTime Sel 320 Exception 381 PreChrg Err Cnfg 329 Fault TP Sel 214 PeakDtct1 Preset 148 FW TaskTime 321 Exception Event2 393 BusUndervoltCnfg 330 Fault TP Data 215 Out 322 Exception
343. d TrigB Int Default 0 RW 32 bit Provides the integer input for the B trigger function This integer is converted to a real Min Max 2147483648 Integer number and summed with Par 563 Trend TrigB Real The result is compared with the Trigger A sum If the A sum exceeds the B sum then a trend trigger will occur 563 Trend TrigB Real Default 0 0000 IRW Real Provides the real input for the B trigger function This real number is summed with Par 562 Min Max 2200000000 0000 X Reserved Triggered J n2 o Am n2 e E e d En A E Wait Enable Wait Enable First Scan Pre trigger Post trigger Wait Disable Val 0 Wait Enable Enbl collect Enbl Collect Val 1 First Scan Buffer Full Pre Trigger Trigger Event Trend TrigB Int The result is compared with the Trigger A sum If the A sum exceeds the B sum then a trend trigger will occur 564 Trig Data Default 00000000000000000000000000000000 IRW 32 bit This is the logic input for the Trend Trigger Function A trigger will occur on the rise 00000000000000000000000000000000 Boolean specified bit in this word The bit will be specified by Par 565 Trend Trig Bit Max 111111
344. d inore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event Options 0 Ignore e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit Fi CosstStop when this event occurs 3 Flt RampStop e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate 4 FitCurLimStp fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event 396 St OvrTrvlCnfg Default 1 Alarm ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event Options 0 Ignore e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit 2 E when this event occurs 3 Fit RampStop Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate 4 FltCurLimStp fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event 3 58 Programming and Parameters No 397 398 399 400 401 402 403
345. d reference value through SynchLink This master drive Par 43 Ramped Spd Ref would then be transmitted to the slave drives over SynchLink Scaled Spd Ref Displays the speed command after scaling SpdRef Spd Displays the final speed command used by the Speed Regulator It is the sum of Par 46 Scaled Spd Ref and Par 21 Speed Trim 1 Spd Ref Bypass2 The speed command after the limit ramp and s curve blocks Link a source directly to this parameter to bypass these blocks Selected SpdRefA Used to view the value of Speed Reference A Par 27 Speed Ref A Sel from a HIM Note This parameter is new for firmware version 3 01 Selected SpdRefB Used to view the value of Speed Reference B Par 28 Speed Ref B Sel from a HIM Note This parameter is new for firmware version 3 01 Drive Ramp Rsit Displays the speed reference value after the limit function This is the input to the error calculator and speed regulator Available for use in peer to peer data links DPI interface This number is scaled so that rated motor speed will read 32768 Inertia TrqLpfBW Sets the bandwidth of the inertia compensation torque output low pass filter A value of 0 0 will disable the filter Note This parameter is new for firmware version 3 01 Speed Comp Displays the derivative or change in Par 56 Inertia SpeedRef on a per second basis Link this parameter to Par 23 Speed Trim 3 and set Par 24 SpdTrim 3 Scale to 0 002 to reduce
346. d the limits set by Pars 75 Rev Check to see if the encoder feedback Speed Limit 76 Fwd Speed Limit and Par 335 Abs OverSpd polarity is correct Lim Check to see if the drive is in torque mode selected in Par 110 Speed TorqueMode value 2 Torque Ref If the drive is in torque mode verify that there is a load present Verify min max settings in Par 75 Rev Speed Lim and Par 76 Fwd Speed Lim Check to see if the load is overhauling If it is overhauling turn the bus regulator off using Par 414 Brake Bus Cnfg bit 2 BusRef High 2 Vref Decel Fail The value of 301 Motor Spd Ref has failed to decrease during a ramp to zero speed stop This could possibly be due to a speed trim from Pars 21 Speed Trim 1 22 Speed Trim 2 or 23 Speed Trim 3 3 Encoder 0 Loss One of the following has occurred on encoder 0 Reconnect encoder or replace encoder missing encoder broken wire quadrature error phase loss 4 1 Loss One of the following has occurred on encoder 1 Reconnect encoder or replace encoder missing encoder broken wire quadrature error phase loss Troubleshooting 4 5 No Name Type Description Action 5 Opt Port 0 Loss A fault on port 0 of the Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Reconnect encoder or replace encoder Card MDI Option Card Heidenhain or Resolver Feedback Option Card has occurred Par 260 Stegmann0 Status dis
347. dback Option PowerFlex 700S F 1 Configuration Settings Main Control Board 1 28 Terminals Wiring Main Control Board 1 22 Wiring 1 21 Indicator Drive Status 2 4 Input Phase Selection 1 10 Input Power Conditioning 1 5 Input Output Contactors Using 1 17 Inputs High Speed 1 27 Inputs amp Outputs Analog Inputs 3 13 Installation Wiring Chapter 1 1 1 Interface Board Resolver A 18 J Jumper 1 18 Location 1 20 Phase Selection 1 14 Jumper Removal 1 18 L LCD HIM Menus D 4 LED Class 1 P 4 LED Indications 4 2 Line Type 1 10 Linear Sensors Temposonics H 1 Location Power Terminal Block 1 14 Logic Command Word A 5 Logic Status Word A 6 Low Voltage Directive 1 29 M Main Control Board A 18 Wiring Terminals 1 22 Main Control Board I O Configuration Settings 1 28 Manual Conventions P 3 Manually Clearing Faults 4 4 MDI H 1 Recommended Cables H 2 Specifications H 1 Support Linear Sensors H 1 Supported Rotary Encoders H 2 Menu Structure HIM D 4 Mode Capacitors 1 18 Monitor Metering 3 3 Monitoring 3 4 Index 3 Motor 1 9 Motor Cable Lengths 1 9 Motor Control Motor Data 3 4 Motor Control Mode C 2 Field Oriented Control C 2 Permanent Magnet Control C 3 Volts Hertz Control C 3 Motor Ratings A 17 Mounting Clearances 1 3 MOV 1 4 MOVs 1 18 Multi Device Interface Option Card H 1 N National Codes and standards 1 7 0 Opening Cover 1 2 Opening the Cover
348. detection Note This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 225 Virtual Edge Rev Units RW 32 bit Set the EPR Edges Per Revolution scaling for calculating motor position Used in the Default 4096 Integer calculation of the position feedback such as Par 229 MtrPosit Stimulat Min Max 10 16777216 226 Motor Speed Est Unit RO Real Displays the estimated motor speed calculated when the selected feedback is sensorless or Default 0 0000 when encoderless ridethrough is enabled Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 227 Motor Est Default 0 RO 32 bit Summation or integration of Par 226 Motor Speed Est scaled by the value in Par 225 Min Max 2147483648 Integer Virtual Edge Rev 228 MtirSpd Simulated Unit RO Real The motor speed output of the motor simulator The motor simulator provides motor speed Default 0 0000 information during setup and troubleshooting when actual motor control is not desired or Min Max 14112 0000 possible To use the motor simulator enter a value of 4 in Par 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri or Scale Par 4 Motor RPM 1 0pu 223 Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel 229 MtrPosit Simulat Default 0 RO 32 bit The motor position output of the motor simulator The motor simulator provides motor position 2147483648 Integer information during setup and troubleshooting when actual motor control
349. difference feedback for Inertia Adaptation Notes When setting both Bit 0 amp 1 stability is enhanced and load disturbances are removed Bit 2 First Diff was added for firmware version 3 01 Options 5 212 lt 0 315 28 555 85 58 55 55 5 a a a a 3 Default 0 0 0 00000 0 0 0 0 Bit 16 15 14 13 12 1 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 True 133 Adapt BW Units R S 4 IRW Real This parameter sets the bandwidth of the Inertia Adaptation function when the IAA function is Default 100 0000 selected Par 132 Inert Adapt Sel bit 0 1 Typical IAA bandwidths range from 70 to 150 10 0000 250 0000 rad sec with 100 rad sec nominal best If the Load Estimate function is selected Par 132 Inert Adapt Sel bit 0 1 then this parameter sets the natural frequency of a filter in rad sec Typical values range from 10 to 150 rad sec with higher values being more responsive to disturbances but with increased system noise There is no nominal best value but 40 rad sec is a suggested starting point This adjustment may not function well in sloppy geared systems If both Inertia Adaptation and Load Estimate functions are active use a bandwidth setting of 100 rad sec 134
350. dino MS uo MS so YMS Jes MS 201 uo MS YOUMS Ies Su uogies uowsies LUl uoisies uosgies LLU 5 0LU 5 60 5 5 5 204 5 5 9041 5 5 50 5 5 5 204 uogies ZOU 5 5 LOUI 5 004 yass o zo ro Kezo uoms es 6 21 Control Block Diagrams Ps 44 s 07 vw 00 2 v wf 06 co ef 00 0001 0 0 pJoM pejegng pejeyngjos jo 161016 jeuuo ejeq psec ef v vue __ 6 sso e ___ 21 w o J eyepdn eyepdn EX spy Ea jeuuo 4uiuo xy pJoM pejeyng peJegngjos pag jo 161 906 14 ejeq pue ay ejepdn xurquou S eAnoedsei pue pue 10 sjeuuoj Y pue
351. drive drive end and the motor frame motor end Use a shield terminating or EMI clamp to connect shield to this terminal RFI Filter Grounding Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Therefore the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected bonded to the same building power distribution ground Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection Some local codes may require redundant ground connections The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter The PowerFlex 700S can be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit breaker Local national electrical codes may determine additional requirements for these installations Refer to Appendix A for recommended fuses circuit breakers power short circuit protection Specifications for the recommended fuse or circuit breaker to provide drive input power protection against short circuits are provided in Appendix A ATTENTION The PowerFlex 700S does not provide input Power Wiring Type Type 1 Max Wire Size 2 AWG Where Used Installation Wiring 1 7 Since most start up diffic
352. e D 9 10 11 12 13 14 Required Parameter Changes 0 10V Analog Input 0 10V Analog Input Bi Polar 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Input Output 0 10V Analog Input 0 10V Analog Connection Example Input Externa 8 o signa 0 Signal Shield gt Signal 0 OShield O Signal Source or Source Common Common or Source Common Common f1 0 Signa or Source Common Installation Wiring 1 25 Required Parameter Changes
353. e 73 23 EEC EN 61800 3 Second Environment Restricted Distribution EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Installations EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations TUV Rheinland applies to frames 1 6 200 400V and frames 5 TUV functional safety report only no FS mark on the label amp 6 690V only 4 TUV Functional Safety Report only for frames 1 4 600V no FS mark on the label 50178 T V Rheinland Type approved Environment Altitude 1000 m 3300 ft max without derating 1000 m 3300 ft max without derating Surrounding Air Temperature Based on drive rating refer to Drive Frame chapters without Derating Open Type 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F IP20 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F NEMA Type 1 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F IP56 NEMA Type 4X 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Note Frames 9 amp 10 are rated 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F surrounding air Storage Temperature all 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 degrees 40 to 158 degrees const Relative Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing 5 to 95 non condensing Shock 10G peak for 11 ms duration 1 0 ms 156 peak for 11ms duration 1 0 ms Vibration 0 152 mm 0 006 in displacement 1G peak 5 5 Hz 2 mm 0 0787 in displacement 1G peak EN50178 EN60068 2 6 Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the Important Drive must not be install
354. e This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Options SID l 2 5 l 2 22 25 22 2 8 5 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 55 8 o 81818 8 818 8 8 E 81818 81818 02 0 Default 0 0 0 jO JO JO 0 O JO JO 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Oc Fale Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12111 109 8 7 654 32 1 0 1 1 3 40 Programming and Parameters No 264 265 266 267 Name Description Values HeidenhainO Stat Indicates fault and alarm statuses on the Heidendhain Encoder Feedback Option and Endat communication Bit5 Sig Amplitud indicates that the signal amplitude is insufficient or too large Bit 6 Quadrate Er indicates that there is a signal quadrature error Bit 7 Open Wire indicates an open wire fault Bit 8 VoltageLvlEr indicates that the operating voltage is too high or too low Bit 9 PowerSup Er indicates the failure of the power supply Bit 10 PowerUpDiag Er indicates the option board failed its power up diagnostic test The pattern on the FPGA mus
355. e amp DriveLogix Controller 20D RN007 Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures 1756 001 Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions 1756 003 Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions www rockwellautomation com 1756 RM006 literature RSLogix 5000 Getting Results 9399 RLD300GR RSNetworx for ControlNet Getting Results 9398 CNETGR RSLinx Getting Results Guide 9399 LINXGR Manual Conventions Drive Frame Sizes Overview p 3 The following publications provide information that is useful when planning and installing communication networks Title Publication ContolNet Coax Tap Installation 1786 5 7 Instructions ControlNet Cable System Planning 1786 6 2 1 and Installation Manual ContolNet Fiber Media Planning CNET INOO1 and Installation Guide Available www rockwellautomation com literature e Inthis manual we refer to the PowerFlex 7005 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive as drive PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700S drive or PowerFlex 700S AC drive e To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used Parameter Names will appear in brackets after the Parameter Number For example Par 307 Output Voltage Display text will appear in quotes For example Enabled e The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an
356. e appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Note The default value was changed from 1 Alarm to 3 Fit RampStop for firmware version 3 01 Mtr OL Trip Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Motor Overload OL Trip exception event Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Mtr OL Pend Cn g Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Motor Overload OL Pending exception event Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event
357. e checksum fault The check sum associated with the Heidenhain encoder must be correct and acknowledged by the feedback option card Bit 12 Time Out Err indicates RS 485 time out fault This check requires information to be sent from the encoder to the feedback option card within a specified time Typical times are about 10 clock cycles before and error is detected This check is done only at power up Options ol _ Su g gt jolo lololo lolo 2 21792 2 2 8 5 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 5 5 5 6 6 5 9 9 9 9 9 G 9 E 2 s 5 21989 88 98 8 8 oc oe foe foe r c x ji Defaut 000 jo jo o jo jo o jo jo o o jo jo jo jo jo jo jo o jo jo jo o jo jo j0 0 000 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 807 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 261 262 263 Table 263A Sample Rate Bit Settings Bit 12 11 10 Exponent Value n Filter Sample Size 27 0000 1 0 0 1 1 2 01 0 2 4 0113 8 Default 100 4 16 1015 32 1 1 0 6 64 1 44 7 127 Programming and Parameters 3 39 2 8 22 Name 21956 Description Values 225 Seer Pi Steg
358. e from Par 322 Exception Event3 e Bit 11 HH HW Ver is sed to indicate a High Horsepower hardware version fault e Bit 12 HH CurUnbinc is used to indicate a High Horsepower output current unbalanced fault e Bit 13 HH VitUnbInc is used to indicate a High Horsepower Bus voltage unbalanced fault 29 Anlgin1 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 1 loss fault Bit 30 Anlgln2 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 2 loss fault Bit31 Anlgln3 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 3 loss fault Notes Bits 16 20 and 23 were added for firmware version 2 04 Bits 11 12 13 29 30 and 31 were added for firmware version 3 01 ole lg elj 2 lolz 2 4 9 9 5 lele 5 5 5 lelg 215 12 5 5 SIS 8 2 22 S S E E Z 2 2 5 1313 13 3 le 51 gt 81 8518 B jm jm o a r jr a jr jr jr Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ogp ragse Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 54 3 2 1 0 1 True 326 Alarm Status 1 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions These events are from Par
359. e hysteresis band for the units digit in intervals of 0 0005 pu velocity e The most significant digit sets the number of time steps from stick to slip each step is 0 002 sec Example Value 524 means 5 time steps between stick and slip each of 0 002 sec duration 2 counts of hysteresis or 0 001 speed each count is 0 0005 pu speed and 4 counts or 0 002 speed is the trigger threshold each count is 0 0005 pu speed FricComp Stick The torque P eded to break away from zero speed By nature of friction the break away sticktion will always be greater than the running friction FricComp p Slip The torque level to sustain very low speed once break away has been achieved By nature of friction viscous friction will always be less than sticktion FricComp Rated The torque to keep the motor running at base speed and with no process loading The friction compensation algorithm assumes a linear or viscous component of friction between 67 FricComp Slip and Par 68 FricComp Rated FricComp Trq Add The torque i bins output of the Friction Compensation function A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor Filtered SpdFdbk Displays the motor speed feedback value output from the feedback Lead Lag filter Scaled Spd Fdbk Displays the product of the speed feedback and Par 73 Spd Fdbk Scale This parameter is for display only Spd Scale A user adjustable scale factor multip
360. e tuning Parameter type When set it indicates the tuning is using the parameter database When cleared it indicates the tuning is using derived data Bit 2 Mtr Turning indicates that the motor is turning Bit 4 Energized indicates the resolver is energized Bit 8 Open Wire indicates a problem with the cable open circuit Bit 9 Power Supply indicates problem with the option card s power supply Bit 10 Diag Fail indicates the option card has failed its power up diagnostics Options TUNIS 2 5 2 sr zssacsvrsziic 515 e 2 g 2 8 3 g S 2 s ISA 812121215 15 S Defaut 0 o o fo fo fo fo oo 0 ors Bit 15 14 18 1211 109 8 7 6 5 432 1 0 1 True 3 42 Programming and Parameters No 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 285 Name Description Reslvr0 TP Sel Enter or write a value to select Fault data displayed in Par 271 Reslvr0 TP Data Reslvr0 Data Displays the data selected by Par 270 ReslvrO TP Sel Reslvr0 SpdRatio _ Specifies the speed ratio for the resolver option card port 0 The speed ratio comes from the following formula Speed ratio electrical revolutions mechanical revolutions pole count 2 Note Option 0 Zero was added for firmware version 2 04 Reslvr0 Carrier Specifies the resolver carrier frequency for the resolver option card port 0 Reslvr0 In Volts Specifies the resolver input voltage
361. ect Motion Planner test point selection Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP TP DataDint Test point integer data This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 1145 PPMP TP Select is integer data Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Units Default Min Max Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Min Max Units Default Units Default Default Default Default Options Default Programming and Parameters RPM 1 25 8 0 RPM 1 25 8 0 RPM 1 01 1 00 1 50 Sec 10 00 0 01 6553 50 Sec 10 00 0 01 6553 50 Sec 0 05 0 00 4 00 RPM 0 0 8 0 0 0 2147483648 0 0 2147483648 M Zero Zero MP FrctAccml MP WholeAccm MP EPR MP NBase MP Once Flag MP Pos Fdbk MP Pos Fdbk1 MP ErrorSum MP ErrorSum1 MP IntegHold 11 MP Pos Exact 12 MP Pos Diff 13 MP One Shot 14 MP Run Delay 15 MP ResyncOne 16 MP Task Time uou n n n H H I e 0 0 2147483648 3 107 a 575 5 RW Real RW Real RW Real V RW Real V RW Real V RW Real
362. ection Reserved 9 lReserved N Reserved 9 Reserved 0 0 0000 1 0 0 1 1 2 3 9 2 4 0 118 8 Default 100 4 16 1015 32 110 6 64 1117 127 Bits 10 12 form a 3 bit moving average filter sampling rate See Par Table 285A Sample Rate Bit Settings Linkable Read Write Data Type RO EPR RO Edge Mode RO nMax RO Delta2Err 32 bit Integer NOS 6 Poles x3 8 Poles x4 10 Poles x5 CRGO uH RO 32 bit Integer RO Real RO Real RO Real 8 Reserved 9 1326 460v 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 AmciR11XC107 e Bit5 Direction Setting this bit to 1 inverts the count up down direction of the linear feedback position parameter 252 FB Opt If FB Posit has been counting up for forward feedback sensor travel then setting this bit will cause FB Opt1 Posit to count down The opposite behavior will occur when the Bit6 Stahl Linear Setting this bit to 1 indicates to the MDI card that a Stahl type linear device is being used It this bit is set to 0 then a Temposonics linear Programming and Parameters 3 43 5075 ls No Description Values 225 286 Status Indicates faults on the Multi Device Interface M
363. ed for firmware version 2 04 Scale Output 17 MPwr Par Lim 2 Spd Torque 18 RPwr Par Lim 3 Mode Out 19 Trq 4 Actv TrqMode 20 Trq ParLim 5 Reserved 21 Nom Bus Volt 6 Trq En Input 22 Bus Volt Hys 7 NotchFiltOut 23 Bus Reg Ref 8 NotchFilt In 24 Bus Reg 9 Trq Lim In 25 Bus Reg Intg 10 Bus Reg Out 26 BusReg Clamp 11 Pos Pwr Lim 27 BusRegOutput 12 Neg Pwr Lim 28 IAA Filt Out 13 Pos Atun Trq 29 IAA 14 Neg Atun Trg 30 MC Trq Lim 15 Pos Lim Src 31 IgActlTrqLim 131 TrqRef TP Data Units RO Displays the data selected by Par 130 Trq Ref TP Sel Default 0 0 Min Max 8 0 pu Scale 1 0 PU Motor to Torque 132 Adapt Sel Configures the Inertia Adaptation Algorithm IAA Function e Bit Inrtia Adapt when set to 1 the Inertia Adaptation function will effect enhanced stability higher bandwidths and dynamic stiffness Useful when systems with a gear box becomes disconnected from the load Also used with motors that have very little inertia that otherwise lack dynamic stiffness even at high bandwidths e Bit 1 Load Est when set to 1 on the Load Estimate option removes or greatly reduces load disturbances and gives quicker system response Bit 2 First Diff selects the first
364. ed for firmware version 3 01 Options 9 z c 5 o l5 gle 5 5 2 5 eu gt 855 5 5 8 sla ele 22553 BiB Sls BERS sis to 5 2 2 2 2 2 lala 22 52 2 288 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 150 Logic State Mach Default 0 Stopped ndicates the logical state of the drive iones fpc d ier Value 0 Stopped indicates zero speed has been detected and the speed and torque Options 15 22 Ds regulators are disabled 2 Running 7 EnableHealth Value 8 Slip Test indicates that the Slip Frequency Auto Tune test is in progress 3 Stopping 8 Slip Test Note Value 8 Slip Test was added for firmware version 3 01 4 Inertia Test Programming and Parameters 3 25 Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 151 Logic Command The controller drive interface as defined by the Controller Communication Format sets bits to enable and disable various functions and algorithms Bits that are changed here are reflected in Par 152 Applied LogicCmd Note Bits 4 through 9 are NOT recalled from Control EEprom They wil
365. ed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to corrosive atmosphere a corrosive atmosphere Electrical Input See Input Voltage Range Tolerance on page C 1 for Full Power See Input Voltage Range Tolerance on page C 1 for Full Power Voltage Tolerance and Operating Range and Operating Range Frequency Tolerance 47 63 Hz 47 63 Hz Input Phases Three phase input provides full rating for all drives Single phase operation provides 5096 of rated current Three phase input provides full rating for all drives Single phase operation provides 5096 of rated current DC Input Voltage Tolerance 10 of Nominal Bus Voltage above 10 of Nominal Bus Voltage above Displacement Power Factor 0 98 across speed range 0 98 across speed range Efficiency 97 5 at rated amps nominal line volts 97 5 at rated amps nominal line volts Max Short Circuit Current Maximum short circuit current rating to match specified fuse lt 200 000 Amps Rating circuit breaker capability Using Recommended Fuse lt 200 000 Amps or Circuit Breaker Type Maximum Drive to
366. eeds Parameter 528 Run Boost is used to create additional running torque at low speeds The value is typically less than the required acceleration torque The drive will lower the boost voltage to this level when running at low speeds not accelerating This reduces excess motor heating that could be caused if the higher start accel boost level were used Parameters 529 Break Voltage and 530 Break Frequency are used to increase the slope of the lower portion of the Volts Hertz curve providing additional torque Parameters 1 Motor NP Volts and 3 Motor NP Hertz set the upper portion of the curve to match the motor design and mark the beginning of the constant horsepower region Parameters 531 Maximum Voltage and 532 Maximum Freq slope that portion of the curve used above base speed Maximum Voltage Motor NP Volts Break Vollage Start Acoel Boost Run Boost Break Motor NP Hertz Maximum Frequency Frequency Motor Overload Current P336 Service Factor P337 Mtr 12T Curr Min Current P336 Service Factor Stop Dwell Time P 160 Zero Speed Lim 0 Speed Application Notes C 5 Mtr 2 Spd Min Sets the minimum speed for the motor overload PT function The value indicates minimum speed below the minimum current threshold Mtr I2T Curr Min and these are the first current speed breakpoint From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by the
367. eface 1 Recommended Documentation Preface 1 Manual Conventions Preface 3 Drive Frame Sizes Preface 3 General Precautions Preface 4 Catalog Number Explanation Preface 5 This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions You must also understand programmable controllers for the PowerFlex 7008 with DriveLogix Since this User Manual is designed to provide only basic start up information for Frames 1 6 the following topics have not been included e Spare Parts Information e Installation instructions for frames 9 12 For detailed drive information please refer to the PowerFlex 7008 AC Drive with Phase II Control Reference Manual publication 003 Please refer to the tables below for more information on recommended documentation The following publications provide general drive information Title Publication Available Wiring and Grounding for PWM DRIVES INOO1 Drives Safety Guidelines for the SGI 1 1 Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control www rockwellautomation com A Global Reference Guide for 100 2 10 literature Reading Schematic Diagrams Guarding Against Electrostatic 8000 4 5 2 Damage 2 Overview The following publications provide information detailed PowerFlex 700S drive
368. efined delay timer to on or off When Par 1109 DelTmr1 Trig Bit is a positive number the delay timer is an timer When Par 1109 is a negative number the delay timer is an off timer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimer1PrSet The time that the value in Par 1111 DelayTimer1 Accum must reach before bit 2 Timer Done in Par 1112 DelayTimertStats is set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimer1 Accum The amount of time that has elapsed since the timer was enabled Par 1112 DelayTimer1 Stats bit 2 set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimeriStats The status of the user defined on or off delay timer Bit 0 Timer Enable when this bit is set the timer is enabled Bit 1 Timer Timing when this bit is set the timer is running Bit 2 Timer Done when this bit is set the timer is done Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options Reserved 0 Default Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 DelTmr2 TrigData Link a word to this parameter that will control a user defined on or off delay timer The bit within the selected word that will control the delay timer is set by Par 1114 DelTmr2 Trig Bit The user defined on off delay timer is enabled by setting bit 6 Delay Timer of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable 0 False 1 True Reserved N Reserved 9
369. egmann Option Encoder Voltage Supply 11 5V DC 130 mA 11 5V DC 130 mA Hi Resolution Feedback 1V P P Offset 2 5 Sine Cosine 1V P P Offset 2 5 Maximum Cable Length 182 m 600 ft 182 m 600 ft RS 485 Interface Hi Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following Hi Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS 485 interface shortly after information via the Hiperface RS 485 interface shortly after power up Address Command Number Mode Number of turns power up Address Command Number Mode Number of Number of Sine Cos cycles Checksum turns Number of Sine Cos cycles Checksum Customer I O Plug P1 Hi Allen Bradley PN 594262912 Allen Bradley PN 594262912 Res Weidmuller PN BL3 50 90 12BK Weidmuller PN BL3 50 90 12BK Resolver Option Excitation Frequency 2400 Hz 2400 Hz Excitation Voltage 4 25 26 Vrms 4 25 26 Vrms Operating Frequency Range 1 10 kHz 1 10 kHz Resolver Feedback Voltage 2V 300 mV 2V x 300 mV Maximum Cable Length 304 8 meters 1000 ft 304 8 meters 1000 ft DriveLogix Available MemoryBase 1 5 megabytes 1 5 megabytes Battery 1756 BA1 Allen Bradley PN 94194801 0 59g lithium 1756 BA1 Allen Bradley PN 94194801 0 59g lithium Serial Cable 1761 CBLPM02 to 1761 NET AIC 1761 to 1761 NET AIC 1756 CP3 directly to controller 1747 CP3 directly to controller 1761 CBLPMO2 to 1761 NET AIC
370. elTmr1 TrigData Link a word to this parameter that will control a user defined on or off delay timer The bit within the selected word that will control the delay timer is set by Par 1109 DelTmr1 Trig Bit The user defined on off delay timer is enabled by setting bit 6 Delay Timer of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable DelayTimer1 PrSet DelayTimer1 Data Timer 1 DelayTimer 1 Bit gt Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Values Default Default Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 0 32 bits of data Linkable Read Write Data Type RW RW RW RO RW RW RW RO RW Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 32 bit Boolean 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 Description DelTmr1 Trig Bit Selects the bit from the word linked to Par 1108 DelTmr1 TrigData that will change the status of the user d
371. en Y axis Mn For values of X Axis input between 0 and 1 the value of this parameter is interpolated from Y axis min and max values Typically it is linked to Par 188 PI Integ HLim 208 Limit Gen Lo Out Units RO Real Displays the negative output of the Limit Generator The value of this parameter is the Default 8 0000 negative of Par 207 Limit Gen Hi Out Typically it is linked to Par 189 PI Integ LLim Min Max 8 0000 0 0000 210 Ctrl In Sets the configuration of the two peak level detectors Peak detection when set and hold are off causes the output to capture the peak min max The Peak1SelHigh and Peak2SelHigh bits determine if the peak level detector is positive or negative If the bit is set the detector detects positive peaks or levels above the preset If the bit is not set the detector detects valleys or levels below the preset The output shows the min or max peak e The Peal 1 Set bit is used to reset the output to the value in Par 214 PeakDtct1 Preset default 0 The Peal 2 Set bit is used to reset the output to the value in Par 218 PeakDtct2 Preset default 0 e The Peak 1 Hold bit is used to hold the output at the present value in Par 214 PeakDtct1 Preset The Peak 2 Hold bit is used to hold the output at the present value in Par 218 PeakDtct2 Preset Options gt e Reserved Reserved
372. en running inverter power devices active with a Default 0 0 Integer resolution of 1 10 hour This parameter is saved in power EE non volatile memory The value Min Max 0 0 429496736 0 in this parameter can be changed written to by the user Scale x10 Elapsed MWHrs Unis MWHrs RW 32 bit Displays the total energy the drive has consumed or produced Calculated from the absolute Default 0 0 Integer magnitude of the product of motor speed and motor torque power accumulated over time 0 0 429496736 0 This value will increase in both regen and motoring modes of operation This parameter value Scale x 10 can be changed written to by the user Motor Spd Fdbk Unit RO Real Displays measured motor speed information from the selected feedback device Default 0 0000 Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 Motor Speed Ref Unis RPM RO Real Displays the speed reference value after the limit function This is the input to the error Default 0 0000 calculator and speed regulator Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 Spd Reg PI Out Units RO Real Displays the output of the speed regulator This is the input to torque control A value of 1 0 Default 0 0000 represents base torque of the motor Min Max 48 0000 pu Motor Torque Ref Unis PU RO Real Displays the reference value of motor torque The actual value of the motor torque is within Default 0 0000
373. en the position regulator is not enabled this parameter is initialized to Par 762 Position Fdbk or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 740 Position Control bit 6 AbsPositCtrl Posit FB EGR Mul A 32 bit integer in the numerator of the load EGR function It is multiplied by Par 764 Posit Load Fdbk and divided by Par 767 Posit FB EGR Div to reflect the load pulse count to the motor effectively removing the gear box ratio The accumulated position values Par 763 Position Actual and Par 765 Posit Actl Load will be equal if the ratio is set properly There may be some difference due to lost motion in the gear train but there should not be an accumulated difference It is often necessary to count gear teeth as gear box manufacturers often approximate exact ratios with decimal numbers Enter a negative value in the numerator to account for reversed motor rotation Posit FB EGR Div This is a 32 bit integer that forms the denominator of the load EGR function PositReg P Gain Sets position regulator gain as measured from position error to speed reference The gain number is identically equal to position regulator bandwidth in rad sec For example A gain of 10 means that a per unit position error of 0 1 sec will effect a 1 0 pu speed change 1 per unit position error is the distance traveled in 1 sec at base motor speed The maximum value of this parameter is typically 1 3 of the speed bandwidth rad sec but may be se
374. er 54 12 w Resistor 5 Safe Off w 2nd Encoder Frames 9 amp up Only Y Yes Expanded cassette required 38 Frames 5 4 6 pending N Not available for Frame 3 drives or larger m e i Additional Config HIM Emission Code Description Code Operator Interface Code CE Filter CM Choke E 0 Ys Phase II DriveLogix5730 2 Digital LCD B Yes No L Phase II DriveLogix5730 8 Full Numeric LCD NS No No WEEE 5 Prog Only LCD Frames 1 6 Only C Full Numeric LCD gt Frames 9 amp up Only Door Mount 8 For use on ungrounded distribution systems Frames 10 amp up only Frame 9 drives only Chapter Objectives Chapter 1 Installation Wiring This chapter provides the information needed to mount and wire PowerFlex 700S AC drives frames 1 6 For installation instructions for PowerFlex 700 AC drives frames 9 12 refer to publication PFLEX INO06 For Information on See Page Opening the Cover 1 2 Mounting Clearances 1 3 AC Supply Source Considerations 1 4 Grounding Requirements 1 5 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1 6 Power Wiring 1 7 Using Input Output Contactors 1 17 Using PowerFlex 7005 Drives with Regenerative Power Units 1 17 Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors 1 18 Wiring 1 21 CE Conformity 1 29 Since most start up difficulties are t
375. er o 1 1 0 0 120nsfiler 1 0 0 16 1 1 0 1 1300nsfiter 1 1 1 1 1400 n filter toG es 011 1 1 1500 ns filler Gn XY Encdr 0 1 Error Indicates the error status of the encoder 0 and encoder 1 Note Bit 4 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Options amp 8 2 3 8 8 2 81 9 2 2 5 2 oo gt 5 ja oz 2 9 9 9 9 9 99 9 9 9 9 5 5 19 18 99 999 9 9 9 9 9 9 eo o Lu CC ec u w w Default 0 0 0 jo jo 0 jo o oO jo o o o jo o oo o jo o o o p o jo o o o o o o 0 O p rase Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 149 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True RegisLtch0 Value Default 0 RW 32 bit Displays the registration data of port 0 Indicates the position reference counter value latched Min Max 2147483648 Integer by the external strobes The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 236 RegisLtch 0 1 Cnfg 3 35 Prog
376. er Electro Motive Force voltage normalized to Default 89 99 nteger base motor speed Min Max 0 00 399 99 Scale 100 8192 525 Slip Ratio Units Hz RO 16 bit Used by the Field Oriented Control 2 FOC2 mode Indicates the present operating slip Default 0 00 nteger frequency at 100 Torque Producing Current 195 scaled to hertz x 100 Min Max 0 00 327 67 Scale x10 526 Stator Frequency Units 96 RO 16 bit Displays stator frequency as a percentage of Par 3 Motor NP Hertz Default 0 0 Integer Min Max 800 0 Scale x 10 527 Start Acc Boost Units RW 16 bit Sets the voltage boost level for starting and acceleration when Custom V Hz mode is Default 50 0 nteger selected Min Max 0 0 1150 0 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 528 Run Boost Units RW 16 bit Sets the boost level for steady state or deceleration when Fan Pmp V Hz or Custom V Default 50 0 nteger Hz modes are selected Min Max 0 0 1150 0 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 529 Break Voltage Units RW 16 bit Sets the voltage the drive will output at parameter 530 Break Frequency Default 1150 0 nteger Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Min Max 0 0 6900 0 530 Break Frequency Units 2 RW 16 bit Sets the frequency the drive will output at parameter 529 Break Voltage Default 150 0 nteger Note This parameter was added for firmw
377. er Interface Circuit Board 3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board 4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board 5 Replace the Main Control Board 70 HiHpFanFdbkLls High Horse Power Only Fan Feedback Loss a fan feedback 1 Check the main cooling fan signal has been lost 2 Check the Main Control Board cooling fan 71 HiHp Drv OvrLoad High Horse Power Only Drive Overload the circuit board Measure output current of the drive If the the Power Module has detected an overload level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module 72 HiHp PwrBd PrcEr High Horse Power Only Power Board Processor Error a 1 Check fiber optic connections between the microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage communication error Feedback Circuit Board 2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board 3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board 4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board 5 Replace the Main Control Board 73 HiHp PrChrg High Horse Power Only Precharge Contactor Fault proper Check precharge circuit wiring contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor e Check for loose connections on X50 has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed
378. es the Real switch Refer to Pars 1023 1025 Bit 6 Sw Dint 1 On activates the DInt switch Refer to Pars 1026 1028 Options cic 4 5 5 5 55525 25555 5 515 5 5 5555 5 5 3 68 3 8 8 8 8 8 8 lala 92 9 ID D gt ID _ False Default o jo jo fo jo jo j0 jo jo jo jo jo 0 O 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1023 Swtch Real 1 NC Default 10 0000 V RW Real This is the Normally Closed input to the Real switch When Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl 645 2200000000 0000 Sw Real 1 On is low this input is updated to Par 1025 Swtch Real 1 Output 1024 Switch Real 1 NO Default 0 0000 V IRW Real This is the Normally Open input to the Real switch When Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 5 Sw Min Max 2200000000 0000 Real 1 On is high this input is updated to Par 1025 Swtch Real 1 Output 1025 Switch Real 1 Out Default 0 0000 RO Real This is the result of the Real switch The output is loaded with the selected input based on Par Min Max 2200000000 0000 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 5 Sw Real 1 On If this parameter does not update check the setting of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable bit 1 User Params 1026 Swtch Dint 1 NC Default 0 0000 V RW 32 bit This is the Normally Closed input to the DInt switch When Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 6 Sw Min Max 2200000000 0000 Integer DInt 1 On is l
379. et the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Inv OL Pend Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to an Inverter Overload OL Pending exception event This event is triggered when one of the Inverter Protection Current Over Time functions Open Loop or Closed Loop detects current and temperature at warning levels e Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Inv OL Trip Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to an Inverter Overload OL Trip exception event This event is triggered when one of the Inverter Protection Current Over Time functions Open Loop or Closed Loop detects current and temperature at a fault level Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occur
380. etpt 1 25 Cmpr 1 A lt B 11 Above Setpt2 26 Cmpr 1 A gt B 12 AtZeroSpeed 27 Cmpr 2 lt 13 Speed Limit 28 Cmpr 2 A gt B 14 CurrentLimit 00000000000000000000000000000000 RW 32 bit 00000000000000000000000000000000 Boolean 11111111111111111111111111111111 0 V RW 16 bit 32 31 Integer Sec RW 16 bit 0 00 Integer 0 00 600 00 Sec RW 16 bit 0 00 Integer 0 00 600 00 Programming and Parameters 3 95 No 860 865 870 875 880 885 861 866 871 876 881 886 862 867 872 877 882 887 863 868 873 878 883 888 864 869 874 879 884 889 Name Description General BitSwap Description The six 6 Bit Swap functions are used to replace one bit in a word with one bit from a different word This is typically done to a control word where one bit in the control word is replaced by a bit from another word such as a digital input Four 4 input parameters and one 1 output parameter are used to accomplish each Bit Swap function BitSwap 1A Data This is the main word in which 1 bit will be edited All of the data from this word except the selected bit in Par 861 BitSwap 1A Bit are passed to Par 864 BitSwap 1 Result BitSwap 2A Data BitSwap 3A Data BitSwap 4A Data BitSwap 5A Data BitSwap 6A Data BitSwap 1A Bit This specifies the bit to be replaced in Par 860 BitSwap 1A Data BitSwap 2A Bit BitSwap 3A Bit BitSwap 4A Bit BitSwap Bit B
381. exists Par 388 Lgx Closed Cnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 3 56 Programming and Parameters o 8 2195 e Description Values 52 2 389 9 LinkChngCnfg Default 2 FitCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to Controller to Drive default links being Options 0 Ignore removed A default link is a link automatically set up when a communication format is H Alarm selected for the Controller to Drive connection 2 FltCoastStop e Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event 3 Fit RampStop occurs 4 FitCurLimStp Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit
382. f the element in Trend Buffer 2 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer Trend In3 Provides integer input to the Trend 3 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 3 if bit 3 In 3 Real is cleared Trend In3 Real Provides real input to the Trend 3 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 3 if bit 3 In 3 Real is set Trend Out3 Dint Displays the output for Trend Buffer 3 if the buffer is using integer data This will equal the value of the element in Trend Buffer 3 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer Trend Out3 Real Displays the output for Trend Buffer 3 if the buffer is using real data This will equal the value of the element in Trend Buffer 3 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer Trend In4 Dint Provides integer input to the Trend 4 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 4 if bit 4 In 4 Real is cleared Trend In4 Real Provides real input to the Trend 4 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 4 if bit 4 In 4 Real is set Trend Out4 Dint Displays the output for Trend Buffer 4 if the buffer is using integer data This will equal the value of the element in Trend Buffer 4 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer Trend Out4 Real Displays the output for Trend Buffer 4 if the buffer is using real data This will equal the value of the element in Trend Buffer 4 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer Lgx Co
383. firm the encoder wires are connected to the correct terminals and are secure 3 Confirm that all control inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure 2 2 Start Up 4 Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive 5 Verify that control power voltage is correct L1 L3 The remainder of this procedure requires that HIM be installed If an operator interface is not available remote devices should be used to start up the drive Start Up 2 3 If the DriveLogix option is not present the associated indicators will not be present the drive is energized and only visible with the drive door open Servicing energized equipment can be hazardous Severe injury or death can result from electrical shock burn or unintended actuation of controlled equipment Follow Safety related practices of NFPA 70E ELECTRICAL SAFETY FOR EMPLOYEE WORKPLACES DO NOT work alone on energized equipment ATTENTION The controller LEDs are only operational when RUN Drive RUN DriveLogix 1 0 DriveLogix BEN FORCE DriveLogix COM DriveLogix BAT DriveLogix OK DriveLogix
384. firmware version 3 01 Options lala lt amp _ 15 8 5 2 2 2 5 2 las Ble sS SO joz gt oloja 5 lt 5 2515 526 Sle 5 2 SIE E G 2 E 8 5 G 21955 8 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 jO 0 20 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 43 2 10 1 3 28 Programming and Parameters No 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 8 Liz is Description Values Sig is Drive Logic Rslt This is the logic output of the logic parser that combines the outputs from the DPI ports and the DriveLogix controller to determine drive control based on the masks and owners The control bits are reflected in Par 152 Applied LogicCmd bits 16 31 Options S mis 8 5 8 T 88 3588 _ 5 2 8 8 88 5118418 2 5 15150210 0 Ligje jt 5 1215 5 22 jg 2 5 lt lt 5 5 lt 215 5 2 8 818 le S S 5 lee ee S S 0121 8 818 68 S ee S 86 2 Default 0 0O o o 0O 0O 0 0 O j0 0 JO O JO jO JO 0 O O JO 0 O O 0 j0 jo O 00 0 D p ci Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 54 3 2 1 0 1 Tr
385. for data type configuration 969 Tx Buf Data Type Indicates the data type of each Buffered Transmit word If the word s bit is set the data type is floating point real If the bit is not set the data type is integer Use the Peer Communication window to configure this selection Options 515 5 5 8 8 8 8 8 8 2585 555 8 8 8 8 8 8 818 CC jo c 5 amp 5 CC 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 92 02 92 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 Defaut 0 0 0 o jo o o j o jo o jo o o jo o o jo o p oO j 0 o o o jo jo jo jo O Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 d SL Buf Data 00 Default 0 V 32 bit to Min Max 32 bits of data W Integer 987 SL Buf Data Tx17 This is the SynchLink buffered data transmitted See Par 969 Tx Buf Data Type for data type configuration 1000 UserFunct Enable This parameter is used to enable and disable the optional user functions If a bit is set the corresponding function in enabled If the bit is not set the corresponding function is disabled and will not be processed outputs will not be updated Notes
386. for firmware version 3 01 DC Brake Level Defines the DC brake current level injected into the motor when DC Brake is selected as a stop mode This also sets the braking current level when Fast Stop is selected The DC braking voltage used in this function is created by a PWM algorithm and may not generate the smooth holding force needed for some applications Refer to the PowerFlex 7005 with Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 Note This parameter was added for future use not active for use with firmware version 3 01 Values Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Default Min Max Units Default 10 00 0 01 6553 50 10 00 0 01 6553 50 0 0 8 0 0 2147483648 Volts 0 0 0 0 1170 0 Linkable 20 lt Read Write 5 Data Type RW RW RW ATTENTION 1f a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used ATTENTION This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during braking DC Brake Time Sets the amount of time DC brake current is injected into the motor Note This parameter was added for future use not active for use with firmware version 3 01 PPMP Pos Command Sets the position reference for the Mo
387. for the resolver option card port 0 Rslvr0 XfrmRatio Specifies the resolver transform ratio for the resolver option card port 0 Reslvr0 CableBal Specifies the resolver cable balance for the resolver option card port 0 Reslvr0 Type Sel Specifies used resolver The values for options 5 amp 12 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Linear1 Config Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 sensor moves in the other direction device is being used Values Default Options Default Min Max Default Options Defau efault Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Options Used to configure a linear encoder when a Multi Device Interface MDI feedback card is installed 0 Zero 0 Zero 1 Edge Time 2 RO 3 RO dTime 0 2147483648 1 2poles x1 0 Zero 1 2 Poles x1 2 4Poles x2 Hz 0 0 10000 Volt 0 0000 0 0000 31 0810 0 0000 0 0000 4 0950 0 0 255 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 T2014 2087x1 2 T2014 2087x2 3 2014 2087 5 4 MPL 460v 5 Reserved 6 Siemens 1FT6 7 PrkrHn 2 600 Options Defaut 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 True Table 285A Sample Rate Bit Settings Bit 12 11 10 Exponent Value n Filter Sample Size 27 N 9 Reserved e IStahl Linear 9 Dir
388. from AC Voltages 600V or less as defined in 70 Art 430 18 Battery supplies or MG sets are not included The following devices were validated to break current of the derived power DC Bus Disconnects Allen Bradley Bulletin No 1494 30 to 400 A Bulletin No 194 30 to 400 A or ABB OESA 600 amp 800 A OESL all sizes Fuses Bussmann Type JKS all sizes Type 170M Case Sizes 1 2 and 3 or Ferraz Shawmut Type HSJ all sizes For any other devices please contact the factory List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor Ratings Supplemental Information 17 Motor Motor Type Poles Base Speed RPM Voltage Rate Current Current 602 Kg m kW Catalog No Vrms Arms Arms 200 STD Motor 15 51027 4 1500 180 75 0 024 2 2 51028 4 1500 180 11 0 045 37 51001 4 1500 180 18 0 066 37 51007 1 4 1500 180 18 0 066 5 5 51002 4 1500 180 25 0 12 5 5 51008 1 4 1500 180 25 0 12 7 5 51003 4 1500 180 33 0 15 7 5 51009 1 4 1500 180 33 0 15 11 51004 4 1500 180 47 0 32 11 51010 1 4 1500 180 47 0 32 15 51005 4 1500 180 63 0 43 15 51011 1 4 1500 180 63 0 43 18 5 51012 4 1500 180 81 0 71 18 5 51012 1 4 1500 180 81 0 71 22 51013 4 1500 180 95 0 82 22 51013 1 4 1500 180 95 0 82 30 51050 4 1500 155 145 0 83 37 51051 4 1500
389. from the back plate 0 Frame 9 amp up Only Important Removing the adhesive label from the drive changes the NEMA enclosure rating from Type 1 to Open type 1 4 Installation Wiring AC Supply Source Considerations PowerFlex drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of 200 000 rms symmetrical amperes 600 volts with recommended fuses circuit breakers Refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual Phase II Control publication PFLEX RMO03 for actual interrupt ratings based on circuit breaker or fuse choice equipment damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection use only the recommended line fuses circuit breakers specified in Appendix A ATTENTION To guard against personal injury and or If a Residual Current Detector RCD is used as a system ground fault monitor only Type B adjustable devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping Unbalanced Ungrounded or Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems If phase to ground voltage will exceed 125 of normal or the supply system is ungrounded refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for more information and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground These devices must be disconnected if the drive is installed on a resistive grounded distribution system or an ungrounded distribution system See page page 1 20 for jumper locations ATTE
390. g Control Must equal 1 to allow drive to exit precharge and begin to run Link this parameter to a controller output word to coordinate the precharge of multiple drives Power EE TP Sel Enter or write a value to select drive power EEPROM data displayed in Par 413 Power EE TP Data The default is 0 Zero Values Units Default Units Default Units Default Default Options Note Options 74 92 were changed and options 93 111 were added for firmware version 3 01 Options 0 Zero 19 Bus VitScale 38 IGBT Rated A 61 Convt Type 1 Volt Class 20 Sml PS Watts 39 IGBT V Thres 62 DC Bus Induc 2 Assy Rev 21 Sml PS Min V 40 IGBT Slope R 63 AC Inp Induc 3 ASAS N 22 Lrg PS Watts 41 IGBT Sw Engy 64 Precharg Res 4 Manuf Year 23 Lrg PS Min V 44 IGBT CS Tres 65 PrechThrm Tc 5 Manuf Month 24 Inv Rated Kw 45 IGBT CS Tc 66 Mtr NP Units 6 Manuf Day 25 Inv Rated V 46 Diode V Thrs 67 Mtr NP Power 7 TstProcStat 26 InvRatedA 47 Diode SlopeR 68 Mtr NP Volts 8 Life PwrCycl 27 InviminAmp 48 Diode JC Tr 69 Mtr NP Amps 9 Life Pwrup 28 inv 3sec Amp 49 Diode JC Tc 70 Mtr NP Freq 10 Life RunTime 29 SWOverCAmp 50 GBT Tjmax 71 Mtr NP RPM 11 Kw Accum 30 DC Bus 51 HS DegC 72 Mtr IR 12 Mw Hrs Accum 31 Min PWM Khz 52 DBIGBT Amp 73 Mtr Id Ref 13 Inv High Vit 32 PWM Khz 53 DB oh
391. generate conducted low frequency disturbances harmonic emissions on the AC supply system More information regarding harmonic emissions can be found in the PowerFlex Reference Manual Vol 2 Essential Requirements for CE Compliance Conditions 1 6 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet the requirements of EN61800 3 1 30 Installation Wiring 1 Standard PowerFlex 700S CE compatible Drive 2 Review important precautions attentions statements throughout this document before installing drive 3 Grounding as described on page 1 5 4 Output power control I O and signal wiring must be braided shielded cable with a coverage of 75 or better metal conduit or have shielding cover with equivalent attenuation 5 All shielded cables should terminate with proper shielded connector 6 Output power cable to motor must not exceed lengths in Table 1 0 Table 1 0 PowerFlex 7005 EN61800 3 EMC Compatibility 1 Environment First Environment Restricted Distribution E Restrict Motor Cable to 30 m 98 ft Restrict Motor Cable to 150 m 492 ft Drive and Option Any Drive and Option _ External Filter Required 1 6 v v v 1 External filters for First Environment installations and increasing motor cable lengths in Second Environment installations are available Roxburgh models KMFA for UL installations and MIF or Schaffner FN3258 and FN258 models are recommended Refer to h
392. gt 2 5 gt gt gt je Je gt D Z 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 512 IF 5 5 6 55 5 2 15 Z Z 91818181818 1515155 lglg lglg ac 02 02 02 Defaut 0 O 0 0 0 oO o o o o o o o po o p o p p p o p p 1 1 jp o 1 1 o Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 149 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 True Table 236A Trigger Source Settings Table 236D Filter Settings Bit 2 18 1 17 Bit 11 10 9 8 InputFilter Setting 0 0 Encoder Ch Z AND Ext Trig A 0 0 0 0 Filter disabled 0 1 Ext Trig B Digital Input 2 0 0 0 1 100nsfiler 1 0 Ext Trig A Digital Input 1 0 0 1 0 200ns filter 1 1 Encoder 0 Primary Encoder Z Phase 0 0 1 1 300ns filter Table 236B Edge Selection Settings 0 1 0 0 400nsfiter Bit 4 20 3 19 0 1 0 1 500ns filter 0 0 Captureon rising edge 0 1 1 0 600ns filter O 1 Capture on falling edge 0 1 1 1 700nsfiler 1 0 Capture on both edges 1 00 0 8005 filter default setting 1 1 Disable capture 1 0 0 1 900nsfiler 1 0 1 0 1000 1 Table 236C Trigger Direction Settings 1 0 1 1 1100ns filter Bit 622 2521 1 1 0 0 1200ns fitter 0 0 Not Configured 1 1 0 1 1300nsfilter 0 1 Reverse 1 1 1 0 1400ns filter 1 0 Forward 1 1 1 1 1500nsfiler 1 1 Both Directions 237 RegisLtch0 1 Ctrl Configures
393. hat the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage Programming and Parameters 3 57 o o 5 Sg ls No Description Values 52 5 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg Default 2 FltCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to communication fault from a network card at Options 0 Ignore a nelpon i er i when tht Alarm alue 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event 2 FltCoastStop i m lani bi 3 Fit RampStop Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit 4 FltCurLimStp when this event occurs Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does
394. he HIM if present 42 DRIVE Troubleshooting LED Indications Figure 4 1 Drive Status Indicators z oO Table 48 Drive Status Indicators Description Action Green Steady llluminates when power is applied to the drive No action no faults present Power o Green Flashing Drive ready but not running amp no faults are action no faults present STS Status present 2 Steady Drive running no faults are present No action no faults present 9 Yellow Flashing A type 2 non configurable alarm condition A start inhibit exists Refer to Par 156 Start a exists drive continues to run Inhibits 2 Steady A type 1 user configurable alarm condition exists but drive continues to run Red Flashing A fault has occurred Refer to Table Table 4 D for faults Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Red Flashing The drive is in flash recovery mode The Complete Flash Upgrade Yellow Alternately operation permitted is flash upgrade ze PORT Status of DPI port internal communications if E Refer to the present 3 E MOD Communication Status of communications module when Adapter User installed Status of network if connected
395. he Official Journal of the European Communities PowerFlex Drives comply with the EN standards listed below when installed according to the User and Reference Manuals Declarations of Conformity are available online at http www ab com certification ce docs Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations EMC Directive 89 336 EEC EN61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods General Notes e If the adhesive label is removed from the top of the drive the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side openings less than 12 5 mm 0 5 in and top openings less than 1 0 mm 0 04 in to maintain compliance with the LV Directive e The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended PowerFlex drives may cause radio frequency interference if used in a residential or domestic environment The user is required to take measures to prevent interference in addition to the essential requirements for CE compliance listed below if necessary Conformity of the drive with CE requirements does not guarantee an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements Many factors can influence total machine installation compliance PowerFlex drives can
396. he result of incorrect wiring take every precaution to assure the wiring is correct Read and understand all items in this chapter before beginning installation proper installation The Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for 1 2 Installation Wiring Opening the Cover Removing the Cassette Task Description Open the door of the power structure and disconnect the cables that connect to the main board 9 Loosen screws on face of cassette Remove the cassette Proper tightening torque for reassembly is 6 Ib in Frames 1 4 Locate the slot in the upper left corner Slide the locking tab up and swing the cover open Special hinges allow cover to move away from drive and lay on top of adjacent drive if present Frame 5 Slide the locking tab up loosen the right hand cover screw and remove Frame 6 Loosen 2 screws at bottom of drive cover Carefully slide bottom cover down amp out Loosen the 2 screws at top of cover and remove Removing the Side Covers Task Description Loosen sc
397. he signal is valid This waiting imposes a mandatory delay in the registration signal The filter delay is programmable in increments of 100 nanoseconds from 0 or no delay up to 700 nanoseconds Options 2 519 51 9 E c 8 i eiwI o hi 22 gt 212 2 2 2 SiS 5 5 2 2 2 2 ISI 5 2 2 2 3121313121312213 E 5 2 2195 8825 5 555 8 5 S 5 5 5155 CC E ie ja Default 0 O O O jO jO JO 00 0 jO JO JO 0200 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True its 3 amp 4 19 amp 20 please refer to lable 254A Edge Selection Settings below Table 254A Edge Selection Settings Table 254B Direction Settings Bit 4 20 3 19 Bit 6 22 5 21 0 0 Capture on rising edge 0 0 Disable capture 0 1 Capture on falling edge 0 1 Capture position during Reverse rotation 1 0 Capture on both edges 1 0 Capture position during Forward rotation 1 1 1 1 Disable capture Capture position during either rotation 255 0 1 Configures the registration control port 0 of the feedback option card Set bits 0 00 Arm Req and 16 01 Arm Req to arm the registration logic for
398. i SN DATA RS 485 NC 4 gt SHIELD NC gt J OVERALL SHIELD RS 485 2 OL T DATA 5 485 1 H xX Figure 2 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL S2L and S2KXL motor or 460V MP Series Motor with 2090 CDNFDMP SXX or 2090 XXNFMP SXX cable Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 TOOT A 4SIN 11 OR BKWH REFSIN REFSIN 10 BKWH RDI 4006 4SIN 9 XX REFCOS REFCOS 8 DI uas GN E DATA RS 485 4008 7 BB E DATA 85 485 SHELD 6 OR N POWER SHIELD 5 gt P COMMON gt 19 ats p DATA RS 485 2 DATA RS 485 1 WHEN XX Figure 3 230V Series Motor with 2090 UXNFDMP SXX or 2090 XXNFMP SXX cable Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 mimm BK 4SIN POWER 11 DER _ B REFSIN REFSIN 10 DER BKWH RD 005 SIN 9 DIR BK xX WHIRD __ p REFCOS REFCOS 8 WERD E 85 485 4008 7 Timm BD E DATA RS 485 SHIELD 6 IER K POWER SHIELD 5 WHIGY COMMON 4 80 BU 3 du OX LLL DATA
399. icated from an external controller to the PowerFlex 7005 drive a communication module Setting a bit High will data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type RO 32 bit Integer Default 0 Min Max 32 dependant on Par 625 To DL DataType controller communication module Setting a bit High will configure the associated word as a Real data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type 3 78 670 671 672 673 674 677 678 679 680 681 684 685 686 Programming and Parameters Nn gt gt 9 5 Description Values 2025 DPI Data Out A1 Default 0 4 RW Set by DPI Data Out A2 Min Max 32 dependant on Par 625 To DL Par 659 DPI Data Out B1 DataType DPI Data Out B2 DPI Data Out C1 DPI Data Out C2 DPI Data Out D1 DPI Data Out D2 These parameters display the output values communicated from the PowerFlex 700S drive to DPI communication modules Write Mask Enables disables write access parameters links etc for DPI ports Changes to this parameter only become effective when power is cycled the drive is reset or bit 15 Security of Par 712 Write Mask Act transitions from 1 to 07 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options amp z3g99825 EIS 2 251 ale 2 ES Default 0 0 0 0
400. ice Temposonics Linear sensors with MTS part numbers ending in 15261102 Supported Rotary Encoders Table H A specifies which encoders work with the MDI Option Important Please note that encoders must be ordered as Single Ended This will ensure that the RS 485 channel has the proper termination network installed at the factory Table Supported Stegmann Rotary Encoders Model SINCOS SCS 60 SCS 70 SCM 60 and SCM 70 Resolution 512 sine cycles per revolution Comment SCM 60 and SCM 70 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SCS KIT 101 and SCM KIT 101 1024 sine cycles per revolution SCM 60 and SCM 70 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SRS 50 SRS 60 SRM 50 and SRM 60 1024 sine cycles per revolution SRM 50 and SRM 60 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SRS M 25 1024 sine cycles per revolution SRS25 and SRM25 have built in mechanical turns counter IP65 Protection Class Size 25 square flange mounting SINCOS SRS660 1024 sine cycles per revolution Hollow shaft up to 14 mm diameter SINCOS SHS 170 512 sine cycles per revolution While the software supports this encoder the SHS 170 draws excessive current and should only be used with an external power supply SINCOS SINCODER and LINCODER are registered trademarks of Stegmann Inc Recommended Cables Use this cable cable Mating MTS molded extension cable
401. ielded Encoder Combined Belden 9730 or equivalent 0 196 mm 24 AWG Pulse I O individually shielded Less 30 5 m 100 ft 300V Encoder Signal Belden 9730 9728 or 0 196 mm 24 AWG 75 90 oc Pulse I O equivalent individually shielded 167 194 F 30 5 m 100 Power Belden 8790 0 750 mm 18AWG ft to 1524 Combined Belden 9892 0 330 mm or 0 500 mm m 500 ft 3 Encoder Signal Belden 9730 9728 or 0 196 mm 24 AWG Pulse I O equivalent 2 individually shielded 152 4m Belden 8790 27 0 750 mm 18AWG Rs to Combined Belden 9773 9774 0 750 mm 18AWG 850 ft equivalent individually shielded pair EMC Refer to CE Conformity on page 1 29 for details Compliance 0 Belden 9730 is 3 individual y shielded pairs 2 channel plus power If 3 channel is required use Belden 9728 or equivalent Belden 8790 is 1 shielded pair 3 Belden 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs 3 channel 0 33 22 AWG plus 1 shielded pair 0 5 mm 20 AWG for power 8 Belden 9773 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel plus power If 3 channel is required use Belden 9774 or equivalent 5 Ifthe wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits the use of shielded wire may not be necessary but is always recommended 1 22 Installation Wiring Wiring the Main Control Board I O Terminals Terminal blocks TB1 and TB2 contain connection
402. imer1Accum 1111 BitSwap 3A Data 870 DelayTimertPrSet 1110 BitSwap 3B Bit 873 DelayTimer1 Stats 1112 BitSwap 3B Data 872 DelayTimer2Accum 1116 BitSwap 4 Result 879 DelayTimer2PrSet 1115 BitSwap 4A Bit 876 DelayTimer2Stats 1117 BitSwap 4A Data 875 DelTmr1 Trig Bit 1109 BitSwap 4B Bit 878 DelTmr1 TrigData 1108 BitSwap 4B Data 877 DelTmr2 Trig Bit 1114 BitSwap 5 Result 884 DelTmr2 TrigData 1113 BitSwap 5A Bit 881 DeltaSpeedScale 60 BitSwap 5A Data 880 Dig In1 Sel 825 BitSwap 5B Bit 883 Dig In2 Sel 826 BitSwap 5B Data 882 Dig In3 Sel 827 BitSwap 6 Result 889 Dig In4 Sel 828 BitSwap 6A Bit 886 Dig In5 Sel 829 BitSwap 6A Data 885 Dig In6 Sel 830 BitSwap 6B Bit 888 Dig Out1 Bit 847 BitSwap 6B Data 887 Dig Out Data 846 Brake OL Onfg 369 Dig OffTime 849 Brake PulseWatts 416 Dig Out1 On Time 848 Brake TP Data 419 Dig Out1 Sel 845 3 110 Programming and Parameters Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter DigO
403. imit or inertia ride through condition The output frequency is adjusted in response to an error in the active or torque producing current to maintain the active bus limit or inertia ride through bus reference A larger value of gain reduces the dynamic error of the active current Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 549 Vuv Fdbk Offset Default 16384 0 RW 16 bit Displays the motor U phase to V phase offset voltage from the voltage feedback circuit The Min Max 15764 0 17004 0 nteger value of the offset is a uni polarity signal A zero offset is equal to 16384 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 550 Vvw Fdbk Offset Default 16384 0 RW 16 bit Displays the motor V phase to W phase offset voltage from the voltage feedback circuit Min Max 15764 0 17004 0 nteger The value of the offset is a uni polarity signal A zero offset is equal to 16384 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 551 CurrFdbk AdjTime Units juSec RW 16 bit Compensates for current feedback delays in High Horse Power drives frames 9 and up Default 0 0 nteger Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Min Max 0 0 50 0 552 Slip Preload Val Default 120 0 RW 32 bit The Slip Gain value to be pre loaded if the drive is powered down Min Max 0 0 8192 0 nteger Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 553 Slip Slew Rate Units uSec RW Real Sets the rate at which
404. ing and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Rated Amps This displays the currenting rating of the inverter The drive automatically sets this at power up Note The maximum value was changed for firmware version 2 03 Rated Volts This displays the name plate voltage rating of the inverter The drive automatically sets this at power up PWM Frequency Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output of the drive Drive derating may occur at highercarrier frequencies For derating information refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual Default is dependant on power structure of the drive Voltage Class Sets the drive configuration for high or low voltage class l e a 400 480V ac drive Allows choice of configuration and affects many drive parameters including drive rated current voltage power over loads and maximum PWM carrier frequency Dead Time The time delay between turning off and turning on an upper device and a lower device in the power structure This parameter is set at power up and is not user adjustable Dead Time
405. ing range 50 rad sec bandwidth 0 1 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 120 1 operating range 50 rad sec bandwidth Speed regulation with feedback 0 001 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 1000 1 operating range 744 rad sec bandwidth Speed regulation with feedback 0 001 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 1000 1 operating range 300 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation Torque Regulation without feedback 5 600 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation without feedback 10 600 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation with feedback 2 2500 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation with feedback 5 2500 rad sec bandwidth Selectable Motor Control Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and permanent magnet motor control Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and permanent magnet motor control Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp Coast Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp Coast and Current Limit and Current Limit Accel Decel Independently programmable accel and decel times adjustable Independently programmable accel and decel times adjustable from 0 to 6553 5 in 0 1 second increments from 0 to 6553 5 in 0 1 second increments S Curve Time Adjustable from 0 5 to 4 0 seconds Adjustable from 0 5 to 4 0 seconds Intermittent Overload 110 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 11096 Overload capability f
406. ink a source directly to this Default 0 0000 parameter to bypass these blocks Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 38 Speed Ref Scale Default 1 0000 RWhRea This parameter is multiplied with the value in Par 37 Spd Ref Bypass Min Max 1000 0000 39 JogSpeed2 Units RW Rea Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when responding to bit 23 Jog 2 of Par Default 0 0000 152 Applied LogicCmd Min Max 8 0000 pu Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 40 Selected Spd Ref Units RPM RO Rea Displays the speed command before the speed reference limit block Default 0 0000 Min Max 8 0000 pu Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 41 42 43 45 46 47 48 49 50 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 Description Limited Spd Ref Displays the speed command after the limit block limited by Par 75 Rev Speed Limit and Par 76 Fwd Speed Limit Jerk Allows you to adjust the amount of S Curve or Jerk applied to the Accel Decel rate Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Ramped Spd Ref Displays the speed command after the ramp block modified by Par 32 Accel Time 1 Par 33 Decel Time 1 and Par 34 S Curve Time Delayed Spd Ref One sample period delayed output of Par 43 Ramped Spd Ref Used in some applications to synchronize the spee
407. int source parameter that will control Analog Output Min Max 2200000000 0000 0000 1 834 Anlg Out1 Offset Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Provides an offset for Analog Output 1 before the scaling and limit blocks in the Analog Output Min Max 2200000000 0000 1 function This parameter value is summed with either Par 832 Anlg Out1 Dint or Par 833 Anlg Out1 Real at the beginning of the function 835 Anlg Out Scale Unis 4 RW Real Scales the range of the source parameter to the range of Analog Output 1 Par 832 Anlg _ Default 0 0000 Dint or Par 833 Anlg Out1 Real is multiplied by this number after the limit function Min Max 2200000000 0000 836 Anlg Out Zero Units Volt V RW Real Applies an offset to the scaled value of Analog Output 1 This parameter is summed with the Default 0 0000 output of the scaling block This sum produces Par 837 Anlg Out1 Value Typically this value 20 0000 corresponds to 0 for Analog Output 1 837 Anlg Outi Value Units Volt RO Real Displays the voltage reference for Analog Output 1 before the digital to analog conversion Default 0 0000 Min Max 10 0000 838 Anlg Out2 Sel Default 3 Output Use select the signal for use on Analog Output 2 If the desired signal is not available in Options _ selection list choose option 0 User Select and link with Par 839 Anlg Out2 Dint o
408. int mode A high filter bandwidth will produce a more square deceleration torque one with a higher level of jerk Typical values range from 5 to 100 rad sec A zero value will bypass the filter Tail out is influenced mainly by Par 768 Posit Reg P Gain Position Fdbk Displays the accumulated pulse count of the selected position feedback Select a position feedback device with Par 777 PositionFdbk Sel Values Default Default Default Default Min Max Default Default Default Default Default Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Default Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Default 1 1 2000000 0 0147483648 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 0 2200000000 0000 0 8 0000 pu 0 8 0000 pu 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 RPM 176 4000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu RPM 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 Sec 10 0000 0 1000 6553 5000 Sec 10 0000 0 1000 6553 5000 RIS 25 0000 0 0000 500 0000 0 2147483648
409. ired 4 9 L stopping mode 10 0 Ramp stop 5 1 CurLim Stop 7 6 2 Coast Stop 7 Lie 8 gt 14 15 6 lo o_ _ Enable Digital Inputs Sourcing Digital Inputs Internal Power Supply 3 Wire e Set Par 829 DigIn 5 Sel to value 14 Normal Stop 24V DC e Set Par 828 DigIn 4 Sel to value 5 Start d e Par 153 Control Options bit 8 3WireControl will 2 automatically be ON for 3 wire control 3 e Set Par 168 Normal Stop Mode for the desired 914 stopping mode 4 0 Ramp stop 5 T 1 CurLim Stop 6 2 Coast Stop 7 12 8 14L o o Stat 15 L o Stop JL 16 Enable 1 28 Installation Wiring Main Control Board Configuration Settings Figure 14 Main Control Board Dip Switches E JUMPER P22 3 HW Enable SWITCH S5 ib No HW Enable 29 SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW B ues i 12 B Down Closed On mieh SWITCH 52 SIDE VIEW FRONT B Up Open Off E TOP VIEW 3 uem Down Closed On ANO 30 o SWITCH S4 SIDE VIEW FRONT TOP VIEW Up Open Off 1
410. ister Latched to Par 793 Xsync In 3 every time bit 0 Sync Default 0 0000 Pulse of Par 786 Xsync Status is set Min Max 214748 3594 795 Out 3 Dly Units RO Real Displays data of Par 794 Xsync Out 3 from the last sync period Default 0 Min Max 214748 3594 796 Gear Ratio Default 1 00 RW Real Sets the load side gear ratio for position control Adjust this value when the selection of Par Min Max 0 00 9999 00 6 777 PositionFdbk Sel is not 3 Motor Fdbk Calculation Motor Encoder Rpm Load Encoder Rpm Note This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 797 Step Default 0 V RW 32 bit Sets the amount added to or subtracted from Par 799 Output on a rising edge of Min Max 2147483648 Integer Par 740 Position Control bit 12 BscIndx Step Note that this value can be positive or negative 798 Preset Default 0 V RW 32 bit Sets the value to be moved into Par 799 BasicIndx Output when Par 740 Position Control Min Max 2147483648 Integer bit 11 BscIndx Enbl and bit 14 BscIndx Prst are both on 799 Basiclndx Output Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the output of the Position Index function Min Max 2147483648 Integer 800 Ini Data Default 10 0000 RO Real Displays the scaled final value for Analog Input 1 Min Max 2200000000 0000 801 80
411. it Enable state Value 3 Post trigger indicates the Trend function is continuing to sample and save the trend inputs until the buffer is full While in this state the function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero value When the buffer is full the function sets bit 2 Complete of Par 557 Trend Status and enters the Wait Disable state Value 4 Wait Disable indicates the Trend function is complete and waiting for bit 0 Enbl Collect of Par 556 Trend Control to be cleared When this is done the trend function returns to the Wait Enable state While in the Wait Disable state Par 569 TrendBuffPointer and the Trend Output Parameters are active 559 Trend Rate Units 5 4 RW Real Sets the sample time for both trend input and output updates Default 0 5000 Min Max 0 5000 1000 00001 560 Trend TrigA Int Default 0 V RW 32 bit Provides the integer input for the A trigger function This integer is converted to a real Min Max 2147483648 Integer number and summed with Par 561 Trend TrigA Real The result is compared with the Trigger B sum If the A sum exceeds the B sum then a trend trigger will occur 561 TrigA Real Default 0 0000 4 IRW Real Provides the real input for the A trigger function This real number is summed with Par 560 2200000000 0000 Trend TrigA Int The result is compared with the Trigger B sum If the A sum exceeds the B sum then a trend trigger will occur 562 Tren
412. itSwap 6A Bit BitSwap 1B Data This is the word from which the replacement bit will be selected Only the selected bit is passed to Par 864 BitSwap 1 Result BitSwap 2B Data BitSwap 3B Data BitSwap 4B Data BitSwap 5B Data BitSwap 6B Data BitSwap1B Bit This specifies the bit from Par 862 BitSwap 1B Data that will replace the specified bit in 860 BitSwap 1A Data and be loaded to Par 864 BitSwap 1 Result A negative bit selection may be used to invert the data Use 32 to invert the value of bit 0 BitSwap 2B Bit BitSwap 3B Bit BitSwap 4B Bit BitSwap 5B Bit BitSwap 6B Bit BitSwap 1 Result This is the result of the Bit Swap operation X unused data not passed to result Cs xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx XXXXX BitSwap 2 Result BitSwap 3 Result BitSwap 4 Result BitSwap 5 Result BitSwap 6 Result Values Default Default Default Default Default 0 32 bits of data 0 0 31 0 32 bits of data 32 31 0 32 bits of data Linkable Read Write RW RW RW RW RO Data Type 32 bit Boolean 16 bit Integer 32 bit Boolean 16 bit Integer 32 bit Boolean 3 96 Programming and Parameters o 8 s 5755 Description Values 892 51 Comm Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select
413. ive limit of the Speed Regulator output value The output of the Speed Regulator is limited by adjustable high and low limits Spd Reg Neg Lim Sets the Pegate limit of the Speed Regulator output value The output of the Speed regulator is limited by adjustable high and low limits SrLss Spd Reg g Sets the proportional gain of the Speed Regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth set in Par 106 Srlss Spd Reg BW Proportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 106 to zero This gain setting has no units per unit torque per unit speed error Values Units Default Min M Units Default Min M ax Default Min M Default Min M Default Min M Units ax Default Min M ax Default Min M R S 700 0000 0 0000 2000 0000 R S 10 0000 0 0000 500 0000 1 0000 0 5000 3 0000 100 0000 0 0000 3000 0000 1 0000 5 0000 20 0000 R S 35 0000 0 0000 3760 0000 1 0000 5 0000 RIS 30 0000 0 0000 3760 0000 R S 10 0000 0 0000 500 0000 Based Motor RPM 0 0 1200 0 RPM R S 40 0 1 0 100 0 RPM 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu P U 0 0000 48 0000 pu 1 0 PU Torque P U 3 0000 0 0000 6 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu PU 3 0000
414. k s in reverse order Important Common Bus DC Input Application Notes 1 If drives without internal precharge are used Frames 5 amp 6 only then a precharge capability must be provided in the system to guard against possible damage and b disconnect switches Must Not be used between the input of the drive and a common DC bus without the use of an external precharge device 2 If drives with internal precharge Frames 1 6 are used with a disconnect switch to the common bus then 3 an auxiliary contact on the disconnect must be connected to a digital input of the drive The corresponding input parameter 825 830 must be set to Precharge Enable This provides the proper precharge interlock guarding against possible damage to the drive when connected to a common DC bus Table 1 E Power Terminal Block Specifications Wire Size Range Torque Terminal Bolt Size No Name Frame Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended Power Terminal Block 1 All power terminals 4 0 mm 0 5 mm 17N m 0 8 10AWG 22 AWG 15 lb in 7 Ib in 2 All power terminals 10 0mm 0 8 2 17N m 1 4 6 AWG 18 AWG 15 16 12 Ib in 3 All power terminals 250mm 2 5 mm 3 6 N m 1 8 8 AWG 14 AWG 321 16 Ib in All power terminals 10 0mm 0 8 2 1 7N m 1 4N m 6 AWG 18 AWG 1 12 Ib in 4 All power terminals 35 0mm 1
415. l 0 1 0 Preset Speed 2 To access Preset Speed 1 0 1 1 Preset Speed 3 set parameter 27 Speed 1 0 0 Preset Speed 4 Ref A Sel or 28 Speed Ref 4 B Sel to 5 Preset Spd 1 1 0 1 Preset Speed 5 1 1 0 Preset Speed 6 1 1 1 Preset Speed 7 3 26 Programming and Parameters ox 5 Sg ls No Description Values 52 2 153 Control Options Set bits to configure the options for operating the drive Note Bit 3 Flying Start was added for firmware version 2 04 Bit 20 21 and 29 were added for firmware version 3 01 ley _ e a 2882 58 5 2882 25 SSIS 5 2 2185 5 Bala le leis le le 52 5 2 5 5 a e 8 22 8859 28588442 5 Default 0 0 0 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000071 0071 p False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True Bit Current Function 0 Bipolar SRef When this bit is enabled a bipolar speed reference is used In bipolar reference mode Par 40 Selected Spd Ref indicates both the speed magnitude and the direction Positive speed reference values forward direction and negative speed reference values reverse direction When this bit is disabled a unipolar speed reference is used In
416. l be cleared upon drive powerup or following an EEprom recall operation Options Comp 9 Ext Fit Alm Reserved N gt Reserved S O SReg IntgRst SReg IntgHld Default 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 True 152 Applied LogicCmd Displays the Logic Command that is applied to the Regulators and Control Algorithms within the drive Logic Commands come from the 32 bit Logic Command SpdRamp Hold Time Axis En Rst 9 Spd 5 Crv En a D Q 2 E c o e 0 0 found in a connection with the Logix Controller Bits 7 amp 8 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Options 3 S m 2 0 9 o o 0 2 1865 2 2 5 515010 0 5 lt 5 5 55 Sls e 2 2 gt gle 1518182 5 8 55855 575 8828 010 c O S 5 0 amp ic E 0 i S DID Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 jO 0 0 0 JO JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 49 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 Speed Reference Select Inputs Bit 30 29 28 Spd Ref SpdRef SpdRef Sel2 Sell Sel Auto Reference Source 0 0 0 Speed Ref A Sel 0 0 1 Speed Ref B Se
417. lNet Redundant 027 27 25 261 261 250 032 32 30 325 325 315 3 DriveLogix ControlNet Fiber 041 41 40 385 385 355 4 DriveLogix P Redundant 052 52 50 416 416 400 062 62 60 460 4 460 450 5 DriveL gix 6 DriveLogix EtherNet IP 077 77 75 502 502 500 099 99 100 590 590 560 125 125 125 650 650 630 144 144 150 750 750 710 170 170 150 prens 820 4 820 800 Control Logic Synch 208 208 200 CE Certification testing has not been Option Expansion Link 261 261 250 performed 600V class drives Phase 325 325 350 Release pending at date of printing Verify No Expanded 385 385 400 before ordering Phase 416 416 450 B Yes Expanded 460 460 450 f C cai Nas No Expanded 800 902 Documentation Phase 590 590 600 Gade Documents D Yes Yes Expanded 650 650 700 E Quick Start Guide Phase j 750 750 800 N No Documentation 5 WA 9 un 820 820 900 H Phase N A Ys Slim CE Certification testing has not been performed on 600 class drives g Release pending at date of printing Verify Brake before ordering Code w Brake IGBT 1 Y Yes Feedback N Option d t Brake IGBT is standard on Frames 1 3 and N None optional on Frames 4 9 ONLY Enclosure 4 Resolver Code Enclosure Stegman Hi Resolution Encoder A IP20 NEMA Type 1 h Cc Multi Device Interface N Brake Resistor E 2nd Encod
418. lays the current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload OL function This function sets this current limit based on stator current feedback and the current ratings of the drive continuous and short term three second rating Typically the drive will have a sixty second rating of 11096 of continuous current and a three second rating at 150 of the continuous Under normal operating conditions the open loop function sets this current limit to the short term three second rating If the function detects an overload it lowers the limit to the continuous level After a period of time typically one to three minutes the function returns the limit to the short term rating OL ClsLp CurrLim Displays the current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload OL function This function will set a current limit level based on the values in Par 355 Iq Ref Limited Par 313 Heatsink Temp and the thermal characteristics of the drive Under normal operating conditions the function typically sets the limit at 25096 of the continuous drive rating If the function determines that the power device junction temperature is approaching maximum it will reduce this limit to the level required to prevent additional heating of the inverter This level could be as low as the continuous rating of the drive If the inverter temperature decreases the function will raise the limit to a higher level Disable this protection by setting bit 13 OL ClsLpDsbl of Par
419. lier for speed feedback It is multiplied with speed feedback to produce Par 72 Scaled Spd Fdbk Atune Spd Ref Sets the speed of the motor during the Flux current and inertia tests Rev Speed Limit Sets a limit on the speed reference in the negative direction This value can be entered as a negative value or zero Fwd Speed Limit Sets a limit on the speed reference in the positive direction This value can be entered as a positive value or zero Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Scal Units Defa Scal Defa Scal Defa zc D F zc D nits efault nits efault Es nits efault in Max n Max n Max 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 RPM 0 0000 8 0000 pu 325 0 999 P U 0 1500 0 0000 8 0000 P U 0 1000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 0 2000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 0 0000 8 0000 pu Motor P U Torque RPM 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 0 0000 2200000000 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 1 0000 42200000000 0000 RPM 0 8500 0 1000 1 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu RPM 1 2500 8 0000 0 0000 RPM 1
420. llow a selection from 2 or more items The LCD HIM will display a text message for each item e Bit Parameters These parameters have individual bits associated with features or conditions If the bit is 0 the feature is off or the condition is false If the bit is 1 the feature is or the condition 15 true Numeric Parameters These parameters have a single numeric value i e 0 1 Volts The example on the following page shows how each parameter type is presented in this manual 3 2 Programming and Parameters Table 3 A Table Explanation e 2 o Sgae No Description Values 2225 151 Logic Command controller drive interface as defined by the Controller Communication Format sets bits to enable and disable various functions and algorithms Bits that are changed here are reflected in Par 152 Applied LogicCmd Note Bits 4 through 9 in Logic Command are NOT recalled from Control EEprom They will be cleared upon drive powerup or following an EEprom recall operation Options o 5 5 1515 8 5 T 8 6 5 E EIS 5510015 9 E 2 8 2 2 5 8 amp c o o o Default 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 110 Spd Torq ModeSel Default 1 Speed Reg Selects
421. lt 0 False Bit 1 True DPI Data In A1 DPI Data In A2 DPI Data In B1 DPI Data In B2 DPI Data In C1 DPI Data In C2 DPI Data In D1 DPI Data In D2 These parameters display the input values communicated from DPI communication modules to the PowerFlex 700S drive DPI Out DataType Sets the data type for each word communicated from the PowerFlex 700S drive to an externa oppi I Options 8 8 88 8 g glg Nie ON Je Vl lt lt amp Gaia Default 0 jo 0 jo jo 0 0 0 0 6 Bit 7 6548 210 1 True Options 5 gt 59 95955 5155 555 55 55 5 55 5 5 5 55 5 5 5 6 6 lt 5 o b E CC CC CC O Default 0 0 0 O0 O j0 o 0 jo o o jo o o jp po o p p o oj jo jo jo jo jo jo 0 0 p rue Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True DriveLogix00 Default 0 V IRO Set by to Min Max 32 dependant on Par 625 To DL Par 625 To DriveLogix20 DataType These parameters display the output values communicated from the PowerFlex 700S drive to the DriveLogix controller Sets the data type for each word commun
422. lux Rate Limit 425 Heidn Mkr Offset 265 DPI Data Out A2 661 Flux Ratio Ref 424 HiHp InPhsLs Cfg 370 DPI Data Out B1 662 Flux Reg Gain 444 HIM Manual Mask 675 DPI Data Out B2 663 Flux Reg P Gaint 443 HIM Manual Owner 682 DPI Data Out C1 664 Flux Reg P Gain2 470 Home Accel Time 1120 DPI Data Out C2 665 Flux Satur Coef 426 Home Decel Time 1121 DPI Data Out D1 666 CurFdbk Id 489 Home Position 1123 DPI Data Out D2 667 LpassFilt BW 361 Home Speed 1122 DPI In DataType 650 Flying StartGain 170 Hrd OvrTrviCnfg 398 DPI Out DataType 659 FR Sys Inertia 1081 ds Command 496 Drive Logic Rslt 158 FricComp Rated 68 ds Integ Freq 429 Drive OL JnctTmp 345 FricComp Setup 65 ds Reg P Gain 430 Drive OL Status 346 FricComp Slip 67 n Posit BW 782 Drive OL TP Data 348 FricComp Spd Ref 64 n Posit Dwell 783 Drive OL TP Sel 347 FricComp Stick 66 nert Adapt BW 133 Drive Ramp Rslt 53 FricComp Trq Add 69 nert Adapt Gain 134 Elapsed MWHrs 299 From DL DataType 601 nert Adapt Sel 132 Elapsed Run Time 298 FromDriveLogix00 602 SpeedRef 56 Encdr 0 1 Config 233 FromDriveLogix01 603 nertia Trq Add 59 Encdr 0 1 Error 234 FromDriveLogix02 604 TrqLpfBW 54 Position 230 FromDriveLogix03 605 nertiaAccelGain 57 Spd Fdbk 231 FromDriveLogix04 606 nertiaDecelGain 58 Encdr1 Position 240 FromDriveLogix05 607 nterp AccelRate 752 Encdr1 Spd Fdbk 241 FromDriveLogix06 608 nterp Fit Cnfg 378 Encoder0 PPR 232 FromDriveLogix07 609 nterp Position 749
423. m Par 1090 MOP Level Real to Par 1092 MOP Level Dint 1092 Level Dint Default 0 0000 RO 32 bit Actual output value of the MOP as a Dint number This value is scaled by Par 1091 MOP Min Max 2147483648 Integer Scale Dint en Anlg Default 0 Disabled nig InczLossUnig Options 0 Disabled 4 Set Input Hi 1095 Anlg In3LossCnfg 1 5 Goto Selects drive action when an analog input signal loss is detected Signal loss is defined as 2 Hold Input 6 Hold OutFreq analog signal less than 1 V or 2 mA The signal loss event ends and normal operation 3 Set Input Lo resumes when the input signal is greater than or equal to 1 5 V or 3 mA Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1096 AddSub 1 Input Default 1 0000 RW Real Input value to be added to and or subtracted from as need with the Add and Subtract function 2200000000 0000 This input will be added with Par 1097 AddSub 1 Add The result will be subtracted from by the value in Par 1098 AddSub 1 Subtrct The result of the operation is loaded to Par 1099 AddSub 1 Result Equation Par 1096 Par 1097 Par 1098 Par 1099 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1097 AddSub 1 Add Default 1 0000 RW Real This value is added to the value of Par 1096 AddSub 1 Input The result will be subtracted Min Max 2200000000 0000
424. mRatio 275 SL Buf Data Rx03 937 SL Buf Data Tx27 997 Run Boost 528 SL Buf Data Rx04 938 SL Buf Data Tx28 998 Rx Buf Data Type 933 SL Buf Data Rx05 939 SL Buf Data Tx29 999 Rx Dir Data Type 928 SL Buf Data Rx06 940 SL Clr Events 916 S Curve Time 34 SL Buf Data Rx07 941 SL Comm TP Data 893 Save To UserSet 199 SL Buf Data Rx08 942 SL Comm TP Sel 892 Saved Events 436 SL Buf Data Rx09 943 SL CommLoss Cnfg 384 Scaled Spd Fdbk 72 SL Buf Data Rx10 944 SL CommLoss Data 383 Scaled Spd Ref 46 SL Buf Data Rx11 945 SL CRC Err Accum 894 Sel Switch Ctrl 1022 SL Buf Data Rx12 946 SL CRC Err Limit 898 Sel Swtch In00 1029 SL Buf Data Rx13 947 SL CRC Error 895 Sel Swtch In01 1030 SL Buf Data Rx14 948 SL Dir Data 00 929 Sel Swtch In02 1031 SL Buf Data Rx15 949 SL Dir Data Rx01 930 Sel Swtch In03 1032 SL Buf Data Rx16 950 SL Dir Data Rx02 931 Sel Swtch In04 1033 SL Buf Data Rx17 951 SL Dir Data Rx03 932 Sel Swtch In05 1034 SL Buf Data Rx18 952 SL Dir Data 00 965 Sel Swtch In06 1035 SL Buf Data Rx19 953 SL Dir Data Tx01 966 Sel Swtch In07 1036 SL Buf Data Rx20 954 SL Dir Data Tx02 967 Sel Swtch In08 1037 SL Buf Data Rx21 955 SL Dir Data Tx03 968 Sel Swtch In09 1038 SL Buf Data Rx22 956 SL Error History 903 Sel Swtch In10 1039 SL Buf Data Rx23 957 SL Error Status 902 Sel Swtch In11 1040 SL Buf Data Rx24 958 SL Mult A In 924 Sel Swtch In12 1041 SL Buf Data Rx25 959 SL Mult B In 925 Sel Swtch In13 1042 SL Buf Data Rx26 960 SL Mult Base 923 3 144
425. made to it from one of the inputs on the local drive The local drive is the one implementing PLL The 1pu RPM of this parameter is set by Par 727 PLL VirtEncdrRPM Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 SpeedOut Phase Locked Loop velocity advanced output This signal is one velocity reference sample in advance of Par 734 PLL Speed Out A link is normally made to this parameter from SynchLink Velocity reference is performed in the same task as the position regulator Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Posit TP Select Enter or write a value to select position regulator data displayed in Par 738 PositTP Datalnt and Par 739 PositTP DataReall PositTP DataDInt Displays the integer data selected by Par 737 Posit TP Select This display should only be used if the selected value is Integer data PositTP DataReal Displays the real data selected by Par 737 Posit TP Select This display should only be used if the selected value is Real data Values Units Default Units Default Units Default Default Units Default Default Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Default Options Default
426. mation circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss WARNING Identifies information about practices or Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property ATTENTION Identifies information about practices damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment PowerFlex is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc DriveExplorer DriveExecutive and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc Manual Updates Summary of Changes This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex
427. mation A 15 690 Volt AC Input Protection Devices See Notes below Drive kW Dual Element Time Non Time Delay Circuit Motor Circuit Power Catalog Rating PWM Freq Temp Input Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Fuse Breaker 9 Protector Dissipation Number ND kHz Amps kVA Cont 1 3Sec Min 2 Min Max 2 10 Max 10 Watts 20DF052 45 l 4 50 46 9 561 52 57 78 60 110 60 175 175 NA 375 4 50 401 1480 46 69 92 50 90 50 150 150 200 060 55 4 50 577 689 60 66 90 80 125 80 225 225 45 l4 50 469 561 52 78 104 60 110 60 175 175 NA 20DF082 75 e 2 50 790 944 82 90 120 100 200 100 375 375 NA a 2 50 577 689 60 90 123 80 125 80 225 225 20DF098 90 2 40 947 113 98 108 127 125 200 125 375 375 75 2 40 790 944 82 1293 140 100 200 100 375 375 20DF119 10 2 50 115 137 1129 191 179 150 250 150 400 NA 90 2 50 947 113 98 147 196 125 200 125 375 NA 20DF142 132 l 2 50 138 165 142 1566 213 175 300 175 450 NA 10 2 50 115 137 1127 179 238 150 250 150 400 Notes 7 Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown maximum Circuit Breaker inverse time breaker For US NEC
428. mation on Specifications G 1 Wiring the Resolver Feedback Option Card to a Resolver G 3 Specifications Resolver Feedback Option Card Specifications Consideration Description Excitation Frequency 2400 Hz Excitation Voltage 4 25 26 Vrms Resolver Feedback Voltage 2 Vrms 300 mV Customer I O plug P1 Allen Bradley PN S94262908 Weidmuller PN BL3 50 90 8BK Compatible Resolvers Table H specifies which resolvers are supported by the PowerFlex 7005 Resolver Feedback Option module Table H Compatible Resolvers Parameter 275 Parameter 275 Parameter 277 Reslvr0 Type Sel Reslvr0 Type Sel Reslvr0 Type Sel Manufacturer Setting for Phasel Setting for Phasel Setting for Phase Manufacturer Catalog Number Notes Firmware 1 17 Firmware 2 XX Firmware 1 XX Tamagawa TS 2014N181E32 x 1 flange mounted 1 Rel800123 2R 1 T2014 2087x1 1 T2014 2087x1 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2014N182E32 x 2 flange mounted 2 Rel800123 28 2 T2014 2087x2 2 T2014 2087x2 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2014N185E32 x 5 flange mounted 3 Rel800123 2T 3 T2014 2087x2 3 T2014 2087x2 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2087N12E9 x 2 HD foot mounted 2 Rel800123 28 2 T2014 2087x2 2 2014 2087 2 enclosure double shaft Tamagawa TS 2087N1E9 x 1 HD foot mounted 1 Rel800123 2R 1 2014 2087 1 1 T2014 2087x1 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2087N2E9 x 2 HD foot mounted 2 Rel800123 2S 2 T2014 2087x2 2 T2014 2087x2 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2087N5E9 x 5 HD foot mounted 3
429. mines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 2 The source type 6 Reserved 20 Reserved selections are no data event feedback and drive parameter 7 Reserved 21 Dir Tx Data 914 51 Tx DirectSel3 8 Reserved 22 Dir Rx Data Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 3 The source type 9 Reserved 23 EQ Accum selections are no data event feedback and drive parameter 10 Event Status 24 E1 Accum Note These parameters were changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 11 Reserved 25 0 Accum 12 Reserved 26 Opt1 Accum 13 Reserved 3 98 Programming and Parameters 8 LIE ls No Description Values 915 ISL Rev Events Displays the received event status from Par 917 SL Rx PO Regis 916 ISL Cir Events Set these bits to clear the corresponding event latches indicated in Par 915 SL Rcv Events Options 0 0 l l 5 5575 55 5 575 2195 55 515 215 25 5 575 275 5 215 575 5 m le o o
430. mitter type resolver 9 AB 164982 8 9 1326Ax 460v 9 1326Ax 460v Motor Primary Resolver supported 1326AH 460V Explosion Proof Yes e Secondary resolver is N A N A N A Motor Secondary Resolver geared to motor not intended for motor speed position feedback e Transmitter type resolver supported 1326AS 460V Rare Earth Yes Transmitter type resolver 9 AB 164982 8 9 1326Ax 460v 9 1326Ax 460v Primary Resolver supported MPL 460V Primary Resolver Yes Transmitter type resolver 4 AB 155407 8 4 MPL 460v 4 MPL 460v supported Recommended Cable Rockwell Automation strongly recommends the use of Reliance Electric 417900 207 or Belden 9730 cable for installation or an equivalent cable that meets these specifications e 3 Twisted Pairs 80 C 300V Chrome FPR Jacket Plenum Rated Conductor Size 18 AWG Twists Per Inch 2 3 twists per inch of wire lay per pair Capacitance Per Pair not to exceed 30 pF per foot 0 3 pF as read on a GEN RAD Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent Capacitance Difference Pair to Pair not to exceed 0 6 pF per foot as read on a GEN RAD Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent Resistance 1000 Feet 17 150 10 Inductance per 1000 Feet 0 13 mH 10 as read on a GEN RAD Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent Insulation Thickness 0 008 in Conductor Stranding 16 30 Jacket Thickness 0 018 in PowerFlex 7005 Resolver Feedback Option Card G 3 Wiring
431. mm Format Indicates the Controller to Drive communication format Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Options E A 0 V RW 32 bit 2147483648 Integer 0 0000 RW Real 2200000000 0000 0 V RW 16 bit 1023 Integer 0 V RW 32 bit 42147483648 Integer 0 0000 RW Real 2200000000 0000 0 RO 32 bit 2147483648 Integer 0 0000 RO 2200000000 0000 0 V IRW 32 bit 2147483648 Integer 0 0000 RW Real 2200000000 0000 0 RO 32 bit 42147483648 Integer 0 0000 RO 2200000000 0000 0 V RW 32 bit 42147483648 Integer 0 0000 RW Real 2200000000 0000 0 RO 32 bit 42147483648 Integer 0 0000 RO 2200000000 0000 0 V RW 32 bit 2147483648 Integer 0 0000 RW Real 2200000000 0000 0 RO 32 bit 2147483648 Integer 0 RO Real 2200000000 0000 16 Speed Ctrl 0 Not Used 18 UserDefin 1 16 Speed Ctrl 19 Motion 17 PositionCtrl 32 CustmUserDef Note Option values 1 15 and 20 31 are Reserved Programming and Parameters 3 77 No 601 Name Description From DL DataType data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type Linkable Read Write Data Type Sets the type of data for each word communicated from DriveLogix to the PowerFlex 7005 d
432. motor current is limited by the maximum drive current and is adjusted by the motor flux current Scaling is in per unit Iq motor current Iq Rate Limit Enter the maximum rate of change for Current Reference in per unit current sec Par 90 Spd Reg BW will be limited to 2 3 of this value Iq Ref Limited Displays the current reference output of the rate limiter Mtr Current Lim Sets the largest allowable motor stator current The online maximum value of this parameter is Par 2 Motor NP FLA The online minimum value is 105 of the current indicated in Par 488 Flux Current Curr Ref TP Sel Enter or write a value to select current reference data displayed in Par 358 Curr Ref TP Data Curr Ref TP Data Sets the limit value for the motor torque producing current Motor Flux Est m The Q axis motor voltage is divided by the motor frequency while field weakening is active This value is used to convert the torque command to a motor current Iqs command Min Flux Sets the smallest level of flux used to convert Par 303 Motor Torque Ref to a current reference above base speed Fix LpassFilt BW Sets the bandwidth of the low pass filter that adjusts the response of the flux estimate used in the torque to current conversion Since the field time constant varies between motors a better control response may be obtained by adjusting the filter time constant Normally this parameter is not changed unless a significant disturbance occu
433. motor service factor Par 336 Motor OL Factor Figure C 1 Motor Overload Curve With Par 338 Mtr 2 Spd Min Is Less Than 1 0 When motor current exceeds the value of the curve Mtr OL Output integrates A motor overload exception event occurs when the value in Mtr OL Output reaches 1 0 The value of Mtr OL Output is visible in Par 330 Fault TP Data when the value of Par 329 Fault TP Sel equals 13 Speed P338 Mtr 127 Spd Min Base Speed 1 0 Figure C 2 Motor Overload Curve With Par 338 Mtr I2T Spd Min Is Equal To 1 0 When the value of Par 338 Mtr 2 Spd Min equals 1 0 the curve is flat at the value of rated motor current times the value of Par 336 Motor OL Factor If motor current exceeds the value of the curve the value of Mtr OL Output integrates The value of Mtr OL Output is visible in Par 330 Fault TP Data when the value of Par 329 Fault TP Sel equals 13 Speed Sets an adjustable delay time between detecting zero speed and disabling the speed and torque regulators when responding to a stop command Important Consult industry and local codes when setting the value of this parameter Figure C 3 Drive Operation When Par 154 Stop Dwell Time Equals Zero When Par 154 Stop Dwell Time equals zero the drive turns off the velocity and torque regulators when it detects zero speed Time Drive Detects Zero Speed and Turns Off Regulators 5 2 2 8 2 5 3
434. ms 74 HH1 Data Rev 14 Reserved 33 Dfl PWM Khz 54 DBE Jo degC 75 HH1 Dev Type 15 Fan PwrCntl 34 PWM Dead us 55 DB EB C Watt 76 HH1 Serial 16 Temp Sensor 35 Drive Frame 56 DBB Jo degC 77 Test Date 17 Phs AmpScale 36 IGBTs per 57 DB BA C Watt 78 HH1 Vcn Code 18 Gnd 37 GBT Rated V 60 DB Ambt Tmax 79 1 CrsCnclD Power EE TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 412 Power EE TP Sel Default 221 15 95 61 5000 10 0000 90 0000 30 0000 10 0000 180 0000 1 Enbl PrChrg 0 PrChrg 1 Enbl PrChrg P B ID HH1 S W ID HH1 Option HH1 2s Amp HH1 Scale HH Serial 0 2200000000 HH1 P B Rev HH1 S W Rev HH1 Extr Data HH1 VoltIndx HH1 Sizelndx 1 HH1 H W Mdfy HH1 1V Amp HH Data Rev HH2 Dev Type HH TestDate HH2 Vcn Code HH2 CrsCnclD Read Write Linkable 20 99 HH2P BID 100 HH2 S W ID 101 HH2 P B Rev 102 HH2 S W Rev 103 HH2 ExtrData 104 HH2 Voltindx 105 2 Sizelndx 106 HH2 Option 107 HH2 HrdPrdct 108 HH2 H W Mdfy 109 HH2 1V Amp 110 HH2 2s Amp 111 HH2 Scale RW RW Real Real pm 3 60 Programming and Parameters No 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 Name Description Brake Bus Cnfg brake and bus operation of the drive Set bit 0 Brake
435. n 2 04 Bit 19 MotinPlanner and 24 PhaseLockLp were added for firmware version 3 01 Options 2 5 ns c 3 la B 2 8 88 8 2 2 Selo Be 26555 lt lt 01 5 5 55 B 898 5 5 215 gg lt lt 5 8 215 525 238 8588 o 52 22588 A ja N A A A a o gt Default 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Y 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 148 TaskTime Default 0 0 5 2 8ms RO 16 bit Displays the actual firmware scan times selected by Par 146 FW TaskTime Sel Before the Options 0 0 5 2 8ms Integer change to the firmware scan time is accepted the drive evaluates the change to ensure the Mz 05 1 8ms processor will not be overloaded If there is risk of overloading the processor the change will 2 0251 8ms not be accepted 025 0 5 8ms 4 0 1 0 5 8ms 5 0 5 1 2ms 6 0 25 1 2ms 7 0 25 0 5 2ms 8 0 1 0 5 2ms 149 IFW FunctionsActl Displays the actual state of the firmware functions If activating requested functions could overload the processor the change to Par 147 FW Functions En will not be accepted Note Bit 19 MotinPlanner and 24 PhaseLockLp were add
436. n card e Bit 8 No Data Read indicates that no data can be read from the encoder e Bit 9 Alarm Optics displays an alarm when fiber optics require cleaning Bit 10 Out of Range indicates that the encoder read count is at the maximum value 524 287 e Bit 11 ErrBits16 31 displays a diagnostic error code refer to bits 16 31 Bit 16 Fault Optics indicates that the read head for fiber optic cable must be cleaned or replaced Bit 17 Read Head indicates that the fiber optic cable read head must be checked aligned or replaced e Bit 18 RAM error indicates that the fiber optic cable read head must be replaced Bit19 EPROM error indicates that there is an error with the communication module replace read head Bit 20 ROM error indicates replace read head Bit 22 No Position Cycle power to Stahl read head Options 5 alg 5 8 8 SISISISISISISISISISISISISISISISISISISISIS ISISITISISISISISI8I8 18 lelBleleleleleel8aleslalszrjolelelegiiesislelelele gt gt 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 8 58 588 8 8 89 Io x 2585 2 8 8 8 2 S 9 9 8 8 8 Z jo ju O fe z jc jc c X 0 False Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 JO 0 0 JO 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
437. n3 Data 812 Anlg In3 Filt BW 817 Anlg In3 Offset 815 Anlg In3 Scale 814 Anlg In3 Sel 820 Anlg In3 Value 813 Anlg In3LossCnfg 1095 Anlg Out1 Dint 832 Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Anlg Out1 Offset 834 Brake TP Sel 418 Out1 Real 833 Brake Watts 417 Anlg Out1 Scale 835 Brake Bus Cnfg 414 Anlg Out1 Sel 831 Break Frequency 530 Anlg 1 Value 837 Break Voltage 529 Anlg Out Zero 836 Bus Reg ACR Kp 548 Anlg Out2 Dint 839 Bus Reg Kd 547 Anlg Out2 Offset 841 Bus Reg Ki 545 Anlg Out2 Real 840 Bus Reg Kp 546 Anlg Out2 Scale 842 Bus Util Limit 500 Anlg Out2 Sel 838 BusReg Brake Ref 415 Anlg Out2 Value 844 BusUndervoltCnfg 393 Anlg Out2 Zero 843 Cnv NotLogin Cfg 368 Applied LogicCmd 152 Coarse Spd Trgt 750 Atune Spd Ref 74 CoarsePosit Trgt 748 Atune Trq Ref 129 Compare 1A 1071 Auto Manual Cnfg 649 Compare 1B 1072 Aux Posit Ref 743 Compare 2A 1073 Basiclndx Output 799 Compare 2B 1074 Basiclndx Preset 798 Control Options 153 Basiclndx Step 797 CurrFdbk AdjTime 551 BitSwap 1 Result 864 Current Limit Gain 362 BitSwap 1A Bit 861 Current Reg BW 503 BitSwap 1A Data 860 Curr Ref TP Data 358 BitSwap 1B Bit 863 Curr Ref TP Sel 357 BitSwap 1B Data 862 DC Brake Level 1125 BitSwap 2 Result 869 DC Brake Time 1126 BitSwap 2A Bit 866 DC Bus Voltage 306 BitSwap 2A Data 865 Dead Time 404 BitSwap 2B Bit 868 Dead Time Comp 405 BitSwap 2B Data 867 Decel Time 1 33 BitSwap 3 Result 874 Delayed Spd Ref 45 BitSwap 3A Bit 871 DelayT
438. nal strobes The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 236 RegisLtch 0 1Cnfg 240 Encdri Position Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the position feedback accumulator from encoder 0 The value changes by a value 2147483648 Integer of four times 4x the Pulses Per Revolution PPR rating of the encoder for each full revolution of the encoder shaft Used by the VPL to close the position loop if position control is selected 241 Encdri Spd Fdbk Units RPM RO Real Displays the speed feedback from encoder 1 Calculated from the change of Par 240 Encdr1 Default 0 Position and Par 242 Encoder PPR Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu 242 Encoderi PPR Units RW 16 bit Sets the pulse per revolution rating of the feedback device connected to the Encoder 1 input Default 1024 Integer Min Max 10 20000 245 Spd Fdbk TP Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select the data displayed in Par 246 Spd Fdbk TP RPM and Par 247 Options 0 Zero 21 E0 EPR Spd Fdbk TP Data i Wo 1 Clock Time 22 EO Edge Mode Note Option values 5 15 were changed to Reserved and option 41 First Diff was added 2 InactvFbkDev 23 EQ nMax for firmware version 2 04 ActiveFbkDev 24 E0 Error 4 MCP Fdbk Dev 25 EO 01055 5 Reserved 26 0 Ploss 6 Reserved 27 PleviHist 7
439. nd Parameters 32 109 Parameter Cross Reference By Name Param Name Text Parameter Motor Flux 309 Hrd OvrTrviCnfg 397 Sft OvrTrviCnfg 395 700L AlarmStatus 334 700L EventStatus 332 700L FaultStatus 333 Abs OverSpd Lim 335 Abs Posit Offset 757 Accel Time 1 32 Act Spd Reg BW 97 CurrFdbk AdjTime 551 AddSub 1 Add 1097 AddSub 1 Input 1096 AddSub 1 Result 1099 AddSub 1 Subtrct 1098 AddSub 2 Add 1101 AddSub 2 Input 1100 AddSub 2 Result 1103 AddSub 2 Subtrct 1102 AddSub 3 Add 1105 AddSub 3 Input 1104 AddSub 3 Result 1107 AddSub 3 Subtrct 1106 Al 1 Filt Gain 804 Al 2 Filt Gain 810 Al 3 Filt Gain 816 Alarm Status 1 326 Alarm Status 2 327 Alarm Status 3 328 Analog I O Units 821 Anlg In1 Data 800 Anlg In1 Filt BW 805 In1 Offset 803 In1 Scale 802 Anlg In1 Sel 818 Anlg In1 Value 801 Anlg In1LossCnfg 1093 Anlg In2 Data 806 Anlg In2 Filt BW 811 Anlg In2 Offset 809 1 2 Scale 808 Anlg In2 Sel 819 Anlg In2 Value 807 Anlg In2LossCnfg 1094 Anlg I
440. ne Results 1 Motor NP Volts 525 Slip Ratio 485 Motor Ctrl Mode 423 145 Rate Limit 421 Iqs Integ Freq 2 Motor NP FLA 526 Stator Frequency 402 PWM Frequency 453 lu Offset 422 195 Reg P Gain 3 Motor NP Hertz 434 Mtr Vds Base 403 Voltage Class 454 Iw Offset 429 105 Integ Freq 4 Motor NP RPM 435 Mtr Vqs Base 405 Dead Time Comp 425 Flux Rate Limit 430 Ids Reg P Gain 5 Motor NP Power 441 Vds Fdbk Filt 409 Line Undervolts 426 Flux Satur Coef 486 Rated Freq 6 Mtr NP Pwr Units 442 Vqs Fdbk Filt 410 PreChrg TimeOut 443 Flux Reg P Gaint 487 Motor NTC 336 Motor OL Factor 497 Vqs Command 411 PreChrg Control 470 Flux Reg P Gain2 488 Flux Current 7 Motor Poles 498 Vds Command 510 Mode Config 444 Flux Reg Gain 490 Statorlnductance 9 Total Inertia 495 145 Command 511 FVC2 Mode Config 533 Flux Gain Adjust 491 StatorResistance 496 105 Command 512 PMag Mode Cnfg 500 Bus Util Limit 492 Leak Inductance 499 Trq CurFdbk Iq 513 V Hz Mode Config 501 Torque En Dly 493 Leak Indc Satur1 489 Fix CurFdbk Id 514 Test Mode Config 437 Vqs 494 Leak Indc Satur2 515 Tune Config 438 Vds Max 502 Rotor Resistance 516 FVC2 Tune Config 439 Min 503 Current Reg BW 517 PMag Tune Config 440 Vds Min 504 AbsEncd Offst 505 PM TestWait Time 469 FVC CEMF Comp 427 Mtr Comp 506 Test Idc Ramp 449 51155 Reg Gain 520 Inductance 507 Test FregRamp 450 51155 Reg P Gain 521 PMD Inductance 508 PM Test Freq Ref 447 Slip Reg P
441. nlg In2 Value Displays the actual input value at Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2 may be configured for voltage or current input signal For proper selection of the input signal the DIP switch and Par 821 Analog Units must be set to match Type of Input Configurable Voltage or Current Polarity Bi Polar Resolution 14 bit 8191 to 8191 DIP Switch Analog I O Units Al 2 Voltage 55 1 Open Par 821 Bit 1 0 False 12 Current S5 1 Closed Par 821 Bit 1 1 True Anlg In2 Scale Scales the range of Analog Input 2 to the range of Par 806 Anlg In2 Data Par 807 Anlg In2 Value is multiplied by this number to produce the input to the lead lag filter function In2 Offset Applies an offset to Analog Input 2 Use the offset to correct for zero signal errors or to create an offset to the actual input The output of the A D converter is summed with this parameter to produce Par 807 Anlg In2 Value AI 2 Filt Gain Provides the Lead term for the Analog Input 2 filter Anlg In2 Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Analog Input 2 filter Light Par 810 Al 2 Filt Gain 0 25 01 Par 811 Anlg In2 Filt BW 50 10 Anlg In3 Data Values Units Default Units Default Units Default Default Units Default Min Max Default Units Default
442. not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 393 BusUndervoltCnfg Default 1 Alarm Ener a value to configure the drive s response to DC Bus voltage falling below the minimum Options 0 Ignore Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event i Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit Pca pat when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event 394 VoltFdbkLossCnfg Default 2 FltCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a communication error between Motor Options 0 Ignore Control MC and the motor voltage feedback board H Alarm Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event 2 FltCoastStop Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event 395 98 OvrTrviCnfg Default 1 Alarm ic
443. nt Ref 431 SL System Time 317 Speed Ref 2 12 Test Freq Rate 433 SL Tx CommFormat 910 Speed Ref A Sel 27 Test Freq Ref 432 SL Tx DirectSelo 911 Speed Ref B Sel 28 Test Mode Config 514 SL Tx DirectSel1 912 Speed Ref Scale 38 Time Axis Output 203 SL Tx DirectSel2 913 Speed Trim 1 21 Time Axis Rate 202 SL Tx DirectSel3 914 Speed Trim 2 22 To DL DataType 625 SLAT Dwell Time 120 Speed Trim 3 23 DriveLogix00 626 SLAT ErrorSetpnt 119 Speed TorqueMode 110 DriveLogix01 627 Slip Comp Gain 99 SReg FB Filt BW 94 To DriveLogix02 628 Slip Gain 98 SReg Out Filt BW 96 To DriveLogix03 629 Slip Gain Max 445 SReg Trq Preset 87 To DriveLogix04 630 Slip Gain Min 446 SRegFB Filt Gain 93 To DriveLogix05 631 Slip Preload Val 552 SRegOut FiltGain 95 To DriveLogix06 632 Slip Ratio 525 SrLss Angl Comp 541 To DriveLogix07 633 Slip Reg Gain 448 SrLss FreqReg Ki 449 To DriveLogix08 634 Slip Reg P Gain 447 SrLss FreqReg Kp 450 To DriveLogix09 635 Slip RPM FLA 98 5155 Spd Reg BW 106 To DriveLogix10 636 Slip RPM Meter 107 5155 Spd Reg Ki 105 To DriveLogix11 637 Slip Slew Rate 553 5155 Spd Reg Kp 104 To DriveLogix12 638 Spd Err Filt BW 89 SrLss StbltyFilt 539 To DriveLogix13 639 Spd Fdbk Scale 73 SrLss Volt Comp 542 To DriveLogix14 640 Spd Fdbk TP Data 247 SrLss VoltStblty 538 To DriveLogix15 641 Spd Fdbk TP RPM 246 5155 ZeroSpdLim 169 To DriveLogix16 642 Spd Fdbk TP Sel 245 SrLssAngleStblty 537 To DriveLogix17 643 Spd Ref Bypass 37 SrvoAxis RotFdbk 707 To DriveLogix18 64
444. ntentional contact with chassis or components Installation Wiring 1 19 Frames Jumper Jumper Location No 6 Wire Common Remove the wire guard from the Power Terminal Please Mode Block Disconnect the three green yellow wires from refer to Capacitors two PE terminals shown in Figure 1 4 Insulate Power MOV s and secure the wires to guard against unintentional Input Filter contact with chassis or components vida Capacitors on page 1 16 ATTENTION The disconnecting MOV must be used on a AN grounded system 1 20 Installation Wiring Frame 1 Figure 1 5 Typical Jumper Locations Control Assembly amp I O Cassette Removed Frames 3 amp 4 BRIBR2 DC DC UTI 2 WTS RLI 542 miooo o 2 d amp SISHLD 5 Lea J wal Frame 5
445. o 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 2 2 Name E Description Values Tune Default 0 None ndicates which test if any is in progress 0 5 Value 7 is retained and is used to continue the Auto Tune test from the last point at which it 15 cy m s 2 was stopped ing Los am Note Option value 5 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Value 7 Mtr Sys 55 aawer Diag 22 E J was changed to Slip Test for firmware version 3 01 Motor Ctrl Cmmd Displays the command bits to the Motor Control Processor from the Velocity Processor Options l gt l5 e l l 15 1 15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1151 15 219 8 4 55555 215 21515 515 55 255 515 5 2 5 5515 58 5 5 8 8 8 9 do 9 5 a CC CC CC rc cc 1 ic e Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12141 109 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 Motor Ctrl Ackn Displays the Motor Control Processor s acknowledgment to the Veloci
446. o 5501 pou 2 8801 546 264 8 5 30Na HH o 1 a Alo 254 5 5507 0140 841 o 5 ald S S 284 S 5 B 8501000 Galo 3 5254 E M dul 5801 HO didlo El dui TOMEI El 5 STAPEL lo 5501 HdO 84 uL 10988 1 WS WAN 33 6 WSYD g lo E WEN FAO 6 e s 40 33 n MH US n AUIS E g g m S ojn T s 2 WWOD HUTS 5 o gt z uo o co WWOD AUIS 2 8507 5 o 5 13 55d 5 5501 1 M0d x e S Ssoap4ioA S 2 E TO AW S e 55013001011 2 10 wely fug uN 3 5 pued 10 41 o E g 19A MH HH o B e 8 e c 11015 Y Qyeede geu3 lt Bx amp S 1115 100 e 5 9 puegdue 9 8 uou s 4 lt 8 gs 5 HH o 8 puaqdw aul 9 5 L 8 Au c st 5 2 x 5
447. ode Field oriented control is selected by setting parameter 485 Motor Ctrl Mode 0 FOC Application Notes C 3 In field oriented control the drive takes the speed reference that is specified by the Speed Reference Selection Block and compares it to the speed feedback The speed regulator uses Proportional and Integral gains to adjust the torque reference for the motor This torque reference attempts to operate the motor at the specified speed The torque reference is then converted to the torque producing component of the motor current This type of speed regulator produces a high bandwidth response to speed command and load changes In field oriented control the flux and torque producing currents are independently controlled Therefore you can send a torque reference directly instead of a speed reference The independent flux control also allows you to reduce the flux in order to run above base motor speed High Bandwidth Current Regulator CURRENT FEEDBACK Flux V mag Reg SPEED REF Speed Current Voltage Reg Reg Control Inverter TORQUE REF Vang Adaptive Controller AUTOTUNE PARAMETERS SPEED FEEDBACK Permanent Magnet Control Permanent magnet control is used with permanent magnet motors Permanent magnet motor control is selected by setting parameter 485 Motor Ctrl Mode 2 Pmag Motor Permanent magnet motor control requires ei
448. oeqpee 4 uonensibey 1 0 1 0 Jepoou3 di PAS 1 pds IPS dL 9 qeissi6ey 1 0140 1 155 0209 1 0140 L 09u3 Sjulogise L 01dO 09u3 yoy s y 190 Ljpou3 yoy sibey 0 190 oJpou3 ud 95 AW 2229 IIM xqp4 uonisog 2229 ueuw tavi pve 1 mg 8501 281 pds 5 5 21601 feidsig WIH OL pys 002 peeds pds sso piqp4 mg oiv suondo jouo 95 L asemu qp4 15 HY sy ssoqyoe puewwog 21601 legaiqed QASH Coz snje S QJeAoses a SyOA Ul I Cu Cuz 2 QUA SEY onewpds ouaisey QI uondo i 1 oido 84 gt Q1eAjoses 0 uondo xoeqpee yy 0 Quuewba s pds oido 84 9129 pds Joenus JOJON payeinwis 562 reuje6p3 193 183 buisseooJg Hdd LJ9poou3 Buisseooug 0 5 V ge pds 195
449. ol Operation Note This parameter was added form firmware version 2 03 Options Ele 59965 95955 iz 2 2 292992 2229592999 8 5 crm Defaut 0 lo o o o o Jo 0 o oj Jo 1286 Bt 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 541 SrLss Angl Comp Default 0 0 RW 16 bit TBD Min Max 16384 nteger Note This parameter was added for future use not active for use with firmware version 2 03 542 SrLss Volt Comp Units _ Volts RW 16 bit TBD Default 100 0 nteger Note This parameter was added for future use not active for use with firmware version 1000 0 2 03 545 Reg Ki Default 1450 0 RW 16 bit Sets the responsiveness of the bus regulator Min Max 0 0 100000 nteger Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 546 Bus Reg Kp Default 1500 0 RW 16 bit Proportional gain for the bus regulator Used to adjust regulator response Min Max 0 0 10000 0 nteger Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 547 Reg Kd Default 1000 0 RW 16 bit Derivative gain for the bus regulator Used to control regulator overshoot Min Max 0 0 10000 0 nteger Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 548 Bus Reg ACR Kp Default 225 0 RW 16 bit This proportional gain in conjunction with Par 545 Bus Reg Ki adjusts the output Min Max 0 0 100000 Integer frequency of the drive during a bus l
450. omp Spd Ref 65 FricComp Setup 66 FricComp Stick 67 FricComp Slip 68 FricComp Rated 69 FricComp Trq Add Programming and Parameters 3 7 Torque Current 110 Speed TorqueMode 303 Motor Torque Ref 302 Spd Reg PI Out 309 Motor Flux 59 Inertia Trq Add 359 Motor Flux Est 69 FricComp Trq Add 360 Min Flux 111 Torque Ref 1 361 LpassFilt BW 112 Torque Ref1 Div 350 Iq Actual Ref 113 Torque Ref 2 351 Iq Ref Trim 114 Torque Ref2 Mult 308 Output Current 115 Torque Trim 343 OL OpnLp CurrLim 119 SLAT ErrorSetpnt 356 Mtr Current Lim 120 SLAT Dwell Time 362 Current Lmt Gain 319 Selected Trq Ref 352 Is Actual Lim 116 Torque Step 488 Flux Current 129 Atune Trq Ref 312 MotorFluxCurr FB 117 NotchAttenuation 345 Drive OL JnctTmp 118 Notch Filt Freq 313 Heatsink Temp 415 BusReg Brake Ref 346 Drive OL Status 401 Rated Volts 344 OL CurrLim 306 DC Bus Voltage 353 Iq Actual Lim 300 Motor Spd Fdbk 354 Iq Rate Limit 127 Mtring Power Lim 355 Ig Ref Limited 128 Regen Power Lim 305 Mtr Curr Ref 353 Iq Actual Lim 125 Torque Pos Limit 126 Torque Neg Limit 123 Trq PosLim 124 Trq NegLim 303 Motor Torque Ref 132 Inert Adapt Sel 133 Inert Adapt BW 134 Inert Adapt Gain 221 Load Estimate 3 8 Programming and Parameters 181 Reference 202 Time Axis Rate 182 PI Feedback 203 Time Axis Output 184 PI Lpass Filt BW 204 LimGen Y axis Mx 183 Error 205 LimGen Y axis Mn 185
451. onversion from Real to DInt This is a multiplication to the input value Min Max 2200000000 0000 after conversion to a DInt value 1052 Real2Dint Result Default 0 RO 32 bit This is the resultant output of the conversion form a Real value to a Dint value after scaling Min Max 2147483648 Integer 1053 MulDiv 1 Input Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Input value to be scaled as need with the Multiplication and Division function This input will Min Max 2200000000 0000 be multiplied by Par 1054 MulDiv 1 Mul and then divided by Par 1055 MulDiv 1 Div The result will be loaded to Par 1056 MulDiv 1 Result Equation Par 1053 Par 1054 Par 1055 Par 1056 1054 MulDiv 1 Mul Default 0 0000 4 Real Set this value as the multiplier to the value of Par 1053 MulDiv 1 Input The result willbe Min Max 2200000000 0000 divided by Par 1055 and loaded into Par 1056 See Par 1053 1055 MulDiv 1 Div Default 0 0000 RW Real Set this value as the divisor of the result of Par 1053 Par 1054 The result will be loaded into Min Max 2200000000 0000 Par 1056 See Par 1053 1056 MulDiv 1 Result Default 0 0000 RO Real This is the result output from the Multiplication and Division function See Par 1053 Min Max 2200000000 0000 Equation Par 1056 Par 1053 Par 1054 Par 1055 1057 MulbDiv 2 Input Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Input value to be scaled as need with the Multiplication and Division
452. or loosening the terminal bolt in order to avoid damage to the terminal Not all terminals present on all drives Refer to the terminal block label inside the drive Auxiliary power UL Installation 300V DC 10 Non UL Installation 270 600V DC 10 Frame 1 6 100 W 1 14 Installation Wiring Figure 1 3 Typical Power Terminal Block Location Frame 1 Frame 2 Ho MN 0 i e I 4 PME _ aeee eh 000 gt us gu er g E E SHLD B deci md po i e e Frame 5 5 Phase Selection Frame 3 amp 4 1 0 L TEA WT3 RLI 512 TAS 22 9 2 21 9 a U 6 g X
453. or up to 1 minute 150 Overload capability for up to 3 seconds 150 Overload capability for up to 3 seconds Current Limit Capability Independent Motoring and Regenerative Power Limits programmable to 80096 of rated output current Independent Motoring and Regenerative Power Limits programmable to 800 of rated output current Electronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response Investigated by U L to comply with N E C Article 430 U L File E59272 volume 12 Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response Investigated by U L to comply with N E C Article 430 U L File E59272 volume 12 4 Supplemental Information Category Specification Frames 1 6 690V Drive frames 5 amp 6 only Frames 9 amp up Feedback Inputs 2 Dual Channel Plus Marker Isolated with differential transmitter Dual Channel Plus Marker Isolated with differential transmitter Output Line Drive Incremental Dual Channel Quadrature type Output Line Drive Incremental Dual Channel Quadrature type Encoder Voltage Supply 5 DC or 12 V DC 320 mA channel 5V DC or 12 V DC 320 mA channel 5V DC requires an external power supply 5V DC requires an external power supply 12 V DC minimum high state voltage of V DC maximum low 12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7V DC maximum low state voltage of 0 4V DC state voltage of 0 4V DC Maximum Input Frequency 400 kHz 400 kHz St
454. ote The Max value was increased from 600 0000 for firmware version 3 01 SRegFB Filt Gain Sets the lead term for the speed feedback filter Values greater than 1 will result in a lead function and values less than 1 will result in a lag function A value of 1 will disable the filter SReg FB Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Speed Feedback filter SRegOut FiltGain Sets the lead term for the Speed Regulator output filter Values greater than 1 will result in a lead function and values less than 1 will result in a lag function A value of 1 will disable the filter Note The default value for this parameter was changed from 0 7000 to 1 0000 for firmware version 2 03 SReg Out Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Speed Regulator output filter Act Spd Reg BW Displays the tial speed regulator bandwidth or crossover frequency The value represents the bandwidth in Par 90 Spd Reg BW after the maximum bandwidth limits have been applied Slip RPM 0 FLA Sets the amount of compensation to drive output at motor full load current FLA Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Slip Comp Gain Sets the response time of slip compensation Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Speed Error The error difference between the motor speed reference and the filtered motor speed feedback SpdReg Integ Out The output valle of the Speed Regulator Integral channel Spd Reg Pos Lim Skis the posit
455. ow this input is updated to Par 1028 Swtch Dint 1 Output 1027 Swtch Dint 1 NO Default 0 0000 V RW 32 it This is the Normally Open input to the Real switch When Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 6 Sw Min Max 2200000000 0000 Integer DInt 1 On is high this input is updated to Par 1028 Swtch DInt 1 Output 1028 Switch Dint 1 Out Default 0 0000 RO 32 bit This is the result of the switch The output is loaded with the selected input based on Par 1022 Min Max 2200000000 0000 Integer Sel Switch Ctrl bit 6 Sw DInt 1 On If this parameter does not update check the setting of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable bit 1 User Params 1029 Swtch In00 Default 10 0000 V RW Real Min Max 2200000000 0000 1044 Sel Swtch In15 Set these values for the inputs to the selector switch specified in Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl All inputs are entered as Real values You may use the output of the selector switch as either Real or Dint A conversion is done to create the Dint value Programming and Parameters 323 101 a Fle Name s No Description Values 2 5 1045 SelSwtch RealOut Default 0 0000 RO Real This is the result of the selector switch The output is loaded with the selected input based Min Max 2200000000 0000 Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 0 and bits 1 4 The output is only updated when Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 0 SSW DataPass is high If Par 1022 Sel
456. peed Control Reference Select 4 Speed Control Reference B 5 Speed Control Regulator B 6 Process Control B 7 Torque Control Torque B 8 Torque Control Current B 9 Speed Position Feedback B 10 Inputs amp Outputs Digital B 11 Inputs amp Outputs Analog B 12 Control Logic 13 Position Control Interp Direct B 14 Position Control Point to Point B 15 Position Control Auxiliary Control B 16 Point To Point Motion Planner B 17 Phase Lock Loop B 18 User Functions 1 B 19 User Functions 2 B 20 Synchlink B 21 V Hz B 22 Diagnostic Tools B 23 Inverter Overload IT B 24 DriveLogix Connection Speed Control B 25 DriveLogix Connection Position Control B 26 DriveLogix Connection Motion Control B 27 2 Control Block Diagrams Diagram Conventions and Definitions Definitions of the Per Unit system 1 0 PU Position Distance traveled 1sec at Base Spd 1 0 PU Speed Base Speed of the Motor H 0 PU Torque Base Torque of the Motor Read Only Parameter Read Write Parameter Read Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration Provides additional information lt gt lt X Read Only Parameter with Bit Enumeration C Enumerated Parameter Page and Coordinate ex 3A2 7 pg 3 Column A Row 2 Constant value Processor Task time selection NOTE Faster Task time selections may require program functions to be disabled to stay within processor load capabilities FW TaskTime Sel 714
457. plays the fault status for port 0 of the Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Card Par 264 HeidenhainO Stat displays the fault status for port 0 of the Heidenhain Feedback Option Card Par 269 Resolver Status displays the fault status for port 0 of the Resolver Feedback Option Card Reconnect option feedback card 6 1 Loss The Linear sensor portion of the MDI feedback option card has Reconnect encoder or replace encoder detected a fault condition Reconnect option feedback card Par 286 Linear Status displays the fault status for linear portion of the MDI feedback Option Card 7 Params Defaulted 0 All parameters are reset to default by user 8 SLink HW Fail A fault on loading SynchLink firmware into FPGA on Controller Replace Main Controller Board board at power up 9 SLink Comm Fail A SynchLink communication fault has occurred Verify the SynchLink configurations Par 904 SL Node Cnfg Par 905 SL Rx Par 902 SL Error Status displays SynchLink errors CommFormat and Par 910 SL Tx CommFormat Reconnect SynchLink communication fibers 10 Drive PowerLoss DC Bus voltage has fallen below the minimum value Verify AC line power Par 306 DC Bus Voltage displays bus voltage Par 330 Fault TP Data displays the minimum value when Par 329 Fault TP Sel is set to five The drive must first complete precharge before this check is made 11 MotorOLoad Trip A moto
458. points for all inputs outputs and standard encoder connections Both terminal blocks reside on the Main Control Board Remove the terminal block plug from the socket and make connections Do not use a tool for terminal block removal Damage may occur if a tool is used Important For NEMA 1 applications all wiring must be routed through the conduit plate on the drive Route any wires from the expanded cassette to the base cassette and out of the drive Reinstall the plug when wiring is complete The terminal blocks have keys which make it difficult to insert a terminal plug into the wrong socket Table 1 H Control amp Encoder Terminal Block Specifications Wires Size Range Torque Name Frame Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended VO Blocks 16 Signal amp Encoder 1 5mm 14mm 25N m 22 N m connections 16 AWG 28 AWG 2 21b in 1 9 Ib in 0 Maximum minimum sizes the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations Figure 1 Main Control Board I O Terminal Locations TB1 Terminals 2 2 3 m i r3 H aus EE
459. position error in following applications Inertia SpeedRef The speed input of the inertia compensator Link this parameter to the output of an internal ramp or s curve block The inertia compensator generates a torque reference that is proportional to the rate of change of speed input and total inertia InertiaAccelGain Sets the acceleration gain for the Inertia Compensation function A value of 1 produces 10096 compensation InertiaDecelGain Sets the deceleration gain for the Inertia Compensation function A value of 1 produces 10096 compensation Inertia Trq Add The torque reference output generated by the inertia compensator This torque level is modified by Par 57 InertiaAccelGain and Par 58 InertiaDecelGain A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor DeltaSpeedScale Multiplier in the Inertia Compensation function affects the value of Par 59 Inertia Trq Add Use in center winder and unwind applications to compensate for roll diameter build up Virt Encoder EPR Equivalent Edges Per Revolution EPR or line count of a virtual encoder A virtual encoder is a position reference whose input comes from speed reference It accumulates pulses at the same rate as a real encoder of identical Pulses Per Revolution PPR Enter the equivalent PPR Values Units Defau t Scale Defau t wn gt Da x Da o2 zc REVS o zc
460. presents base speed of the motor Spd Divide 10 Speed Ref 1 is divided by this number This number can be used to scale the value of Par 10 Speed Ref 1 Speed Ref 2 Ss the speed reference that the drive should use when selected by Par 27 Speed Ref A Sel or Par 28 Speed Ref B Sel A value of 1 0 represents base speed of the motor Spd Ref2 Multi Pr 12 Speed Ref 2 is multiplied by this number This number can be used to scale the value of Par 12 Speed Ref 2 Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 7 Provides internal fixed speed command value The preset speeds may be selected with 27 Speed Ref A Sel or Par 28 Speed Ref B Sel Speed Trim 1 Provides an additive trim value to Par 38 Speed Ref Scale Speed Trim 2 Provides an additive speed trim value to Par 47 SpdRef SpdTrm1 with a Lead Lag filter The Position regulator output is linked to this parameter by default This speed trim value affects the speed reference input to the speed regulator Speed Trim 3 Provides a scalable speed trim value that will be added to Par 47 SpdRef SpdTrm1 Par 24 SpdTrim 3 Scale scales this value prior to the trim value affecting the speed reference SpdTrim 3 Scale Par 23 Speed Trim 3 is multiplied by this number This number be used to scale the value of Par 23 Speed Trim 3 STrim2 Filt Gain Sets the lead term for the Par 22 Speed Trim 2 filter Values greater than 1 will re
461. puts configured as Jog2 Reprogram Par 825 830 so only 1 is set to Jog2 Multiple inputs configured as Fwd Rev Reprogram Par 825 830so only 1 is set to Fwd Rev 14 Invalid Feedback Device for Permanent Magnet Motor Control Set Par 222 to Value 5 FB Opt Port0 4 4 Troubleshooting HIM Indication The HIM also provides visual notification of a fault Condition Display Drive is indicating a fault The LCD HIM immediately reports the fault condition by displaying the following e Faulted appears the status line Fault F24 F gt Faultea auto DC Bus Overvolt e Fault number Time since Fault e Fault name 00 23 52 e Time that has passed since the fault occurred Press Esc to regain control of the HIM Manually Clearing Faults This section will contain a table that illustrates the HIM keystrokes necessary to clear faults Step Key s 1 Press Esc to acknowledge the fault The fault information will be removed so that you can use the HIM Go Address the condition that caused the fault The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared 3 After corrective action has been taken clear the fault by one of these methods Press Stop Cycle drive power Select Clear Faults from Diagnostic Faults menu Fault Descriptions Table 4 D Fault Descriptions and Configuration Parameters No Name Type Description Action 1 Abs Ovespd Det Motor speed has exceede
462. r 200V class drives Verify that either Par 414 Brake Bus Cnfg the brake or bus regulator is enabled Verify that Par 128 Regen Power Lim is set properly f Par 414 bit 0 Set Brake Enable is set verify braking resistor is properly sized 25 Inv Trans The IGBT detects a transistor fail Desat 26 Ground Fault A current to earth exceeds 35 of the peak drive rating Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition 27 Inst Overcurrent Instantaneous motor current exceeds 214 of rating Reduce mechanical load Checkthe motor and external wiring to the motor Troubleshooting 4 7 No Name Type Description Action 28 VPL MC Comm Fail A communication failure has occurred between the Velocity Cycle power Position Loop VPL processor and the Motor Control MC Reflash firmware processor on the main control board Possible causes are Replace Main Controller Board VPL is flashing MC firmware into the MC processor when HIM indicates Loading Config MC has failed to complete or pass diagnostic tests MC has not detected VPL handshake activity for over 32 ms VPL has not detected MC handshake activity for over 32 ms This is indicated when Fault Test Point 15 or 16 equals 1 This test point is viewed in Par 330 Fault TP Data when Par 329 Fault TP Select is set to value 15 or 16 29 PWM Sign
463. r 4 for a list of potential digital input conflicts If a fault code appears refer to Chapter 4 The STS LED should be flashing green at this point 8 Proceed to Start Up Routine This routine prompts you for information needed to start up a drive for most applications such as line and motor data commonly adjusted parameters and I O Important When using the Start Up Assistant always exit the Assistant before Step 1 To exit the User Display screen Press Esc cycling power on the drive Failure to exit may leave unwanted settings active in the drive configuration If after exiting the Start Up Assistant external sources inhibit drive start check Par 671 Start Mask The assisted start up routine asks simple yes or no questions and prompts you to input required information Access Assisted Start Up by selecting Start Up from the Main Menu Key s Example LCD Displays Stopped 0 0 Output C Start Up 1 In the Main Menu use the Down Arrow to scroll to Nar bs stopped Maree TIP Throughout the Start Up Routine many screens 0 0 have more selection than shown Use the arrow keys agnostics to scroll through all the menu options rameter gt Device Select 1 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the Start Up PowerFlex 7005 Push Start Up The Start Up routine sets up the drive for basic operation Enter
464. r 62 2 Press Enter FGP File appears on the File top line and the first three files appear Monitor below it Dynamic Control 3 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the files Group 4 Press Enter to select a file The groups in the file are displayed under it Monitoring Drive Config 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select a group and then a parameter The parameter FG g Parameter value screen will appear Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA 6 Press Enter to edit the parameter Motor NP Hertz 7 Pressthe Up Arrow or Down Arrow to 7 FGP Par 2 change the value If desired press Sel Motor NP FLA to move from digit to digit letter to Amps letter or bit to bit The digit or bit that you can change will be highlighted ALT VIEW gt Limits 8 Press Enter to save the value If you want to cancel a change press Esc S 5 2 9 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the parameters in the GD Motor NETLA 1 500 Amps group or press Esc to return to the ALTIVIEWI gt Limit group list Numeric Keypad Shortcut If using a HIM with a numeric keypad press the ALT key and the key to access the parameter by typing its number Most parameter values are entered directly by the user However certain parameters can be linked so the value of one parameter becomes the value of another
465. r Par 840 Options a pde ie _ dolor Pet Anlg Out2 Real to select the desired parameter for output 2 Sel Spd Ref 16 MtrTrqCurRef 3 Output Curr 17 Speed Ref 4 Cur Iq 18 Speed Fdbk 5 Motor Flux 19 Torque Est 6 Output Power 20 Scl Spd 7 Output Volts 21 RampedSpdRef 8 DC Bus Volts 22 Spd Reg Out 9 PI Reference 23 MOP Level 10 Feedback 24 Trend 1 11 PI Error 25 Trend 1 Real 12 PI Output 26 Trend 2 13 Reserved 27 Trend 2 Real 839 Anlg Out2 Dint Default 0 4 RW 32 bit Link this parameter to an integer source parameter that will control Analog Output 2 Min Max 2147483648 Integer 840 Out2 Real Default 10 0000 IRW Real Link this parameter to a real floating point source parameter that will control Analog Output Min Max 2200000000 0000 2 841 Out2 Offset Default 0 0000 V RW Real Provides an offset for Analog Output 2 before the scaling and limit blocks in the Analog Output Min Max 2200000000 0000 2 function This parameter value is summed with either Par 839 Anlg Out2 Dint or Par 840 Anlg Out2 Real at the beginning of the function 842 Anlg Out2 Scale Units RW Real Scales the range of the source parameter to the range of Analog Output 2 Par 839 Anlg Out2 Default 0 0000 DInt or Par 840 Anlg Out2
466. r REGISTRATION CHASSIS GND TETTETETT TETT 6 PowerFlex 7005 Multi Device Interface MDI Option Card Connection Examples Figure 8 Registration Sensor Connection EXTERNAL 12 or 24 Vdc POWER POWER COMMON SUPPLY Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder COS Rotary Encoder RS485 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 Linear Sensor CLOCK Linear Sensor CLOCK Linear Sensor DATA Linear Sensor DATA Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION CHASSIS GND m Qo RO o o Feedback ion Board Ouuu Rotary Registration Sensor K Power Common Linear Registration Sensor Power ee a E Compatible Permanent Magnet Motors Appendix PowerFlex 7005 Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications The following table contains a list of specifications for the permanent magnet motors compatible with PowerFlex 7005 drives Note that you must have a high resolution Stegmann or compatible resolver Table I A
467. r overload trip has occurred Reduce mechanical load Enter correct motor nameplate full load Par 308 Output Current is squared scaled and integrated over amps Par 2 Motor NP FLA time When this integrated value exceeds 1 0 this Exception Event occurs The integrator s output can be viewed in Par 330 Fault TP Data when Par 329 Fault TP Sel is set to 13 Mtr OL Outpt The overload integration rate is affected by Pars 336 Motor OL Factor 337 Mtr I2T Curr Min 338 Mtr 2 Spd Min and 339 Mtr I2T Calibrat 12 MotorOLoad Pend A motor overload is pending Reduce the mechanical load Enter correct motor nameplate full load Par 308 Output Current is squared scaled and integrated over amps Par 2 Motor NP FLA time When this integrated value exceeds 0 5 this Exception Event occurs The integrator s output can be viewed in Par 330 Fault TP Data when Par 329 Fault TP Sel is set to 13 Mtr OL Outpt The overload integration rate is affected by Pars 336 Motor OL Factor 337 Mtr I2T Curr Min 338 Mtr 2 Spd Min and 339 Mtr I2T Calibrat 13 Motor Stalled The motor has stalled These three conditions have occurred at Increase torque limit the same time for the amount of time specified in Par 373 Motor Stall Time 1 Drive is not stopped Par 150 Logic State Mach not equal to zero 2 Drive is on limit Par 304 Limit Status not equal to zero 3 Drive is at zero speed
468. r resistance as determined by the auto tune procedure Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance Do not change this value Current Reg BW Sets the bandwidth for the current regulator Par 402 PWM Frequency limits the maximum value Reducing the value reduces current regulator over shoot PM AbsEncd Offst Determined by auto tune procedure Values Units Default nits efault nits efault nits efault OC cale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Min Max in Max in Max in Max Min Max Min Max 100 50 200 30 00 0 00 75 00 100 PU 0 0000 8 0000 pu 100 0 0 00 799 99 100 4096 1 00 0 00 100 00 100 8192 20 00 0 00 100 00 100 8192 100 00 25 00 100 00 100 00 25 00 100 00 0 0 800 0 10 0 0 800 0 10 0 200 100 8192 0 200 100 8192 P U 0 0000 8 0000 90 0 10 0 100 0 100 8192 100 0 32767 100 8192 1 00 10 00 100 00 100 8192 5 600 100 30000 0 0 65535 Linkable Read Write 20 WwW RW RO RW RW RW RW RW RO RO RO RO RO RW RW RW RW RW 16 bit Integer Real
469. racted from the result of Par 1100 Par 1101 The result will be loaded into Par 1103 See Par 1100 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 2 Result This is the result output from the Add and Subtract function See Par 1100 Equation Par 1103 Par 1100 Par 1101 Par 1102 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 3 Input Input value to be added to and or subtracted from as need with the Add and Subtract function This input will be added with Par 1105 AddSub 3 Add The result will be subtracted from by the value in Par 1106 AddSub 3 Subtrct The result of the operation is loaded to Par 1107 AddSub 3 Result Equation Par 1104 Par 1105 Par 1106 Par 1107 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 3 Add This value is added to the value of Par 1104 AddSub 3 Input The result will be subtracted from by Par 1106 and loaded into Par 1107 See Par 1104 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 3 Subtrct This value is subtracted from the result of Par 1104 Par 1105 The result will be loaded into Par 1107 See Par 1104 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 3 Result This is the result output from the Add and Subtract function See Par 1104 Equation Par 1107 Par 1104 Par 1105 Par 1106 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 D
470. ram Par 825 830 to include a stop button rewire the drive Run input configured but control options do not match Program Par 153 Bit 8 to 0 2 wire control 8 Start input configured but control options do not match Program Par 153 Bit 8 to 1 3 wire control 12 2 Multiple inputs configured as Start or Run Reprogram Par 825 830 so multiple starts multiple runs or any combination do not exist S Multiple inputs configured as Jog1 Reprogram Par 825 830 so only 1 is set to Jog1 amp Multiple inputs configured as Jog2 Reprogram Par 825 830 so only 1 is set to Jog2 Multiple inputs configured as Fwd Rev Reprogram Par 825 830 so only 1 is set to Fwd Rev 14 Invalid Feedback Device for Permanent Magnet Motor Control Set Par 22210 Value 5 FB Opt Start Up 2 5 Table E Common Start Up Faults Fault Description Action Encoder Loss One of the following has occurred on an encoder Reconnect encoder or replace encoder missing encoder broken wire quadrature error phase loss Motor Overload A motor overload is pending Enter correct motor nameplate full load amps Par 2 Motor NP FLA or reduce excess load Motor Poles Fault Assisted Start Up The poles of the motor do not match its rating Enter correct motor nameplate information Par 4 Motor NP RPM If any digital input is configured to Stop CF CF Clear Faults verify the signal is present or the drive will not start Refer to Chapte
471. ramming and Parameters ae Name s No Description Values 225 236 RegisLtch 0 1Cnfg Configures the registration latch at port 0 or port 1 to be used with Encoder 0 or Encoder 1 respectively Bit 0 RLO 1 selects the encoder for the input source of latched data Setting bit 0 selects encoder 1 resetting the bit to zero selects encoder 0 Bits 1 RLO TrgSrc0 2 RLO TrgSrc1 17 RL1 TrgSrc0 and 18 RL1 TrgSrc1 select the trigger source see Par Table 236A Trigger Source Settings Bits 3 RLO TrgEdg0 4 RLO TrgEdg1 19 RL1 TrgEdg0 and 20 RL1 TrgEdg1 select which edges signal the position see Par Table 2368 Edge Selection Settings Bits 5 RLO DirRev 6 RLO DirFwd 21 RL1 DirRev and 22 RL1 DirFwd set the direction of position capture see Par Table 236C Trigger Direction Settings Bits 8 SL DI Filt 0 9 SL DI Filt 1 10 SL DI Filt 2 and 11 SL DI Filt 3 configure a filter for the digital input 1 and 2 see Par Table 2360 Filter Settings The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored Bits 8 11 add 100ns filter per stage to external trigger Bit0 816 off 0 input to latch on Enc input to latch Options zz 5185815 2 2 9 58 5 855 5 5 5 5 5 5 94 8 lz 8 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt
472. rend Trig 30 PreCharge En 31 Reserved 32 Hrd OvrTrvl 33 Hrd OvrTrvl 34 UserGen Sel0 35 UserGen Sel1 36 UserGen Sel2 37 UserGen Sel3 38 ExtFault Inv 39 Home Switch 3 91 3 92 Programming and Parameters 8 585 Description Values 2 5 831 Out Sel Default 17 Speed Fdbk Use to select the signal for use on Analog Output 1 If the desired signal is not available the Options 0 EE d selection list choose option 0 User Select and link with Par 832 Anlg Out Dint or Par 833 1 Output Fret 15 Anlg Out1 Real to select the desired parameter for output 2 Sel Spd 16 MtrTrqCurRef 3 Output 17 Speed Ref 4 Cur Iq 18 Speed Fdbk 5 Motor Flux 19 Torque Est 6 Output Power 20 Scl Spd Fdbk 7 Output Volts 21 RampedSpdRef 8 DC Bus Volts 22 Spd Reg Out 9 Reference 23 MOP Level 10 Feedback 24 Trend 1 11 PI Error 25 Trend 1 Real 12 PI Output 26 Trend 2 13 Reserved 27 Trend 2 Real 832 Out1 Dint Default 0 RW 32 bit Link this parameter to an integer source parameter that will control Analog Output 1 Min Max 2147483648 Integer 833 Out1 Real Default 0 0000 RW Real Link this parameter to a real floating po
473. rent the accumulator counts down If the value of this parameter exceeds 0 5 the Motor Overload Pending alarm fault 12 occurs If the value of this parameter exceeds 1 0 the Motor Overload Trip fault fault 11 occurs The value of this parameter is saved in non volatile memory after power down if Par 153 Control Options bit20 Motor OL Retention is on Toggling bit 20 of Par 153 Control Options clears the value of this parameter 5 14 13 12 0 11 10 Units Default Scale Units Default Units Default Min Units Default Units Default Units Default Default Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 9 9 Reserved 9 NonCn 9 gt 9 NonCn NonCn gt NonCn 9 NonCn 9 NonOn RPM 352 8000 0 0000 1750 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu P U 1 1500 1 0000 2 0000 P U 0 5000 0 0500 2 0000 P U 1 0000 0 0500 1 0000 P U 2 0000 1 1000 4 0000 P U 1 1500 0 0500 2 0000 0 0 0 0 1 5 Read Write Data Type 0 False 1 True RW RW RW RW RW RO RO Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 3 50 Programming and Parameters No 343 344 345 346 347 348 Name Description OL OpnLp CurrLim Disp
474. rews on face of front cover and remove the cover o Loosen screws on side of rear cover and remove the cover Installation Wiring 1 3 Mounting Clearances ts x x W 101 6mm No Adhesive Label see below C8 Sw 50 8mm 2 0 in 101 6mm 4 0 in Adhesive Lael i see below af 1 27 ES 101 6mm 0 0 4 0 in Ca xh Refer to the PowerFlex 7005 Phase Reference Manual publication 101 6mm PFLEX RM003 for detailed 9m G0 Ain dimension information gm N j exili Operating Temperatures PowerFlex 7008 drives are designed to operate in surrounding air temperature of 0 to 40 C To operate the drive in installations with surrounding air temperature between 41 and 50 C remove the adhesive label affixed to the top of the drive enclosure Table 1 4 Acceptable Surrounding Air Temperature amp Required Actions Required Action IP 20 NEMA IP 20 NEMA 1 00 NEMA Type 1 Open Type Open No Action Required Remove Top Label Remove Top Label amp Drive Catalog Number Vent Plate 2 All Except 20DC072 40 C 50 NA 200 072 40 C 45 50 1 remove vent plate see page 27 for location lift top edge of plate from the chassis Rotate the plate out
475. rive Setting a bit High will configure the associated word as Real FromDriveLogix20 These parameters display the input values communicated from the DriveLogix controller to the PowerFlex 7008 drive Options gt gt gt lo o9 99928838838838 3833832383238323393383 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 PRILL 2 lt IH 5 9 0 58 o CC CC O Defaut 0 0 0 0 jo 0 0 0 Jo 0 0 0 jo 0 0 0 JO 0 jo jo jo JO jo Jo jo 0 0 JO Jo 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2E FromDriveLogix00 Default 0 RO 32 bit to Min Max 32 dependant on Par 601 From DL Integer DataType No 625 Sets the data type for each word communicated from the PowerFlex 7005 drive to DriveLogix type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type 8 5075 Description Values Sigs To DL DataType Setting a bit High will configure the associated word as a Real data DPI In DataType configure the associated word as a Rea Options B2 Real B1 Real oc lt 2 D1 Rea C2 Real C1 Real A1 Rea a a 0 1 S pP a epp 9 pP eroe i epp Defau
476. rive is enabled and run Par 153 Control Options bit 18 SpdRegPreset 0 enables this preset Values Default Options Units Default Min Max Scale Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Programming and Parameters 77 Linkable Read Write Data Type 0 Zero 0 Zero 12 S Crv Match 1 2 User Ref 13 S Array size 2 Logic Select 14 S Array Indx 3 Lgc Sel Ref 15 Reserved 4 Ramp Spd Ref 16 Scl Ext Trim 5 Ramp In 17 Trim FiltOut 6 Spd Ref 18 Ref w Trim 7 Reserved 19 Amp Lim In 8 Reserved 20 Amp LimStat2 9 Reserved 21 Amp Lim2 Out 10 Amp Lim Stat 22 FTD Ramp Out 11 Ramp Match 23 Reserved RPM RO 0 0000 8 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 0 RO 432768 20 0000 0 0000 3000 0000 Sec 4 IRW 50 0000 0 0000 100000 0000 0 0000 RW 0 0000 0 5000 Over Shoot Under Shoot Sec 0 0000 0 0000 300 0000 PU 0 0000 0 0000 0 2500 P U 0 0000 8 0000 3 19 Real 16 bit Integer Real Real Real Real Real 16 bit Integer 3 20 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 9 97 98 99 100 101 10
477. rive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 386 Lgx OutOfRunCnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 387 Lgx Timeout Cnfg Default 2 FltCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Controller to Drive connection timeout aS Options 0 4 Options 0 detected by the drive 1 Alarm Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event 2 FliCoastStop vum he di 3 Fit RampStop e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit 4 FltCurLimStp when this event occurs Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 4 FitCurLimStp
478. rs as the motor enters field weakening AND Par 360 Min Flux is less than 1 per unit Current Limit Gain Sets the responsiveness of the current limit This parameter should not be changed by the user Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Ki Current Limit Current Limit Integral gain This gain is applied to the current limit error signal to eliminate steady state current limit error A larger value increases overshoot during a step of motor current load This parameter should not be changed by the user Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Kd Current Limit Current Limit Derivative gain This gain is applied to the sensed motor current to anticipate a current limit condition A larger value reduces overshoot of the current relative to the current limit value This parameter should not be changed by the user Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Values Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Options Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max PU 0 0000 8 0000 pu P U 0 0000 8 0000 pu P U 1 0000 0 0000 8 00
479. s za a 2 E Bis No Description Values 5 2 5 519 MC Diag Done Indicates which MC diagnostic tests are completed Options e 8 58385 55 lt 5 5 lelelelelelela x G S 5 9 2 S S 2 SIS Ele ele 5 gt 5 8 2 2 52 5 5 55 gt f Defaut 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 520 Inductance Units 96 RW 16 bit ndicates the percent per unit inductance of the motor stator in the torque producing Default 20 00 nteger 9 Min Max 0 00 399 99 Scale 100 8192 521 Inductance Units RW 16 bit ndicates the percent per unit inductance of the motor stator in the flux producing d axis Default 20 00 nteger in Max 0 00 399 99 Scale 100 8192 522 PM Stator Resist Units 96 RW 16 bit ndicates the percent per unit resistance of the motor stator Default 1 50 nteger Min Max 0 00 100 00 Scale 100 8192 523 Mtr Coef Units RW 16 bit the coefficient for Count
480. s e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Interp Fit Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a position interpolator exception event If the interpolator loses the synchronization pulse or is out of synch this event occurs Ext Fit Alm Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to an External Input exception event The event is triggered by a digital input that is configured for auxiliary fault or auxiliary aux fault by setting bit 11 Aux Fault or bit 12 AuxFault Inv in Par 825 Digln 1 Sel Par 826 Digln 2 Sel or Par 827 DigIn 3 Sel Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Values Default Options Default Options Default
481. s 1 pu in 1 second for 1 pu error Integ HLim The high limit of the integral gain channel for the Process Control regulator A value of 1 can represent either base motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function PI Integ The low limit of the integral gain channel for the Process Control regulator A value of 1 can represent either base motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function PI Integ Output Displays the output value of the integral channel of the Process Control regulator A value of 1 represent either base motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function High Limit The high limit of the Process Control regulator output A value of 1 can represent either base motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function PI Lower Limit The low limit of the Process Control regulator output A value of 1 can represent either base motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function ParamAccessLevel The value of this parameter establishes the level of parameter access for the Human Interface Module HIM e Value 0 Basic grants access to the minimum number of parameters e Value 1 Advanced grants access to a larger group of parameters Time Axis Rate Sets rate 1 sec for the Time Function Generator to ramp from an output of 0 to 1 and from 1 to 0 Values Units Default Min Max Default Options
482. s D 4 Index 5 Utility Drive Memory 3 11 V Viewing and Changing Parameters D 5 Voltage Low Voltage 1 29 W Wire Signal 1 21 Wiring Cable Entry Plate Removal 1 9 1 21 Main Control Board 1 22 Power 1 7 Index 6 Jim www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 20D UMO06C EN P September 2005 Supersedes August 2005 Copyright 2005 Rockwell Automation All rights reserved Printed in USA Allen Bradley PowerFlex 7005 High Performance AC Drive Phase Control User Manual
483. s for DPI port communication Bit 15 Security indicates when security software is controlling the parameter Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 8 5 e 0 0 Options Reserved Reserved 9 Reserved 9 Reserved N 9 Reserved 9 2 Reserved 9 DPI Port 5 Reserved DPI Port 3 N c DPI Port 2 9 DPI Port 1 Default 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 True s 0 0 3 82 Programming and Parameters No 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 Description PLL TP Select Phase Locked Loop test point selection Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL TP DataDint Test point integer data This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 717 PLL TP Select is integer data Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL TP DataReal Test point real data This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 717 PLL TP Select is not integer data Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL Control Phase Locked Loop Control Values Default Options Default Min Max Default Min Max Zero Bg Once Position Gain Pos Intg Cal Epr Cal Num 10 Denom 11 Egr Ratio 12 A Comp 13 Comp 14
484. sables the function which reconnects to a spinning motor at actual RPM when a start command is issued 4 Overrides Par 110 Speed TorqueMode setting when a jog command is received 5 Jog NoRamp Bypasses the Speed Reference Ramp and S Curve 6 7 8 Trq StopRamp Overrides Par 110 Speed TorqueMode setting when stopping Trq DsbIZSpd Configures how the drive uses stop dwell time 3WireControl Configures the drive for 3 wire control 10 Motor Dir Changes direction of the motor rotation 11 Iq Delay Enables the Torque Current Delay option 12 Jog Nolnteg Configures the speed regulator s integrator to hold when jogging 13 OLCIsLpDsbl Overload Closeloop Calculation Disable 14 Reserved DM Reserved for use by the Drive module for Invert Speed Feedback 15 Reserved DM Reserved for use by the Drive module for Invert Motor Torque Current 16 Tach Sw Switches to secondary motor feedback 17 AuxPwrSply Enables the use of an auxiliary power supply When set to 1 the Main Control Board MCB examines internal 12V DC power to see when it is energized When set to 0 the MCB examines the voltage of the DC Bus This bit enables the MCB and the DriveLogix Controller to remain energized when 3 0 voltage is de energized 18 SpdRegPreset When set to 1 this bit selects Par 303 Motor Torque Ref for the Speed Regulator preset When set to 0 Par 87 SReg Trq Preset is selected 19 SlipComp Enables
485. se and bit 6 Endat24bitSI was added for firmware version 3 01 Options d o jo jojo jojojo ojo 5 lt 2 2 Qo o jo lt 2 o o cc 05 j jui 2 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DO 0 O O 0 0 412Tue Bit 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Heidn Encdr PPR Units RW 32 bit Configures the encoder PPR for the Heidenhain Encoder Feedback Option Default 2048 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Min Max 10 100000 268 269 Programming and Parameters 3 41 8 3 5075 ls Description Values 225 Resolver0 Cnfg Configures options for the resolver option card port 0 e Setting bit 0 Cable Tune enables the cable tuning test resetting the bit to zero disables the test e Bit 1 Tune Param has been disabled Bits 2 Resolution 0 and 3 Resolution 1 select the resolver resolution see Par Table 268A Resolution Settings This determines the number of significant bits that are calculated in the value of parameter 250 FB Opt0 Posit It does not affect the number of counts created per resolver revolution see Par Table 2688 Resolution and Least Significant Bits Used Also the resolution sets a limit on the maximum tracking speed see P
486. se not present on one or two input phases 2 Check the status of each external AC input fuse 66 HiHp Bus Com High Horse Power Only Bus Communication Time Delay the Check fiber optic connections between the processor has not received proper periodic feedback Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage information Feedback Circuit Board 67 HiHp Bus LinkLs High Horse Power Only Bus Communication Link Loss bus Check fiber optic connections between the communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted Feedback Circuit Board 68 HiHpBus CRCEr High Horse Power Only Bus Communication CRC Error too Check fiber optic connections between the many Cycling Ring Checksum CRC errors have occurred Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage the communication bus Feedback Circuit Board A fast power cycle may cause the 7005 Main Control Board to Wait five minutes before re energizing the attempt to communicate with the ASIC Board before the ASIC drive Board is energized 69 Bus WtchDog High Horse Power Only Bus Communication Watchdog Error 1 Check fiber optic connections between the communication has halted in the communication bus causing Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage the watch dog timer to expire Feedback Circuit Board 2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Pow
487. slip compensation 20 MotorOL Ret Enables motor over load retention 21 Inrt TrqLPEn Enables the Inertia Compensation Torque Output Low Pass Filter 23 PlTrim EnOut Enables the output of Process Trim 24 Time Axis Ramps the output of the Time Function Generator 25 MC Atune En Enables Autotune tests 26 TrqTrim En Enables Torque Trim 27 PwrDiagEn Enables the Power Diagnostic test 28 PM Offset En Enables the Permanent Magnet Motor offset test 29 Slip TestEn Enables the Slip Frequency Auto Tune function 30 SysInrtEn Enables the System Inertia test Programming and Parameters 3 27 8 5 Name 575 Is No Description Values 5 154 Stop Dwell Time Units Sec 4 IRW Real Sets an adjustable delay time between detecting zero speed and disabling the speed and _ Default 0 0000 torque regulators when responding to a stop command For more information please see Min Max 0 0000 10 0000 Stop Dwell Time on page C 5 Important Consult industry and local codes when setting the value of this parameter 155 Logic Status Displays the status condition of the drive Options 8 elgisie Bl 5 22252 8 2 85 2 s 232g 8 95 lt lt lt 2 285 9 gt 55 5 gt 2 fe lt 5 8 e le S Sle le 5 5 2 2 8 8 8 55 2 2
488. sult in a lead function and value less than 1 will result in a lag function A value of 1 will disable the filter SpdTrim2 Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Speed Trim 2 filter Iculation is based on the drive frame size and input voltage 75 705 x 1 30000 x 14112 0000 x 14112 0000 Volt Calculated Amps Calculated x Calculated Calculated Hz Calculated x 12 0000 500 0000 RPM Calculated 1 Hp Calculated 1 x 0 2500 3500 0000 2 0000 x 0 0100 655 0000 0 0000 x 42200000000 0000 1 0000 x 2200000000 0000 0 0000 x 2200000000 0000 1 0000 x 2200000000 0000 RPM 0 0000 x 48 0000 pu Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu RPM 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu RPM 0 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu RPM 0 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 1 0000 x 1000 0000 1 0000 x 15 0000 RIS 200 0000 x 0 0000 1000 0000 Linkable RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Real 16 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea 3 16 Programming and Parameters 8 E Name 558 Description Values 27 Speed
489. t 0 0000 RO Real The output of the Time Function Generator When the Time Function Generator is enabled Min Max 0 0000 1 0000 by Par 151 Logic Command bit 3 Time Axis En or Par 153 Control Options bit 24 Time Axis the value of this parameter ramps from 0 to 1 at a rate determined by Par 202 Time Axis Rate Conversely when the Time Function Generator is disabled the value of this parameter ramps from 1 to 0 204 LimGen Y axis Mx Units P U 4 RW Real Sets Par 207 Limit Gen Hi Out and Par 208 Limit Gen Lo Out when the absolute value of Default 0 2500 Par 206 LimGen X axis In is greater than or equal to 1 0 0000 8 0000 205 LimGen Y axis Mn nits PU 4 RW Real efault 0 0500 0 0000 8 0000 efault 0 0000 V RW Real 8 0000 pu Sets Par 207 Limit Gen Hi Out and Par 208 Limit Gen Lo Out when the absolute value of Par 206 LimGen X axis In is equal to 0 206 LimGen X axis In The X axis input to the Limit Generator Typically this parameter is linked to a speed reference or to Par 203 Time Axis Output 207 Limit Gen Hi Out Unis RO Real Displays the positive output of the Limit Generator When Par 206 Limit Gen X axis In is Default 8 0000 greater than or equal to 1 this value equals Par 204 Limit Gen Y axis Mx When Par 206 0 0000 8 0000 Limit Gen X axis In is equal to 0 this value equals Par 205 Limit G
490. t will be saved until Bit 2 Reset is set Options S o 2 aw 29 5 5 9 9 8 a Default 0 0 0 JO 0 Bit 4 3 2 1 0 1087 Units Sec RW Real Sets the rate of change increment or decrement for the MOP The setting 0 1 sec will equate Default 0 1000 Sec to an increment or decrement of 0 1 for every second active If this is used for the speed Min Max 0 0000 2200000000 0000 reference that equals 1096 of base speed every second for a total of 10 seconds to reach base speed reference 1088 High Limit Units 4 RW Real Sets the upper limit for MOP output The MOP cannot be incremented above this level Default 1 0000 Sec Min Max 0 0000 2200000000 0000 1089 Low Limit Units Sec 4 RW Real Sets the lower limit for the output The cannot be decremented below this level Default 1 0000 Sec Min Max 2200000000 0000 0 0000 1090 Level Real Units Sec RO Real Actual output value of the MOP as a real number This value is also found in the speed Default 10 0000 reference selection A value of 1 0 equals base motor speed Min Max 2200000000 0000 1091 Scale Dint Default 1 0000 4 RW Real Set this value for scaling of the Dint MOP output The MOP is calculated and controlled as Min Max 2200000000 0000 Real value Use this scaler to adjust for an integer value Use this parameter to scale the conversion fro
491. t 1 Dsat Phs V1 indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase V Bit 2 Dsat Phs W indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase W Bit 3 Ovr Current1 indicates that the primary structure detected an over current Bit 4 Ovr Volt indicates that the primary structure detected an over voltage Bit 5 Asym DcLink1 indicates that the primary structure detected an unbalanced DC Link Bit 6 Pwr Suply1 indicates that the primary structure detected a power supply failure Bit 7 HW Disable1 indicates that the primary structure detected a hardware disable Bit 8 Latch Err1 indicates that the primary structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set Bit 14 Cnv NotLogin the converter was expected but none logged Bit 15 Cnv NotStart the converter was commanded to start but did not become active Bit 16 Dsat Phs U2 the second structure detected a Dsat on phase U Bit 17 Dsat Phs V2 the second structure detected a Dsat on phase V Bit 18 Dsat Phs W2 the second structure detected a Dsat on phase W Bit 19 Ovr Current2 the second structure detected an over current Bit 20 Ovr Volt2 the second structure detected an over voltage Bit 21 Asym DcLink2 the second structure detected an unbalanced DC Link Bit 22 Pwr Suply2 the second structure detected a power supply failure Bit 23 HW Disable2 the second structure detected a hardware disable Bit 24 Latch Err2 the second structure
492. t be identical to the pattern written from the DSP or the board status test will fail Bit 11 MsgChecksum Er indicates a message checksum fault The check sum associated with the Endat communication device must be correct and acknowledged by the feedback option card Bit12 Time Out Err indicates an Endat time out fault Bit13 PPR Error indicates an encoder PPR setting mismatch fault Bit14 Bootup Error indicates Endat boot up fault Bit 15 FW VersionEr indicates Bit16 LightSrc Er indicates an Endat light source fault Bit17 Sig Amplitud indicates an Endat signal amplitude fault Bit18 PstvValue Er indicates an Endat positive value fault Bit19 Over Voltage indicates an Endat over voltage fault Bit20 Undr Voltage indicates an Endat under voltage fault Bit21 Over Current indicates an Endat over current fault Bit24 FrqExced Alm indicates an Endat frequency exceeded alarm Bit25 Temprtr Alm indicates an Endat temperature exceeded alarm Bit26 LghtCtrl Alm indicates an Endat limit of light control alarm Bit28 RefPoint Alm indicates an Endat reference point alarm firmware version 3 01 Linkable Read Write Data Type Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Bit 14 was changed from Endat BootEr to Bootup Error and Bit 15 FW VersionErr is new for Options amp 5g 1 ols ls lt
493. t considerably higher with careful tuning of the speed regulator output lead lag filter Position Error Actual position error in motor pulse counts When the position regulator is not enabled this 32 bit integer register is initialized to zero When the position regulator is enabled this parameter contains the running value of position error often referred to as following error PositReg Integ Sets position regulator integral gain as measured from position error to velocity reference It has gain units of per unit velocity sec per unit position and is unit compatible with Par 768 PositReg P Gain An integral gain of 25 means that a per unit position error of 0 1 sec will effect 2 5 pu speed change per sec A typical maximum value is _ PositReg P Gain 2 Note 1 per unit position is the distance traveled in 1 sec at base motor speed PositReg Droop Position Droop limits the low frequency gain of the position regulators integral channel to a value of 1 droop It provides a means to fine tune the stability for load mounted feedback devices where lost motion may cause a problem Typically position droop will have a value that is less than 1 position gain perhaps even zero for tightly coupled loads Position droop has a gain value of per unit position per unit speed Note 1 per unit position is the distance traveled in 1 sec at base motor speed XReg Integ LoLim The negative limit of the position
494. t of the resistor Another equation you can use is Par 416 Brake PulseWatts Time Constant x Brake Watts where Time Constant equals the amount of time to reach 63 of its rated temperature while the maximum power is applied and Brake Watts is the peak power rating of the resistor Note The maximum value was changed from 1000000 0000 to 1000000000 0000 for firmware version 3 01 Brake Watts Units Sets the continuous rated power reference for the Dynamic Brake DB You may change Default the value of this parameter only if you have selected and external DB resistor set bit 1 Min Max Brake Extern of Par 414 Brake Bus Cnfg Note The maximum value was changed from 5000 0000 to 500000 0000 for firmware version 3 01 Brake TP Sel Default Enter or write a value to select the drive brake data displayed in Par 419 Brake TP Data Options Brake TP Data Default Displays the data selected by Par 418 Brake TP Sel Pwr Strct Mode e Options 52 5 2 55 2 5 2 2 5 2 5 2 5 5 o CC I Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fals Bit 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 True 111 0000 110 5000 117 8000 2000 0000 100 0000 0 0000 500000 0000 0 Zero 0 Zero 1 Duty Cycle 2 Power Actual 3 Max
495. t running Ground Fault Trip Phase to ground on drive output Phase to ground on drive output Short Circuit Trip Phase to phase on drive output Phase to phase on drive output 2 Supplemental Information Category Specification Frames 1 6 690V Drive frames 5 amp 6 only Frames 9 amp up Agency The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements ofthe The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements of the Certification following codes standards following codes standards IEC 61800 2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems 61800 2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems General requirements General requirements IEC 61800 5 1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems IEC 61800 5 1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Safety requirements Safety requirements NFPA 70 US National Electric Code 70 US National Electrical Code NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment UL and cUL Listed to UL508C and CAN CSA 22 2 14 95 UL and cUL Listed to UL508C and CAN CSA 22 2 No 14 95 c UL us Marked for all applicable European Directives Marked for all applicable European Directives EMC Directive 89 336 EEC EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Emissions Emissions EN 61800 3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive EN 61800 3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 systems Part 3 Immunity Low Voltage Directiv
496. tate Default Value indicates the state of the Data Trend function Options e Value 0 Wait Enable indicates the trend function is ready and waiting to begin data collection Setting bit 0 Enbl Collect of Par 556 Trend Control will cause data collection to begin In this state Par 569 TrendBuffPointer and the Trend Output Parameters are active Value 1 First Scan indicates the Trend function is executing the first pass through the trend sample buffer This takes 512 ms 0 5 ms x 1024 samples When it enters this state the Trend function clears bit 1 Triggered and 2 Complete bits of Par 557 Trend Status While in this state the Trend function refreshes the data Also while in this state the function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero When done it enters the Pre trigger state Value 2 Pre trigger indicates the Trend function is sampling the trend inputs and storing them in memory at a rate determined by Par 559 Trend Rate Sampling continues until either the trend trigger event occurs or bit 0 Enbl Collect of Par 556 Trend Control is cleared While in this state the Trend function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero If the trigger event occurs the function sets bit 1 Triggered of Par 557 Trend Status and enters the Post trigger state If bit 0 Collect of Parameter 556 Trend Control is cleared the function sets bit 2 Complete of Par 557 Trend Status and returns to the Wa
497. th one of the following functions Table D A ALT Key Functions ALT Key and then SMART Function not available Vj Allows the selection of how parameters will be viewed or Gi detailed information about a parameter or component Function not available Lang Function not available Auto Man unction not available Allows HIM removal without causing a fault if the HIM is Remove notthe last controlling device and does not have manual control of the drive Exp Allows the value to be entered as an exponent Param Allows entry of a parameter number for viewing editing Menu Structure Device Select 6 6 Status Info 65 view selected through 69 ED Lew selected inrough Vale Nul Y PowerFlex 7005 Memory Storage e Continue Preferences HIM Overview D 3 Figure D 1 HIM Menu Structure User Display r 0 0 Oo CD View Fault Queue gt Logic Status Clear Faults Run Inhibit Stat Fault Queue Logic Control State Reset Device Faults Device Version PowerFlex 700S HIM Version Product Data Main Control Board Power Unit Board Y LCD HIM Product Data LCD HIM Standard Control Board Keyboard Numeric Param Access Lvl Basic FGP FGP File Advanced Numbered List File 1 Name FGP Group Changed File2 Name Group 1 Name gt FGP Parameter File 3 Name Parameter Name Parameter s Group 2 Name Group 3 Name
498. the motor in per unit percent representation as determined by the auto tune procedure Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance Do not change this value Leak Inductance Displays the sum of the motor stator and rotor leak inductance and motor cable inductances in per unit percent representation as determined by the auto tune procedure Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance Do not change this value Leak Indc Satur1 Displays the leakage inductance correction for the first overload level as determined by the autotune procedure Leak Indc Satur2 Displays the leakage inductance correction for the first overload level as determined by the auto tune procedure 145 Command Displays the torque producing q axis current command 145 Command Displays the flux producing d axis current command qs Command isplays the command for initiation of voltage on the torque producing axis q axis o lt ds Command isplays the command for initiation of voltage on the flux producing axis d axis o lt Trq CurFdbk Iq Displays torque producing q axis current feedback w us Util Limit ets the maximum allowed bus voltage utilization for the Motor Control Do not change his value Higher values may result in control instability or over current faults Torque Dly Sets the delay between the time the drive is enabled and the time the Motor Control applies torque Rotor Resistance Displays roto
499. the output terminals In addition reconnecting a motor to an active drive by closing the contactor could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fault If any of these conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is programmed as Enable This will cause the drive to execute a coast to stop cease output whenever an output contactor is opened ATTENTION To guard against drive damage when using Using PowerFlex amp 7005 If a Regenerative unit 1 1336 REGEN is used as a bus supply or a brake Drives with Regenerative the common mode capacitors should be disconnected see Table 1 F on Power Units page 1 18 1 18 Installation Wiring Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors Regenerative Unit to Drive Connections Regenerative Brake Mode Terminals Frame s 1336 REGEN PowerFlex 7005 1 4 DC amp DC BR1 amp DC 5 amp 6 DC amp DC DC amp DC Regenerative Bus Supply Mode Terminals Frame s 1336 REGEN PowerFlex 700S 1 4 DC amp DC DC amp DC 5 amp 6 DC DC DC amp DC of the Common Bus Drives PowerFlex 7005 drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground To guard against drive damage these devices must be disconnected if the drive is installed on a resistive grounded distribution system or an ungrounded distri
500. the source for the drive torque reference Options 0 Zero Torque 4 Spd Torq 1 Speed Reg Sum Spd Torq 2 Torque Ref 6 AbsMn Spd Tq 3 Min Spd Torq 4 Motor NP RPM Units RPM RW 16 bit Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM Default Calculated Integer Min Max 1 30000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu 2 o E 5 Description 5 e amp No Parameter Number Parameter value cannot be changed until the drive is stopped Name Parameter name as it appears the DriveExecutive software Description Brief description of parameter function e Values Define the various operating characteristics of the parameter There are 3 types of Values ENUM Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Options Displays the selections available Bit Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Options Displays the selections available Numeric Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Min Max Displays lowest possible setting Displays highest possible setting Scale Value sent from Controller or Comm Device Drive Parameter Value x Comm Scale A checkmark indicates that the parameter is linkable Indicates if parameter is read write read only RW Read Write RW RO Read Only RO Indicates parameter data type i e integer floating point boolean loe How Parameters Organized Metering 310 Output Freq 49 Sele
501. ther a hi resolution Stegmann encoder or compatible resolver feedback on the motor Refer to PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option on page F 1 for a list of compatible hi resolution Stegmann encoders and compatible resolvers Motor data and an autotune is required for correct operation in this mode Refer to PowerFlex 700S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications on page I 1 for a list of compatible Allen Bradley permanent magnet motors and motor data to be used with the PowerFlex 7005 Volts Hertz Control v2 003 and later Volts Hertz control is used in fan pump or multi motor applications Volts Hertz operation creates a fixed relationship between output voltage and output frequency C4 Application Notes Configuration Volts Hertz control is selected by setting parameter 485 Motor Ctrl Mode 3 V Hz Volts Hertz allows wide variety of patterns using linear segments The default configuration is a straight line from zero to rated voltage and frequency This is the same volts hertz ratio that the motor would see if it were started across the line As seen in the diagram below the volts hertz ratio can be changed to provide increased torque performance when required The shaping takes place by programming five distinct points on the curve 1 Parameter 527 Start Acc Boost is used to create additional torque for breakaway from zero speed and acceleration of heavy loads at lower sp
502. time since the last feedback sample Note the sample rate is 10 000 counts per second 10 Mhz e Value 4 L1 EPR displays the change in edges per motor revolution This number is the same value Par 290 Lineari CPR e Value 5 Edge Mode should always display a zero 0 Value 6 L1 nMax displays the numerator term for speed calculation This number divided by change time 15 the calculated per unit speed for the linear feedback sensor 288 Lineari TP Data Default 0 RO 16 bit Displays the data selected by Par 287 Linear1 TP Sel Min Max 32768 Integer 289 Lini Update Rate Default 2 1 0 msec Sets the sample rate for the linear channel on the Multi Device Interface MDI feedback Options 0 8 0 msec 8 4 0 msec option 1 0 5 msec 9 4 5 msec 2 1 0 msec 10 5 0 msec 3 1 5 msec 11 5 5 msec 4 2 0 msec 12 6 0 msec 5 2 5 msec 13 6 5 msec 6 3 0 msec 14 7 0 msec 7 3 5 msec 15 7 5 msec 290 Lineari CPR Units RW 32 bit Specifies the change in Par 252 FB Opt Posit for one revolution of the motor shaft This Default 1000 Integer value is used to scale the calculated speed based on the change in feedback position Units Min Max 10 100000 are count per motor revolution CPR 291 LiniStahl Status Displays the status of the Stahl linear encoder The Stahl linear encoder works with the MDI optio
503. tion Planner The units are counts Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Pos Mul Part of the input scale block Set this value as the multiplier to the value of Par 1130 PPMP Pos Command Also see Par 1132 PPMP Pos Div The scale block is enabled by setting bit 4 of Par 1134 control The the intermediate product must be lt 31 bits Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Pos Div Part of input scale block Set this value as the divisor of the product of Par 1130 PPMP Pos Command and Par 1131 PPMP Pos Mul Integer math applies The scale block is enabled by setting bit 4 of Par 1134 JPPMP control Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Scaled Cmd Indicates the result of integer scaling of the position reference for the Motion planner or the Position loop The units are counts Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Control Establishes the operating condition for the Motion Planner The operating mode s is selected if the corresponding bit is set Bit 0 Absolute Absolute mode Bit 1 Incremental Incremental mode Bit 2 Start Start Bit 4 Scaling En Scaling enabled Bit 5 Over Ride En Override enabled Bit 6 S Curve En Curve Enabled Bit 7 Cond Hold Conditional Hold Bit 8 Pause Pause Bit 9 Re Synch Re Synch Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options Reserved
504. tion data of the feedback option card port 0 The registration data is the 2147483648 Integer position reference counter value latched by the external strobes The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by the Par 254 RegisCnfg Cnfg Configures the Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option e Bit 5 Direction determines counting direction If clear direction is forward or up If set the direction is reverse or down Bits 10 SmplRate 610 12 SmplRate bt2 configure the Finite Impulse Response FIR Filter see Par Table 259A FIR Filter Settings This setting reduces the effect of noisy feedback on the system Refer to the Speed Position Feedback section of the PowerFlex 700S with Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for details Notes Bit 11 SmplRate is set to 0 False by default for firmware version 1 11 and is set to 1 True by default for firmware version 2 03 This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Options l gt l l l l e e l l l l 6 54 gt 0 5 5 o 9 o ele 5 8 215 21855 215 21855 215 21515 515 6
505. tion is satisfied A default link connects this parameter to Par 763 Position Actual 3 88 Programming and Parameters 8 2 Name 585 Description Values 2 5 786 Status Bit 0 Sync Pulse will go high for 0 5ms latching the Sync Generator inputs to the Sync Generator outputs The period at which this bit is set is determined by 787 Xsync Gen Period Note Bit 1 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Options 5 l le D l aja 2 gt 2 2 222 5 515 246 E 8 5 5 8 jam ja jm ja jam ja jam m ja Default 0 O O 0 0 0 O 0 jO 0 JO 0 JO JO JO JO 0 0 0 0 M JO JO JO JO 0 jo 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 787 Gen Period Default 1 1 msec Sets the period for the Sync Pulse Generator Bit 0 of Par 786 Xsync Status will be set for 0 5 Options 0 0 5 msec 4 8 msec msec and will be cleared for 0 5msec 2 Xsync Gen Period 0 5 msec H
506. tion of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 391 DPI CommLoss Cfg Default 2 FitCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to the failure of a DPI port Options 0 Ignore Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event H Alarm ocours 2 FltCoastStop e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and the appropriate alarm bit 3 Fit RampStop when this event occurs 4 FltCurLimStp e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 391 DPI CommLoss Cfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure t
507. tion on an output condition occurs Min Max and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or relay output will not change state Par 858 Rly Out3 On Time can be disabled by setting the delay time to 0 zero Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Rly Out3 OffTime Units Defines the amount of time between a True to False transition the output status and Default corresponding change in state of Relay Output 3 If a transition on an output condition occurs Min Max and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or relay output will not change state Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 8 5 s I RW 16 bit 0 0 Integer 0 0 600 00 1 Not Fault 0 User Select 15 Torque Limit 1 Not Fault 16 Power Limit 2 Not Alarm 17 Fault 3 Ready 18 Alarm 4 Running 19 Command Dir 5 Reserved 20 Actual 6 Reserved 21 Jogging 7 Enable 22 In Position 8 Active 23 Posit Watch1 9 At Speed 24 Posit Watch2 10 At S
508. top Function Low Stop High Ok to Run In Norm Stop CF Low Normal Stop and Clear Fault Notes Option 38 ExtFault Inv was added for firmware version 2 04 Option 39 Home Switch was added for firmware version 3 01 1 Opening an Enable input will cause the motor to coast to stop ignoring any programmed Stop modes Values Default Options Default Options Default Options Programming and Parameters Reserved Reserved Enable Clear Faults Ext Fault Norm Stop CF Start Reverse Run Reserved Reserved Jog 1 Reserved Reserved Jog 2 Normal Stop Spd Ref 0 Spd Ref Spd Ref Sel2 CurLim Stop Coast Stop Reserved Reserved Enable Clear Faults Ext Fault Norm Stop CF Start Reverse Run Reserved Reserved Jog 1 Reserved Reserved Jog 2 Normal Stop Ref 0 Spd Ref Spd Ref Sel2 CurLim Stop Coast Stop Reserved Reserved Enable 7 Clear Faults Ext Fault Norm Stop CF Start Reverse Run Reserved Reserved 10 Jog 1 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Jog 2 14 Normal Stop 15 Spd Ref Sel 16 Spd Ref 17 Spd Ref Sel2 18 CurLim Stop 19 Coast Stop CONOAROM Oy YW nnn nou nu Hon Hog
509. tor current Mtr 127 Curr Min Sets the minimum current threshold for the motor overload function The value indicates minimum current at the minimum speed Par 338 Mtr 2 Spd Min and these are the first current speed breakpoint From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by Par 336 Motor OL Factor Mtr 2 Spd Min Sets the minimum speed for the motor overload PT function The value indicates minimum speed below the minimum current threshold Par 337 Mtr I2T Curr Min and these are the first current speed breakpoint From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by the motor service factor Par 336 Motor OL Factor For more information please see Motor Overload on page C 5 Mtr 2 Calibrat Sets the current calibration level for the motor overload PT function The value indicates the current level that the drive will fault at this current in 60 seconds Mtr 2 ThrH Displays the trip threshold current for the motor overload PT function The value depends on the motor speed and is calculated from the minimum current Par 337 Mtr 2 Curr Min the minimum speed Mtr 2 Spd Min and the motor service factor Par 336 Motor OL Factor Mtr 2 Count The accumulator for Motor Overload detection Motor 12T function When the motor runs at the over rated motor current the accumulator starts counting up If the motor runs at below rated motor cur
510. ttenu Default 50 4 RW Real Sets the depth for the Position Notch Filter Attenuation is the ratio of the output to the input at Min Max 0 500 the notch frequency An attenuation of 30 means that the notch output is 1 30th of the input at the specified frequency Calculation Attenuation Input Output a gt Freq Hz 779 X Notch FiltFreq Units Hz 4 RW Real Sets the center frequency of the Position Notch Filter Default 0 0 Min Max 0 0 500 0 780 PositDetcti Default 0 V RW 32 bit Provides the set point for Position Watch 1 Position Watch 1 is enabled and configured with Min Max 2147483648 Integer Par 740 Position Control bits 16 amp 17 Position Watch 1 compares this value with Par 784 Posit Dect1 In and sets bit 8 Posit Watch1 of Par 741 Position Status when the appropriate condition is satisfied 781 PositDetct2 Default 0 V 32 Provides the set point for Position Watch 2 Position Watch 2 is enabled and configured with 2147483648 Integer Par 740 Position Control bits 18 amp 19 Position Watch 2 compares this value with Par 785 Posit Dect2 In and sets bit 9 Posit Watch2 of Par 741 Position Status when the appropriate condition is satisfied 782 nPosit BW Default 200 V 32 Sets the overall bandwidth of the In Position detector The detector sets bit 10 In Position of Min Max 0 1000000 Integer Par 741 Position Status
511. ttp www deltron emcon com and http www mtecorp com USA or http www schaffner com respectively Chapter 2 Start Up This chapter describes how to start up the PowerFlex 7005 Drive Refer to Appendix D for a brief description of the HIM Human Interface Module For Information on See Page Prepare for Drive Start Up 2 1 Assisted Start Up 2 5 the following start up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform Prepare for Drive Start Up _ Before Applying Power to the Drive Important If you have a DriveLogix application you must first connect the battery before starting this section L 1 Confirm that motor wires are connected to the correct terminals and secure Confirm Frame 5 transformer connections refer to page 1 11 Ti T2 T3 1 2 If an encoder is used con
512. ty Processor for the Motor Control Command bits Options lo 5 lo lo 2 lele 5 5 lolo l l 1 2 2 5 _ 9 9929292925929292 999299929 9 99929 99 9 99 9 z 7C is 5 1515 15 5 5 5 5 5 2 9 9 5 2 9 9 2 9 9 5 51515 5 5 5 5 5 S F 82 9 8 9 9 58 8 2 5 9 83 128128 8 S S la ju gt ju O Default 0 0 0 0 0 000 0 JO 0 0 JO JO 00 00 JO 0 jO JO 0 0 0 JO JO Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 18 12 11109 8 7 6 54 3 2 1 0 Normal Stop Mode Default 0 Ramp Stop Sets the method of stopping the drive when a stop command is given Normal Stop command Options 0 Ramp Stop and the RUN input changing from true to false will command a Normal Stop Hz CurLim Stop 2 Coast Stop Ramp Stop decelerates to zero speed at the decal rate CurLim Stop Max torque current applied until zero speed Coast Stop power removed from motor motor coasts to zero SrLss ZeroSpdLim Units Functionally equivalent to Par 160 Zero Speed Lim but is used exclusively in Sensorless 49 9975 speed mode The value is automatically set from Par 3 Motor NP Hertz Par 4 Motor Min Max 0 0000 875 0000 RPM or Par 7 Motor Poles The automatic setting corresponds to the rated slip speed of the motor
513. u2Bit P2 Exception Event3 322 FromDriveLogix13 615 Dig Out2 Data 851 Ext Fit Alm Cnfg 379 FromDriveLogix14 616 Dig Out OffTime 854 Fault Clr Mask 674 FromDriveLogix15 617 Dig Out2 On Time 853 Fault Clr Owner 681 FromDriveLogix16 618 Dig Out2 Sel 850 Fault Status 1 323 FromDriveLogix17 619 Digln ConfigStat 159 Fault Status 2 324 FromDriveLogix18 620 Digln Debounce 823 Fault Status 3 325 FromDriveLogix19 621 DInt2Real1 In 1047 Fault TP Data 330 FromDriveLogix20 622 Dint2Real1 Scale 1048 Fault TP Sel 329 FVC CEMF Comp 469 Dint2Real1 Result 1049 FB Opto Posit 250 FVC Mode Config 510 Dint2Real2 In 1150 FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk 251 FVC Tune Config 515 DInt2Real2 Scale 1151 FB Posit 252 FVC2 Mode Config 511 Dint2Real2Result 1152 FB Spd Fdbk 253 FVC2 Tune Config 516 Direction Mask 673 Fdbk LsCnfg Alt 366 FW Functions En 147 Direction Owner 680 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri 365 FW FunctionsActl 149 DPI CommLoss Cfg 391 Fdbk LsCnfgPosit 367 FW TaskTime Actl 148 DPI Data In A1 651 Fdbk Option ID 249 FW TaskTime Sel 146 DPI Data In A2 652 FdbkAxis FdbkSel 701 Fwd Speed Limit 76 DPI Data In B1 653 FdbkAxis FdbkVal 702 Hardware Present 145 DPI Data In B2 654 FdbkAxis RotFdbk 709 Heatsink Temp 313 DPI Data In C1 655 FdbkAxisUnwdFdbk 710 Cnfg 263 DPI Data In C2 656 Filtered SpdFdbk 71 0 Stat 264 DPI Data In D1 657 Flux Current 488 Heidn Encdr PPR 267 DPI Data In D2 658 Flux Gain Adjust 533 Heidn Encdr Type 266 DPI Data Out A1 660 F
514. ue the transmitting node and receiving multiplying nodes Enter a value that will not produce an overflow the product of this value and the inputs to the conversion and multiply functions must be less than 65 536 924 ISL Mult A In Default 0 0000 RO Real Displays the A Multiplier Input as a floating point real value This value is divided by the Par Min Max 0 0000 65535 0000 923 SL Mult Base The source of the A Multiplier is determined by the Rx Direct Data Selector Parameters 905 909 The possible sources zero Par 1054 MulDiv 1 Mul Par 1056 MulDiv 1 Result Par 1058 MulDiv 2 Mul or Par 1060 MulDiv 2 Result The SynchLink Multiply function takes this input before it is converted to floating point 925 ISL Mult B In Default 1 0000 RW Real The B Multiplier Input This must be a floating point real value The SynchLink Multiply Min Max 0 25000 2 0000 function takes this input after it is converted to integer 926 ISL Mult Out Default 0 0000 RO Real Displays the output of the SynchLink Multiply function as a floating point real value The Min Max 0 0000 65535 0000 value is the result of the formula Par 924 SL Mult A In source integer x Par 925 SL Mult B In Par 923 SL Mult Base or Par 924 SL Mult A In x Par 925 SL Mult B In Note The SynchLink Multiply function produces an output that is always positive 927 ISL Mult State Displays the status of the SynchLink Multiply function
515. ue DigIn ConfigStat Default 0 Digln Ok This parameter indicates the status of the Digital Inputs Options 0 Digln 4 Strt UnLatch 1 2 Run Starts 5 210015 2 Start NoStop 6 2 0025 3 Run Latched 7 2Fwd s Rev s Zero Speed Lim Units 4 RW Real Establishes a band around zero speed that is used to determine when the drive considers the Default 17 6400 motor to be at zero speed Min Max 0 0000 882 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu Logic TP Sel 5 HT Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select logic status indication displayed in Par 162 Logic TP Data Options 0 Zero 25 RThru State 1 Avg Spd Ref 26 RThru Timer 2 Avg Spd Fdbk 27 Health State 3 LastStopMode 28 Sys Friction 0 None 29 Iq proc time 1 Coast 30 Enable Inhib 2 Current Limit 31 DI Src Index 3 Ramp 32 DI SrcRevldx 4 Torque Mode 33 DI TrendTrig 4 Spd Ref Sel 34 DI Prchg 5 Start State 35 Enable State 6 Run State 36 LID Revision 7 Stop State 37 DI MOP Incr 8 PrChrg Logic 38 DI MOP Decr 9 Meas State 39 DI MOP Reset 10 Data State 40 Cmd Term 11 Diag State 41 Cmd DPI 1 12 CalcState 42 Cmd DPI 2 13 Task 1 time 43 Cmd DPI 3 14 Task 1 max 44 Cmd DPI 4
516. uf Data Tx02 972 Real2DInt Scale 1051 SelSwtch DIntOut 1046 SL Buf Data Tx03 973 Regen Power Lim 128 SelSwtch RealOut 1045 SL Buf Data Tx04 974 RegisLtch0 Value 235 SrLssAngleStblty 537 SL Buf Data Tx05 975 RegisLtch0 1Cnfg 236 SrLss VoltStblty 538 SL Buf Data Tx06 976 RegisLtch0 1 Ctrl 237 SrLss StbltyFilt 539 SL Buf Data Tx07 977 RegisLtch0 1 Stat 238 Servo Lock Gain 85 SL Buf Data Tx08 978 RegisLtch1 Value 239 Set Speed Lim 171 SL Buf Data Tx09 979 Reserved 0 Setpt 1 Data 172 SL Buf Data Tx10 980 Reslvr0 CableBal 276 Setpt 1 Limit 174 SL Buf Data Tx11 981 Reslvr0 Carrier 273 Setpt 2 Data 175 SL Buf Data Tx12 982 Reslvr In Volts 274 Setpt 2 Limit 177 SL Buf Data Tx13 983 Reslvr0 SpdRatio 272 Setpt1 TripPoint 173 SL Buf Data Tx14 984 Reslvr0 TP Data 271 Setpt2 TripPoint 176 SL Buf Data Tx15 985 Reslvr0 TP Sel 270 Sft OvrTrviCnfg 396 SL Buf Data Tx16 986 Reslvr Type Sel 277 Skip Speed 1 136 SL Buf Data Tx17 987 Resolver Cnfg 268 Skip Speed 2 137 SL Buf Data Tx18 988 Resolver Status 269 Skip Speed 3 138 SL Buf Data Tx19 989 Rev Speed Limit 75 Skip Speed Band 139 SL Buf Data 20 990 Rly Out3 Bit 857 SL BOF Err Accum 896 SL Buf Data Tx21 991 Rly Out3 Data 856 SL BOF Err Limit 899 SL Buf Data Tx22 992 Rly Out3 OffTime 859 SL BOF Error 897 SL Buf Data Tx23 993 Rly Out3 On Time 858 SL Buf Data Rx00 934 SL Buf Data Tx24 994 Rly Out3 Sel 855 SL Buf Data Rx01 935 SL Buf Data Tx25 995 Rotor Resistance 502 SL Buf Data Rx02 936 SL Buf Data Tx26 996 Rslvr0 Xfr
517. ult DelTmr1 TrigData DelTmr1 Trig Bit DelayTimer1PrSet DelayTimer1 Accum DelayTimer1 Stats DelTmr2 TrigData 1114 1115 1116 1117 1120 1121 1122 1123 1125 1126 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1150 1151 1152 DelTmre Trig Bit DelayTimer2PrSet DelayTimer2Accum DelayTimer2Stats Home Accel Time Home Decel Time Home Speed Home Position DC Brake Level DC Brake Time PPMP Pos Command PPMP Pos Mul PPMP Pos Div PPMP Scaled PPMP Control PPMP Status PPMP Rev Spd Lim PPMP Fwd Spd Lim PPMP Over Ride PPMP Accel Time PPMP Decel Time PPMP SCurve Time PPMP Spd Output PPMP Pos Output PPMP Pos To Go PPMP TP Select PPMP TP DataDInt PPMP TP DataReal Dint2Real2 In DInt2Real2 Scale Dint2Real2Result See Page soc 2 Change See Page The following parameters were updated for firmware version 3 01 3 1 3 108 81 Spd Reg P Gain 370 HiHp InPhsLs Cfg 825 Dig In1 Sel 84 SpdReg AntiBckup 412 Power EE TP Sel 826 Dig In2 Sel 92 SpdReg P Gain Mx 414 Brake Bus Cnfg 827 Dig In3 Sel 110 Speed TorqueMode 416 Brake PulseWatts 828 Dig In4 Sel 132 Inert Adapt Sel 417 Brake Watts 829 Dig 15 Sel 147 FW Functions En 420 Pwr Strct Mode 830 Dig In6 Sel 149 FW FunctionsActl 465 MC Diag Error 3 904 SL Node Cnfg 150 Logic State Mach 466 MC TP1 Select 905 SL Rx
518. ulties are the result of incorrect wiring take every precaution to assure the wiring is correct Read and understand all items in this section before beginning installation proper installation The Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for Power Cable Types Acceptable for 200 600 Volt Installations and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION National Codes and standards NEC BSI etc General A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations For many installations unshielded cable is adequate provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits As an approximate guide allow a spacing of 0 3 meters 1 foot for every 10 meters 32 8 feet of length In all cases long parallel runs must be avoided Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils 0 4 mm 0 015 in Use copper wire only Wire gauge requirements and re
519. und impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked Recommended Grounding Scheme A single point PE only grounding scheme should be used Some applications may require alternate grounding schemes refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication number DRIVES INO01 for more information These applications include installations with long distances between drives or drive line ups which could cause large potential differences between the drive or line up grounds For installations within a cabinet a single safety ground point or ground bus bar connected directly to building steel should be used All circuits including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and directly to this point bar 1 6 Installation Wiring Figure 1 1 Typical Grounding R S L1 L2 Required Input Fusing E E Required Branch Circuit Disconnect e 4 Apt Fuses and Circuit Breakers Shield Termination SHLD The Shield terminal see Figure 1 3 on page 1 14 provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield It must be connected to an earth ground by a separate continuous lead The motor cable shield should be connected to this terminal on the
520. upply High Power 1 23 Hard Enable Circuitry 5 ener UE E RESP RES 1 23 Main Control Board I O Configuration 1 28 CE Contormity 2 59 1 29 Low Voltage Directive 73 23 1 29 EMC Directive 89 336 1 29 General Notes IDE i nee 1 29 Essential Requirements for CE 1 29 Prepare for Drive Start p 5s d Ree a en Tete deeft 2 1 Before Applying Power to the 2 1 Applying Power to the 2 4 Assisted Start Up sc sade Noe EA a eR aD Rue ER Maal sega eed 2 5 About Parameters 0 5 Gaede veto gee VE PECES ES 3 1 How Parameters are 3 3 Parameter Data in Linear List 3 15 Parameter Cross Reference 3 109 Chapter 4 Appendix Appendix Appendix Table of Contents iii Chapter Objectives e eR ER MERERI E REY a eo 4 1 Faults and Alarms 2e
521. urce Parameter Number Define Link and press Enter The linked parameter can now be viewed two different ways by repeating Accel Time 1 steps 1 4 and selecting Present Link 800 Value or Define Link If an attempt is Analog In1 Data made to edit the value of a linked parameter Parameter is Linked will be displayed indicating that the value is coming from a source parameter and can not be edited 5 To remove a link repeat steps 1 5 and change the source parameter number to zero 0 6 Press Esc to return to the group list Removing Installing the can be removed or installed while drive is powered Step 5 Example Displays To remove the HIM 1 Press ALT and then Enter Remove The Remove HIM configuration screen appears 2 Press Enter to confirm that you want to remove the HIM 3 Remove the HIM from the drive To install HIM 1 Insert into drive or connect cable Remove Op Intrfc Press Enter to Disconnect Op Intfc Port 1 Control Appendix E PowerFlex 7005 214 Encoder Feedback Option Card Chapter Objectives For Information on Specifications 1 Wiring and Configuring the Second Encoder Option Card E 2 Specifications 2 Encoder Feedback Option Card Specifications Consideration Description Input Dual Channel Plus Marker Isolated with differential transmitter Output Line Drive
522. urn on level for ascending data TripPoint Limit Min Max 0 0000 0 5000 Turn off level for ascending data TripPoint 2 Limit e Turn on level for descending data TripPoint Limit Turn off level for descending data TripPoint 2 Limit Setpt 2 Data Unit Provides data for comparison to 177 Setpt2 TripPoint driving bit 17 Above Setpt 2 of Default 0 0000 Par 155 Logic Status For more information please see Setpt 2 Data on page C 6 Min Max 8 0000 pu Setpt2 TripPoint Unit P U Provides the midpoint for operation of bit 16 At Setpt 1 of Par 155 Logic Status Default 0 2000 Min Max 8 0000 pu Read Write Data Type 0 False 1 True 0 False 1 True RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Real 16 bit Integer Real Real Real Real Real Real 3 30 Programming and Parameters No 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 196 202 Name Description Setpt 2 Limit Creates a tolerance hysteresis band around the value in Par 176 Setpt2 TripPoint For positive setpoints Turn on level TripPoint e Turn off level TripPoint Limit For negative setpoints Turn on level TripPoint e Turn off level TripPoint Limit PI TP Sel Enter or write a value to select Process Control PI data displayed by Par 179 PI TP Data
523. urs Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event Cnv NotLogin Cfg Configures the 700L drive s response when the active convertor is not logged in via a DPI port Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Brake OL Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Brake Overload OL Trip exception event This event is triggered when a Dynamic Brake DB overload condition occurs e Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event HiHp InPhsLs Cig Selector for the input phase loss configuration Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set th
524. usted by setting Par 90 Spd Reg BW to a value of zero Units are per unit torque sec per unit speed SpdReg AntiBckup By setting this parameter to 0 3 the drive will not over shoot to a step response This parameter has no affect on the drive s response to load changes The recommended setting is 0 1000 to 0 5000 Note This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Over Shoot Reference Feedback SpdReg AntiBckup 0 0 Feedback SpdReg AntiBckup 0 3 Under Shoot Servo Lock Gain Sets the gain of an additional integrator in the speed regulator The effect of Servo Lock is to increase stiffness of the speed response to a load disturbance It behaves like a position regulator with velocity feed forward but without the pulse accuracy of a true position regulator The units of Servo Lock are rad sec Gain should normally be set to less than 1 3 speed regulator bandwidth or for the desired response Set to zero to disable Servo Lock Spd Reg Droop Specifies the amount of base speed that the speed reference is reduced when at full load torque Use the droop function to cause the motor speed to decrease with an increase in load The units are per unit speed per unit torque SReg Trq Preset When the drive is not enabled this parameter presets integrator output Par 101 SpdReg Integ Out to a specified torque level This ensures that the torque command will be at the preset value when the d
525. ved from the DriveLogix Options 0 Zero Data controller when the connection is closed or times out 1 Last State e Value 0 Zero Data Resets data to zero e Value 1 Last State Holds data in its last state ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 385 Lgx CommLossData lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive to hold the data in its last state You can set this parameter so that the drive resets the data to zero Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage Programming and Parameters 3 55 za Description Values 518168 386 Lgx OutOfRunCnfg Default 2 FltCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to the DriveLogix processor being in Non Run ine 0 Options 0 mode Non Run modes include Program Remote Program and Faulted 1 Alarm Value 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event 2 FltCoastStop occurs 3 Fit RampStop Value 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit 4 FltCurLimStp when this event occurs e Value 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response this event e Value 3 Fit RampStop configures the d
526. voltage Default 0 0000 Note The maximum value was increased from 1000 0000 to 1170 0000 for firmware version Min Max 0 0000 1170 0000 3 01 Output Voltage Units RO Real Displays RMS line to line fundamental motor voltage This data is averaged and updated _ Default 0 00 every 50 milliseconds Min Max 0 00 3000 00 Output Current Units Amps RO Real Displays measured RMS motor current Default 0 00 Min Max 0 00 10000 00 Motor Flux Units RO 16 bit Displays the motor flux in of nominal Default 0 0 Integer Min Max 0 0 100 0 Scale 100 4096 Output Freq Units _ Hz RO Real Displays the motor stator frequency Default 0 00 Min Max 250 00 Output Power Units RO Real Motor Power is the calculated product of the torque reference and motor speed feedback A Default 0 00 125mS filter is applied to this result Positive values indicate motoring power negative values Min Max 9999 00 indicate regenerative power Note The units were changed from kW to Hp for firmware version 2 03 MotorFluxCurr FB Units RO Real Displays the measured per unit motor flux producing current Default 0 0000 Min Max 0 0000 1 0000 Heatsink Temp Units degC RO Real Displays the measured temperature of the drive s heatsink Default 0 0000 Min Max 30 0000 200 0000 VPL Firmware Rev Default 1 03 RO 16 bit Displays the major and minor revision levels of the drive s Velocity Position Loop VPL Min Max 0
527. xis voltage required for motor control Min Max 32767 Integer adaptation Adaptation is disabled below this voltage This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Vds Fdbk Filt Default 0 RO 16 bit Displays measured filtered motor flux producing d axis voltage Min Max 32767 Integer Vas Fdbk Filt Default 0 RO 16 bit Displays measured filtered motor torque producing q axis voltage Min Max 32767 Integer Flux Reg P Gain1 Default 150 RW 16 bit Sets the Proportional P gain for the flux regulator Do not change this value Min Max 0 32767 Integer Flux Reg Gain Default 350 RW 16 bit Sets the 1 gain for the flux regulator Do not change this value Min Max 0 32767 Integer Slip Gain Max Units 96 RW 16 bit Disblays the maximum slip frequency allowed in the motor control The scaling is in hertz Default 300 Integer x 256 This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Min Max 100 10000 Slip Gain Min Units 96 RW 16 bit Displays the minimum slip frequency allowed in the motor control The scaling is in hertz x Default 50 Integer 256 This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Min Max 0 100 Slip P Gain Default 35 RW 16 bit Se m roportional P gain for the slip regulator Do not change this value Min Max 0 32767 Integer Slip Reg Gain Default 100 RW 16 bit Sets the Integral I
528. y mechanical systems could range from 1 to 10 r s while well behaved high line count input devices could range upwards of 100 r s Higher bandwidths will quickly resolve tracking errors while the lower bandwidths will take longer to settle into a steady state Some adjustment will be necessary to effect the best compromise between noise and tracking response Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL Rev Input Revolution of the input encoder This parameter must be coordinated with Par 724 PLL Rev Out to resolve the gear ratio between input revolutions and output virtual revolutions The ratio of input to output revolutions can always be resolved into integer values and should be reduced to their lowest common factor Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL Rev Output Revolution of the output encoder This parameter must be coordinated with Par 723 PLL Rev In to resolve the gear ratio between input revolutions and output virtual revolutions The ratio of input to output revolutions can always be resolved into integer values and should be reduced to their lowest common factor Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PLL EPR Input Edges Per Revolution of the physical input device Use as high of a line count device as possible to insure smoother PLL operation 0 False 1 True e lrckng AComp 7 9 Ext Vel In FdFwd

User Manual High Performance AC Drive

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents